JP2008295768A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To reduce the feeling of loss to be given to a player and to suppress the decline of a savor of a game. <P>SOLUTION: The game machine is provided with a pattern display means 115 where a plurality of pattern columns are variably displayed. When a game ball is received in a first receiving port 604, first start information is stored. When a game ball is received in a second receiving port 602, second start information is stored. When the condition of starting the variation of the plurality of pattern columns is established, drawing for the first start information or the second start information is performed. The result of the drawing is displayed at the pattern display means 115 by the combination of the plurality of pattern columns. When winning in the drawing for the first start information, a normal big winning game or a special big winning game is executed. When winning in the drawing for the second start information, the special big winning game or a small winning game is executed. The drawing for the second start information is performed only when the first start information is not stored. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2009,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine called a digipachi is provided with a symbol display means such as a liquid crystal display on which a plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed. When the variation start condition is satisfied for the plurality of symbol sequences, the symbol display means variably displays the plurality of symbol sequences. In addition, when a game ball that has been thrown into the game area wins the start opening, a big win lottery is performed, and the result of the big win lottery is displayed by a combination of stop symbols by a plurality of symbol rows displayed on the symbol display means. If the combination of the stop symbols is a combination indicating that the jackpot is won, a round game in which a big winning opening as a jackpot game that can acquire a large amount of game balls is opened.

  In addition, in this type of gaming machine, when the jackpot game is controlled to a probability variation gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is increased, and the jackpot with a normal probability without increasing the jackpot winning probability after the jackpot game ends. In some cases, it is controlled to a normal gaming state that can be won. However, in such a gaming machine, even if a big hit is won, if the big hit is a normal big hit, there is a risk that the interest will be lowered even though the big hit is won.

  On the other hand, in recent years, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a sense of expectation is increased by shifting from a normal gaming state to a high probability state (probability changing gaming state) at an unpredictable time (for example, Patent Document 1). reference). The gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 sets a small-combination game in which at least one game ball can win a prize, and uses the small-combination game as an opportunity to change to a probabilistic gaming state, apparently from the normal gaming state. The purpose is to give a sense of suddenly high probability.

JP 2005-168619 A

  However, although the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 can give a sense of suddenly changing from a normal gaming state to a high probability state, a small role game is a place where a large amount of prize balls cannot be obtained. However, if it is determined that the winning type is a small role game while winning the lottery, the player will feel a sense of loss, and there is a risk that the interest will be lowered.

  This invention is made in view of such a situation, and it aims at reducing the feeling of loss given to a player and suppressing the fall of interest.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a symbol display means for displaying a plurality of symbol rows in a variable manner when the change start condition is satisfied, a first receiving port capable of receiving a game ball flowing down a gaming area, and a connection to the first receiving port. A first start information extracting means capable of extracting first start information based on the acceptance of the game ball, and a first start for storing the first start information extracted by the first start information extracting means up to a first upper limit value An information storage unit; a winning determination unit that determines a winning for the first starting information stored by the first starting information storing unit one by one in the stored order when the variation condition is satisfied; The symbol display control means for controlling the winning symbol determination means to display the determination result by the combination of the stop symbols when the plurality of symbol strings are stopped, and the stop symbol hit A prize winning ball that gives a player a predetermined amount of prize balls according to the prize winning of the game balls at least in the variable prize opening. When a combination of means and the stop symbol is displayed as a winning combination, a prize winning game that facilitates winning of the game ball to the variable winning opening is performed to give a player a large amount of game balls as a prize. When a specific combination is displayed among the possible winning game execution means and the combination indicating the winning, the winning determination means controls the special gaming state with a relatively high probability of being determined as winning, and When displayed in a combination other than a specific combination, the gaming state control means capable of controlling the normal gaming state with a relatively low probability of being determined to be a hit by the winning determination means , Further comprising: a second receiving port disposed above the first receiving port and capable of receiving a game ball flowing down the gaming area; and receiving the gaming ball into the second receiving port Second starting information extracting means capable of extracting second starting information based on the second starting information extracting means, and second starting information storing means for storing the second starting information extracted by the second starting information extracting means up to a second upper limit value; And the first receiving port is relatively more than the second receiving port by facilitating the reception of the game ball into the first receiving port when being controlled in the special gaming state. It has a movable member that facilitates the reception of the game ball and can make the reception of the game ball more difficult than the second receiving port when being controlled in the normal game state. The change start condition is satisfied As well as determining whether or not the second start information is correct, the first start information is stored prior to the second start information as long as the first start information is stored. Regardless of whether the winning determination result for the first starting information is always determined, and the winning determination result for the first starting information is winning, the combination indicating the winning is the specific combination. While the winning game is executed regardless of whether or not it is displayed, when the winning determination result for the second start information is winning, even if the stop symbol is a combination indicating winning, When the winning combination is a combination other than the specific combination, the winning judgment result by the winning judging means is a win. In addition, a game per prize where the variable prize opening is operated in such a manner that the game ball can barely win can be executed, and after the game per prize ends, it can be controlled to the normal game state and the winning is indicated When the combination is the specific combination, the game per prize is executed, and after the game per prize is finished, the game is controlled to the special game state, and the winning determination result for the second start information is lost. In addition, when the winning determination result indicating the loss is displayed on the display means, if the gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state, the second start information storage means stores the second When the number of pieces of start information is only the second start information related to the change, the normal change in which the change display of the plurality of symbol sequences is performed for a predetermined time is displayed. And when the number of the second start information stored in the second start information storage means is the second upper limit value including at least the second start information related to the fluctuation, On the other hand, when the game state is controlled to the special game state, it is stored in the second start-up information storage means while the change display of the symbol sequence can be displayed for a time shorter than the predetermined time. The gaming machine is characterized in that the plurality of symbol sequences can be displayed in a variable time regardless of the number of the second starting information.

  According to the above technical idea, when the game ball is received at the first receiving port, the first start information is extracted. More specifically, when a game ball is received at the first reception port, the first detection switch detects the reception of the game ball at the first reception port, and the first detection switch detects the first based on the reception detection by the first detection switch. Startup information is extracted. The extracted first start information is stored in the first start information storage means on condition that the number of the first start information stored in the first start information storage means is less than the first upper limit value. The On the other hand, if the first starting information stored in the first starting information storage means reaches the first upper limit value when the game ball is received at the first receiving port, the extracted first starting information is It is discarded without being stored in the first starting information storage means. When the first start information stored in the first start information storage means is the first upper limit value, instead of discarding the extracted first start information, a game ball is placed at the first receiving port. Even if accepted, the first start information may not be extracted. The first start information is information extracted when a game ball is received at the first entrance, for example, a winning determination random number used to determine whether it is a win or a loss, and a stop of a plurality of symbol sequences This corresponds to a stop symbol random number for determining a symbol combination.

  When the winning determination for the first start information is performed, the variation display of the plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the symbol display means is performed, and the result of the winning determination is suggested by the combination of the stopped symbols of the plurality of symbol sequences. The Here, the winning determination means not only determines whether it is a winning or losing, but also determines a winning type if it is a winning. In addition, the combination of stop symbols in a plurality of symbol sequences may suggest only the winning judgment result. When the winning judgment result is a win, the winning type is set in addition to the winning judgment result. May also be suggested. The symbol display means corresponds to the effect display device of this embodiment, but a liquid crystal display, a dot matrix display, a 7-segment display, a display composed of an EL panel, a plasma display, a CRT display, etc. Is exemplified.

  If the combination of stop symbols of a plurality of symbol sequences is a combination that indicates a winning combination, a game per winning prize is executed. The winning game is a winning game in which the variable winning opening is operated in such a manner that a large number of game balls can win. Since a predetermined amount of game balls are awarded as prizes when winning in the variable prize opening, when a game per grand prize is executed, a large number of game balls as prizes can be given to the player.

  By the way, there are a specific combination and a combination other than the combinations of the stop symbols indicating the hits. When displayed in a specific combination, it is controlled to the special game state after the game per grand prize is finished, and when displayed in a combination other than the specific combination, it is changed to the normal game state after the game per prize is finished. Can be controlled. The specific combination is exemplified by a double-eyed pattern with an odd pattern or a double-colored pattern with a color that gives an image of the probability variation. Further, examples of combinations other than the specific combination include a double-eyed pattern based on an even-numbered pattern, a double-colored pattern based on a color that gives an image of a normal hit that is not probabilistic, or a combination of symbols that are different from each other in a plurality of graphic sequences. This combination that isn't sloppy reminds the player to lose at first glance, but if you don't want to suggest that you are a player, such a combination may be considered a winning combination. .

  Here, the special game state is a game state with a relatively high probability of being determined to be a winning by the winning determination means, and is generally referred to as a probability variation game state. In the above technical idea, the time-shortening function that promotes the reception of the game ball into the first receiving port is also activated at the same time in this probability variation gaming state. The normal gaming state is a gaming state that has a relatively low probability of being determined to be winning by the winning determination means. The probability of being determined to be a winning by the winning determination means in the special gaming state is preferably at least twice as high as the probability of being determined to be a winning by the winning determination means in the normal gaming state. It is set between -10 times. Note that “the game is controlled to the special game state after the game per prize is finished” means that if the game state before the game per prize is executed is the normal game state, the game is changed to the special game state with the game per prize as a trigger. On the other hand, if the game state before the game per prize is executed is the special game state, the special game state is continued even after the game per prize is executed. In addition, “the game can be controlled to the normal game state after the game per prize is finished” means that the game is controlled to the normal game state immediately after the game per prize is finished, or the short-time game after the game per prize is finished. This is a case where the state is controlled to the normal gaming state after the short gaming state has ended.

  When the stop symbol is a combination indicating a winning combination, the special game state is always controlled when the combination is a specific combination. On the other hand, even if the stop symbol is a combination indicating a winning combination, if the combination is a combination other than the specific combination, it can be controlled to the normal gaming state. However, if the stop symbol is a combination indicating a winning combination and the combination is a combination other than a specific combination, it is not always necessary to control to the normal gaming state after the winning game is completed, You may control to a special game state after it complete | finishes. For example, while suggesting that the combination of stop symbols can be controlled to the normal gaming state, it may be notified that the game is controlled to the special gaming state when the game per prize is being executed. At this time, the player thinks that the player has been promoted from being controlled to the normal gaming state to being controlled to the special gaming state, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game per grand prize that tends to be boring.

  In addition, in this gaming machine, the first receiving port has a movable member, and when it is controlled to a special gaming state, it moves so as to promote the reception of the game ball into the first receiving port, When it is controlled to the normal gaming state, the reception of the game ball at the first receiving port is not promoted, and it becomes relatively difficult to receive the game ball at the first receiving port. However, even if the game is not controlled in the special game state, it is relatively easy to win a game ball at the first receiving port in a predetermined case such as a predetermined period after the game is won per grand prize. In some cases, the movable member may move so as to be (in such a case, it is generally called a short-time gaming state). As this movable member, a so-called “electric tulip” is generally adopted, but the movable member is not limited to this.

  Further, this gaming machine is provided with a second receiving port above the first receiving port. The second receiving port does not have a movable member unlike the first receiving port. In other words, the ease of accepting the game ball is constant regardless of the game state in the second entrance without changing the ease of accepting the game ball unlike the first entrance. Here, comparing the ease of accepting the game ball into the first entrance and the ease of accepting the game ball into the second entrance, when the game state is controlled to the special game state, the game ball to the first entrance Therefore, the first receiving port is relatively easier to receive the game ball. In addition, when the normal gaming state in which the time saving function is not activated is controlled, the second receiving port is relatively easier to receive the game ball.

  Further, when a game ball is received at the second receiving port, second start information is extracted. More specifically, when a game ball is received at the second reception port, the reception of the game ball at the second reception port is detected by the second detection switch, and the second detection switch detects the second based on the reception detection by the second detection switch. Startup information is extracted. The extracted second start information is stored in the second start information storage means on the condition that the number of second start information stored in the second start information storage means is less than the second upper limit value. The The second upper limit value is generally the same as the first upper limit value, but is not limited thereto.

  Further, even when a game ball is received at the second receiving port, if the second start information stored in the second start information storage means reaches the second upper limit value, the extracted second start information Is discarded without being stored in the second starting information storage means. In the same way as when the game ball is received at the first receiving port, the second start information extracted when the second start information stored in the second start information storage means is the second upper limit value. Instead of discarding the second starting information, the second starting information may not be extracted even if a game ball is received at the second receiving port. The second start information is information extracted when a game ball is received at the second entrance, for example, a winning determination random number used for determining whether it is a win or a loss, and a stop of a plurality of symbol sequences This corresponds to a stop symbol random number for determining a symbol combination.

  When the winning determination for the second start information is performed, the variation display of the plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the symbol display means is performed, and the result of the winning determination is suggested by the combination of the stopped symbols of the plurality of symbol sequences. The Note that the winning determination means not only determines whether it is a winning or losing, but also determines the winning type if it is a winning. In addition, the combination of stop symbols in a plurality of symbol sequences may suggest only the winning judgment result. When the winning judgment result is a win, the winning type is set in addition to the winning judgment result. May also be suggested.

  By the way, when the first start information is stored by the first start information storage means and the second start information is stored by the second start information storage means, the first start information is prior to the second start information. Regardless of whether or not it is stored, the winning determination means always determines a winning for the first start information. That is, the winning determination for the first start information is performed in preference to the winning determination for the second start information. However, when performing the winning determination for the first starting information, the winning determination is performed in the order stored in the first starting information storage means. Also, when performing the winning determination for the second starting information, the winning determination is performed in the order stored in the second starting information storage means.

  When the gaming state is controlled to the special gaming state, when the winning determination result for the first start information or the winning determination result for the second start information is displayed, the following control is performed.

  First, when the first start information is stored, as described above, even if the second start information is stored, the winning determination for the first start information is performed with priority. When a winning determination is made for the first start information, if the winning determination result is a win, the stop symbol is displayed in a combination indicating a win, and whether or not the combination of the stop symbol is a specific combination Regardless, the game per grand prize is executed. Then, after the game for winning the grand prize is completed, the game is controlled to the special game state or the normal game state (the game state may be controlled to the normal game state via the short-time game state).

  More specifically, when the stop symbol indicating the winning determination result for the first start information is displayed in a combination indicating a winning combination, if the combination is a specific combination, When the combination is a special game state and the combination is a combination other than a specific combination, the game is controlled to the normal game state after the winning game is finished (the game state is controlled to the normal game state via the short-time game state). In some cases).

  Next, when the first start information is not stored and only the second start information is stored, the winning determination for the second start information is performed. When the winning determination is made for the second start information, if the winning determination result is a win, the winning game is executed only when the stop symbol is a specific combination. Then, after the game per the grand prize is finished, the game is controlled to the special game state. Even if the winning determination result is a win, if the stop symbol is a combination other than a specific combination, a game per prize is executed. Then, after the game per prize is completed, the normal game state is controlled. Here, since the game per small prize is not a game for the purpose of giving a large amount of game balls to the player as a prize, the determination result by the success / failure determination means is a hit (with the operation of the condition device). Nevertheless, the variable winning opening only operates to the extent that one or two game balls are allowed to be accepted (one game ball may not win). In addition, when a game per prize is executed, the variable prize opening is operated in an instant, so that the player often cannot grasp that the variable prize opening has been activated.

  In addition, when the winning determination result for the second start information is lost, the variation display mode of the plurality of symbol sequences is controlled to the special gaming state and the normal gaming state. It is different.

  Specifically, when the game state control means controls the normal game state, the variation times of the plurality of symbol sequences differ depending on the number of second start information stored in the second start information storage means. ing. For example, if the number of second start information stored in the second start information storage means is only the second start information related to the change, the change display of a plurality of symbol sequences is performed over a predetermined time. Further, when the number of the second start information stored in the second start information storage means is the second upper limit value including the second start information related to the fluctuation, the time is shorter than the predetermined time. A plurality of symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. Note that the number of second start information stored in the second start information storage means is not only the second start information related to the change but also the second upper limit value including the second start information related to the change. If not, either normal fluctuation or shortening fluctuation may be performed. Further, the variation display of a plurality of symbol sequences may be performed over a time shorter than the normal variation and longer than the shortened variation. However, when a highly anticipated effect such as a so-called reach effect is performed, an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation is performed, so regardless of the number of second start information stored in the second start information storage means. The variation display of the plurality of symbol rows is performed over a relatively long time.

  In addition, when the game state control means controls the special game state, the time during which a plurality of symbol sequences are displayed is variable as long as the high expectation effect such as a so-called reach effect is not performed. Regardless of the number of second start information stored in the means, a plurality of symbol sequences are always displayed in a variable manner over a certain period of time, and stop symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a loss. However, when a highly anticipated effect such as a so-called reach effect is performed, an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation is performed, so that the variable display of a plurality of symbol sequences is performed over a relatively long time.

  Thus, when the winning determination result for the first start information is a win, the stop symbol is displayed in a combination indicating a win. Then, regardless of whether or not the combination of the stop symbols is a specific combination, the game per grand prize is executed. If the combination of stop symbols is a specific combination, the game state after the game per prize is executed is controlled to a special game state, and the combination of stop symbols is a combination other than the specific combination The game state after the game per grand prize is executed is controlled to the normal game state or the short-time game state as described above.

  On the other hand, when the winning determination result for the second start information is a win, the winning game is executed only when the combination of stop symbols indicating a win is a specific combination, and the stop symbol indicating a win. If the combination is a combination other than a specific combination, a game per prize is executed. In addition, when the combination of stop symbols is a specific combination, the game state after the game per grand prize is executed is controlled to the special game state, but the combination of stop symbols is a combination other than the specific combination The game state after the game per prize is executed is controlled to the normal game state or the short-time game state. That is, when the special game state is controlled, a win determination for the second start information is performed, and when winning per prize in the win determination, not only a game ball as a prize is not given to the player, The special gaming state ends (shifts to the short-time gaming state). In this normal gaming state, the probability that the winning determination means is determined to be a win is relatively lower than the probability that the winning determination means is determined to be a winning in the special gaming state, so that the special gaming state is controlled. If a player wins a small prize when he is, the player's disappointment will be very large.

  Therefore, according to the above technical idea, when the game state is controlled to be in the special game state, the first receiving port is more likely to receive the game ball than the second receiving port. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the special gaming state is terminated without giving a game ball as an award to the player, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, when the winning determination result for the second start information is displayed on the display means when the normal gaming state is controlled, the winning determination result is lost and a high expectation effect such as reach is achieved. As long as is not performed, the time during which the plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed differs depending on the number of second start information stored in the second start information storage means. That is, when the winning determination result for the second start information is displayed on the display means, the second start information stored in the second start information storage means is only the second start information related to the change. In addition, a normal variation in which a plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed over a predetermined time is performed, and the second start information stored in the second start information storage means includes the second start information related to the variation and includes a second change. If it is an upper limit value, a shortening variation shorter than the predetermined time is performed. This is because, when controlled to the normal gaming state, it becomes more difficult to receive the game ball into the first receiving port than to receive the game ball into the second receiving port. By doing so, even if the second receiving port is relatively easier to receive game balls than the first receiving port, the extracted first starting information is stored in the first starting information storage means. It is suppressed that it is discarded without being. In addition, even if a large number of game balls are received at the second receiving port, it is possible to suppress the player from being given stress due to the fact that the winning determination is not easily performed.

  Also, when the winning determination result for the second start information is displayed on the display means when controlled to the special gaming state, the winning determination result is lost and a high expectation effect such as reach is achieved. As long as is not performed, the variable display of a plurality of symbol sequences is performed in a fixed time regardless of the number of second start information stored in the second start information storage means. This is because when the special game state is controlled, the reception of the game ball into the first reception port is promoted so that the first reception port can receive the game ball more easily than the second reception port, This is because even if the game ball is received at the first receiving port, the winning determination for the first start information is performed with priority over the second start information. That is, the second start information stored in the second start information storage unit is almost in a state larger than the first start information stored in the first start information storage unit. Therefore, when the game state is controlled to the special gaming state, the display of the winning determination result as the loss of the second start information is related to the number of the second start information stored in the second start information storage means. It is possible to reduce the amount of data stored in the ROM by setting the variable display time of a plurality of symbol sequences to a certain time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in control load. It should be noted that the fluctuation display of a certain time by a plurality of symbol sequences corresponds to the fluctuation number 7D described in the embodiment “During open extension / normal fluctuation”, and the fluctuation time at this time is 6000 ms.

  In addition, when the gaming machine of the above technical idea is controlled in the normal gaming state, if the combination by the stop symbol is a specific combination, the game per prize is always performed and the special game is triggered by the game per prize. Since the game is controlled to the state, once a game per grand prize is performed, another game per grand prize is likely to be executed. That is, when controlled to the special game state, the game per prize is not executed as long as the winning determination for the first start information is performed, so the first start information stored in the first start information storage means As long as the memory is not interrupted, another game per grand prize is executed. As a result, when the player wins the grand prize while being controlled in the normal gaming state, the game always enters the special gaming state, and at least two games per grand prize are executed before being controlled again in the normal gaming state. Therefore, the player's willingness to play is stimulated, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. Moreover, when the game per prize is executed twice, the special game state is not ended, but as long as the combination of stop symbols is displayed in a specific combination, the game per prize is executed at a relatively early stage. Become. In other words, as in the conventional so-called third type gaming machine, the winning game is not two or three times one set, as long as the special gaming state continues while at least two winning games are executed. There is a possibility that a game per the above grand prize will be executed. In this way, once a game per grand prize is executed, a large amount of game balls can be obtained as a prize ball. Therefore, even if the special game state is immediately ended, the player is immediately terminated. Discouragement can be alleviated and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the loss feeling given to a player can be reduced and the fall of the interest of a game can be suppressed.

[Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a perspective view seen from the front of the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a plan view of the pachinko machine.

  1 and 2, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown), and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. 11), and a door frame 5 that is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. The locking of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 are both performed by the locking device 60. The outer frame 2 according to this embodiment is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape having a lateral width of approximately 52 cm, a height of approximately 81 cm, and a depth width of approximately 7 cm.

  In addition, the game effect unit 4 (specifically, the game panel 409) is formed with a game area 20 in which a game ball driven from a launching device 57 (see FIG. 4) described later can flow down, and the door frame 5 Includes a glass unit 190 as a transparent plate unit through which the player can visually recognize the game area 20, and a dish unit 300 disposed below the glass unit 190. The dish unit 300 is configured to be able to store game balls to be supplied to the launching device 57, and game balls (so-called prize balls) as prizes that can be given to the player as a result of the game are also stored in the dish unit. To be paid out. Hereinafter, in this specification, the side (left side in FIG. 16) on which the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 is referred to as a pivot support side, and the opposite side of the pivot support side (to the outer frame 2). On the other hand, the side on which the main body frame 3 is opened and the right side in FIG.

  A lower decorative plate 6 whose surface is covered with a decorative cover plate 6a is fixed to the outer frame 2 at the lower front side. Although the details will be described later, the outer frame 2 is a connection for connecting upper and lower wooden upper and lower frame plates and left and right light alloy (aluminum) side frame plates at their respective ends. It is assembled in a square shape by connecting with members. The upper support bracket 47 and the lower support bracket 8 provided on the upper surface of the lower decorative plate 6 on the upper side of the upper frame 7 and the lower support plate 8 provided on the upper side of the outer frame 2, respectively, By engaging the shaft support bracket 48, the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed.

  Further, as described above, the game effect unit 4 can be detachably attached to the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. A member (tank rail) 51, a ball passage unit 52, and a ball dispensing device (ball dispensing unit) 53 are attached, and a substrate unit 54 is attached to the lower part of the back surface thereof. The board unit 54 includes various control boards and power supply boards 395 for controlling electrical components provided on the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 excluding the launch device 57 and the game effect unit 4 (see FIG. 84). Etc. are provided together. Further, a rear opening 70 (see FIG. 16) is formed in the main body frame 3, and a back cover 58 that covers the rear opening 70 is detachably provided.

  In addition, the game effect unit 4 (specifically, the game panel 409) is provided with a guide rail 482 that partitions the game area 20 and guides the game ball into the game area 20 on the left edge of the game area 20. ing. The guide rail 482 includes an outer rail 472 and an inner rail 462. Further, the upper end of the inner rail 462 has a backflow prevention member 463 that prevents the hit ball once shot and taken inside the game area 20 from flowing back to the outer rail 472 again. On the other hand, at the upper right edge of the game area 20 when viewed from the front, there is an impact portion 476 that repels the hit ball hitting the outer rail 472 toward the inside of the game area 20 when the ball hits the outer rail 472. is doing. The stopper 476 is made of an elastic body made of rubber or synthetic resin.

  Further, the door frame 5 is provided with a handle unit 318 in the above-described dish unit 300. Here, the number of the dish units 300 provided in the door frame 5 is one, and the handle unit 318 conventionally provided in the main body frame 3 is provided in the dish unit 300 on the door frame 5 side. Moreover, since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, the main body frame 3 cannot be visually recognized from the front.

[Outer frame]
Next, the outer frame 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the outer frame. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. FIG. 8 is a front view of the outer frame. FIG. 9 is a rear view of the outer frame. 10 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 8A, a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 10A, a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 10A, and FIG. It is EE sectional drawing (D) of).

  6 and 7, the outer frame 2 connects the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 with connecting members 14 for connecting the respective end portions. By this, it is assembled in a vertically long rectangular shape. The “side frame plates 12 and 13” correspond to the “vertical frame (vertical plate)” of the present invention.

  Specifically, the connecting member 14 is formed in a podium shape with a difference between the center and the left and right, and the protruding center portion is formed at the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The engagement notches 10B and 11B are fitted. Then, the back surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper surface of the lower frame plate 11 are in contact with the planes of the left and right portions of the connecting member 14 that are lowered by one step, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are disposed on one side of the left and right portions that are lowered by one step. The inner surface of the is in contact. In this state, the insertion holes 10C and 11C formed on both sides of the engagement notch 10B of the upper frame plate 10 and both sides of the engagement notch 11B of the lower frame plate 11, respectively, A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting holes 16 (in the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 on the shaft support side in FIG. Are also present in other connecting members 14), and are fixed by a plurality (two in the illustrated case) of connecting screws 16 </ b> B from above or below.

  Further, a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 12B and 13B drilled in the upper and lower end portions of the side frame plates 12 and 13 and a plurality formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions lowered by one step. (In the illustrated case, three) connecting holes 15 (shown on the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the open side frame plate 13 in FIG. 7 but also on the other connecting members 14) Are fixed by a plurality (three in the illustrated case) of connecting screws 15B from the outside of the side, and the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected to each other. Are firmly connected and fixed. However, of the three connecting screws 15B, one connecting screw 15B does not connect the side frame plates 12, 13 and the connecting member 14, but the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the connecting member 14. Are directly connected from the side.

  Of the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 of the short side are made of the same wood as the conventional one, and the long side frame The plates 12 and 13 are made of an extruded plate of a light metal, for example, an aluminum alloy. That is, the outer frame 2 is composed of two wooden short plates and two light metal long plates. The reason why the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as before is to make nails easier when placing the pachinko machine 1 on the island. More specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing the pachinko machine 1 at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are nailed to the island. Therefore, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as in the past so that the nails can be easily nailed to the island.

  On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy extruded plate is that the thickness can be reduced while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wood. When the thickness of the side frame plates 12 and 13 is reduced, the left and right widths in the front view of the peripheral walls 290 to 293 (see FIG. 16) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 (that is, the pivot support side). The width of the peripheral wall 290-293 and the open peripheral wall 290-293 can be widened, and as a result, the large game effect unit 4 in the horizontal direction can be mounted on the main body frame 3. It becomes. As a result, the game area 20 can be formed larger as a result, and the effect display device 115 can be enlarged while securing the area where the game ball flows down.

  As shown in FIG. 10C, in order to reduce the thickness while maintaining the strength as compared with wooden, the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side (the side frame plate 13 on the open side is the side frame plate). 12 is a space portion 12G (the space portion 13G of the side frame plate 13 on the open side is shown in FIG. 9) whose rear portion is opened by a rib on the inner side of the rear portion of the rear portion, and the thickness h2 of the rear portion is It is pultruded to be thick. Of course, the thickness h2 is the same as or slightly thinner than the conventional wooden thickness (that is, it is preferably 19 mm or less in relation to a game effect unit installation recess 30 described later). Further, by forming the space portion 12G in this way, the thickness h2 of the rear portion can be reduced compared to the case where the rib is simply bent from the rear portion of the side frame plates 12 and 13. it can. Such pultrusion molding cannot be done with wood. Therefore, the strength of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be maintained compared with the conventional wood while the thickness is reduced only by making the side frame plates 12 and 13 made of a metal that can be drawn and molded. Further, if the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a light metal such as an aluminum alloy, the weight of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 10B and 10D, one of the left and right portions of the connecting member 14 that are lowered by one step is fitted in front of the space portion 12G of the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side. A groove 12F (the groove 13F of the open side frame 13 is shown in FIG. 6) is formed. From the groove portion 12F to the front end portion of the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side, as shown in FIGS. Although it is in the form of a flat plate that comes into contact, a shallow concave portion for material reduction is formed in the flat plate portion. Further, on the opposite surface (outer surface) where the groove portion 12F is formed, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 10B, a concave portion 12H (open side) into which the hanging piece portion 7E of the upper support fitting 7 is inserted. A recess 13H of the side frame plate 13 is formed in FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 7, the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side formed as described above has a hanging piece of the upper support metal 7 on the upper portion in addition to the configuration for attaching the connecting member 14. A mounting hole 12 </ b> C for fixing the portion 7 </ b> E to the outside of the side frame plate 12 on the shaft support side with a mounting screw 17 is formed. Further, a mounting hole 12D is formed in the lower portion of the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side so as to be fixed with a mounting screw 18 so as to coincide with the mounting hole 8C formed in the side bent portion of the lower support fitting 8. Has been. Further, an attachment for fixing the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side and the lower decorative plate 6 to the front portion of the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side at the lower portion of the mounting hole 12D with the fastening screw 6E. A hole 12E is formed.

  On the other hand, in addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 14, the open side frame plate 13 is provided with a mounting hole 13 </ b> C for attaching the closing projection 22 with an attaching screw 22 </ b> B. In addition, an attachment hole 13C for attaching the closing projection 23 with the attachment screw 23B is formed in the lower portion of the side frame portion 13C. Furthermore, a mounting hole 13D for fastening the side frame plate 13 and the lower decorative plate 6 with the fastening screws 6E is formed at the lowermost part of the open side frame plate 13. The closing protrusions 22 and 23 are hook portions (details will be described later) of the locking device 60 attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. To engage. Then, as will be described later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 868 of the locking device 60 and rotating it to one side, the hook portion of the locking device 60 and the closing projections 22 and 23 are disengaged, and the main body frame 3 is removed. The outer frame 2 can be opened.

  The lower decorative plate 6 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 has the main body frame 3 placed on the upper surface thereof when closed. The front and side surfaces of the lower decorative plate 6 are covered with a decorative cover plate 6a. However, a fastening protrusion 6C (see FIG. 9) with an elastic claw formed at the rear end of the decorative cover plate 6a protrudes from the back surface of the decorative cover plate 6a. Has been established. And this decoration protrusion board 6a is attached to the lower decoration board 6 by making this fixation protrusion 6C penetrate the fixation hole 6D which penetrates the lower decoration board 6. FIG. A guide plate 6F for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is exchangeably mounted on the upper surface of the outer cover 2 on the decorative cover plate 6a.

  By the way, as a structure for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, an upper support fitting 7 that also functions to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side, and an upper surface on one side of the lower decorative plate 6. A lower support fitting 8 attached along the main body frame 3 is provided.

  The upper support fitting 7 is formed with a support hole 19A formed by bending the support protrusion piece 19 protruding forward from the side of the support protrusion piece 19 toward the center of the tip. A shaft support pin (see FIG. 16) of the upper shaft support 47 of the main body frame 3 is detachably engaged with the flange hole 19A.

  Further, the lower support fitting 8 is also formed in a shape protruding forward, and a support projection 21 is projected upward from the protruding portion, and the lower shaft support bracket of the main body frame 3 is projected on the support projection 21. A support hole formed in 48 (see FIG. 16) is inserted. Therefore, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, the support protrusion 21 of the lower support bracket 8 is engaged with the support hole formed in the lower shaft support bracket 48 of the main body frame 3, and then the main body frame 3. The shaft can be supported in a freely openable / closable manner by hooking the shaft support pin of the upper shaft support metal 47 into the support hole 19A.

[About the general structure of the game production unit]
Next, a schematic configuration of the game effect unit 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 11 is a perspective view seen from the front of the game effect unit. FIG. 12 is a front view of the game effect unit. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the game effect unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, the game effect unit 4 is attached so as to surround the game area 20 on the front surface of the panel holder 540 and a substantially square panel holder 540 holding a transparent plate-like game panel 409. And a front component member (game area partition frame member) 680. On the surface of the game panel 409, various game devices and a number of obstacle nails (all not shown) are planted in the game area 20. Then, after those gaming devices and obstacle nails are provided, the front component member 680 is attached to the front surface of the panel holder 540. The front component 680 is formed in a circular hollow shape so as to surround the periphery of the game panel 409, and the outer shape is formed in a shape along the outer shape of the panel holder 540.

  The front component member 680 has a circular arc surface extending from the middle of the lower side in the clockwise direction to the obliquely upward direction past the center of the upper side as an outer rail 472 and an impact provided at the end of the outer rail 472 A circular arc surface extending from the lower position of the portion 476 in the clockwise direction to the backflow preventing member 463 positioned substantially symmetrically with the stopper 476 is formed as the inner rail 462. The outer rail 472 has a connecting passage portion 477 that is connected to a rail connecting member 44 provided in an extension shape of the firing rail 38 at the starting end thereof, and is formed in an oblique shape. 489 is formed. A metal rail is attached in close contact with the outer rail 472 from the upstream end of the foul port 489 to the stop 476. The stopper 476 is provided with an elastic body of rubber or synthetic resin so that when the hit ball that has slid on the outer rail 472 collides with force, the hit ball hits the inside of the game area 20. It is. Further, the backflow prevention member 463 prevents the hit ball, which is fired at one end and taken inside the game area 20, from flowing back to the outer rail 472 again.

  In the game effect unit 4, a launch guide path 29, which is a flow path of game balls communicating with the game area 20, is formed in the gap between the inner rail 462 and the outer rail 472 constituting the guide rail 482. In addition, the upper end of the launch guide path 29 is provided in the upper part of the game area 20 (where the backflow prevention member 463 is installed), and functions as a ball insertion port 28 for throwing a game ball into the game area 20. Then, in the lower center along the inner rail 462 (that is, the most downstream side in the game area 20), the game balls that have not won any of the winning ports such as the start ports 602 and 604 and the general winning port 614 are placed. An outlet 471 for discharging from the game area 20 is provided. On the other hand, the game ball that has flowed back through the launch guide path 29 without reaching the game area 20 is taken into a foul port 489 to be described later and discharged to the dish unit 300 again. The game area 20 is an area substantially surrounded by the inner rail 462.

  A security protrusion 465 is provided on one side of the lower portion of the outer rail 472 so as to extend along a part of the metal rail. This security protrusion 465 overlaps with the rear end protrusion 215 (see FIG. 39) of the crime prevention rear end projecting on the security cover 210 (see FIG. 39) in a state where the door frame 5 is closed, and is pivotally supported. This prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the gap between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5.

  Further, a rail security groove 464 is formed on the inner rail 462 on the way from the outlet 471 to the stop 476. The rail security groove 464 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the post-crime projection piece 214 (see FIG. 39) protruding from the security cover 210 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed enters. Then, by the uneven engagement between the rail crime prevention groove 464 and the post-crime projection piece 214, the piano is overlapped in the vertical direction and inserted from slightly below the middle of the gap between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the open side. Finally, the intrusion of unauthorized tools such as wires is prevented.

  In addition, the outer shape of the game effect unit 4 is formed with speaker cutouts 468 on the upper left and right sides of the game effect unit 4 so as to accept the rearward protruding portions of the speakers 144a and 144b provided on the back surface of the door frame 5. A passage cutout portion 478 into which a part of a later-described sphere supply passage 59 is inserted is formed obliquely below the side.

  A positioning recess 466 that fits into a unit positioning projection 37 formed on the main body frame 3 is formed on one side (shaft support side) of such a game effect unit 4, and the other side (open side) of the game effect unit 4. ) Is provided with a game effect unit stopper 467 inserted into a unit stopper insertion hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame 3. When the game effect unit stopper 467 is pushed and fixed, its end is inserted into the unit stopper insertion hole. Thus, in order to fix the game effect unit 4 to the main body frame 3, after inserting the game effect unit 4 from an oblique direction so that the positioning recess 466 fits into the unit positioning protrusion 37 from the front side of the main body frame 3. Then, the entire game effect unit 4 is pushed into the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3, and the game effect unit stop 467 which is free in that state is pushed in and fixed, and the end is inserted into the unit stop. Insert it into the hole and fix it. Thereafter, the game effect unit fixing tool 46 that is rotatably provided on the upper front surface of the plate portion 32 of the main body frame 3 is rotated to fix the lower front surface of the game panel 409. As a result, the entire game effect unit 4 including the game panel 409 can be easily attached to the main body frame 3. In order to remove the game effect unit 4, the procedure may be removed in the reverse order of the above procedure. However, in the illustrated embodiment, a fastening portion 469 is formed by cutting out a part of the lower end side on the lower side of the game effect unit 4, and the fastening portion 469 and the plate portion 32 of the main body frame 3 are formed. By fastening the formed fastening hole 41 with a fastener (not shown), it is possible to prevent the game effect unit 4 from being removed from the main body frame 3 unless the fastener is cut.

  On the other hand, on the back surface of the game effect unit 4, the balls won in various game devices (for example, a prize opening such as a big prize opening device or a general prize opening) provided in the game area 20 are aligned and guided downstream. A winning space forming cover body 491 is attached, and the display of the effect display device 115 (see FIG. 51, etc.) as a display device arranged on the back surface of the winning space forming cover body 491 is arranged almost at the center of the game area 20 is controlled. A display device control board box 119 in which a display device control board 816 (see FIG. 85) to be stored is accommodated is attached.

  Further, a substrate holder 505 is fixed to the back surface of the game effect unit 4 below the winning space forming cover body 491. The substrate holder 505 has a space portion (the width of the space portion in the front-rear direction is larger than the width of the winning space formation cover body 491 so that the winning balls aligned and guided by the winning space formation cover body 491 are collected in front of the substrate holder 505. Wide). A drop port (not shown) formed in the bottom surface of the space portion joins at the rear surface portion of the out port 471 and communicates with an out ball passage 645 (see FIG. 28) of the substrate unit 54 described later.

  Further, the board holder 505 has a main control board box 25 for housing a main control board 710 (see FIG. 84) for controlling a gaming operation and a peripheral control board box for housing a peripheral control board 810 (see FIG. 85) on the back surface thereof. 24 and a unit relay board 625 for connecting to a payout control board 720 (see FIG. 84), a power supply board 395 (see FIG. 84) and the like provided in a board unit 54 described later. Specifically, the substrate holder 505 is mounted with the peripheral control board box 24 in which the peripheral control board 810 is housed, and the main control board 710 is housed in a state of being superimposed on the rear side of the peripheral control board box 24. A main control board box 25 is mounted.

  On the unit relay board 625, the unit side drawer connector 2000a that is automatically connected to the frame side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b (see FIG. 28) provided on the board unit 54 only by mounting the game effect unit 4 on the main body frame 3. , 2002a. That is, the unit side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a provided on the game effect unit 4 side and the frame side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b provided on the main body frame 3 side attach the game effect unit 4 to the main body frame 3 from the front. In this case, they are arranged at positions where they can face each other. The unit relay board 625 is formed with a fitting protrusion 751 extending rearward at a substantially intermediate position between the unit side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a. On the other hand, the board unit 54 is formed with a fitting hole 646 (see FIG. 28) extending in the back direction at a substantially intermediate position between the frame side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b.

  With this structure, when the game effect unit 4 is attached to the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3 from the front surface, the fitting protrusion 751 is fitted into the fitting hole 646 while being guided. At the same time, the unit side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a on the game effect unit 4 side are positioned so as to face the frame side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b on the main body frame 3 side, respectively. Therefore, the main drawer connector 2000 (2000a and 2000b) and the sub drawer connector 2002 (2002a and 2002b) are connected to each other simply by attaching the game effect unit 4 to the main body frame 3. It is not necessary to perform a typical connection work and work efficiency is improved.

[About the body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4, 5, and 14 to 18. 4 and 5 are as described above, and FIG. 14 is a front view of the main body frame to which the game effect unit is attached. FIG. 15 is a side view of the main body frame before attaching the components. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the main body frame to which the components are attached as viewed from the front side. FIG. 17 is a rear view of the main body frame to which components are attached. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back side.

  First, the structure of the main body frame 3 to which the game effect unit 4 is attached will be described. The main body frame 3 is integrally formed of synthetic resin. An upper shaft support bracket 47 and a lower shaft support bracket 48 are attached to the outer frame 2 to support the opening and closing shaft. By engaging the upper shaft support bracket 47 and the lower shaft support bracket 48 with the upper support bracket 7 and the lower support bracket 8 attached to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Can be pivotally supported. As described above, the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so that the door frame 5 can be opened and closed. .

  By the way, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 17, the main body frame 3 according to this embodiment is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape. It has thin-walled (for example, 1 to 3.5 mm thick) peripheral walls (2 mm in this embodiment) 290 to 293 extending so as to stand upright. Moreover, it has the game production | presentation unit installation recessed part (large accommodation part, large accommodation space) 30 which is the space area | region formed by being enclosed by these surrounding surface walls 290-293. As will be described later, the peripheral walls 290 to 293 according to this embodiment are positioned 13 cm or more behind the front surface of the outer frame 2 beyond the rear surface (positions spaced 6 cm or more from the rear surface of the outer frame 2). 1st main body frame side wall provided to cover the game effect unit installation recess 30 from the side frame plate 13 side, and the game effect unit installation recess 30. And a second main body frame side wall provided so as to cover from the side frame plate 12 side, and a main body frame upper wall provided to cover the game effect unit installation recess 30 from above. .

Here, as shown in FIG. 16, various parameters for determining the volume of the game effect unit installation recess 30 are as follows.
The maximum width of the front receiving opening 30a of the game production unit installation recess 30 (the distance between the front end portion (peripheral wall 290) of the first main body frame side wall and the front end portion (peripheral wall 290) of the second main body frame side wall) ) L1 is approximately 49cm.
The depth width (depth width on the inner wall side of the peripheral wall 290 to 293) L2 of the game production unit installation recess 30 is approximately 14 cm.
-From the inner wall of the part (the last end of the peripheral wall 293 on the side frame plate 13 side) of the first body frame side wall part, the part of the second body frame side wall part (the last end) The distance (maximum lateral width on the back side) L3 to the inner wall of the peripheral wall 293 on the side frame plate 12 side is approximately 44 cm.
The height (front height) L4 of the inner wall side of the peripheral wall 290 on the side frame plate 13 side is approximately 54 cm (equivalent to the inner wall side height of the peripheral wall 290 on the side frame plate 12 side).
The height (rear side height) L5 of the peripheral wall 293 on the side frame plate 13 side is approximately 46 cm (smaller than the height on the inner wall side of the peripheral wall 293 on the side frame plate 12 side).

According to such a configuration, even if the volume of the game effect unit installation recess 30 is estimated to be small,
Volume = “maximum width L1 of the front receiving port 30a” × “front side height L4” × “depth width of the peripheral wall 290” + “maximum side width L3” × “rear side height L5” × “around” Depth width of face walls 291-293 "
Based on such a calculation formula, “31259” cubic centimeters can be calculated. Of the depth width L2 on the inner wall side of the peripheral wall 290 to 293, the depth width of the peripheral wall 290 is approximately 4.2 cm, and the depth width of the peripheral walls 291 to 293 is approximately 9.3 cm.

  That is, conventionally, the main body frame is provided with a payout device for paying out game balls and a payout passage for guiding the game balls to the payout device, but the game board is designed so as not to interfere with the payout device and the payout passage. This generally limited the space behind the game board. In this respect, according to such a configuration, the maximum lateral width L1 of the front receiving port 30a is approximately 49 cm, the depth width L2 on the inner wall side of the peripheral wall 290 to 293 is approximately 14 cm, and further, “31259” cubic centimeters are extremely large. Since the space (the game effect unit installation recess 30) is secured in advance, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom with respect to how the game area, the effect area, and the control area are designed. In addition, since such a game effect unit installation recess 30 is formed so as to be covered by the peripheral wall 290 to 293, members (game area, effect area, and control area) accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30 are formed. It is possible to suitably suppress fraudulent acts on (part).

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a large game board member in which a game area 20 (see FIG. 1) is mainly formed with a maximum lateral width of approximately 49 cm, and a substantially entire back surface side of the large game board member. A game effect control unit 99 (see FIG. 53) configured to have a large-scale back member in which an effect area and a control area are formed is designed as a member accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30. Yes. That is, as will be described later, in this game effect control unit 99, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55,
A frame-shaped front component member (game region partition frame member) 680 that partitions and forms the outer periphery of the game region 20 (see FIG. 1).
A transparent plate-like gaming panel 409 arranged to close the gaming area 20 (see FIG. 1) on the rear side of the front component 680.
A fitting step portion (holding step portion) 540a that covers the outer periphery of the gaming panel 409 and holds the gaming panel 409 detachably from the front side, and is formed inside the fitting step portion 540a and the gaming area 20 (FIG. A frame-like panel holder 540 that has a through-hole 540b that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a size that substantially corresponds to 1), and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 680.
For large game board members composed of parts such as
A back box 514 attached to the rear side of the panel holder 540 and having a predetermined depth with the front side open and having an opening on the rear wall, and a game on the outer periphery of the opening in the back box 514 A back unit 510 having at least a light-emitting decorative body 1720 disposed including a portion overlapping the game area 20 (see FIG. 1) when viewed from the person side.
An effect display device 115 arranged so as to close the opening of the back unit 510 from the rear side and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image.
An inner peripheral board that is attached to the back of the effect display device 115 and controls the effect display device 115, and an outer peripheral board that is attached to the back of the light emitting decoration body 1720 and controls the light emission decoration body 1720 And a control device (not shown) in which a plurality of control boards are arranged so as to be stacked in the depth direction.
A large-scale back member composed of parts and the like is attached with a depth of approximately 8 to 13 cm over substantially the entire back surface side of the large game board member. The game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3 can be accommodated only from the front accommodation opening 30a.

  In such a game effect control unit 99, as will be described later, since a transparent plate-like game panel 409, a back unit 510 and the like are provided, a new effect different from the conventional effect can be performed. become. However, when the transparent panel-like game panel 409 and the back unit 510 are provided in this way, the game area and the effect area are completely separated in the depth direction. In addition, in this embodiment, an effect display device 115 arranged to close the opening of the back unit 510 from the rear side, and a light emitting decoration 1720 arranged on the outer periphery of the opening of the back unit 510 are provided. Therefore, a control device associated therewith is further provided over substantially the entire back surface of the back unit 510. For this reason, the game effect control unit 99 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape having a depth width of about 12 cm on the entire surface, but according to the game effect unit installation recess 30 described above, Even such a game effect control unit 99 can be stored, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  A plate portion 32 is formed below the game effect unit installation recess 30. In addition, on the front side surrounding the game effect unit installation recess 30, door hook holes 352 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower portions of the front right side that is the open side. The door hook hole 352 is provided to penetrate the door frame hook portion 973 provided in the locking device 60 (details will be described later) attached to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3 so as to jump forward. . Further, a unit positioning projection 37 for engaging with a positioning recess 466 formed in the game panel 409 is provided on the inner side surface of the left side portion of the front surface that is the pivot support side.

  By the way, conventionally, it was fundamentally impossible to form the game production unit installation recess 30 having the volume as described above. That is, in a general pachinko machine, the maximum width of the outer frame 2 is set to approximately 520 mm in consideration of island facilities installed in the hall. However, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the thickness of the outer frame is set to approximately 20 mm, the thickness of the vertical frame provided on the left and right (about 40 mm in total), and further, the body frame relative to the outer frame Considering the arrangement space such as a sliding rod that can be slid in the vertical direction so as to restrict the opening, it is impossible even to make the width of the member in which the game area into which the game ball is to be formed be 480 mm or more. It was. With such a background, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the minimum lateral strength of the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 is ensured, and the maximum lateral width L1 of the front receiving port 30a is approximately 49 cm. An extremely large accommodation space (game production unit installation recess 30) such as approximately 14 cm as a depth width L2 on the inner wall side of the face walls 290 to 293 and further “31259” cubic centimeters is secured in advance.

  Hereinafter, various new configurations capable of securing such a large accommodation space (game production unit installation recess 30) will be described in order.

  First, the board part 32 provided below the game effect unit installation recessed part 30 is demonstrated with reference to FIG. The plate portion 32 is configured on the front side of the main body frame 3.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the firing rail 38 is screwed to the plate portion 32 from the center portion of the front surface toward the open end portion. A rail connection member 44 projects from the front surface of the plate portion 32 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 38 (so-called M-shaped rail) on the shaft support side. The rail connection member 44 is adjacent to the connection passage portion 477 that is the downstream end of the outer rail 472 when the game effect unit 4 is installed in the game effect unit installation recess 30. An elliptical game effect for fixing the lower portion of the game effect unit 4 (specifically, the game panel 409) to the side position on the shaft support side of the rail connection member 44 (position opposite to the launch rail 38). A unit fixture 46 is rotatably attached. The game effect unit fixing tool 46 rotates clockwise with the game effect unit 4 placed in the game effect unit installation recess 30, and presses the game effect unit fixing tool 46 against the front surface of the game panel 409. Thus, the entire game effect unit 4 including the game panel 409 is fixed to the main body frame 3. On the other hand, when removing the game effect unit 4, the lower part of the game panel 409 can be easily released by turning the game effect unit fixture 46 counterclockwise.

  In the present embodiment, only one dish unit 300 is provided without providing a so-called lower dish as in the prior art. The reason why the lower plate is not provided is to increase the vertical length of the game effect unit 4 in order to enlarge the game area 20. In addition, a firing mechanism including a handle unit 318, a launch rail 38, a rail connection member 44, and the like is disposed in the plate portion 32. The plate portion 32 is located on the front side and below the game effect unit installation recess 30. Therefore, the game area 20 can be expanded in the vertical direction (the height direction seen from the player). Since there is no conventional lower plate, the plate portion 32 and thus the launching mechanism are located generally below the conventional gaming machine.

  By the way, in the position where the rail connection member 44 protrudes, a so-called foul port is formed in the conventional pachinko machine. This foul mouth played a role of receiving a game ball (so-called foul ball) that flowed back without being driven into the game area 20 even though it was launched, and to return the foul ball to the lower plate. The foul port was provided at this position because when the game effect unit is mounted on the main body frame, the rail provided on the game effect unit and the launch rail provided on the main body frame come into contact with each other. This is because there is a risk of damage. Therefore, by providing a gap between the game effect unit side rail and the main body frame side launch rail, the game effect unit side rail and main body frame side fire that may occur when the game effect unit is mounted on the main body frame It prevented contact with the rail.

  However, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is not provided with a lower plate. Therefore, the foul port 489 (see FIG. 26) is connected to the front structural member 680 (more specifically, on the upstream side (shaft support side) of the connection passage portion 477 and the connection passage portion 477 and the guide rail 482 (outer rail). 472), the foul ball can be returned to the reservoir 361 of the dish unit 300. Since the storage unit 361 is below the placement surface (the surface of the main body frame 3 on which the game effect unit 4 is placed) on which the game effect unit 4 is placed, the foul port 489 (see FIG. 26) is used as the game effect. By forming the unit 4 on the front component member 680 side, the foul sphere can be returned to the storage portion 361.

  With the above configuration, the foul ball can be returned to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 while increasing the vertical length of the game effect unit 4 without providing the lower dish, and the game frame 3 can be It is possible to prevent contact between the connection passage portion 477 on the game panel 409 side and the firing rail 38 on the main body frame 3 side, which may occur when the effect unit 4 is mounted.

  Further, a prize ball payout stopper mechanism 39 is provided on the side of the game effect unit fixture 46 on the side of the shaft support side. This prize ball payout stopper mechanism 39 is provided in the middle of the prize ball path for paying out the prize balls paid out from the ball payout device 53 (see FIG. 17) to the dish unit 300 on the door frame 5 side. When the door is opened, the prize ball passage is automatically closed to prevent the balls from spilling out of the prize ball passage, while when the door frame 5 is closed, the prize ball passage automatically communicates with the ball. The prize balls paid out from the payout device 53 are paid out to the dish unit 300. A fastening hole 41 for fastening with a fastening portion (not shown) and a fastening portion 469 formed in the game effect unit 4 is formed in the plate portion 32 above the launch position of the launch rail 38.

  In addition, a rectangular parallelepiped launching device mounting portion 40 is formed on the lower portion of the open side of the plate portion 32 so as to bulge out toward the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). 57 is fixed to the launcher mounting portion 40 from the back surface of the main body frame 3. A handle connection window 40 a is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 40. A slide engagement / disengagement piece 231 (see FIG. 1) of the slide unit 230 attached to the back side of the door frame 5 is inserted into the handle connection window 40a. When the door frame 5 is closed, a slide engagement / disengagement piece 231 described later is inserted into the handle connection window 40a, and the handle unit 318 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 and the launching device 57 are linked. In addition, the launching device 57 can adjust the resilience of the game ball with a strength corresponding to the amount of turning operation of the handle unit 318, so that it is at the launch position of the launch rail 38. The game ball can be ejected and launched at a desired position in the game area 20.

  The front structure of the main body frame 3 is generally as described above. Next, the back side structure of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 4 and 17. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 17, a prize ball tank 50 for storing a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball or a rental ball is detachably attached to the upper back of the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the upper wall of the main body frame). It is attached to. A tank rail member 51 that guides the balls from the prize ball tank 50 in a laterally inclined manner is disposed below the prize ball tank 50, and further, a ball path from the lower end of the tank rail member 51 toward the lower side. A unit 52 and a ball dispensing device 53 are provided.

  That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the main body frame upper wall portion of the peripheral wall 290 to 293 is inward from the rear end portion (peripheral wall 293) (in FIG. 4, the lower wall). A rear wall portion (second rear wall portion) extending in the direction), and the second main body frame side wall portion of the peripheral wall 290 to 293 is a rear end portion (peripheral wall 293). And a rear wall portion (third rear wall portion) extending inward (leftward in FIG. 4). Among these, the tank rail member 51 is attached to the rear wall portion of the main body frame upper wall portion, and the ball passage unit 52 and the ball dispensing device 53 are attached to the rear wall portion of the second main body frame side wall portion. In this manner, the rear end portion of the peripheral wall 293 is purposely bent to provide the rear wall portion, thereby compressing the depth width as the game effect unit installation recess 30 in which the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated. The tank rail member 51, the ball passage unit 52, and the ball payout device 53 can be attached to the rear wall portion.

  Here, the tank rail member 51 attached to the outer surface of the rear wall portion of the main body frame upper wall portion allows the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 50 to be placed on the side of the first main body frame side wall portion (FIG. 4). A structure is adopted in which it is received from the middle and the left side and flows down to the side of the second main body frame side wall (right side in FIG. 4). Further, the tank rail member 51 has two passages (not shown) through which game balls flow down in two rows. Thereby, it becomes possible to secure a large number of game balls in the tank rail member 51 itself, and the payout of game balls to the player becomes smooth. The prize ball tank 50 and the tank rail member 51 may be integrally formed. However, considering that the degree of freedom in designing these members is increased, it is practically desirable to provide them as separate members.

  On the other hand, the ball passage unit 52 attached to the outer surface of the rear wall portion of the second main body frame side wall portion is separated from the tank rail member 51 in order to secure a depth width as the game effect unit installation recess 30. The game balls are provided with a single passage (not shown) through which the game balls flow down. However, in this case, the game balls that have flowed down in two rows in the tank rail member 51 collide with each other when they reach the ball path unit 52 and become one row, and the payout of the game balls may be delayed. There is a concern that game balls may be clogged.

  Therefore, the tank rail member 51 according to this embodiment includes an order supply device 51 a that alternately supplies the game balls that have flowed down in two rows through the two passages to the ball passage unit 52. . Accordingly, it is possible to ensure the depth width as the game effect unit installation recess 30 while preferably avoiding the slow payout of the game ball and the occurrence of clogging of the game ball.

  In addition, as such an order supply device 51a, for example, a gear device provided with two gears that rotate while stocking one game ball between teeth protruding from the rotating body is adopted. Can do. That is, in such a gear device, the two gears are disposed separately from the two passages in a state in which the positions of the teeth of each other are formed so as to deviate from the radius of the game ball. Yes. A game ball that has passed through one of the two gears is supplied to a single passage of the ball passage unit 52. In such a configuration, the game balls flowing down in two rows by the two passages of the tank rail member 51 are sequentially supplied to the one passage one by one by the order supply device 51a. Become.

  Then, the game ball guided to the ball passage unit 52 from the order supply device 51 a falls down the one passage and is further guided to the ball payout device 53. The game balls guided to the ball payout device 53 are a predetermined number of prize balls according to a payout control program executed by a payout control board 720 (see FIG. 84) housed in a payout control board box 55 described later. Or as a rental ball, it is paid out to the dish unit 300 provided on the front side of the door frame 5. As will be described later, the ball payout device 53 is provided with a payout motor and a rotary payout member that is rotationally driven by the payout motor and pays out the balls one by one.

  Further, a board unit 54 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 (the surface bent inward from a later-described fourth peripheral wall 293) so as to be positioned below the lower end of the game effect unit 4. ing. The substrate unit 54 is a unit in which a plurality of substrate boxes for storing various control substrates are integrated as a unit. The plurality of board boxes include a payout control board box 55, a terminal board box 56, a power board box 62, and the like. These various board boxes are stacked by disposing a payout control board box 55 and a terminal board box 56 behind the power board box 62. The payout control board box 55, the terminal board box 56, the power board box 62, and the like do not need to be replaced when the game effect unit 4 is replaced. Therefore, these control board boxes are integrated as a board unit 54 separated from the game effect unit 4 and arranged on the back surface of the main body frame 3. Therefore, since the space in the depth direction of the game effect unit 4 is not obstructed by the plurality of board boxes, the game effect unit 4 can be enlarged in the depth direction. In addition to this, the game effect unit 4 and the board unit 54 can be efficiently arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so that the appearance is organized. If the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is visually troublesome, even if an illegal board such as a hanging board is attached, it becomes difficult for hall personnel to notice it. In this respect, if the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 is visually arranged, it is easy to detect even if there is an illegal act as described above, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the illegal act.

  In addition, as will be described later, when the game effect unit 4 is stored and installed in the game effect unit installation recess 30, the main control board provided on the game effect unit 4 side and the board provided on the board unit 54, the main control board. Electrical connection with the board that needs to be connected to the board is automatically performed by the above-described drawer connectors 2000 and 2002. Thereby, after the game effect unit 4 is stored and installed in the game effect unit installation recess 30, it is not necessary to perform an electrical connection work from behind the pachinko machine 1 and work efficiency is improved.

  A unitized launching device 57 is attached to the launching device mounting portion 40 (see FIG. 14) located below the substrate unit 54 described above. Further, a back cover 58 is provided at the rear opening 70 formed along the rear end of the aforementioned peripheral wall 290 to 293 of the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed. The back cover (transparent cover body) 58 covers the game effect control unit 99 housed in the game effect unit installation recess 30 so as to be visible from the rear. The back cover 58 is attached to close the rear opening 70. In this state, as shown in FIG. 5, the vertical surface is substantially the same as the rear end portion of the tank rail member 51 that protrudes most rearward of the pachinko machine 1.

  That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the first main body frame side wall portion of the peripheral wall 290 to 293 is inward from the rear end portion (circumferential wall 293) (in FIG. 4). And a rear wall portion (first rear wall portion) extending in the right direction. And the back cover support cylinder part 280 for pivotally supporting the said back cover 58 so that opening and closing is possible is provided in the outer surface of the rear wall part of the 1st main body frame side wall part. In this manner, the rear end portion of the peripheral wall 293 is purposely bent to provide the rear wall portion, thereby compressing the depth width as the game effect unit installation recess 30 in which the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated. Without this, the back cover 58 can be attached to the rear wall.

  A locking device 60 is fixed to the open side rear surface of the body frame 3. The locking device 60 is a so-called W lock that locks both the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3. A plurality (three in this embodiment) of door frame hooks 973 and cylinder locks 868 (both see FIG. 1) are provided so as to protrude from the locking device 60 toward the front of the main body frame 3. The details will be described later.

  In summary, as shown in FIG. 18, the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment has the following assembly structure as a whole. That is, a tank mounting groove 202 is formed on the back surface side of the main body frame 3 on a vertical surface connecting the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291, and the prize ball tank 50 is played by the tank mounting groove 202. It is attached above the production unit installation recess 30. A rail locking groove 203 is formed along the opening edge of the rear opening 70, and the tank rail member 51 is attached along the upper rear wall 295 by the rail locking groove 203. In addition, the ball passage unit 52 is attached to the lower side of the tank rail member 51 by a passage unit attachment boss 204 formed on the back side of the shaft support side rear wall 296. In addition, in a ball dispenser installation area 205 formed below the tank rail member 51, a ball dispenser 53 is installed adjacent to the shaft support side of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, the ball supply passage 59 is attached from the front side of the main body frame 3 to the ball supply passage installation portion 206 corresponding to the pivot support side bottom wall of the game effect unit installation recess 30.

  Further, the launching device 57 is attached to the inside of the concave shape of the launching device mounting portion 40 by the launching device mounting boss 208 projecting rearwardly at the lower part of the rear side of the open side of the main body frame 3. Further, the board unit 54 in which the payout control board box 55, the terminal board box 56, the power board box 62, the board tray 64, and the like are unitized as a unit is attached to the mounting holes 207 provided on the left, right, top and bottom of the plate part 32. And fastened from the back side. A back cover support cylinder 280 is formed on the back side of the open side rear wall 294, and the back cover 58 is pivotally supported by the back cover support cylinder 280 so that the rear opening 70 can be closed. .

  As shown in the figure, in the main body frame 3 having such a structure, the game effect unit installation recess 30 is formed as a large capacity space, and the bottom wall portion of the game effect unit installation recess 30 is substantially flush. Therefore, it is easy to install the game effect unit 4 having a box-like appearance with a large depth in the game effect unit installation recess 30 as will be described later. Furthermore, since the game effect unit 4 having a box-like appearance substantially the same as the space shape of the game effect unit installation recess 30 can be closely installed in the game effect unit installation recess 30 with no gap, Wobble and fraud are appropriately prevented. Below, the various members assembled | attached to the main body frame 3 are demonstrated further in detail separately.

<Tank rail member>
The tank rail member 51 disposed below the prize ball tank 50 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank, tank rail member, ball path unit, ball payout device, and ball supply path, as viewed from the back side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 20 is a perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine showing the relationship between the prize ball tank, the tank rail member, the ball passage unit, the ball dispensing device, and the ball supply passage.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the tank rail member 51 is formed in the shape of an inclined bowl having an open upper surface, the upper surface of the upstream end faces the discharge port 1404 of the prize ball tank 50, and the lower surface of the downstream end is detailed later. It faces the ball passage unit 52 to be described. Further, the inside of the tank rail member 51 is a two-way passage 1412 through which game balls flow down in two rows by a partition wall. The bottom surface of the passage 1412 is cut out of a narrow groove, and foreign matters that roll together with the game ball fall downward from the narrow groove.

  In addition, an egg-shaped ball leveling member 1413 having a weight on the slightly downstream side of the midstream region of the tank rail member 51 is swingably provided. The ball leveling member 1413 hangs down into the two passages 1412 of the tank rail member 51, and when the game balls flowing down the passages 1412 flow down in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction, the ball leveling member 1413 The rectification is as follows. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 51 on the downstream side from the installation position of the ball leveling member 1413 is covered with a ball pressing plate 1414. The ball presser plate 1414 is formed in an inclined arc shape so that a game ball that has not been made one level by the ball leveling member 1413 is forcibly set to one level.

  Further, a pair of alignment gears 1416 (corresponding to the above-described order supply device 51a) are rotatably supported by shaft pins 1417 at the downstream end of the tank rail member 51 so as to face the respective passages 1412. The alignment gear 1416 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is fixed to the shaft pin 1417 so that the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 1416 are shifted by a half pitch. For this reason, when the upper part of the game balls flowing down the passages 1412 of the tank rail member 51 flows downstream while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 1416, the game balls of the two rows of passages 1412 are alternately sent one by one. Will be. The alignment gear 1416 is covered with an arcuate gear cover 1415 on its upper surface.

<Ball passage unit>
The ball path unit 52 for guiding the game balls dropped from the tank rail member 51 in a line to the ball payout device 53 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a front sectional view of the ball passage unit.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the ball passage unit 52 is provided along the vertical direction (height direction) so as to bypass the accommodation space of the game effect unit 4 formed in the main body frame 3 on the back surface. In this spherical passage unit 52, a spherical drop passage (height direction passage) 1422 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 1421 bent on the back surface of the substantially rectangular plate material (the surface seen from the back surface is called the front surface). The ball drop passage 1422 has a front / rear bent passage portion 1422a whose upstream is bent in the front / rear direction (depth direction as viewed from the back), and a left / right direction (left / right direction as viewed from the rear) communicating with the front / rear bent passage portion 1422a. The left and right bent passage portions 1422b are bent to the left and right and the right and left bent passage portions 1422b are connected to the right and left bent passage portions 1422b, and the vertical passage portions 1422c are substantially vertical. Further, a cutout portion 1423 is formed in one bent passage wall 1421 constituting the vertical passage portion 1422c, and a ball breakage detecting piece 1424 whose upper end is supported by a support shaft 1425 is swingably attached to the cutout portion 1423. ing. A ball break switch 1426 is attached to the side of the ball break detection piece 1424, and an actuator 1427 of the ball break switch 1426 is in contact with the ball break detection piece 1424.

  Thus, when a game ball is present in the vertical passage portion 1422c, the ball break detection piece 1424 is pressed by the game ball present in the vertical passage portion 1422c, and the actuator 1427 is pushed to turn on the ball break switch 1426. On the other hand, when there is no game ball in the vertical passage portion 1422c due to clogging or lack of balls, the ball break detection piece 1424 swings into the vertical passage portion 1422c, and the actuator 1427 turns the ball break switch 1426 OFF. To do. When the ball cut switch 1426 is turned OFF, the rotation of a payout motor of a ball payout device 53, which will be described later, is stopped and the payout of the winning ball is stopped.

  A stopper protrusion 1428 is formed at the lower end of the notch portion 1423 to prevent excessive swinging of the ball breakage detecting piece 1424 to the opposite side of the passage portion. A ball clogging insertion groove 1429 is formed in the vertical passage portion 1422 c corresponding to the cut detection piece 1424. The ball clogging insertion groove 1429 is inserted into a pin from the rear surface side of the ball dispensing device 53 when the ball breakage detecting piece 1424 is difficult to swing due to ball clogging or the like. This is provided to eliminate the problem. Further, the other bent passage wall 1421 facing the broken piece detection piece 1424 is formed in a slightly bulging shape toward the broken piece detection piece 1424 side. This is because when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 1422c, the ball break detection piece 1424 is surely pressed to turn on the ball break switch 1426.

<Ball delivery device>
Next, the ball payout device 53 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described ball passage unit 52 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back side of the ball dispensing device. FIG. 23 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the payout motor and the sprocket as the payout member.

  The ball dispensing device 53 includes a unit base body 1451 in which a bent passage 1453 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 1452, a unit sub plate 1475 that covers the rear surface of the unit base body 1451, and an upper surface of the unit sub plate 1475 ( A relay board 1480 attached to the rear surface side, and gear groups 1493, 1494, 1497 and a gear cover 1510 covering the detection disk 1500 provided in a substantially central surface region (rear surface side region) of the unit sub-plate 1475. . Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

  The unit base body 1451 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages projecting toward the plate-like unit sub-plate 1475 side. A bent passage 1453 is formed by the wall 1452. The bent passage wall 1452 protrudes from the center of the upper part of the unit base body 1451 to approximately the middle of the downstream side at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. It also serves as side walls on both ends of the unit base body 1451 from the downstream end to the downstream end. In addition, the middle bent passage wall 1452 is largely divided into left and right portions to form a sorting space 1455 in which a sprocket 1457 serving as a sorting member is disposed. A passage partition wall 1459 is formed so as to project from the lower portion of the distribution space 1455 to the left and right ends of the unit base body 1451 so as to form a pair of bent passage walls 1452 divided into left and right. That is, the right and left bent passage wall 1452 and the passage partition wall 1459 on the downstream side from the middle form two passages on the left and right from the distribution space 1455, and one passage constitutes the prize ball passage 1460, The other passage forms a ball passage 1461. The passage partition wall 1459 is also largely divided into left and right, and a motor storage space 1464 for storing the payout motor 1465 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 1459.

  Further, in the distribution space 1455, a sprocket 1457 as a payout member in which a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) recesses in which a sphere fits is formed is rotatably arranged. A bearing cylinder 1456 that pivotally supports the other end of the rotating shaft 1458 to which the 1457 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 1455. Further, the upper end portion of the passage partition wall 1459 constituting the bottom portion of the distribution space 1455 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 1457, and in the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 1460 formed on one side thereof A payout ball detection sensor 1462 is detachably mounted. The payout ball detection sensor 1462 is composed of a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor having a circular passage hole through which a sphere passes at the tip, and an attachment portion that matches the shape of the rear end is formed by a bent passage wall 1452. Thus, it can be easily attached and detached. A wiring (not shown) from the payout ball detection sensor 1462 is connected to a relay board 1480 described later.

  A circular motor storage space 1464 for storing the payout motor 1465 is formed below the unit base body 1451 and between the prize ball passage 1460 and the ball removal passage 1461. The motor storage space 1464 The cylindrical main body of the payout motor 1465 is accommodated inside. Then, with the payout motor 1465 attached to the aluminum heat sink 1491 of the unit sub-plate 1475, the motor shaft 1468 of the payout motor 1465 passes through the shaft insertion hole formed in the aluminum heat sink 1491 and passes through the first gear. 1493 is fixed. Further, the unit base body 1451 is provided with a guide protrusion 1469 for guiding the game ball, which has been extracted at the lowermost end of the ball extraction passage 1461, to the back side of the ball dispensing device 53, and is guided to the guide protrusion 1469. The spheres thus guided are guided to a ball outlet connecting passage 415, which will be described later, and finally discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (a collection basket provided below the island platform).

  Further, the unit sub-plate 1475 has a payout motor 1465 attached to a synthetic resin plate covering the bent passage 1453 portion, the distribution space 1455 portion, and the prize ball passage 1460 portion of the unit base body 1451 and the ball passage 1461. It is comprised by attaching the aluminum heat sink 1491 which covers a downstream part. A relay board region 1476 for attaching the relay board 1480 is formed on the top side (rear side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub-plate 1475, and a plurality of gears 1493, 1494, 1497 and detection are formed below the relay board area 1476. A gear region 1490 to which the disk 1500 is attached is formed.

  Further, the relay board 1480 relays the wiring from the payout ball detection sensor 1462, the payout motor 1465, and the sensor 1505 described later and the wiring from the payout control board 720 (see FIG. 84) described later. Therefore, the relay board 1480 is provided with a plurality of connectors 1481 and is covered with the board cover 1485.

  The substrate cover 1485 is formed in a box shape with a substantially square front side open, and a button opening 1488 and a connection opening 1489 are formed in the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 1485. In the state where the substrate cover 1485 is covered, the head of the detachable button 1472 slightly faces the outside from the button opening 1488. In addition, the wiring connected to the relay substrate 1480 is drawn out from the connection opening 1489 to the outside.

  Next, gears 1493, 1494, 1497 provided in the gear region 1490 and the detection disk 1500 will be described. As described above, the first gear 1493 is fixed to the tip of the motor shaft 1468 of the dispensing motor 1465. Above the first gear 1493, a second gear 1494 that meshes with the first gear 1493 is rotatably provided on the shaft 1495. Above the second gear 1494, a third gear 1497 that meshes with the second gear 1494 is rotatably provided on the shaft 1498. Further, above the third gear 1497, a detection disk 1500 having a gear portion 1502 that meshes with the third gear 1497 is rotatably provided on a rotating shaft 1458 that supports the sprocket 1457. The sprocket 1457 and the detection disk 1500 are configured to rotate integrally around the rotation shaft 1458. Therefore, when the payout motor 1465 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 1457 via the first gear 1493, the second gear 1494, the third gear 1497, and the gear portion 1502 of the detection disk 1500.

  The outer circumference of the detection disk 1500 is formed to be slightly larger than the circle of the gear portion 1502, and the outer circumferential portion protruding outward from the gear portion 1502 has the same number as the concave portions of the sprocket 1457 (in the illustrated case). 3) detection notches 1501 are formed. This detection notch 1501 is detected by a light emitting / receiving sensor 1505 provided on a sensor substrate 1504 sandwiched and supported by a substrate mounting portion 1507 formed on the surface of the unit sub-plate 1475. The sensor 1505 is for monitoring whether or not the sprocket 1457 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 1501 within a predetermined interval during the payout operation. If abnormal rotation is detected by the sensor 1505 (in many cases, the ball is engaged with the sprocket 1457), the sprocket 1457 is rotated forward and backward a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, the ball engagement state). It is. Note that the number of game balls actually paid out is detected by the payout ball detection sensor 1462 provided in the prize ball passage 1460 and used for counting.

  Although the configuration of the ball payout device 53 has been described above, in the state where the unit base body 1451, the unit sub-plate 1475, the relay board 1480, the board cover 1485, and the gear cover 1510 are assembled, a game ball to be paid out is guided. A cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 1465 is positioned below the bent passage 1453 so as to be accommodated. In addition, the payout motor 1465 and the sprocket 1457 are coupled so as to be rotationally driven by a plurality of gears 1493, 1494, 1497, 1500 (1502) provided in the gear region 1490 on the rear surface of the unit sub-plate 1475. . Therefore, unlike the conventional one in which the depth width dimension from the upper side to the lower side of the ball payout device 53 is made substantially constant and the payout motor protrudes to the front side, rear surface side or side side of the ball payout device as in the prior art. It can be set as the structure where any part of 53 does not protrude toward back further.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, a seal 53 a is affixed to the back surface of the ball payout device 53 so as to conceal the screw fixing portion of the screw used for assembling the ball payout device 53. . In recent years, a gaming machine has a complicated back surface structure due to an increase in the size of a liquid crystal display or the like, and it is necessary to consider the maintainability of workers such as hall personnel. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, maintainability is improved by arranging a series of payout passages on the back of the gaming machine. However, when the maintainability is improved, troubles such as disassembling precision parts unintentionally by the operator are likely to occur. For this reason, in this embodiment, in order to prevent such troubles in the ball dispensing device 53, the balls used for assembling the ball dispensing device 53 are concealed by the seal 53a, and the ball dispensing device 53 is used unless the seal 53a is peeled off. Can not be disassembled. That is, by providing the seal 53a, the operator's intention to work is clearly confirmed, and unintentional removal and disassembly are preferably prevented. Further, by printing the characters “disassembly prohibited” on the seal 53a, the operator's attention can be urged and the intention of the operation can be confirmed more clearly. In addition, as long as it confirms the work intention, it is possible to provide not only the seal 53a but also a cover member that covers the screw. It is also effective to color the seal 53a with yellow and black, which are generally known as colors that call attention.

<Sphere supply passage>
The sphere supply passage (depth direction passage) 59 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described ball dispensing device 53 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. FIG. 24 is a perspective view showing the flow of the game ball in the ball supply passage. FIG. 25 is a plan view for explaining the operation of the full tank rocking plate.

  The ball supply passage 59 is composed of a box main body 1521 formed in a box shape having an upper surface opened and extending in a substantially horizontal direction with a thickness of one game ball, and a lid body 1541 covering the upper surface of the box main body 1521. The overall shape is flat. The ball supply passage 59 is provided along the bottom surface of the game effect unit 4 when the game effect unit 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. The box main body 1521 is configured such that a game ball flowing in from the downstream end of the prize ball passage 1460 is guided in a zigzag shape inside and discharged from the ball outlet 1536. For this reason, a side guide passage 1522 for guiding the game ball flowing in from the prize ball entrance 1542 formed in the lid 1541 to the side from one end to the other end is formed by the partition wall 1526 at the upstream portion. . A side guide receiving portion 1523 formed in a concave arc shape is provided at one end portion of the side guide passage 1522 immediately below the prize ball entrance 1542 so as to guide the game ball toward the side. A buffer member 1524 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of the passage 1522 to receive the impact of the game ball flowing through the side guide passage 1522 and guide it to the downstream side.

  In addition, the game ball that collides with the buffer member 1524 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 1522 is changed in direction to the downstream side, and then the side wall of the side guide passage 1522 is formed by the inclined side wall 1527 formed on the downstream side. It is induced to flow in the opposite direction to the flow of the sphere. That is, the reverse side guide passage 1525 is formed by the partition wall 1526 and the inclined side wall 1527. The game ball that has flowed through the reverse side guide passage 1525 is then guided to the front guide passage 1535 that is formed forward, and the above-described dish unit 300 is formed from the ball outlet 1536 that is formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 1535. To the storage section 361.

  Incidentally, a switch housing space 1528 is formed at one end portion of the reverse side guide passage 1525 on the downstream side of the buffer member 1524 so as to protrude outward. A full swing plate 1531 through which a support shaft 1529 is inserted is swingably provided at a lower front position of the switch storage space 1528. The full tank swinging plate 1531 is formed in a plate shape so as to form one end side wall of the reverse side guide passage 1525, a shaft hole is formed in the lower end of the plate shape, and a detection piece 1532 is integrally formed on the back surface thereof. Is formed. The detection piece 1532 is formed by vertically projecting the rear end portion of the fan-like coupling plate connected to the back surface of the full tank swinging plate 1531, and the projected detection piece 1532 projects the projection described in detail later. The ON / OFF state of the full tank switch 730 is detected by shielding or conducting between the light projector and the light receiver of the light receiving type full tank switch 730. The lid 1541 is provided with a switch mounting portion 1543 for mounting a full light switch 730 of a light projecting / receiving type at a position corresponding to the switch storage space 528.

  A shaft spring 1530 is also inserted into the support pin 1529, one end of the shaft spring 1530 is locked to the back surface of the full tank swing plate 1531, and the other end is erected rearward of the support pin 1529. By being locked by the spring locking pin 1549, the upper end portion of the full rocking plate 1531 is always urged toward the reverse side guide passage 1525. However, two stopper pieces 1534 are formed in the upper part of the switch storage space 1528 at the downstream extension position of the other end side wall of the side guide passage 1522 and the rear position thereof. Therefore, the upper end portion of the full tank swing plate 1531 only swings around the support shaft pin 1529 between the two stopper pieces 1534. Note that a wiring drawing recess 1547 for drawing the wiring from the full switch 730 to the outside is formed in the rear portion of the upper side wall of the switch storage space 1528.

  Further, a foul ball passage 1537 is formed on one side downstream of the reverse side guide passage 1525. The foul ball passage 1537 is bent and formed so that the foul ball inlet 1538 on the upstream side communicates with a communication port 473 (foul ball guide passage 473a) described later, and the downstream side communicates with the upstream side of the front guide passage 1535. Has been. Therefore, the foul sphere taken into the foul port 489 (see FIG. 26) and dropped into the communication port 473 is guided from the foul ball inlet 1538 to the front guide passage 1535 through the bent foul ball passage 1537 and further to the ball outlet. 1536 is returned to the reservoir 361 of the dish unit 300.

  In the ball supply passage 59 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 24, the game balls paid out from the prize ball passage 1460 of the ball dispensing device 53 are upstream from the prize ball entrance 1542 to the side guide passage 1522. Enters the side, is guided toward the side different from the direction of the ball outlet 1536 by the side guide receiving portion 1523, and collides with the buffer member 1524. The game ball that has collided with the buffer member 1524 hits the inclined side wall 1527 as it is toward the downstream side with its momentum weakened, and is guided in the reverse side guide passage 1525 in the direction opposite to the guide direction of the side guide passage 1522. It is guided to the front guide passage 1535 and is guided from the ball outlet 1536 of the front guide passage 1535 to the storage portion 361 of the dish unit 300. Further, the foul sphere entered from the foul sphere entrance 1538 is also weakened by the bent foul sphere passage 1537 and merged with the front guide passage 1535, and from the sphere outlet 1536 of the front guide passage 1535, the storage portion 361 of the dish unit 300. Led to.

  As described above, when the game ball naturally flows in the ball supply passage 59, when the game ball moves from the side guide passage 1522 to the reverse side guide passage 1525 as shown in FIG. In addition, the ball hits the buffer member 1524 and is reflected toward the substantially central position of the inclined side wall 1527, so that the game ball hardly hits the full tank swinging plate 1531. For this reason, the upper end of the full rocking plate 1531 is in contact with the front stopper piece 1534 by the biasing force of the shaft spring 1530, so that the detection piece 1532 is It is in a state (OFF) where the switch does not conduct due to entering the light receiver. On the other hand, when the winning ball is stored in the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 and the game ball is also filled in the ball supply passage 59, as shown in FIG. Due to the pressure of the game ball stored in the direction guide passage 1525, the full swinging plate 1531 swings in the clockwise direction against the urging force of the shaft spring 1530 and comes into contact with the subsequent stopper piece 1534. Become. In this state, the detection piece 1532 is removed from between the light projector and the light receiver of the full tank switch 730 of the light projecting / receiving method, and the switch becomes conductive (ON). When the full tank switch 730 is turned ON, the rotational driving of the payout motor 1465 of the ball payout device 53 stops (if an ON signal is derived while paying out a predetermined number of prize balls, the predetermined number of prize balls Will be stopped after paying out). Even when game balls are stored in the front guide passage 1535 and the reverse side guide passage 1525, the bottom of the foul ball passage 1537 has a very strong inclination, so the stored game balls are stored in the foul ball passage 1537. , And does not flow backward from the foul bulb inlet 1538.

  As described above, since the sphere supply passage 59 according to the present embodiment is detachably attached to the sphere supply passage installation portion 206 of the main body frame 3, the sphere supply passage is formed in the main body frame as in the past. It is not necessary to form a sphere supply passage in the main body frame as compared with the one assembled in the payout passage.

  Further, since the ball payout device 53 is provided in the immediate vicinity of the ball supply passage 59, it is sent out to the ball supply passage 59, and the game ball can be paid out at an appropriate payout speed by the flat ball supply passage 59. In addition, by providing the ball payout device 53 in the immediate vicinity of the upstream of the ball supply passage 59, supply of the game ball to the ball supply passage 59 can be realized in a form that weakens the momentum of the game ball as much as possible.

  Further, since the ball supply passage 59 is formed in a box shape extending in a substantially horizontal direction, the game balls sent to the ball supply passage 59 are scattered in the ball supply passage 59 and paid out to the storage unit 361. Can do. In other words, the conventional gaming machine has delivered a large amount of game balls in a straight line, but in the present embodiment, the ball supply passage 59 weakens the force of the balls to provide a slow payout speed. At the same time, the game balls are paid out so as to be scattered including the collision of the game balls in the ball supply passage 59. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a feeling of pitching or a feeling of paying out according to such a payout mode, thereby giving a sense of bliss when winning a winning ball at the time of a big hit. In addition, the game ball paid out from the prize ball passage 1460 of the ball payout device 53 is guided to a side different from the direction of the ball exit 1536 by the side guide receiving portion 1523, and once to the buffer member 1524. Since the collision is made, the speed of the game ball after the collision with the buffer member 1524 can be controlled to a substantially constant speed by the natural drop force. Further, by making the inside of the ball supply passage 59 into a zigzag-shaped passage, it is possible to guide to the dish unit 300 while weakening the momentum of the game balls paid out from the prize ball passage 1460 of the ball payout device 53. The awarded ball does not jump out of the storage unit 361.

  In addition, since the full rocking plate 1531 for operating the full tank switch 730 is provided at a position below the flow lower end of the side guide passage 1522 that is not affected by the flow of the normal game ball, The award ball payout is not stopped due to a full tank, and the award ball payout can be reliably stopped only when the tank is full.

  Further, the ball supply passage 59 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the foul ball passage 1537 for guiding the foul ball joins the ball in the middle of the front guide passage 1535 from which the award ball is paid out. The foul sphere can be merged without hindering the flow of the sphere.

<Mechanism for foul ball discharge>
Here, a mechanism relating to foul ball discharge formed by the main body frame 3 and the game effect unit 4 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is an enlarged front view centering on the joint portion of the main body frame and the game effect unit, in which (A) is a view showing an injection mode of a game ball in the ball guide passage, and (B) is a ball guide passage. It is a figure which shows the backflow aspect of the game ball in.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the game ball supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 38 in response to the operation of the handle unit 318 by the player is directed toward the launch guide path 29 by the reciprocating motion of the hitting basket 57a of the launch device 57. And injected. When the game ball is guided by the launch guide path 29 and reaches the game area 20, the game ball is inserted from the ball insertion port 28 and flows down the game area 20.

  First, as shown in FIG. 26A, the game ball ejected by the launching device 57 slides on the launch rail 38 by its urging force and radiates into the launch guide path 29 from the upper end of the launch rail 38. Is done. Here, the launch rail 38 is slightly curved upward so that the inclination gradually increases from the opening side of the pachinko machine 1 toward the shaft support side. Further, the pachinko machine is configured such that the launch rail 38 and the connection passage portion 477 are connected by the rail connection member 44 to the upper surface portion 44a of the rail connection member 44 that closes the gap between the launch rail 38 and the connection passage portion 477. 1 is provided with a gradually rising gradient from the open side to the shaft support side. A portion of the rail connection member 44 connected to the firing rail 38 is lower than the upper end portion of the firing rail 38.

  With such a structure, the game ball released from the upper end of the launch rail 38 does not contact the rail connection member 44 and the connection passage portion 477, and the inner side surface (rail surface 472a) of the outer rail 472 in the launch guide path 29. Is directly reachable. Then, the game ball that has reached the outer rail 472 flows so as to rise in the launch guide path 29 while being guided by the rail surface 472a of the outer rail 472. On the other hand, since the urging force with respect to the game ball is small, the game ball may stall before reaching the outer rail 472 and the game ball may fall onto the connection passage portion 477. In this case, the rail connection member 44 prevents the game ball from spilling downward from the gap between the connection passage portion 477 and the launch rail 38, and the game ball is returned to the launch position of the launch rail 38 as described later. It is.

  In the game effect unit 4, the gap between the outer rail 472 and the connection passage portion 477 functions as an opening (foul port 489) that can communicate with the communication port 473 and into which a game ball can drop. Then, the foul ball that has been discharged from the upper end of the firing rail 38 and flows backward into the foul port 489 enters the communication port 473 and is discharged to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 as described later.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (B), the game ball ejected by the launching device 57 stalls before reaching the game area 20 and flows backward in the launch guide path 29 (that is, flows downward). ) At this time, the game ball that flows backward in the launch guide path 29 flows downward while being guided by the rail surface 472a of the outer rail 472, and reaches the lower end 472b of the outer rail 472. From the upper end portion on the support side, it abuts on a stop wall portion 477b provided continuously (in the lower part) inside the foul port 489 and falls (falls) into the foul port 489. Then, the game ball dropped into the foul port 489 enters the communication port 473 or is guided to the communication port 473 along the stop wall portion 477b of the connection passage portion 477.

  Here, the communication port 473 is formed with a foul ball guiding path 473a which is a flow path of a game ball formed so as to penetrate the game effect unit 4 in the front-rear direction along the lower edge of the communication port 473. Yes. The foul ball guiding path 473a is inclined downward from the front to the rear of the game effect unit 4, and communicates with the foul ball inlet 1538 of the above-described ball supply path 59 on the most downstream side in the flow direction of the game ball. ing. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the communication port 473 rolls on the foul ball guiding path 473a and is led to the back side of the game effect unit 4, and further rolls in the ball supply passage 59 to store the dish unit 300. It is discharged to the part 361.

  On the other hand, when the momentum of the game ball flowing backward through the launch guide path 29 is large, the game ball may jump over the foul port 489 and reach the upper surface 477a of the connection passage portion 477. At this time, the game ball rolls further toward the opening side while being guided by the upper surface 477a of the connection passage portion 477 inclined downward toward the opening side. Then, after rolling while decelerating on the upper surface portion 44a of the rail connecting member 44 having a gentle inclination, the firing rail 38 is caused to flow backward and return to the firing position.

  In the state where the game effect unit 4 is installed in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the player opens the communication port 473 through the game window 101. Is visible. Therefore, the player can visually observe the manner in which the game ball that flows backward in the launch guide path 29 enters the communication port 473.

  By the way, conventionally, the foul mouth is provided in the main body frame below the game board, and almost all of the foul balls are collected from the foul mouth. In other words, even a foul ball that has failed to reach the outer rail is recovered from the foul mouth. Therefore, the foul ball that reaches the outer rail and is not visually recognized by the player does not know what is happening from the player side, and there is a possibility that launch adjustment may be difficult. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the foul ball on the upper surface 477a of the connection passage portion 477 is returned to the firing rail 38 side. In other words, the foul ball that has failed to reach the outer rail 472 is returned to the firing position. As a result, the time required for re-strike can be reduced, and launch adjustment is easier than before.

  Further, since the foul port 489 is provided in the game effect unit 4 (specifically, the front component member 680 described later), the game balls that run backward on the outer rail 472 can be quickly collected. In addition, the foul ball flowing down from the lower end 472 b of the outer rail 472 is dropped into the foul port 489 by the stop wall portion 477 b of the connection passage portion 477. Thereby, the game balls that run backward on the outer rail 472 can be reliably collected.

  A communication port 473 (foul ball guiding path 473a) is provided for discharging the foul ball dropped into the foul port 489 to the back side of the game effect unit 4 (specifically, a front constituent member 680 described later). As described above, the communication port 473 (foul ball guiding path 473a) is provided in the game effect unit 4 (specifically, the front constituent member 680 described later), so that the foul ball is discharged at a relatively high position. For example, it becomes easy to return the foul ball to the storage part 361 of the dish unit 300 on the front side.

  Conventionally, in a configuration having two upper and lower storage dishes on the front side, the game balls collected from the foul mouth are returned to the lower storage dish (lower dish). In this case, it is necessary for the player himself to return the foul ball of the lower plate to the upper storage plate (upper plate), and the number of foul balls increases particularly at the time of launch adjustment, which may cause a decrease in interest. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the foul balls discharged from the foul ball guiding path 473a are joined to a ball supply passage 59 that is a flow path of a prize ball discharged from the ball payout device 53. That is, the foul ball is returned to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 from which the game ball at the time of winning a prize is paid out. This eliminates the need for the player himself to return the foul ball to the upper plate, and can reduce the decrease in interest caused by the foul ball during launch adjustment.

  In particular, since the communication port 473 (foul ball guiding path 473a) is formed above the ball supply passage 59 provided in the lower part of the main body frame 3, the game effect unit 4 (details will be described later in front components) 680), the foul ball discharged to the back side is guided to the ball supply passage 59 without any delay. Thereby, the time required for the foul ball to return to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 is relatively short.

  Further, the inner rail 462 is arranged in parallel with the outer rail 472, and a launch guide path 29 reaching the ball insertion port 28 is formed. As a result, the foul sphere that does not reach the ball insertion port 28 flows downward along the launch guide path 29, so that the trajectory of the foul sphere flowing down from the lower end 472b of the outer rail 472 can be stabilized, and the connection passage portion The foul ball can be almost surely dropped into the foul mouth 489 by the stop wall portion 477b of 477.

  Here, in the present embodiment, almost the entire area of the launch guide path 29 is visible from the front side through the game window 101 (see FIG. 39). Therefore, the behavior of the foul ball that does not reach the ball insertion port 28 is known, and the launch adjustment is further facilitated. Here, conventionally, in the configuration in which the main body frame is provided with the foul port, the foul ball that does not reach the ball insertion port has been received and collected by the foul port. Therefore, if the number of foul balls increases at the time of launch adjustment, the number of game balls returned to the storage tray increases, and there is a problem that launch adjustment is difficult. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the foul sphere that has passed the foul mouth 489 to the launch guide path 29 is received by the foul mouth 489, while the foul sphere that has not passed the foul mouth 489 and has not reached the launch guide path 29 is , Returned to the launch position. That is, only the visually recognized foul sphere is received and collected by the foul mouth 489, and the foul sphere not visually recognized is returned to the firing position. In this way, even if the number of foul balls increases during launch adjustment, the number of game balls returned to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 can be relatively reduced. In addition, a foul ball that is not visually recognized can be re-shot from the launch position, so that launch adjustment is relatively easy.

  By the way, a foul port 489 is provided in the game effect unit 4 (specifically, a front component member 680 described later) adjacent to the lower end portion 472b of the outer rail 472. On the other hand, the firing rail 38 is provided in the main body frame 3. Therefore, if the launch rail 38 is made long enough to reach the game effect unit 4, the game effect unit 4 housed in the main body frame 3 (the front component member 680 that is a part of the game effect unit 4) may be interfered.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, an “alignment portion” composed of the rail connection member 44 and the connection passage portion 477 is provided. This “alignment portion” is interposed between the foul port 489 and the firing rail 38 to form a series from the outer rail 472 to the firing rail 38. If such a “matching portion” (rail connection member 44 and connection passage portion 477) is interposed, it is not necessary to lengthen the launch rail 38, and the launch rail 38 and the game effect unit 4 (the front component member 680) The problem of interference can be solved. Thereby, even if it is the structure which provides the foul port 489 in the game production | presentation unit 4 (front structural member 680), attachment of the firing rail 38 becomes easy.

  And the upper surface part of the above-mentioned "alignment part" is comprised by the inclined surface which inclines to the firing rail 38 side, and the foul ball | bowl of the said inclined surface is returned to the firing rail 38 side. That is, the foul ball is returned to the predetermined launch position by the upper surface portion of the “alignment portion”. As a result, the time required for re-strike can be reduced, and launch adjustment is easier than before.

  Here, in the configuration in which the foul ball of the “alignment portion” is returned to the firing rail 38 side, the upper surface of the end portion on the firing rail 38 side of the “alignment portion” is flush with the end rail surface of the firing rail 38. Arrangement is also possible. However, the upper surface of the end portion of the “alignment portion” may be higher than the end rail surface of the firing rail 38 due to, for example, an attachment error of the firing rail 38. If the upper surface of the end portion of the “alignment portion” becomes slightly high, the launched game ball comes into contact with the “alignment portion”. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the upper end surface of the upper surface portion of the “alignment portion” that is close to the firing rail 38 side is disposed below the end rail surface of the firing rail 38. Even if there is a mounting error, the upper surface of the end portion of the “alignment portion” does not become higher than the end rail surface of the firing rail 38. That is, the launched game ball is prevented from coming into contact with the rail connection member 44.

  In addition, since the above-mentioned “matching portion” includes the connection passage portion 477 (corresponding to the guide portion) of the game effect unit 4 and the rail connection member 44 (corresponding to the step portion) of the main body frame 3, the game effect unit 4 is In the configuration accommodated in the main body frame 3, it is only necessary to consider the alignment between the connection passage portion 477 and the rail connection member 44, and interference of the rail portions (the launch rail 38 and the outer rail 472) can be avoided. In particular, since the rail connection member 44 is integrally formed on the front surface portion of the main body frame 3, unlike the structure in which the rail connection member 44 is mounted separately, no mounting error of the rail connection member 44 itself occurs. Yes. Further, the firing rail 38 is attached to the main body frame 3 so as to maintain a predetermined positional relationship with the rail connection member 44. Since the rail connection member 44 is integrally formed on the front surface portion of the main body frame 3 as described above, the firing rail 38 can be appropriately attached to the main body frame 3.

  Further, in the configuration in which the foul ball of the above-mentioned “matching portion” is returned to the rail connection member 44 side, the upper end surface of the connection passage portion 477 on the rail connection member 44 side is flush with the upper end surface of the rail connection member 44. It is also possible to arrange it above. However, the upper surface of the end of the rail connection member 44 may be higher than the upper surface of the end of the connection passage portion 477 due to, for example, an accommodation error of the game effect unit 4. And if the end part upper surface of the rail connection member 44 becomes high, it will become difficult to return a foul ball | bowl from the connection channel | path part 477 to the firing rail 38 side. In this regard, in this embodiment, in a state where the game effect unit 4 is housed in the main body frame 3, the upper end surface of the upper surface portion of the rail connection member 44 that is close to the connection passage portion 477 side is the connection passage portion 477. It is arrange | positioned below the edge part upper surface of the upper surface part. Thereby, for example, even if there is an accommodation error of the game effect unit 4, the upper end surface of the rail connection member 44 does not become higher than the upper end surface of the connection passage portion 477. The foul ball quickly returns to the firing position via the rail connection member 44.

  By the way, in recent years, game areas tend to be expanded with the increase in size of liquid crystal displays and the like. Accordingly, the guide path of the game ball from the launcher to the ball slot in the game area is also long. This guide path is composed of a rail member. However, if the rail member becomes longer, the frictional force received from the rail member becomes larger, and the disturbance factor becomes larger. There is.

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, a connection passage portion 477 that forms a foul port 489 is provided between the lower end portion 472 b of the outer rail 472. Furthermore, a rail connection member 44 interposed between the connection passage portion 477 and the firing rail 38 is provided in the main body frame 3. Then, the game ball launched from the launch position and guided to the launch rail 38 directly reaches the outer rail 472 through the connection passage portion 477 and the rail connection member 44. That is, it is guided to the ball slot 28 only by the launch rail 38 and the outer rail 472. By providing such a rail connection member 44, the launch rail 38 can be further shortened, the frictional force generated in the game ball can be further suppressed, and the disturbance factor is also relatively small, so that the ball Flying can be stabilized.

  And the upper surface part 44a of the rail connection member 44 is also comprised by the inclined surface inclined to the firing rail 38 side, and the foul ball | bowl of the said inclined surface is returned to the firing rail 38 side. That is, the foul ball is returned to the predetermined launch position by the upper surface portion 44a of the rail connection member 44. As a result, the time required for re-strike can be reduced, and launch adjustment is easier than before.

  By the way, the foul port 489 is formed not in the main body frame 3 side but in the game effect unit 4, so that the main body frame 3 can be prevented from being damaged or broken due to the discharge of the foul ball. Even if the game effect unit 4 is damaged or broken due to the discharge of the foul ball, the foul ball can be appropriately discharged by replacing only the game effect unit 4, so the pachinko machine 1 or the game There is an advantage that recycling and maintenance of the production unit 4 is easy.

  Further, as described above, both the foul ball and the prize ball are discharged to the storage unit 361 of the common dish unit 300 through the ball supply passage 59 which is one path. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide a return path for foul balls and a payout path for prize balls as in the prior art, and the structure of the main body frame 3 is simplified. And since the discharge path of the foul ball and prize ball provided in the main body frame 3 is made common, it is possible to secure the game effect unit installation recess 30 as a large accommodation space without narrowing the game effect unit installation recess 30. Is possible.

<Game production unit installation recess>
Next, the configuration of the game effect unit installation recess 30 will be further described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. As shown in FIG. 16, the game effect unit installation recess 30 has a front-facing saddle face portion that does not accommodate the game effect unit 4 in a part of the upper side and the open side, Although nothing is formed, door hook holes 352 through which the door frame hook portion 973 of the locking device 60 penetrates are formed in the upper side, the lower, and the lower three portions on the open side. That is, the locking device 60 is fixed to the back surface of the open side flange portion (see FIG. 4).

  Thus, as described above, the game effect unit installation recess 30 includes the first peripheral wall 290, the second peripheral wall 291, the third peripheral wall 292, and the fourth peripheral wall 293, so that the left and right sides of the main body frame 3 It is formed in a concave shape in which the rear part of the side and the upper side is surrounded. Here, the first circumferential surface wall 290 surrounds the game effect unit installation concave portion 30 from the inner side surface on the pivot support side, the upper side surface portion, the open side surface portion and the lower side surface toward the rear side. It is arranged so that. The second peripheral wall 291 extends rearward from the first peripheral wall 290, the third peripheral wall 292 extends rearward from the second peripheral wall 291, and the fourth peripheral wall 293 is the first peripheral wall 293. The three circumferential walls 292 are extended rearward. Thus, the main body frame 3 is integrally formed in a square cylinder shape. However, only the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291 are extended from the inner surface of the lower side portion, and the substrate unit 54 is disposed in the vicinity of the rear of the second peripheral wall 291. .

  The first peripheral wall 290 to the fourth peripheral wall 293 are formed to extend straight from the upper side (main body frame upper wall part) and the side on the pivotal support side (second main body frame side wall part) to the rear with a step. On the other hand, the side on the open side (first body frame side wall) is formed in a stepped shape (see FIG. 5) that inclines inwardly from the first peripheral wall 290 toward the fourth peripheral wall 293. Has been. In addition, the inwardly inclined shape from the first peripheral wall 290 on the open side toward the fourth peripheral wall 293 is such that the main frame 3 can be opened smoothly when the main frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. It is to make it. That is, when the first peripheral wall 290 to the fourth peripheral wall 293 on the open side are formed to extend straight rearward, the fourth peripheral wall 293 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. In order to avoid this, there is a possibility that the rearmost end portion of the frame abuts against the inner surface of the side frame plate of the outer frame 2 and cannot be opened smoothly. The locking device 60 is attached along the first circumferential wall 290 on the open side. The locking device 60 is attached using a lock mounting hole (not shown) provided in the rear end side of the first circumferential wall 290. Therefore, in order to form the lock mounting hole (not shown), it is preferable to form the fourth peripheral wall 293 from the first peripheral wall 290 on the open side in an inclined step shape. Furthermore, since the inner peripheral surface of the first peripheral wall 290 and the outer peripheral surface of the game effect unit 4 need to be brought into contact with each other, the step between the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291 is formed with a somewhat large step. However, the dimension of the step between the second peripheral wall 291 to the fourth peripheral wall 293 is a very small step.

  However, if the first main body frame side wall is unnecessarily large and inclined toward the fourth peripheral wall 293 from the first peripheral wall 290 on the open side, the volume of the game effect unit installation recess 30 described above In particular, it is difficult to secure a distance of approximately 44 cm as the maximum lateral width L3 on the back side. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the part on which the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported with respect to the front side of the outer frame 2 is an opening / closing axis O, the first main body frame side wall portion has the opening / closing axis O. The center point is provided so as to extend rearward while being bent stepwise along the virtual circular arc C drawn on the horizontal plane (see FIG. 5). That is, in this case, the first main body frame side wall is inclined inward toward the inside by a minimum width so as not to adversely affect the opening operation of the main body frame 3 by colliding with the outer frame 2. As a result, it is possible to secure a distance of approximately 44 cm as the volume of the game effect unit installation recess 30, particularly the maximum lateral width L 3 on the back side.

  In addition, since the first main body frame side wall portion is provided so as to extend rearward while being bent stepwise, the strength of the main body frame 3 as a constituent component is simpler than the case where the first main body frame side wall portion is simply formed linearly in the inner direction. Can be suitably secured. Moreover, each of the second main body frame side wall and the main body frame upper wall formed integrally with the first main body frame side wall also has its own meat each time the first main body frame side wall is bent. Since it is provided to extend backward while being bent inward by the thickness, the strength as the thin peripheral wall 290 to 293 can be efficiently secured. Further, since the second main body frame side wall portion and the main body frame upper wall portion are bent inward only by their substantially wall thickness, the game effect unit installation concave portion 30 becomes uselessly small. There is no end to it.

  In this embodiment, the first main body frame side wall is approximately 0.98 times the distance L11 (see FIG. 49) from the axis of the opening / closing axis O to the front surface of the side frame plate 13. It is provided so as to extend rearward while being bent stepwise along a circular arc of a virtual circle having a radial distance. However, as will be described later, in this embodiment, a thickness portion 13b having a thickness of approximately 19 mm is formed at the rear end portion of the side frame plate 13. For this reason, when the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the first main body frame side wall portion particularly has a rear end portion (thickness portion 13 b) more than the front end portion of the outer frame 2. Colliding with each other can adversely affect its opening action. Therefore, in this embodiment, for the first main body frame side wall, the radial distance is approximately 0.99 times the distance L12 (see FIG. 49) from the axis of the opening / closing axis O to the thickness part 13b. It is provided so as to extend backward while being bent stepwise along the arc of the virtual circle. As described above, the first main body extends along the arc of the virtual circle having a radial distance sufficient to increase the magnification with respect to the distance from the axial point of the opening / closing axis O to the rear end portion of the side frame plate 13. By providing the frame side wall portion, it is possible to secure a distance of approximately 44 cm as the volume of the game effect unit installation recess 30, particularly the maximum lateral width L 3 on the back side, compared to the case where the radial distance is adjusted to the conventional front end portion. It becomes like this. That is, in other words, the gaming effect unit installation recess 30 is provided by providing the thick portion 13b having a thickness of approximately 19 mm not at the front end portion of the side frame plate 13 but at the rear end portion thereof. It is possible to secure a distance of approximately 44 cm as the maximum lateral width L3 on the inner side, particularly the rear side.

  The peripheral walls 290 to 293 are formed to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4, respectively, as shown in FIG. 15, and in this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 135 mm. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first peripheral wall 290 corresponds to a thickness that can cover the side portion of the game panel 409, and is formed by the remaining second peripheral wall 291, third peripheral wall 292, and fourth peripheral wall 293. The rearward protruding portions of various game devices as the game effect unit 4 are stored in the space to be played. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, as described below, the second peripheral wall 291, the third peripheral wall 292, and the fourth peripheral wall 293 are formed up to a position corresponding to the outer periphery of the game panel 409. The size of the space is secured. Thereby, for example, even when an effect display device 115 or the like that occupies most of the game panel 409 as a game board is attached, the display device control board box 119 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 115. The rearward projecting portion (see FIG. 13 and the like) can be easily stored. In addition, the peripheral wall 290-293 concerning this embodiment is formed so that it may extend from the rear surface of the said outer frame 2 to about 63 mm back.

  Further, from the rear end side of the fourth peripheral wall 293, specifically, from the open side, the upper side, and the side of the shaft support side, the open side rear wall 294, the upper rear wall 295, and the shaft support side rear wall 296 are respectively provided. It extends toward the inside. The “open side rear wall 294, the upper rear wall 295, and / or the pivot support side rear wall 296” corresponds to the “rear wall portion” of the present invention.

  The shaft support side rear wall 296 has a flat front surface, and the ball passage unit 52 and the ball dispensing device 53 are detachably attached to the rear surface along the shaft support side rear wall 296. ing. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the shaft support side rear wall 296 to be wide enough to attach the ball passage unit 52 and the ball dispensing device 53.

  The upper rear wall 295 has a flat front surface, and the tank rail member 51 is attached to the rear surface. The tank rail member 51 is inclined so that a game ball can flow down, and the lower end side of the upper rear wall 295 is formed in an inclined shape along the tank rail member 51. Therefore, it is sufficient for the width of the protrusion to the inside of the upper rear wall 295 to be the height width of the tank rail member 51 attached in an inclined manner.

  Further, the open-side rear wall 294 has a flat front surface, and a rear cover support cylinder portion (attachment member) 280 that pivotally supports the rear cover 58 is formed on the rear surface. Accordingly, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the open-side rear wall 294 to have a width dimension that forms the back cover support cylinder 280.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the open-side rear wall 294, the upper rear wall 295, and the shaft-supporting rear wall 296 that project inward from the rear end side of the fourth peripheral wall 293 are formed in a flat plate shape. . In addition, as described above, the size of the space formed by the second peripheral wall 291, the third peripheral wall 292, and the fourth peripheral wall 293 is secured up to a position corresponding to the outer periphery of the game panel 409. Therefore, for example, even when the effect display device 115 or the like occupying most of the game panel 409 as a game board is attached, the display device control board box 119 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 115 is used. The rear protruding portion can be easily stored. Note that the insides of the open-side rear wall 294, the upper rear wall 295, and the pivot support-side rear wall 296 constitute a rear opening 70, and the rear opening 70 is closed by a back cover 58 (see FIG. 4) so as to be opened and closed. It has become so.

<Board unit>
Next, the board unit 54 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the back side. FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the front side.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the substrate unit 54 is attached to a plurality of attachment holes 207 (see FIG. 18) formed in the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3, and a substrate tray 64 formed of synthetic resin. In addition, various boards such as a door relay board 68, a power board board 62, a terminal board box 56, a payout control board box 55, a main drawer relay board 648, and a sub drawer relay board 649 are attached. Among the above boards, the door relay board 68, the power board box 62, the terminal board box 56, and the payout control board box 55 are attached to the rear side of the board tray 64 in the front-rear direction, and are attached to the main drawer relay board 648. The auxiliary drawer relay board 649 is attached to the front side in the board tray 64. A shield plate is attached to the rear surface of the payout control board box 55 to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board or the like, and the main drawer relay board 648 and the sub drawer relay board 649 are attached to the board cover 641. Covered and attached.

  First, the substrate tray 64 is formed in a horizontally long synthetic resin, and a wiring opening 642 is formed on one side of the rear surface side thereof. A recess is formed. At both the left and right sides and the lower side of the substrate tray 64, mounting pieces 643 for mounting the substrate unit 54 to the main body frame 3 are projected outward, and the mounting pieces 643 are attached to the mounting holes 207 (see FIG. 18), the board unit 54 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. A wiring hooking piece 644 for locking the wiring is formed outside the side wall on the other end side of the substrate tray 64.

  Further, an out-sphere passage 645 is formed in an inverted L shape substantially at the center of the front side of the substrate tray 64. The out ball passage 645 is formed broadly so as to correspond to the above-described out port 471, the downstream side of the ball removal connection passage 415, and the drop port (not shown), and the downstream side discharges the game balls in a row. It is formed so as to be narrow. Therefore, when the substrate unit 54 is attached to the main body frame 3, the wide upstream portion of the out ball passage 645 is positioned behind the passage support protrusion (not shown) that supports the lower surface of the out port 471. Then, an out ball, a winning ball, or a ball ball is discharged from the downstream end of the out ball passage 645 toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (generally, an island recovery basket).

  Next, the main drawer relay board 648 and the sub drawer relay board 649 attached to the front side of the board tray 64 will be described.

  Here, the main drawer relay board 648 is provided with a frame side main drawer connector 2000b and a payout control board connector 2010 on the top and bottom. Among these, the frame side main drawer connector 2000b is connected to the unit side main drawer connector 2000a (see FIG. 13) attached to the back side of the game effect control unit 99, whereby the main control device (main control board 710). , See FIG. 84). That is, the main control device according to this embodiment (main control board 710, see FIG. 84) is supplied with power via the payout control device (payout control board 720, see FIG. 84) on the main body frame 3 side. The frame-side main drawer connector 2000b is electrically connected to the payout control board connector 2010 by an in-board wiring (not shown) of the main drawer relay board 648. Then, the payout control board connector 2010 is connected to an internal connection terminal (not shown) of the payout control board (the payout control board 720, see FIG. 84) by a wire harness (not shown). The power supply line for the control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 84) is formed. In this embodiment, the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the payout control board connector 2010 include the main control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 84) and the payout control device (payout control board 720, FIG. 84)).

  On the other hand, the sub drawer relay board 649 is provided with a frame side sub drawer connector 2002b and a door frame connector 2012 on the top and bottom. Among these, the frame side auxiliary drawer connector 2002b is connected to the unit side auxiliary drawer connector 2002a (see FIG. 13) attached to the back side of the game effect control unit 99, so that the effect control device (peripheral control board 810, This is a portion for forming an information transmission / reception line for a frame decoration relay terminal board 240 described later (see FIG. 85). In other words, the frame side sub drawer connector 2002b is electrically connected to the door frame connector 2012 via the in-board wiring (not shown) of the sub drawer relay board 649, and the door frame connector 2012 is connected to the door frame connector 2012. By connecting to the frame decoration relay terminal board 240 with a wire harness (not shown), an information transmission / reception line to the frame decoration relay terminal board 240 described later of the effect control device (peripheral control board 810, see FIG. 85) is formed. Will be. As a result, the production control device can control the driving of the speakers 144a and 144b, the operation buttons 327, the frame decoration lamp 842, and the like through the frame decoration relay terminal plate 240.

  Although the configuration of the board unit 54 has been described above, in the case of the present embodiment, among various boards necessary for driving and controlling the pachinko machine 1, the board unit 54 is replaced with a change in the game effect unit 4. Door relay board 68 which is a board other than the game control board and display device control board, power board 395 (see FIG. 84) housed in power board box 62, and external terminal board 753 (see FIG. 84) housed in terminal board box 56. The payout control board 720 (see FIG. 84) housed in the payout control board box 55 is assembled into the board tray 64 in advance to form a unit. Then, by simply attaching the unitized substrate unit 54 to the lower part on the back side of the main body frame 3, the work efficiency can be improved as compared with various types of board attaching work that has been separately attached to the back side of the main body frame 3 in the past. Can be improved. Further, in this case, since the wiring between the boards unitized in the board unit 54 can be accommodated in the board tray 64, the wiring connecting the boards is not messed up and disturbed and laid in order. Can do.

  In the present embodiment, the main drawer relay board 648 having the frame side main drawer connector 2000b and the sub drawer relay board 649 having the frame side sub drawer connector 2002b are provided on the front surface of the board unit 54. Then, when the game effect unit 4 (specifically, the game effect control unit 99) is mounted on the main body frame 3 from the front side, the unit side main of the unit relay board 625 provided on the back side of the game effect control unit 99 is provided. The drawer connector 2000a and the unit side sub drawer connector 2002a are connected to the corresponding frame side main drawer connector 2000b and frame side sub drawer connector 2002b, respectively. Therefore, the mounting of the game effect control unit 99 and the connection between the boards can be performed at the same time, and the replacement work of the game effect control unit 99 can be performed efficiently.

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 16, the game panel 409 includes one game including the main control device (game control device). The effect control unit 99 is configured to be accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3 from the front receiving port 30a. In this respect, in this pachinko machine 1, in this embodiment, first, the box-shaped substrate holder (peripheral control substrate box 24, main control substrate box 25, display device control substrate box 119, etc.) is provided. When the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30, at least one inner wall of the pair of main body frame side wall portions and the main body frame upper wall portion (inner wall of the peripheral wall 290 to 293) To be in contact with a part of

  Then, as shown in FIG. 53, a flange portion FG is formed on the periphery of the substrate holder, and a screw hole (not shown) provided at the outer peripheral edge of the rear surface of the panel holder 540 is formed. The board holder is attached to the large game board member provided with the game panel 409 by screwing the flange portion FG in between. Furthermore, when the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30, a power line for the main control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 84) is connected to the game on the main body frame 3 side. The main drawer connector (unit side) shared with the information transfer line with the payout control device via the payout control device (the payout control board 720, see FIG. 84) attached below the effect unit installation recess 30. The main control device (game control device) and the payout control device are electrically connected by the main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b). Further, of the main drawer connectors, the unit side main drawer connector 2000a provided on the game effect control unit 99 side is fixed so as to face rearward at a position where the flange portion FG on the lower peripheral edge of the substrate holder is provided. The frame-side main drawer connector 2000b provided on the main body frame 3 side of the main drawer connector is fixedly arranged so as to face the front at the lowermost part of the game effect unit installation recess 30. Yes.

  In such a configuration, due to the contact between the substrate holder and the inner wall of the main body frame 3, the game effect control unit 99 is properly accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30 while being guided to its accommodation location. It becomes like this. Then, the power supply line for the main control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 84) is connected to the payout control device via the payout control device (payout control board 720, see FIG. 84) on the main body frame 3 side. In securing the main drawer connector 2000a shared by the information transfer line with the apparatus (unit side main drawer connector 2000a and frame side main drawer connector 2000b), the lower peripheral edge of the substrate holder The frame side main drawer connector 2000b is fixedly arranged so as to face the front at the lowermost part of the game effect unit installation recess 30 at the place where the flange portion FG is provided. It was. Therefore, the unit-side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame-side main drawer connector 2000b are automatically connected only by housing the game effect control unit 99 in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3. Thus, after the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30, the power line to the main control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 84) is connected by an appropriate connector, etc. It becomes possible to omit manual work.

  In addition, in the above configuration, the flange portion FG that is screwed to the periphery of the box-shaped substrate holder and the mounting hole 540j (see FIG. 58) that is a screw hole provided on the rear surface of the panel holder 540. And the unit side main drawer connector 2000a is provided at a place where the flange portion FG is formed. That is, as described above, a structure is provided in which a box-like back unit 510 having a predetermined depth is attached to a large-sized game board member (game board portion) having a transparent board-like game panel 409 so as to produce a light emission effect from behind. The adopted game effect control unit 99 requires a space in which various control boards are arranged in the depth direction. In this regard, in the above configuration, since the unit side main drawer connector 2000a is provided in the flange portion FG of the substrate holder, the connector 2000a can be disposed in a compact manner, and the various control boards are disposed. Even if a design change occurs in the space in the depth direction, it is not necessary to change the position of the unit side main drawer connector 2000a provided in the flange portion FG, and consequently the position of the frame side main drawer connector 2000b. Is also suitably maintained.

  For convenience of explanation, although not shown in the drawings, in this embodiment, a wire harness (not shown) provided so that the unit side main drawer connector 2000a enters the board holder from the flange part FG. And a drawer connector (not shown) in the holder that is connected to the main control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 84) as a free end on the opposite side of the wire harness. Therefore, even if the arrangement and design of the main control device are changed, the position of the unit side main drawer connector 2000a provided in the flange portion FG can be suitably maintained. Still further, the main control device (see the main control board 710, FIG. 84) and the payout control are connected to the wire harness provided so as to enter the board holder from the flange portion FG. As shown in FIG. 53, the signal line (wire harness) used for exchanging information with the apparatus (payout control board 720, see FIG. 84) is connected to the board holder (peripheral control board box 24, main control). It is possible to suitably protect against fraud in the board box 25).

  In this embodiment, the outer peripheral edge of the rear surface of the panel holder 540 is provided with a plurality of screw holes (mounting holes 540j) more than necessary for mounting the substrate holder in advance. Thereby, even if a change occurs in the design on the board holder side, the configuration of the large game board member (game board part) can be suitably maintained.

  On the other hand, on the main body frame 3 side, as shown in FIG. 28 together with FIG. 16, only the upper portion of the main frame frame connector 2000b where the main frame drawer connector 2000b is fixed is arranged. A main drawer relay board 648 is provided so as to protrude from the lower part of the back surface (the lower part of the main body frame 3) to the game effect unit installation recess (large accommodation space) 30. The position where the frame side main drawer connector 2000b is fixedly arranged is the position where the unit side main drawer connector 2000a is positioned when the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30. Yes. The frame-side main drawer connector 2000b and the in-board wiring (not shown) are provided on the lower side of the main drawer relay board 648 on the same surface as the frame-side main drawer connector 2000b. Since the electrically connected dispensing control board (main drawer connector in frame) connector 2010 is fixedly arranged, the arrangement and design of the dispensing control device (dispensing control board 720, see FIG. 84) have changed. However, the position of the frame side main drawer connector 2000b can be suitably maintained. Furthermore, since the payout control board connector 2010 is fixedly disposed between the main drawer relay board 648 and the lower back of the main body frame 3, the main control device and the payout control device A signal line (wire harness) used for information exchange between the main drawer relay board 648 and the lower part of the main body frame 3 can be suitably protected from fraudulent acts. become.

  Incidentally, the structure and the mounting position of such a unit side main drawer connector 2000a can be applied to the unit side sub drawer connector 2002a. That is, the unit-side auxiliary drawer connector 2002a is also fixedly disposed so as to face rearward at a location where the flange portion FG is provided on the lower periphery of the substrate holder, and enters the substrate holder from the flange portion FG. Is connected to a wire harness (not shown). In addition, on the opposite side of this wire harness, a drawer connector (not shown) in the holder that is a free end and is connected to the effect control device is formed.

  Similarly, in the sub-drawer relay board 649, only the upper part of the sub-drawer relay board 649 where the frame-side sub drawer connector 2002b is fixedly arranged is the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame 3 (the lower side of the main body frame 3 The game effect unit installation recess (large accommodation space) 30 protrudes from the portion). The position where the frame side auxiliary drawer connector 2002b is fixedly arranged is the position where the unit side auxiliary drawer connector 2002a is located when the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30. ing.

<Drawer connector>
Next, a drawer connector used for electrical connection between the main body frame 3 and the game effect control unit 99 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a main drawer connector and a sub drawer connector.

  As described above, unit side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a are provided on the game effect control unit 99 side, and frame side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b are provided on the main body frame 3 side. A pair of drawer connectors composed of the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are the main drawer connector 2000. A pair of drawer connectors constituted by the unit side sub drawer connector 2002a and the frame side sub drawer connector 2002b is the sub drawer connector 2002.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (a), the game effect control unit 99 side is electrically connected by inserting unit side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a into the frame side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b on the main body frame 3 side. can do. The unit-side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a include terminals 2001a and 2003a as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 29C, the frame-side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b include contacts 2001b and 2003b. When the unit side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a are inserted into the frame side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b, as shown in FIG. 29C, the terminals 2001a and 2003a push down the contacts 2001b and 2003b, and the contacts 2001b and 2003b are displaced. To do. The repulsive force of the contacts 2001b and 2003b generated by this displacement is brought into an electrically conductive state by strongly contacting the terminals 2001a and 2003a.

  As a result, the main drawer connector 2000 and the sub drawer connector 2002 are formed with control signal lines for transmitting various control signals between the various control boards (for example, by the main control board 710 and the payout control board 720). Further, the main drawer connector 2000 and the sub drawer connector 2002 are further formed with voltage supply lines for supplying various voltages created by the power supply board 395. As described above, by attaching the game effect unit 4 to the main body frame 3 in a detachable manner, the unit side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a and the frame side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b (that is, the main drawer connector 2000 and the sub drawer connector 2002). The control signal line and the voltage supply line can be connected freely.

  In this embodiment, the terminals 2001a and 2003a and the contacts 2001b and 2003b are of the bellows type. In the case of the pin type, there is a possibility that the pin may be inadvertently touched and bent during the work, but in the case of the bellows type, there is no such risk. Moreover, gold plating with a small friction coefficient is adopted for plating of the terminals 2001a and 2003a and the contacts 2001b and 2003b. Thereby, the sliding goodness (goodness of fitting) at the time of attachment and detachment of the game production unit 4 is ensured.

  Here, when the game effect unit 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, if the operation is performed with the power switch turned on, the contact between the terminal 2001a and the contact 2001b, specifically, for various voltage supply lines Since a large current (an inrush current described later) flows at the contact, welding occurs. If the game effect unit 4 is forcibly pushed into and attached to the main body frame 3 in this welded state, the contact 2001b is bent or broken, or when the game effect unit 4 is removed from the main body frame 3, the contact 2001b The drawer connector 2000a cannot be used because it is peeled off and damaged from the drawer connector 2000a.

  In addition, when the terminal 2001a and the contact 2001b are welded, various control boards may malfunction or electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged due to breakage of the connector. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a circuit for preventing welding (hot line failure prevention circuit 2100) is provided on the main control board 710, which will be described in detail later.

<Locking device>
Next, the locking device 60 attached in the vertical direction along the back side edge of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 30 to 38. FIG. 30 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the locking device and the main body frame. FIG. 31 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing a structure for latching the locking device to the main body frame. FIG. 32 is a partial cross-sectional view cut in the horizontal direction at a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction of the pachinko machine. FIG. 33 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a detailed relationship between the locking device and the first peripheral wall and the second peripheral wall of the main body frame. FIG. 34 is a side view (A) of the locking device, and a perspective view (B) viewed from the front side. FIG. 35 is a perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the locking device, and a perspective view of a sliding frame for a door frame and a sliding frame for a body frame that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device. (B), (C). FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device. FIG. 37 is a front view for explaining the operation of the door frame sliding rod and the main body frame sliding rod. FIG. 38 is a front view for explaining the operation of the fraud prevention member.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the locking device 60 is attached from the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the first peripheral wall 290 on the open side of the main body frame 3, and has a U-shaped base 685. . The U-shaped base 685 includes a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) locks formed in the middle and middle of the upper and lower ends between the outer peripheral side of the main body frame 3 and the rising portion of the first peripheral wall 290. A locking hole 351, a lock mounting hole 350 formed by being cut out in the upper part and middle of the vertical surface of the first peripheral wall 290, and a lock mounting hole 353 formed in the vicinity of the upper part of the cylinder lock through hole 354 , Supported and fixed by. Hereinafter, the structure of the locking device 60 will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 to 37, the locking device 60 includes a U-shaped base 685 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 685. The sliding frame 971, the body frame sliding rod 984 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 685, and the body frame sliding rod 984 cannot be slid. Fraud prevention members 882 and 890 attached to the lower portion of the U-shaped base 685.

  The U-shaped base 685 is formed by bending a metal so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and slidably providing a door frame sliding rod 971 and a body frame sliding rod 984 therein. The width dimension is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device integrated on an L-shaped base. This is to increase the space surrounded by the peripheral walls 290 to 293 of the main body frame 3 by increasing the size of the game effect unit 4 in the left-right direction and the vertical direction. That is, in order to increase the size of the game effect unit 4 in the left-right direction and the vertical direction, it is necessary to extremely reduce the dimension between the first peripheral wall 290 and the outer periphery of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the width of the locking device 60 according to this embodiment is formed to be small so that the locking device 60 can be attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base 685 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the locking device 60 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. The sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 have a tamper-proof structure in which the U-shaped base 685 is completely covered except for the hook portions 973, 988, and 1014. That is, since the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are accommodated in the U-shaped base 685, the door frame 5 can be opened even when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. The sliding rod 971 and the main body frame sliding rod 984 cannot be directly touched. This makes it possible to provide a highly secure pachinko machine.

  The U-shaped base 685 is provided with rectangular hook penetration openings 860 through which the hook portions 988 and 1014 of the main body frame sliding rod 984 are penetrated on the upper and lower sides opposite to the open side. Further, a screw fixing portion 861 is projected in the horizontal direction on the upper side and the middle of the side surface 685b (see FIG. 36) which is opposite to the open side and is in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290. Furthermore, locking protrusions 862 are formed to project from the upper and middle portions of the side surface 685a (see FIG. 36) that are not in close contact with the first circumferential wall 290 on the open side, and the lower ends of the both side surfaces 685a and 685b on the open side. ing. Screw fixing portions 861 and locking protrusions 862 are for attaching the locking device 60 to the back surface of the main body frame 3. When the locking projection 862 is inserted into the lock locking hole 351 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward (see FIG. 31), the screw fixing portion 861 and the lock mounting hole 350 match in this state. The locking device 60 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown). Note that the locking device 60 is attached not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 861 but also in the vicinity of a screw fixing hole 898 formed in a lock mounting piece 866 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 354 above. The lower part of the locking device 60 can also be attached by fixing the lock attaching hole 353 to be fixed with a screw (not shown).

  That is, in this embodiment, the predetermined portion of the portion (first peripheral wall 290) disposed opposite to the inner wall of the outer wall portion 12a (see FIG. 10) described later in the first main body frame side wall portion includes the above-described portion. An insertion hole 290a (see FIG. 30) into which a screw stopper 861 as an attachment member of the locking device 60 provided between the outer wall 12a and the inner wall is inserted is formed. Of the thin wall exposed by forming the insertion hole 290a in the first peripheral wall 290, the portion screwed with a screw (screw) (not shown) is thicker than 3 mm. In this thick portion, a lock mounting hole 350 is formed in the front-rear direction in advance. Accordingly, in the state where the screw fixing portion 861 is inserted into the insertion hole 290a of the first peripheral wall 290, a screw is screwed from the screw fixing portion 861 to the lock mounting hole 350. In this embodiment, the locking device 60 is attached to the first peripheral wall 290 with a screw having a diameter of approximately 3 mm including the peak and a length of approximately 12 mm.

  Further, at the time of the mounting, the locking projections 862 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 685 are inserted into the locking holes 351 to be positioned and locked. Thereafter, screw fixing portions 861 formed at two positions on the upper side opposite to the opening side (rear portion) of the U-shaped substrate 685 and screw fixing formed on the opening side (front portion) of the U-shaped substrate 685. The hole 898 is fixed to the lock mounting hole 350 with screws. Therefore, the front portion of the locking device 60 is locked by the locking projection 862 and the lock locking hole 351, the rear portion of the locking device 60 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 861 and the lock mounting hole 350, and the locking device 60 Is fixed by the screw fixing hole 898 and the lock mounting hole 353, the locking device 60 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure. In other words, even when the locking device 60 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base 685 having a very small width, the locking device 60 is fixed to the main body by locking and fixing the front portion and the rear portion of the locking device 60. It can be firmly fixed to the frame 3. In particular, in the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 862 constituting the locking structure (or a fixed structure) at the front portion is formed so as to protrude from the side surface 685a that is not in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 of the U-shaped base 685. The screw fixing portion 861 and the screw fixing hole 898 constituting the fixing structure of the rear portion are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 of the U-shaped base 685. Therefore, the locking device 60 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front portion is formed on the side surface 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290.

  In addition, insertion holes 863 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower sides of both side surfaces 685a and 685b of the U-shaped base 685. Then, by inserting the rivet 864 into the insertion hole 863 and crimping the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 in the U-shaped substrate 685, the inside of the U-shaped substrate 685. The door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 can be slidably attached. In other words, one rivet slot 974 is formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the door frame sliding rod 971, and one is formed on each of the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986 of the body frame sliding rod 984. By passing the rivet 864 through the rivet slots 989 and 996, the door frame sliding rod 971 can be moved upward, and the body frame sliding rod 984 can be moved downward. ing. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 35 (B), the rivet 864 penetrates the lower end of the rivet slot 989, 996 of the main body frame sliding rod 984, and as shown in FIG. A rivet 864 passes through the upper end of the rivet slot 974 of the sliding rod 971.

  Further, a tamper-proof notch 865 is formed in the lower part of the U-shaped base 685 on the side opposite to the open side. Further, a lock attaching piece 866 for attaching the cylinder lock 868 is provided projecting toward the side at the front end portion of the side face 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 of the main body frame 3 on the open side. Further, an insertion vertical opening 878, a spring locking piece 879, and a relief lateral hole 880 are formed on the side surface 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290, respectively. The fraud prevention notch 865 is configured such that a stopper piece 885 of a first fraud prevention member 882 described later moves forward and backward, which will be described later. In addition, the lock attachment piece 866 is provided on the side surface 685b of the U-shaped base 685 so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game effect unit installation recess 30 in a state where the lock device 60 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. It protrudes from the front end toward the side. The lock attachment piece 866 has a lock insertion hole 867 through which the cylinder lock 868 passes, and two attachment holes 871 for attaching the cylinder lock 868 with screws 870. Screw fixing holes 898 for attaching the lower part of the device 60 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed. The insertion vertical opening 878 is an opening through which the first engagement protrusion 874 and the second engagement protrusion 875 of the engagement cam 873 fixed to the cylinder lock 868 enter when the cylinder lock 868 rotates. The spring locking piece 879 is for locking the spring 894 provided on the tamper-proof members 882 and 890, and the clearance lateral hole 880 constitutes a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 893. It is. This point will be described later.

  Next, the cylinder lock 868 attached to the above-described lock attachment piece 866 will be described. The cylinder lock 868 has a cylindrical cylinder lock body fixed to the front of the lock mounting substrate 869, and a lock shaft 872 of the cylinder lock body protrudes from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 869. The engagement cam 873 is fixed by screws 876. The cylinder lock 868 can be locked and unlocked from the front side of the door frame 5 by the cylindrical portion passing through the door frame 5 (see FIGS. 2, 3, 14 and the like). Further, the cylinder lock 868 is disposed on the lower end side of the game effect unit 4 (more specifically, below the dish unit 300).

  The engagement cam 873 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement protrusion 874 that engages with the downward engagement hole 997 of the body frame sliding rod 984 when rotating, and the other end. The side is a second engagement protrusion 875 that engages with the ascending engagement hole 979 of the door frame sliding rod 971 when rotating. The cylinder lock 868 configured as described above has a mounting hole (not indicated) and a lock formed in two places on the lock mounting substrate 869 by inserting the cylindrical cylinder lock body portion into the lock insertion hole 867. The U-shaped base 685 can be fixed by aligning the mounting hole 871 of the mounting piece 866 with the screw 870 and screwing it.

  Next, fraud prevention members 882 and 890 attached to the U-shaped base 685 will be described with reference to FIG. The fraud prevention members 882 and 890 are for preventing the body frame sliding rod 984 from being lowered illegally by, for example, a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 868 with an official key. . Accordingly, the tamper-proof members 882 and 890 have a structure in which the first tamper-proof member 882 and the second tamper-proof member 890 are connected by the connecting pin 893. The first fraud prevention member 882 is formed in a vertically long plate shape that is configured to be swingable about a swing shaft hole 883 at the upper end. This first fraud prevention member 882 has a swing shaft hole 883 at the lowermost of the insertion hole 863 and the rivet 864 for slidably attaching the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984. It is fixed by being attached to the inside of the U-shaped base 685 described above by the insertion hole 863 and the rivet 864.

  The first fraud prevention member 882 is provided with a vertically long protruding piece insertion hole 884 that overlaps the insertion vertical opening 878 on the plate-like surface, and a second engaging protruding piece 875 is formed in the protruding piece insertion hole 884. It can be inserted. That is, when the second engagement protrusion 875 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 884 and the insertion vertical opening 878, the upward engagement hole 979 of the door frame sliding rod 971 provided inside the U-shaped base 685 The second engaging protrusion 875 is engaged. In addition, an outer line obliquely above the opening position of the projecting piece insertion hole 884 of the first fraud prevention member 882 is an inclined portion 882a. The inclined portion 882a is in contact with the rear surface side of the first engaging protrusion 874 when the engaging cam 873 is rotated, and the first engaging protrusion 874 and the inclined portion 882a are rotated when the engaging cam 873 is rotated. , The first fraud prevention member 882 swings about the swing shaft hole 883 (clockwise rotation in FIG. 37B).

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 882 is provided with a stopper piece 885 protruding on an outline line obliquely below the protruding piece insertion hole 884, and a restricting protruding piece 889 is provided below the stopper piece 885, A pin hole 887 and a connecting hole 888 are formed vertically on the front portion of the restricting protrusion 889. The stopper piece 885 enters and engages with the tamper-proof notch 865 and the engagement notch 1017 of the body frame sliding rod 984 when the body frame sliding rod 984 is locked. This is to prevent unauthorized sliding. In addition, the restricting protrusion 889 is connected to the first fraud prevention member 882 and the second fraud prevention member 890 by a spring 894. When the restriction protrusion 889 is connected by the spring 894, the biasing direction of the second fraud prevention member 890 is The movement to is restricted. The pin hole 887 is used to fix the guide pin 886. When the guide pin 886 is fixed to the pin hole 887 from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 882, the guide pin 886 is inserted into the insertion vertical opening 878. The first fraud prevention member 882 is guided along the side surface 685b of the U-shaped base 685 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the U-shaped base. Further, the connection hole 888 is for connecting the first tamper-proof member 882 and the second tamper-proof member 890 with a connection pin 893.

  The second tamper-proof member 890 connected to the first tamper-proof member 882 is formed of an inverted “te” -shaped plate material, a connection hole 892 is formed at one upper end, and a spring engagement is formed at the other upper end. A stop hole 896 is formed, and a contact portion 897 is provided at the lower end. The connection hole 892 is for matching with the connection hole 888 of the first fraud prevention member 882 and connecting with the connection pin 893, and the spring locking hole 896 is a spring locking piece with a U-shaped base 685 at one end. The other end of the spring 894 locked to 879 is locked. The abutting portion 897 abuts on the closing projection 23 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The operation of the first fraud prevention member 882 and the second fraud prevention member 890 will be described later.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 685 will be described. The door frame sliding rod 971 is composed of a vertically long metal plate-like member, and the door frame hook portions 973 project integrally and forwardly at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side of the door frame. Has been. The door frame hook portion 973 protrudes forward from the open side when housed in the U-shaped base 685, and when the locking device 60 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3. It protrudes forward from a door hook hole 352 (see FIG. 14) formed on the door and engages with an engagement opening 175 (see FIG. 39) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Since the door frame hook portion 973 has a downward engaging claw shape, the door frame hook portion 973 and the engagement opening 175 are locked by raising the door frame sliding rod 971. Can be released.

  Also, a vertically long rivet hole 974 into which the rivet 864 is inserted is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces of the door frame sliding rod 971. The uppermost rivet for the rivet long hole 974 A guide protrusion 976 projects from the elongated hole 974 and at the lowermost end of the door frame sliding rod 971. The rivet long hole 974 is a hole through which the rivet 864 inserted into the insertion hole 863 of the U-shaped base 685 passes, and the rivet 864 does not interfere with the ascending operation of the door frame sliding rod 971. It is formed vertically. In the normal state, the rivet 864 is in contact with the upper end of the rivet slot 974. The guide protrusion 976 is inserted into the protrusion moving holes 991, 999 formed in the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986 of the main body frame sliding bar 984, and the door frame sliding bar 986 The sliding movement of 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 is guided.

  A spring hook portion 980 is formed at the upper end of the door frame sliding rod 971. One end of the spring 982 is locked to the spring hook portion 980, and the other end of the spring 982 is the main frame sliding rod. The spring hook portion 993 formed on the upper hook member 985 of 984 is locked. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 971 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 984 is biased upward. In the middle of the door frame sliding rod 971, a contact elastic piece 981 is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 981 is formed by pressing from one side surface of the door frame sliding bar 971 with a press, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 685 so that the door frame is internally used. This prevents the sliding rod 971 from rattling. Furthermore, a vertically long play hole 978 and a rising engagement hole 979 are formed on the side surface of the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 971. When the first engagement protrusion 874 of the engagement cam 873 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 978 moves the tip of the first engagement protrusion 874 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation. It constitutes a space. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 875 of the engagement cam 873 is inserted and rotated, the rising engagement hole 979 is engaged so that the door frame sliding rod 971 is raised by the rotation operation. Is to do. In addition, an escape notch 983 that is a notch larger in the vertical direction than the tamper-proof notch 865 is formed at the lower rear side of the vertical side of the door frame sliding rod 971. The escape notch 983 is formed so as not to obstruct the stopper piece 885 of the first tamper-proof member 882 so as to be surely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 865 and the engagement notch 1017.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 984 includes a metal plate upper hook member 985, a metal plate lower hook member 986, a connecting wire rod 987 connecting the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986, and Consists of. That is, the main body frame sliding rod 984 is not formed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986 having the hook portions 988 and 1014 are made of metal. A plate member made of metal is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 987. For this reason, the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 685.

  By the way, the upper hook member 985 has a hook portion 988 projecting rearward from the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet slot 989 and a projecting piece moving hole 991 are formed on the plate surface portion. A spring hook portion 993 and a connecting hole 994 are formed at the lower end portion of the vertical side, and contact portions 1015 are formed at the upper and lower sides thereof. The hook portion 988 penetrates the hook penetration opening 860 above the U-shaped base 685 and engages with the closing projection 22 provided on the upper part on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 989 corresponds to the rivet slot 974 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 971. In a normal state where the rivet 864 is penetrated through the rivet slot 989, The rivet 864 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 989. Thereby, the upper hook member 985 can move downward. In the protruding piece moving hole 991, the guide protruding piece 976 above the door frame sliding rod 971 is inserted as described above, and the door frame sliding rod 971 and the main body frame sliding rod 984 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. The spring hook portion 993 is for locking the other end of the spring 982 as described above. The connecting hole 994 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 987. Further, when the abutting portion 1015 is housed in the U-shaped base 685, the abutting portion 1015 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 685, and the sliding operation of the upper hook member 985 is smoothly performed without rattling. It is for doing so.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 986 is provided with a hook portion 1014 projecting rearward at the lower end portion thereof, and protrudes from the upper surface to the lower portion of the plate surface portion with a long rivet hole 996, a lowering engagement hole 997, and a play hole 998. One moving hole 999 is sequentially formed. Further, a connecting hole 995 is formed at the upper end of the front vertical side, an engagement notch 1017 is formed at the lower part of the rear vertical side, and contact portions 1016 are formed at the upper and lower sides. The hook portion 1014 penetrates the hook penetration opening 860 below the U-shaped base 685 and engages with a closing projection 23 provided at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 996 corresponds to the rivet slot 974 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 971. In a normal state where the rivet 864 is penetrated through the rivet slot 996, The rivet 864 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 996. Thereby, the lower hook member 986 can move downward. When the first engagement protrusion 874 of the engagement cam 873 is inserted and rotated, the lowering engagement hole 997 is engaged so that the main body frame sliding rod 984 is lowered by the rotation operation. belongs to. Further, the play hole 998 has a distal end portion of the second engagement protrusion 875 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 875 of the engagement cam 873 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space that can move. As described above, the guide piece 976 below the door frame sliding rod 971 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 999, so that the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are connected to each other. It is designed to guide the movement. The connecting hole 995 is inserted by bending the lower end of the connecting wire rod 987. Further, when the abutting portion 1016 is housed in the U-shaped base 685, the abutting portion 1016 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 685, and the sliding operation of the lower hook member 986 is smoothly performed without backlash. It is for doing so.

  By adopting such a structure as the locking device 60 and the above-described mounting structure for the first peripheral wall 290, the outer wall of the first body frame side wall (first peripheral wall 290), The locking device 60 can be disposed in a space having a distance of approximately 18 mm from the inner wall of the side frame plate 13, whereby the volume of the above-described game effect unit installation recess 30, particularly the above. 49 cm can be secured as the maximum lateral width L1 of the front receiving port 30a.

  As mentioned above, although each member which comprises the locking device 60 was demonstrated, the method of assembling this locking device 60 is as follows. First, the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986 of the main body frame sliding rod 984 are connected by a connecting wire rod 987. In this state, the guide protrusion 976 of the door frame sliding rod 971 is inserted into the protrusion moving holes 991, 999 of the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986, and the rivet long hole 974 and the rivet The long holes 989 and 996 are aligned and overlapped. Then, in the state of being overlapped, the hook portion 988 of the upper hook member 985 and the hook portion 1014 of the lower hook member 986 are passed through the hook penetration opening 860 of the U-shaped base 685, and the door frame sliding rod 971. The body frame sliding rod 984 is inserted into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 685. Thereafter, the rivet 864 is inserted from the insertion hole 863. At this time, the rivet 864 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet slots 989, 996, 974. However, when the lowermost rivet 864 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 864 also into the swinging shaft hole 883 of the first fraud prevention member 882 and attach the first fraud prevention member 882 to the U-shaped base 685 at the same time. Before attaching the first fraud prevention member 882 to the U-shaped base 685, the first fraud prevention member 882 and the second fraud prevention member 890 are connected by the connection pin 893, and the guide pin 886 is illustrated in the pin hole 887. The guide pin 886 needs to be inserted into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 878.

  With the rivet 864, the door frame sliding rod 971 and the main body frame sliding rod 984 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 685, and the spring 982 is spanned between the spring hook portions 980 and 993, and is used for the door frame. The sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are biased in opposite directions. Further, the spring 894 is stretched over the spring locking pieces 879 and 594 so that the second fraud prevention member 890 is in contact with the restricting protrusion 889. Thereafter, the cylindrical body portion of the cylinder lock 868 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 867 of the lock attachment piece 866, and the cylinder lock 868 is fixed to the attachment hole 871 with the screw 870. At this time, the distal end portion of the first engagement protrusion 874 of the engagement cam 873 is slightly inserted into the insertion vertical opening 878 outside the inclined portion 882a, and the second engagement protrusion 875 of the engagement cam 873 is inserted. The cylinder lock 868 is attached to the lock attachment piece 866 so that the tip end portion thereof is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 884 and the insertion vertical opening 877 of the first fraud prevention member 882.

  In order to attach the locking device 60 assembled as described above to the back surface of the main body frame 3, the door frame hook portion 973 of the door frame sliding rod 971 is formed on the main body frame 3 as described above. While being inserted into the hook hole 352, the locking projection 862 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the lock locking hole 351 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward. Then, the screw fixing portion 861 and the screw fixing hole 898 that protrude in the horizontal direction in that state are aligned with the lock mounting hole 350, and a screw (not shown) is screwed into the aligned hole, as shown in FIG. The locking device 60 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3. In particular, in the case of this embodiment, the locking protrusion 862 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to project from the side surface 685a that does not adhere to the first peripheral wall 290 of the U-shaped base 685, while the rear portion The screw fixing portion 861 and the screw fixing hole 898 that constitute the fixing structure are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 685b that is in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 of the U-shaped base 685. Therefore, the locking device 60 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front portion is formed on the side surface 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290.

  By the way, the effect | action of the locking device 60 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 is demonstrated with reference to FIG. 37 and FIG.

  First, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening / closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. In a state in which the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. The hooks 988 and 1014 of the body frame sliding rod 984 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 973 of the door frame sliding rod 971 and the engagement opening 175 of the door frame 5 are locked. ing. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 868 and the first engagement protrusion 874 of the engagement cam 873 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 878, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the first engagement protrusion 874 engages with the lower engagement hole 997 of the main body frame sliding rod 984 to push down the lower hook member 986 against the urging force of the spring 982. Further, the connecting wire rod 987 and the upper hook member 985 connected thereto are also pushed down and lowered. For this reason, the locking state between the closing projections 22 and 23 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 988 and 1014 of the main body frame sliding rod 984 is released, and the main body frame 3 is pulled by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. Can be opened to the outer frame 2. When closing the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3 is forcibly pressed against the outer frame 2. At this time, the hook portions 988 and 1014 are in a state of being lifted by the urging force of the spring 982 (the same lifted position as in the state shown in FIG. 37A), but the upper sides of the hook portions 988 and 1014 are directed outward. And tilted down. Therefore, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the upper side inclined portions of the hook portions 988 and 1014 come into contact with the lower end portions of the closing projections 22 and 23, and the main body frame sliding rod 984. Descends downward. Finally, the upward claw portions of the hook portions 988 and 1014 and the closing projections 22 and 23 are locked again, and the main body frame sliding rod 984 rises to return to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 868 and the second engagement protrusion 875 of the engagement cam 873 rotates in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 878, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the second engagement protrusion 875 engages with the ascending engagement hole 979 of the door frame sliding rod 971 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 971 upward against the biasing force of the spring 982. . For this reason, since the engagement state of the engagement opening 175 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 973 of the door frame sliding rod 971 is released, the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. Can be opened to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame 5 is forcibly pressed against the main body frame 3. At this time, the door frame hook portion 973 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 982 (the same lowered position as the state shown in FIG. 37A), but the lower side of the door frame hook portion 973 is outside. Inclining up towards Therefore, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the lower inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 973 comes into contact with the upper end portion of the engagement opening 175, and the door frame sliding rod 971 is Ascend upward. Finally, the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 973 and the engagement opening 175 are locked again, and the door frame sliding rod 971 is lowered to return to the locked state.

  Note that the door frame sliding rod 971 in the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the entire length of the U-shaped base 685, and the U-shaped base 685 is substantially the side surface in the vertical direction of the main body frame 3. It is attached over the entire length. In addition, since the door frame hook portion 973 that is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three positions of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 971, the door frame 5 and the main body Locking of the entire length of the frame 3 in the longitudinal direction is reliably performed. Therefore, there is also an advantage that it is not possible to perform an illegal act of forcibly opening between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and inserting an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from there.

  As described above, the locking device 60 according to the present embodiment releases the locking of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 868 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing so, locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be cancelled | released. In this case, an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 988 and 1014 of the sliding rod 984 for the main body frame without lowering the key without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 868 may be performed. Can not do such cheating. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism including a first fraud prevention member 882 and a second fraud prevention member 890, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 685. The door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are housed in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. In the state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. It has become a state. In this state, the first tamper-proof member 882 rotates counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 894 so that the stopper piece 885 enters the tamper-proof notch 865 and the stopper piece 885 is tamper-proof notch. It is in a state of being engaged with an engagement notch 1017 formed in the lower hook member 986 of the main body frame sliding rod 984 at a position corresponding to 865. Therefore, even if the piano wire or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 984 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 885 and the engagement notch portion 1017 are engaged. It is not possible to perform an illegal act of pulling down and opening the body frame 3.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is properly unlocked by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 868, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 873 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 874 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 878. When the first engagement protrusion 874 is rotated, the inclined portion 882a of the first fraud prevention member 882 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 874 abut, so the first fraud prevention member 882 is pivoted. The stopper piece 885 starts to rotate from the tamper-proof cutout 865 so as to start rotating in the clockwise direction shown in the figure around the 883. For this reason, the engagement between the stopper piece 885 and the engagement notch 1017 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 890 is in a position where the spring 894 is extended and the contact portion 897 is retracted. When the engagement cam 873 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 874 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 874 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 997 of the lower hook member 986. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 984 is lowered, the hooked state of the hook portions 988 and 1014 and the closing projections 22 and 23 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2. Can be opened.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 890 is in contact with the restricting protrusion 889, so the first fraud prevention member 882 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 890 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing projection 23 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 897 of the second fraud prevention member 890 come into contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. . For this reason, the 1st fraud prevention member 882 and the 2nd fraud prevention member 890 do not get in the way when closing the main body frame 3. In the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 882 and the second fraud prevention member 890 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 984 from being illegally performed. This is because if the body frame sliding rod 984 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 971 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire etc. This is because it is extremely difficult to do. Thus, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 984.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the first tamper-proof structure described above, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first tamper-proof member 882 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, even if the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in this embodiment, when the locking device 60 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame sliding rod 971 provided inside is provided. The main body frame sliding rod 984 is housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 685 except for the hook portions 973, 988, and 1014, and is completely covered. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is inserted and the body frame sliding rod 984 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 685 is to be pulled down, both sides 685a and 685b of the U-shaped base 685 can Since entry into the enclosed space is prevented, cheating cannot be easily performed.

  As described above in detail, the locking device 60 according to the present embodiment has a lateral width dimension for the door frame inside the U-shaped base 685 which is extremely thin as compared with the conventional locking device integrated in the L-shaped base. A sliding rod 971 and a body frame sliding rod 984 are slidably provided, and the cylinder lock 868 for operating the locking device 60 is attached to the U-shaped base 685 at the lower end side of the game effect unit 4. It was set as the position which becomes below. Thereby, the storage space of the game effect unit 4 (particularly the game panel 409) is not obstructed by the cylinder lock 868, and the size of the game effect unit 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction can be extremely increased. Therefore, even if the space surrounded by the peripheral walls 290 to 293 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the locking device 60 can be firmly attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. And since it is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the locking device 60 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame sliding rod 971 provided inside and the main body The frame sliding rod 984 is completely covered with the U-shaped base 685 except for the hook portions 973, 988, and 1014. Accordingly, it is not possible to easily perform an illegal act such as pulling down a main body frame sliding rod 984 provided by inserting a piano wire or the like. Further, when the locking device 60 is attached, the locking projections 862 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 685 are inserted into the lock locking holes 351 and positioned and locked. The screw fixing portions 861 and the screw fixing holes 898 formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides opposite to the open side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 685 are fixed to the lock mounting holes 350 with screws. Therefore, the front portion of the locking device 60 is locked by the locking protrusion 862 and the lock locking hole 351, and the rear portion of the locking device 60 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 861, the screw locking hole 898, and the lock mounting hole 350. The locking device 60 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure.

  In the above-described embodiment, the screw fixing hole 898 formed in the lock mounting piece 866 and the cylinder lock through hole 354 of the main body frame 3 are formed in the vicinity of the upper portion of the lock mounting piece 866 as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 685. However, instead of this, a screw 870 for attaching the cylinder lock 868 to the lock attachment piece 866 is used, and the tip of the screw 870 penetrates the lock attachment piece 866. Alternatively, a structure may be employed in which the lock mounting holes to be screwed are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 354. Further, the locking device 60 can be attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 685 is not screwed, or only by fixing the screw fixing portion 861 at the rear portion of the locking device 60 and the lock mounting hole 350. It is confirmed that it is firmly fixed. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 685 having the left and right side surfaces 685a and 685b. The door frame sliding rod 971 and the main body frame sliding rod 984 are slidably attached to the opposite side surface 685a that is not in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 is attached. L-shaped base body (lock base body) is omitted, and a sliding frame 971 for a door frame and a main body frame are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 685a of the L-shaped base body (lock base body) and the first peripheral wall 290. It is good also as a structure which accommodates the sliding rod 984. Even in this case, the same mounting structure and tamper-proof structure as in the embodiment can be obtained.

[About the door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41. FIG. 39 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 to 41, the door frame 5 includes a door frame main body 100 formed in a square shape, a door lens unit 120, a reinforcing sheet metal 160, a glass unit 190, a dish unit 300, a security cover 210, and the like. Installed. A vertically long hexagonal gaming window 101 having an opening area that occupies approximately 3/4 of the door frame main body 100 when viewed from the front is formed in an upper portion of the door frame main body 100. In other words, the door frame main body 100 formed of a synthetic resin in a frame shape is formed with a gaming window 101 in the upper part thereof, and a lower part of the gaming window 101 is a plate-like part. Note that circular speaker openings 102 that allow the speakers 144a and 144b to pass therethrough are formed on the upper left and right of the gaming window 101. A stop lever 108 for locking the stopper piece 194 of the glass unit 190 is rotatably provided below the speaker opening 102.

  In the door frame 5, the door lens unit 120 is attached around the front surface of the gaming window 101, while the dish unit 300 is provided on the front surface of the plate-like portion below the gaming window 101. A handle unit 318, which will be described later, protrudes and is fixed to one side (open side) of the dish unit 300. A reinforcing sheet metal 160 is fixed around the gaming window 101 on the back surface of the door frame main body 100, and a glass unit 190 is attached so as to close the gaming window 101. Furthermore, the slide unit 230 corresponding to the handle unit 318, the mounting base 220, and the frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 are attached to the back surface of the plate-like portion below the game window 101, respectively. A security cover 210 having a security function is also attached to the lower part of the back surface of the glass unit 190.

  In the plate-like portion below the game window 101, a prize ball passing port 103 through which a prize ball communication rod 431 (see FIGS. 46 and 47) of the dish unit 300 passes is provided at the upper part on the pivot support side. Further, a lid opening 105 for attaching and detaching the side surface opening lid 383 (see FIGS. 46 and 47) is provided near the oblique center of the prize ball passing port 103. Further, a ball feed opening 104 for mounting the ball feed unit 226 is opened at a position adjacent to the opening side of the lid opening 105. A lock hole 106 for allowing the cylinder lock 868 to pass therethrough is further opened near the opening side of the ball feed opening 104.

  A slide unit mounting recess 107 for attaching the slide unit 230 is formed at a position below the ball feed opening 104 on the back side of the plate-like portion below the gaming window 101. Further, engagement receiving pieces (not shown) for hooking the latching protrusions 195 of the glass unit 190 are formed at the lower left and right of the gaming window 101. A mounting opening 110 is formed on the side of the engagement receiving piece to which the mounting elastic piece 213 of the crime prevention cover 210 is mounted.

  Further, at the center of the front surface of the plate-like portion below the game window 101, the engagement is inserted into the guide hole 436 (see FIG. 47) of the dish unit 300 toward the front (that is, the front side) of the door frame 5. A protrusion 111 is formed. On the other hand, on the back surface of the plate-like portion below the gaming window 101, a door frame protrusion 112 protruding rearward (that is, on the back side) of the door frame 5 is formed along the lower side of the door frame main body 100. . The door frame protruding piece 112 is an outer protrusion that is engaged with the engaging grooves 42 and 43 (see FIG. 1) formed in the main body frame 3 at the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The engaging portion is configured as a pair.

<Door lens unit>
Next, the configuration of the door lens unit 120 attached to the upper part on the front side of the door frame main body 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44. FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door lens unit attached to the front side of the door frame. FIG. 43 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing the relationship between the lens cover of the door lens unit and the lens cover provided on the dish unit. FIG. 44 is a front view of the door frame when a member that irradiates the LED among members constituting the speaker cover and the decorative member is removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, the door lens unit 120 includes reflectors 122, 130a, 130b, cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b, LED boards 137, 138a, 138b, a lens cover 140, and a speaker 144a. , 144b and the lens base body 121.

  More specifically, the front surfaces of the reflectors 122, 130a, and 130b are reflecting surfaces. The cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b are attached to the front surfaces of the reflectors 122, 130a, 130b, respectively. In addition, LED boards 137, 138a, and 138b are attached to the inside of the reflectors 122, 130a, and 130b, respectively. Furthermore, a light-transmissive lens cover 140 that covers the reflectors 122, 130a, and 130b is provided in front of the reflectors 122, 130a, and 130b. The lens cover 140 is disposed with a lens base body 121 described later as a base, and a pair of left and right speakers 144a and 144b are attached to the upper portion of the lens cover 140.

  The lens base body 121 is formed of a synthetic resin so as to form an inner hollow triangular shape having a circular arc at the front and a straight shape at the rear and a rear surface (that is, a back surface) opened in a plan view. An inverter board 136 for supplying a high-voltage current to the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b is housed and fixed in the hollow interior of the lens base body 121. Further, an upper reflector 122 having an L-shaped cross section is attached so as to contact the front surface and the bottom surface of the lens base body 121. The upper reflector 122 is formed of a polycarbonate resin colored in white, and has a surface whose reflectance is increased by the white colored resin. That is, the surface of the upper reflector 122 is a reflection surface that reflects light emitted from the upper cold cathode tube 132 and the upper LED substrate 137. Note that side reflectors 130a and 130b, which will be described later, are similarly formed of a polycarbonate resin colored in white.

  Meanwhile, electrode support portions 125 for supporting both ends of the upper cold cathode tube 132 are formed at both ends of the upper reflector 122, respectively. Further, in order to support the upper cold cathode tube 132 at an appropriate interval, a cathode tube support piece 123 having a tip portion formed in a U shape is projected from the front surface of the upper reflector 122. This is because the central portion of the upper cold cathode tube 132 is bent into a "<" shape and is bent, so that the bent portion at the center is stressed and is easily damaged. is there. That is, by supporting the horizontally long upper cold cathode tube 132 not only by the electrode support portions 125 at the left and right ends but also by the cathode tube support piece 123 at an appropriate interval, the upper cold cathode tube 132 is preferably not damaged. Can be supported. Further, by supporting the upper cold cathode tube 132 so as not to move with the cathode tube support piece 123 in a state where the upper cold cathode tube 132 is sandwiched between heat-resistant rubber packings (not shown), a support structure that is more difficult to break. It can be.

  In addition, the electrode support portions 125 at the left and right ends are open at the top, and an electrode insertion hole (not shown) that is open to receive the end portion of the upper cold cathode tube 132 is formed in the peripheral wall facing inward. ing. On the other hand, rubber sleeves 133 that can be elastically deformed are respectively attached to the left and right ends of the upper cold cathode tube 132 to which wiring is connected. Then, the electrode cover 127 is fitted from above the electrode support 125 in a state where the rubber sleeve 133 is inserted from above into an electrode insertion hole (not shown) formed in the electrode support 125. Thus, the upper cold cathode tube 132 can be mounted on the front surface of the upper reflector 122.

  Thus, the rubber sleeve 133 is attached to both ends of the upper reflector 122, and the rubber sleeve 133 is supported in the electrode insertion hole (not shown) of the electrode support portion 125 in a loosely fitted state. With this structure, even if the upper cold cathode tube 132 vibrates due to an impact or the like, when the rubber sleeve 133 absorbs the vibration, the end portion of the upper cold cathode tube 132 is swung at the electrode support portion 125 or The sliding stress is weakened by sliding. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the upper cold cathode tube 132 from being damaged at the electrode support portion 125 and the bent portion of the upper cold cathode tube 132. Note that speaker through holes 128a and 128b through which the speakers 144a and 144b penetrate are formed on the left and right ends of the upper reflector 122, respectively.

  By the way, the left and right ends of the upper reflector 122 are connected to the side reflectors 130a and 130b so as to hang down. The side reflectors 130a and 130b are also formed of a polycarbonate resin colored white like the upper reflector 122, and have a surface whose reflectance is increased by the white colored resin. That is, the surfaces of the side reflectors 130a and 130b are reflecting surfaces that reflect the light emitted from the side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b and the side LED substrates 138a and 138b. The side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b attached in front of the side reflectors 130a and 130b are formed in a straight line extending in the vertical direction. Therefore, electrode support portions 131a and 131b that support the side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b are formed at two locations on the upper and lower ends of the side reflectors 130a and 130b, respectively. Of course, the structure for supporting the side cold-cathode tubes 134a and 134b with the electrode support portions 131a and 131b is the same as that of the upper cold-cathode tube 132 and the electrode support portion 125 described above. That is, rubber sleeves 135a and 135b are attached to the end portions of the side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b, and the rubber sleeves 135a and 135b are in contact with and supported by the electrode support portions 131a and 131b. . Thereby, it can be set as the support structure which is hard to be damaged even if the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b vibrate.

  Note that LED boards 137, 138a, and 138b on which a large number of LEDs are mounted are attached to the inner side of the upper reflector 122 and the side reflectors 130a and 130b (positions that border the gaming window 101). The inner surface of the lens cover 140 described later is decorated by the LEDs mounted on the LED substrates 137, 138a, and 138b.

  The lens base body 121, the upper reflector 122 to which the upper cold cathode tube 132 is attached, and the side reflectors 130a and 130b to which the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b are attached are arranged on the back side of the lens cover 140. Fixed. The lens cover 140 includes an upper lens cover portion 141 and side lens cover portions 142a and 142b as a cover body made of a transmissive resin. The upper lens cover portion 141 is a cover body provided corresponding to the upper reflector 122 to which the lens base body 121 and the upper cold cathode tube 132 are attached. The side lens cover parts 142a and 142b are cover bodies provided corresponding to the side reflectors 130a and 130b to which the side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b are attached, respectively.

  More specifically, the upper lens cover portion 141 and the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b are both formed as a white lens portion, and a front bulge portion having a wedge-shaped cross section is formed of a synthetic resin. Further, on the rear end side of the lens cover portions 141, 142 a, 142 b, a red lens portion 150 formed of a synthetic resin having a different color from the lens cover portions 141, 142 a, 142 b borders the gaming window 101. Each is formed along the peripheral surface. In the lens cover portions 141, 142a, and 142b, the white lens portion and the red lens portion 150 are connected and formed in a series. The red lens portion 150 is illuminated by a plurality of LEDs mounted linearly on the upper LED substrate 137 and the side LED substrates 138a and 138b.

  By the way, the upper lens cover part 141 is formed in a wedge shape in a cross section in which the inside is hollow and the rear side is open, and is configured in a boomerang shape in plan view. The inner surface of the wedge-shaped tip end portion of the upper lens cover portion 141 is close to the above-described upper cold cathode tube 132 formed in a “<” shape. Further, a front lens portion 141c colored in silver is bonded to the outer side of the wedge-shaped tip portion of the upper lens cover portion 141. With this structure, the front bulging surface having a wedge shape in cross section corresponding to almost the entire upper lens cover portion 141 is illuminated by the upper cold cathode tube 132.

  Further, the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b are the same as the upper lens cover portion 141 in that the inside is hollow and the rear is open and formed in a wedge shape in cross section. However, the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b are configured in a boomerang shape having a wedge-shaped protrusion amount smaller than that of the upper lens cover portion 141 in a side view and having a gentle curve as a whole. Further, the inner surfaces of the wedge-shaped tips of the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b are close to the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b formed in the above-described linear shape. Furthermore, a front lens portion 142c colored in silver is bonded to the outside of the wedge-shaped tip portions of the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b. With this structure, the front bulging surface having a wedge shape in cross section corresponding to almost the entire side lens cover portion 142a, 142b is illuminated by the side cold cathode tubes 134a, 134b.

  In the above-described embodiment, the light source disposed in the space defined by the reflectors 122, 130a, and 130b is the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, and 134b and the LED substrates 137, 138a, and 138b. Then, the lens cover portions 141, 142a, and 142b corresponding to these light emitting sources were molded and connected with synthetic resins having different colors (in this case, white and red). Specifically, the lens cover portions 141, 142a, 142b corresponding to the reflectors 122, 130a, 130b are white lens portions, while the lens cover portions 141, 142a, 142b corresponding to the LED substrates 137, 138a, 138b are red. The lens unit 150 was obtained. In this manner, the lens cover portions 141, 142a, and 142b can be molded with a structure and color that are suitably irradiated by the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, and 134b and the LED substrates 137, 138a, and 138b. Of course, different types of light emitting sources are not limited to the combination of the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b and the LED substrates 137, 138a, 138b, and both may be configured as LED substrates.

  By the way, speaker attachment holes 143a and 143b for attaching the speakers 144a and 144b are formed in a connecting portion between the upper lens cover portion 141 and the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b of the lens cover 140. A speaker cone 145a is provided in front of the speakers 144a and 144b. Therefore, the cone support that supports the speaker cone 145a is attached from the back surface of the speaker attachment holes 143a and 143b using a predetermined attachment member (not shown). The front surfaces of the speakers 144a and 144b attached to the speaker attachment holes 143a and 143b are covered by speaker covers 146a and 146b having mesh-like covers 147a and 147b (punching metal).

  Furthermore, decorative member attachment areas 148a and 148b are formed below the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b, and the decorative members 149a and 149b are attached to the decorative member attachment areas 148a and 148b. The decorative members 149a and 149b have shapes similar to the speaker covers 146a and 146b described above. With this structure, when the lens cover 140 is attached to the surface of the door frame main body 100, it is possible to give an impression that the upper left and right and the lower left and right of the lens cover 140 are balanced.

  Incidentally, the speaker covers 146a, 146b and the decorative members 149a, 149b not only simply cover the front of the speakers 144a, 144b or decorate the lower part of the lens cover 140, but the surroundings are light-decorated with LEDs. It has a structure.

  Specifically, in the speaker covers 146a and 146b, the LED substrate 152 is in close contact with the back surface of the cover base plate 151 formed of a synthetic resin in a flat plate shape. The speaker frame 154 is covered with an inner lens and a front lens (not shown) with the speaker frame 154 built in front of the cover base plate 151. Further, the front surfaces of the speaker covers 146a and 146b are closed with mesh covers 147a and 147b.

  Further, inside the decorative members 149a and 149b, the LED substrate 156 is in close contact with the back surface of the decorative base plate 155 formed in a flat plate shape with a synthetic resin. And the decoration base board 155 is covered with the inner lens and decoration lens which are not shown in figure in the state which incorporated the decoration frame 158 ahead of the decoration base board 155. FIG. Further, the front surfaces of the decorative members 149a and 149b are closed with the decorative plates 159a and 159b.

  Thus, the speaker covers 146a, 146b and the decorative members 149a, 149b are light decorations by the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b and the LED boards 137, 138a, 138b in the region surrounding the game window 101 of the door frame 5. Separately, the four corners of the door frame 5 are mainly light-decorated. Therefore, the entire circumference except for the lower side of the gaming window 101 is not casually decorated with light, but can be a light decoration with strength and weakness. In particular, the light decoration on the upper left and right sides of the door frame 5 has a strong tendency to arrange only speakers. For this reason, in the conventional gaming machine, since the light decoration around the speaker is not performed, the light decoration around the outer periphery of the game window 101 has an impression. However, by configuring as in the present embodiment, the entire periphery of the door frame 5 excluding the lower side of the gaming window 101 can be effectively light-decorated.

  In the present embodiment, the cold cathode fluorescent lamps 132, 134a, 134b and the LED substrates 137, 138a, 138b that perform light decoration in the door frame 5 correspond to the frame decoration lamp 842 (see FIG. 85).

<Reinforcing sheet metal>
Next, the reinforcing sheet metal 160 attached to the back side of the door frame main body 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the reinforcing sheet metal 160 is formed by fastening the upper reinforcing sheet metal 161, the pivot supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 162, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 163, and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 with screws or the like. It is configured in a shape. The upper reinforcing sheet metal 161 is attached along the rear surface of the upper side of the door frame main body 100. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 162 is attached along the shaft support side side part back surface of the door frame main body 100. The open-side reinforcing sheet metal 163 is attached along the open-side side portion back surface of the door frame main body 100. The lower reinforcing metal plate 164 is attached along the lower surface of the lower side of the game window 101 of the door frame main body 100.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 161 has a predetermined width and is formed to have the same length as the width of the door frame body 100. Then, both end edges of the long side of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 161 are an upper bent protrusion piece 165 and a lower bent protrusion piece 166 that are bent backward. The upper bent protrusion 165 and the lower bent protrusion 166 are fitted into the upper crime prevention double groove 33 (see FIG. 14) of the main body frame 3.

  The pivot support side reinforcing sheet metal 162 is also formed to have a predetermined width and substantially the same length as the longitudinal dimension of the door frame main body 100. Then, both end edges of the long side of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 162 are a shaft support side short bent protrusion 172 and a shaft support side L-shaped bent protrusion 167 which are bent backward. However, while the shaft support side short bent protrusion 172 that is the inner bent protrusion is extremely short, the shaft support side L-shaped bent protrusion 167 that is the outer bent protrusion is the tip of the bent portion. Is formed in an L shape. The shaft support side L-shaped bent projecting piece 167 is configured such that a tip portion bent in an L shape comes into contact with the inside of the shaft support side portion 49 of the main body frame 3 described above.

  The open-side reinforcing sheet metal 163 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the longitudinal dimension of the door frame body 100. Then, both end edges of the long side of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 163 are an open-side outer bent protrusion 173 and an open-side inner bent protrusion 174 that are bent rearward. The open-side outer bent protrusion 173 is inserted into the side crime prevention groove 34 (see FIG. 14) of the main body frame 3 described above, and the open-side inner bent protrusion 174 is a security concave portion of the main body frame 3. 35 (see FIG. 14). Engagement openings 175 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower portions of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 163 so that the door frame hook portion 973 of the locking device 60 can enter. A hook cover 176 with which the door frame hook portion 973 engages is fixed so as to cover the back side of these engagement openings 175.

  The lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 has a predetermined width and is formed to have the same length as the width of the door frame body 100. Then, both end edges of the long side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 are a lower bent protrusion piece 178 and an upper bent protrusion piece 179 which are bent toward the rear. However, the lower bent protruding piece 178 is formed by bending the lower long side edge of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 toward the rear, and the upper bent protruding piece 179 is the upper longer side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 164. The both sides of the edge are bent rearward, and the portion sandwiched between the upper bent protrusions 179 on both sides is a vertical bent protrusion 180 extending in the vertical direction. Yes. The vertical bent projecting piece 180 is formed in a concave shape so that the upper end edge shape thereof matches the lower end shape of a unit frame 191 of a glass unit 190 described later. Then, when the glass unit 190 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the upper end piece of the vertical bent projecting piece 180 is formed along the substantially central outer periphery in the width direction of the unit frame 191 of the glass unit 190. The mating groove 200 is engaged. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 is formed with a prize ball passage port covering portion 177 that protects the outer periphery excluding the bottom surface of the prize ball passage port 103 formed in the door frame main body 100.

<Glass unit>
Next, the glass unit 190 as a transparent plate unit attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the glass unit 190 is configured by adhering a unit frame 191 and a glass plate 201 (not a glass plate but a transparent synthetic resin plate). The unit frame 191 is a frame having an annular vertically long octagon shape molded with a synthetic resin having an opening larger than the game window 101. The glass plate 201 is two transparent plates disposed on the front and rear surfaces of the opening of the unit frame 191.

  Stopping pieces 194 are formed on the left and right sides of the upper portion of the unit frame 191 so as to project outward. In addition, on the left and right sides of the lower part of the unit frame 191, hooking protrusions 195 are formed so as to protrude toward the outer side of the ring. The stopper piece 194 and the latching protrusion 195 are for attaching the glass unit 190 to the back surface of the door frame 5 as described above. The glass unit 190 of the present embodiment is integrally formed with a unit frame 191 with a pair of security projection plates 199 (see FIG. 39) that project obliquely upward in a front view. For this reason, when the glass unit 190 is attached to the door frame 5, the security protruding plate 199 is connected to the lateral positions of the speakers 144a and 144b without any gap.

<Security cover>
Next, the crime prevention cover 210 provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190 and prevents the unauthorized equipment from entering the game effect unit 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the crime prevention cover 210 is formed in a flat plate shape with a transparent synthetic resin so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 190 between the left and right reinforcing sheet metals 162 and 163. The upper side portion of the crime prevention cover 210 is formed as an arc-shaped contact recess 211 along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 462, and the crime prevention post-projection piece faces rearward along the contact recess 211. 214 protrudes.

  The rear surface of the crime prevention cover 210 is provided with a crime prevention rear end projecting piece 215 that protrudes obliquely on the rear surface of the door frame 5 with the door frame 5 attached thereto. Yes. On the other hand, on the front surface of the security cover 210, the security cover 210 is attached to the door frame 5, and the pre-crime projection piece 212 projecting along the lower shape of the unit frame 191, and both lower ends of the unit frame 191. A mounting elastic piece 213 formed in a U-shape is formed so as to project forward.

<Mounting base>
As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the mounting base 220 is attached so as to cover the upper half of the back surface of the plate portion of the door frame main body 100. And like the crime prevention cover 210, it is formed in the horizontal rectangular parallelepiped shape which the front open | released with the transparent synthetic resin. A ball flight guide surface 227 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting table 220, and the launch rail 38 is held between the ball flight guide surface 227 and the plate portion 32 when the door frame 5 is closed. Thereby, the ball launched from the launch rail 38 is smoothly guided to the game area 20.

  By the way, an opening for a prize ball passage opening through which a rearward protruding portion of a prize ball passage opening covering portion (not shown) formed in the lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 is formed in the upper portion on the shaft support side of the mounting base 220 according to the present embodiment. 221 is formed. A ball feed unit mounting recess 222 for mounting the ball feed unit 226 is formed in the lower part on the open side of the mounting table 220. In addition, the area | region of the diagonal direction from this ball feed unit attachment recessed part 222 is the above-mentioned ball flight guide surface 227. The ball feed unit 226 attached to the ball feed unit mounting recess 222 is provided with a ball feed member (not shown) that swings in response to the reciprocating motion difference of the hitting ball of the launching device 57. By this swinging movement of the ball feeding member, the balls at the lower end of the guide passage portion 362 of the dish unit 300 are supplied one by one to the firing position of the firing rail 38. Further, a lid opening 223 into which a finger can be put when a side opening lid 383 described later is removed is formed in the middle lower part of the mounting base 220. Further, a vertical wall 224 is formed on a part of the upper side of the mounting table 220. When the security cover 210 is attached, the upright wall 224 is in contact with the front surface of the security cover 210 so as to restrict the lower part of the security cover 210 from moving forward.

<Frame decoration relay terminal board>
As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, a frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 is attached to the lower shaft support side of the mounting table 220. Further, a relay board cover 241 is attached so as to cover the rear surface of the frame decoration relay terminal board 240. The frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 includes an electrical component and electrical components (cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b, LED boards 137, 138a, 138b, speakers 144a, 144b, 341a, 341b, handles provided on the door frame 5. Wiring from a switch, a ball rental unit 324, an operation button unit 326, and the like provided in the unit 318 are collectively connected. Then, the wiring from the frame decoration relay terminal board 240 is delivered to the delivery control board box 55 via the door frame connector 2012 of the sub drawer relay board 649 incorporated in the board unit 54 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The control board is connected to the main control board of the main control board box 25.

<Dish unit>
Next, the configuration of the dish unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 45 is a front view of the dish unit provided on the front surface of the door frame. FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the dish unit. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the dish unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, in the dish unit 300, members such as a lower speaker unit 330, a dish body 360, a second ball extraction link unit 400, and a dish lid body 430 are attached to a unit frame 301 constituting the appearance. Configured. Specifically, the lower speaker unit 330 is attached to the inside of the unit frame 301, while the dish 360 is provided so as to face the upper surface of the unit frame 301 above the lower speaker unit 330. The second ball removal link unit 400 performs the ball removal operation of the ball removal valve 375 provided in the dish body 360, while the dish lid body 430 closes the rear surface of the unit frame 301.

  First, the unit frame 301 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 45 to 47, in the unit frame 301, an upper surface cover portion 302 and a front surface cover portion 303 are integrally formed of synthetic resin. The upper surface cover portion 302 has a semi-elliptical shape in plan view in which the upper surface is gently inclined toward the near side, and constitutes the upper surface of the unit frame 301. Further, the front cover portion 303 continuously extends from the front side to the rear side and constitutes the front and bottom surfaces of the unit frame 301. A vertical cover portion 302 a that contacts the front side of the door frame main body 100 is also integrally formed on the back side of the upper surface cover portion 302. The vertical cover 302a has a ball rental button unit opening 323 at the center thereof. The ball rental unit 324 can be attached to the ball rental button unit opening 323 from the back side. When a ball lending machine is provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, the lending unit 324 is provided with a switch for deriving a lending command, a remaining lending indicator, and the like.

  Further, a dish body upper surface opening 305 is opened from the rising portion of the vertical cover portion 302a of the upper surface cover portion 302 toward the front. An operation button unit concave space 306 is formed at the front center of the dish upper surface opening 305. Further, an LED decoration space portion 307 is formed along the front end portions of the left and right upper surface cover portions 302 from the operation button unit concave space portion 306. Further, a first ball extraction button opening 313 a for attaching the first ball extraction button 313 is provided on the side of the dish upper surface opening 305. The dish body upper surface opening 305 is formed in the same shape as the storage part 361 of the dish body 360 and the upper surface opening of the guide passage part 362 communicating therewith. When the dish body 360 is attached to the unit frame 301, the storage section 361 and the guide passage section 362 of the dish body 360 face the dish body upper surface opening 305.

  In addition, a space portion forming member 310 is attached to the operation button unit concave space portion 306, and the operation button unit 326 is attached to the space portion forming member 310. The space forming member 310 has a wiring housing opening 310b. The wiring storage opening 310b stores a connector 310a for wiring that is connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the bottom surface of the operation button unit 326 when the operation button unit 326 is inserted into the space forming member 310. It is. The operation button unit 326 includes a plurality (three in the illustrated example) of operation buttons 327. The plurality of operation buttons 327 are operated when the player participates in the game content performed on the effect display device 115 or the like.

  Further, the first ball removal button 313 is attached to the upper surface cover portion 302 via a sliding support member 314 attached to the first ball removal button opening 313a of the upper surface cover portion 302. The member 314 slides in the vertical direction. When the first ball removal button 313 is pressed by the player, the rotation member 366 positioned below the first ball removal button 313 rotates about the rotation shaft 367 in the clockwise direction. Then, in conjunction with the operation of the rotating member 366, the slide valve 365 linked to the lower end of the rotating member 366 moves. The slide valve 365 is always biased by the spring 369 and is in a position where the downstream end of the guide passage portion 362 of the dish body 360 is closed. When the first ball extraction button 313 is moved as described above, the first ball extraction passage portion evacuates from the guide passage portion 362 and continues downstream of the guide passage portion 362 and the guide passage portion 362. 364 is communicated. Thereby, the balls stored in the storage portion 361 and the guide passage portion 362 of the dish body 360 can be extracted from the dish body 360. This structure will be further described in detail when the dish 360 is described.

  Next, the configuration of the front cover portion 303 of the unit frame 301 will be described. As described above, the front cover portion 303 forms the front surface and the bottom surface of the unit frame 301 continuously from the front side of the upper surface cover portion 302. Therefore, the front surface portion of the front cover portion 303 is inclined to the back side as the central portion protrudes most forward and moves left and right. Speaker openings 315a and 315b are formed on the left and right sides of the front surface portion of the front cover portion 303 (that is, the central protrusion). The speaker openings 315a and 315b are covered with a mesh-like speaker cover 316a and 316b (punching metal). Then, two speakers 341a and 341b housed and fixed in the lower speaker unit 330 are located behind the speaker covers 316a and 316b. Note that the speaker openings 315a and 315b are formed on an inclined surface that inclines from the protruding portion at the center of the front surface of the front cover portion 303 toward the back side. Therefore, when the unit frame 301 is viewed from the front, the unit frame 301 is opened outward from the central vertical line of the pachinko machine 1. And the front decoration board 304 is attached so that the protrusion part of the front surface center of the front cover part 303 may be bordered to the opening edge of the upper part and lower part of speaker opening 315a, 315b.

  Further, a handle attachment hole 317 for attaching the handle unit 318 is formed below the open side end of the front cover portion 303. As is well known, the handle unit 318 is for adjusting the resilience of the hit ball. Therefore, the handle unit 318 is provided with a rotation operation member 318a that can be operated by the player. When the turning operation member 318a is turned, the engaging cam 319 fixed to the rear end of the turning shaft is turned. Then, as described above, by converting the rotational movement of the engaging cam 319 into the sliding movement of the slide engaging / disengaging piece 231 of the slide unit 230, the strength of the elastic force of the launching device 57 can be adjusted. It is like that.

  Here, the second ball removal link unit 400 includes a second ball removal button 401, a pressing swing member (not shown), a first link 414, and a second link 419. The pressing swing member (not shown) is a member that swings when the second ball extraction button 401 is locked. The first link 414 and the second link 419 are members for transmitting a pressing operation of a pressing swing member (not shown) as a ball swinging motion of the ball release valve 375.

  A second ball extraction button opening 320 for opening a second ball extraction button 401 that constitutes a part of the second ball extraction link unit 400 is opened at the center lower portion of the front cover portion 303. In addition, a ball discharge port for discharging a ball, which has been removed according to the operation of the first ball removal button 313 and the second ball removal button 401, to the outside of the dish unit 300 is provided at the center of the bottom surface of the front cover portion 303. 322 is formed. A fastener insertion hole 325 for attaching the operation button unit 326 is formed obliquely in front of the ball discharge port 322. In the present embodiment, the two ball removal buttons 313 and 401 of the first ball removal button 313 and the second ball removal button 401 are provided for the following reason. That is, all the spheres stored in the storage portion 361 and the guide passage portion 362 of the dish 360 can be extracted by operating the first ball release button 313, but are aligned in a line at the guide passage portion 362. It takes some time to remove the sphere. On the other hand, since the ball on the upstream side from the storage portion 361 of the dish body 360 can be quickly extracted from the large-diameter opening 388 by operating the second extraction button 401, the extraction time is shortened. Can do. That is, it is possible to arbitrarily select the length of time for the player to remove the ball. In addition, when a big hit is made during the game and a large amount of balls are paid out to the dish unit 300, if the game is continued with the ball left unattended, the full switch 730 provided on the upstream side of the dish unit 300 may function. is assumed. Then, due to the operation of the full tank switch 730, the payout operation is stopped or the ballistic operation is stopped, and there is a possibility that the game cannot be continued even though it is a big hit. In such a case, by operating the second ball removal button 401, the ball being stored in the dish unit 300 is removed, and at the same time the supply of the ball to the launch position is maintained, The game can be continued.

  Next, the configuration of the dish lid 430 that closes the back surface of the unit frame 301 of the dish unit 300 will be described. The dish lid 430 is formed of a synthetic resin as a rectangular flat plate so as to close almost the entire back surface of the unit frame 301. In addition, a ball escape passage rear bar 433 is formed integrally and projectingly at substantially the center of the front side of the dish lid 430. A curved upper guide rod 434 and a lower guide rod 435 are formed on the rear ball passage 433 so as to guide the ball upward and downward. Then, when the dish lid 430 is attached to the back surface of the unit frame 301, it is integrated by facing the ball extraction passage front rod 337 and the ball extraction passage rear rod 433 formed in the speaker box body 331 of the lower speaker unit 330. This constitutes a ball passage in the dish. At this time, the guide rod 338 formed on the ball extraction passage front rod 337 is positioned between the upper guide rod 434 and the lower guide rod 435 of the ball extraction passage rear rod 433. For this reason, the in-dish ball extraction passage is formed in a meandering shape, and the extracted ball is discharged to the outside from the ball discharge port 322 while weakening the momentum.

  In addition, an opening lid attachment window 432 is formed in the dish lid body 430 on the upper side of the rear punching passage 433. Further, a square cylindrical award ball connecting rod 431 protrudes from the upper back of one end side (the pivot support side) of the dish lid 430. When the dish unit 300 is attached to the surface of the door frame main body 100, the prize ball communication rod 431 penetrates the prize ball passage port 103 formed in the lower part of the shaft support side of the door frame main body 100 and It penetrates to the back side. Then, with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the end of the prize ball passage formed in the main body frame 3 faces in a superposed manner. The opening lid attaching window 432 is an opening for detachably attaching the side opening lid 383 that closes the side wall opening (not shown) of the second ball extraction passage portion (not shown) of the dish body 360. And it is provided in the position corresponding to the opening 105 for lid | covers (refer FIG.40 and FIG.41) formed in the door frame main body 100. FIG.

[Relationship between outer frame, main frame and game effect unit]
Next, the positional relationship when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the game effect unit 4 is mounted on the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a plan sectional view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 49 is a plan sectional view of the pachinko machine, in which the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame.

  Of the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of wood having a thickness of 19 mm. On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are thin-walled members made of an aluminum alloy extruded plate. In the present embodiment, the side frame plates 12 and 13 have a thickness of 3 mm. Further, as described above, ribs are formed on the inner side of the rear portion of the side frame plates 12 and 13 so that the thickness h2 (see FIG. 10C) of the rear portion is increased. That is, the side frame plates 12 and 13 include vertically long outer wall portions 12a and 13a (a portion having a thickness of 3 mm), and thickness portions 12b and 13b formed with ribs directed toward the inner side of the rear portions of the side frame plates 12 and 13, respectively. (The outer wall 13a and the thickness 13b of the open side frame 13 are shown in FIG. 7). The thickness sections 12b and 13b have a substantially U-shaped cross section in plan view so as to have an open space 12G behind the side frame plates 12 and 13.

  The outer wall portions 12a and 13a are substantially flat plate members, and the thickness portions 12b and 13b are erected inwardly from the rear end portions of the outer wall portions 12a and 13a. Thereby, the thickness of the left-right direction in the front-end part of the side frame boards 12 and 13 becomes the thickness of the outer wall parts 12a and 13a, and there is no structure which increases this thickness elsewhere. In addition, inner frame spaces 12A and 13A having a rib width are formed inside the outer wall portions 12a and 13a. Therefore, a part of the body frame 3 (more specifically, the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291) can be accommodated in the outer frame inner space 12A, and the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291 are accommodated. The outer frame 2 can be made closer. As a result, the width in the left-right direction between the peripheral surface walls 290 to 293 on the shaft support side and the peripheral surface walls 290 to 293 on the open side can be widened to the limit, and the left and right width of the game area 20 can be increased. Moreover, the effect becomes remarkable by making the side frame plates 12 and 13 thin. In this way, while the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made thin by reducing the thickness, not only can the strength equal to or higher than that of conventional wood be maintained, but also the game area 20 can be enlarged. Can also be achieved.

  Furthermore, the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 of the locking device 60 are also provided in the outer frame inner space 13A on the open side in a state where the main frame 3 is confined to the outer frame 2. Be contained. Thereby, the lateral width of the gaming panel 409 (the lateral width when viewed from the player) is substantially equal to the thickness of the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 from the lateral width of the entire pachinko machine 1 (more specifically, the thickness of the outer wall portion). ) Is subtracted. As a result, a sufficient width of the game area 20 can be secured. When the main body frame 3 is confined to the outer frame 2, the second peripheral wall 291 of the main body frame 3 is close to the open side thick portion 13 b of the side frame plate 13. It is difficult to insert a finger or the like from between b and the second peripheral wall 291). Accordingly, it is possible to suppress injustice such as operating the door frame sliding rod 971 or the body frame sliding rod 984 from behind the outer frame 2.

  The main body frame 3 is formed with peripheral wall 290 to 293 along the inner peripheral surface of the outer frame 2. That is, the main body frame 3 is configured such that the peripheral wall 290 to 293 is provided along the surface of the inner peripheral wall of the outer frame 2 while substantially maintaining the width of the left and right when viewed from the front. Specifically, the inner side wall surface of the pivot side frame 12 and the outer side surface of the first peripheral wall 290 on the pivot side are closely adjacent to each other and formed on the side frame plate 12 on the pivot side. A first peripheral wall 290 is extended to the ribs. In addition, the open side frame plate 13 and the open side first peripheral wall 290 are formed on the open side frame plate 13 so that the outer side surfaces of the open side frame plate 290 are close to each other with the thin locking device 60 (details will be described later) interposed therebetween. A first peripheral wall 290 is extended to the ribs. In this way, the first peripheral wall 290 is closest to the outer frame 2 on both the pivot support side and the open side. Thereby, the width in the left-right direction between the peripheral surface walls 290 to 293 on the shaft support side and the peripheral surface walls 290 to 293 on the open side can be maximized. Note that almost no openings are formed in the peripheral walls 290 to 293.

  Further, on the pivot support side, the main body frame 3 is bent at a substantially right angle to the inside of about 18 mm immediately before the rib formed on the side frame plate 13 on the open side, and the second peripheral wall 291 avoids this rib. Is extended substantially in parallel with the first peripheral wall 290 toward the rear.

  The third peripheral wall 292 is substantially parallel to the second peripheral wall 291 from the rear end of the second peripheral wall 291 (the boundary between the second peripheral wall 291 and the third peripheral wall 292) to the rear. Is extended. The third peripheral wall 292 is slightly (about 1 mm) inside the second peripheral wall 291. In other words, on the shaft support side, a fine step having a wall thickness is formed between the second peripheral wall 291 and the third peripheral wall 292.

  Furthermore, from the rear end portion (boundary portion between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293) of the third peripheral wall 292 toward the rear, the fourth peripheral wall 293 is substantially parallel to the third peripheral wall 292. Is extended. The fourth peripheral wall 293 is slightly inside (about 1 mm) from the third peripheral wall 292. That is, on the shaft support side, a fine step having a thickness of about 3 mm is formed between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293.

  In addition, since the thickness of the level | step difference between the 2nd surrounding wall 291 and the 3rd surrounding wall 292 and between the 3rd surrounding wall 292 and the 4th surrounding wall 293 is as thin as about thickness, the main body frame 3 is 2nd. From the front end portion of the peripheral wall 291 to the rear end portion of the fourth peripheral wall 293, it extends substantially linearly in a direction substantially orthogonal to the game panel 409. Moreover, although the second peripheral wall 291 to the fourth peripheral wall 293 are substantially straight, the strength of the main body frame 3 is increased by forming a fine step of about the thickness.

  On the other hand, on the open side, the main body frame 3 is arranged so that the first peripheral wall 290 and the first peripheral wall 290 are rearward from the rear end of the first peripheral wall 290 (the boundary between the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291). A second peripheral wall 291 extends substantially in parallel. The second peripheral wall 291 is slightly inside (about 5 mm) from the first peripheral wall 290. In other words, on the open side, a fine step with a thickness of approximately 1 is formed between the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291.

  A third peripheral wall 292 extends from the rear end of the second peripheral wall 291 (the boundary between the second peripheral wall 291 and the third peripheral wall 292) toward the rear inner side. In addition, a fine step having a thickness of about a thickness is formed at the boundary between the second peripheral wall 291 and the third peripheral wall 292. In other words, the third peripheral wall 292 extends from the front end (the boundary between the second peripheral wall 291 and the third peripheral wall 292) to the rear end (the boundary between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293). It will be formed diagonally backward.

  In addition, a fourth peripheral wall 293 extends from the rear end portion of the third peripheral wall 292 (the boundary between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293) toward the rear inner side. In addition, a fine step having a thickness of about a thickness is formed at the boundary between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293. That is, the fourth peripheral wall 293 on the open side is a boundary between the front end (the boundary between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293) and the rear end (the fourth peripheral wall 293 and the open rear wall 294). Part), it will be formed obliquely rearward.

  In this way, the main body frame 3 is formed obliquely rearward from the front end portion of the third peripheral wall 292 toward the rear end portion of the fourth peripheral wall 293 without interfering with the side frame plate 13 on the open side. The body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2 around the axis connecting the upper shaft support bracket 47 and the lower shaft support bracket 48 (see FIG. 2) (see FIG. 2). 49). In particular, in the present embodiment, when the axial center connecting the upper shaft support bracket 47 and the lower shaft support bracket 48 (see FIG. 2) is used as the rotation center, the open-side peripheral walls 290 to 293 have It is formed along a circular arc whose radius is the length from the center to a portion close to the inner end of the side frame plate 13 (specifically, the first peripheral wall).

  In other words, the main body frame 3 has a plurality of peripheral walls 290 to 293 as strip-shaped plate portions whose longitudinal direction is the vertical direction, and is thicker so that the rear peripheral wall is arranged on the inner side. A slight level difference is formed. That is, the second peripheral wall 291 is inside the first peripheral wall 290, the third peripheral wall 292 is inside the second peripheral wall 291, and the fourth peripheral wall 293 is inside the third peripheral wall 292. Very few step portions are formed so as to be arranged respectively. As a result, the strength of the main body frame 3 can be increased, and the opening-side peripheral wall 290 to 203 can be brought close to the inner end (inner side surface) of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2. While adopting the effect display device 115, the width of the game panel 409 (the width in the left-right direction as viewed from the player), that is, the width of the game area 20 can be sufficiently secured. Further, on the open side, the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293 are inclined obliquely inward toward the rear, so that the main body frame 3 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. Can smoothly open the main frame 3 without interfering with the outer frame 2.

  Further, the game effect unit 4 is inserted into the main body frame 3 described above. More specifically, the front structural member 680 and the panel holder 540 that partition and form the game area 20 are arranged along the inner wall of the first peripheral wall 290 without a gap. Further, the transparent game panel 409 is sandwiched between the front component member 680 and the panel holder 540.

  In addition, the game effect unit 4 is inserted into the main body frame 3 so as to be accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30. That is, the foremost part of the game effect unit 4 (the surface of the game panel 409) is located deeper than the foremost part of the main body frame 3 (the foremost surface of the first peripheral wall 290). The open-side rear wall 294 is molded at a substantially right angle from the rear end of the open-side third peripheral wall 292 toward the inside (left side in front view), and the upper rear wall 295 is the rear of the upper fourth peripheral wall 293. It is molded at a substantially right angle from the end toward the inside (front view lower side), and the shaft support side rear wall 296 is approximately directed from the rear end portion of the shaft support side third peripheral wall 292 toward the inside (right side of the front view). Molded at right angles. Accordingly, the game effect unit 4 is closed in the depth direction by the peripheral wall 290 to 293 of the outer frame 2. As a result, foreign acts are inserted from the side of the game panel 409 to suppress illegal acts such as operating each of the starting ports 602, 604, the general winning port 614 and the opening / closing device 500 provided in the gaming panel 409. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 having excellent security can be provided. In particular, since the peripheral wall 290 to 293 is not formed with an opening other than the lock locking hole 351, the peripheral wall 290 to 293 functions as a covering portion that covers the game effect unit 4 from the side. The cheating from the side with respect to the production unit 4 can be suppressed.

  Behind the panel holder 540, a back unit 510 having a frame-like box-shaped back box 514 that forms a space of a predetermined volume is disposed. An opening 514b (see FIG. 65) is formed on the rear surface side of the back box 514, and the effect display device 115 is arranged so as to close the opening 514b. Behind the effect display device 115, a main control board box 25 that houses a main control board 710 (see FIG. 84) and a peripheral control board box 24 that houses a peripheral control board 810 (see FIG. 85) are mounted.

  Thus, the front structural member 680, the panel holder 540, the game panel 409, the back unit 510, the effect display device 115, the main control board box 25, and the peripheral control board box 24 are accommodated in the main body frame 3. That is, the front structural member 680, the panel holder 540, the game panel 409, the back unit 510, the effect display device 115, the main control board box 25 and the peripheral control board box 24 are mounted on the main body frame 3 as a box-like game box. Is done.

  Here, in other words, the positional relationship among the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the game effect unit 4 is a state in which the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the game effect unit 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. The side portions (outer side surfaces in the longitudinal direction) of the pivot support side and the open side game panel 409 are brought close to the inner ends (inner side surfaces) of the side frame plates 12 and 13 on the pivot support side and the open side, respectively. Is formed. In addition, for each of the pivot support side and the open side, a thin first peripheral wall 290 extends from the front toward the rear between the side portion of the game panel 409 and the inner ends of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is installed. Further, the upper side portion (outer side surface in the short side direction) of the game panel 409 is formed so as to be close to the inner end (inner side surface) of the upper frame plate 10, and the upper side portion and the upper frame plate of the game panel 409 are formed. A thin first peripheral wall 290 extends from the front to the rear also between the inner ends of the tenth. Thereby, the game area 20 formed in the game panel 409 can be designed sufficiently large. In addition, the left limit, right limit, and upper limit of the accommodation space of the game effect unit 4 are easy to understand, and the design of the game effect unit 4 can be facilitated.

  By the way, a light emitting decorative body 1720 is disposed in a space formed by the back unit 510. The light emitting decoration body 1720 includes a plurality of LEDs 1740 as electric decoration members as will be described later, and projects light toward the front side of the game effect unit 4. It should be noted that the LEDs 1740 of the light emitting decoration 1720 are arranged around the effect display device 115 arranged at the approximate center of the back unit 510 and scattered over substantially the entire game area 20.

  In the present embodiment, many of the main components constituting the game effect unit 4 are used as light transmissive members, for example, the game panel 409 is made of a transparent resin. Furthermore, in the space formed by the back unit 510, an effect device such as a light emitting decoration 1720 is disposed. Thus, the game area 20 is not narrowed by the light emitting decoration 1720, and a sufficient space for the game ball to flow down can be secured. Moreover, since the main body frame 3 extends rearward while maintaining a wide state, a wide-area production space 510G (nets shown in FIGS. 48 to 50) for accommodating the production device is provided behind the game panel 409. A hanging portion) is formed, and it is possible to play a three-dimensional game with a wide and deep sense of reality. In particular, an electric decoration member such as a light emitting decoration 1720 arranged in the depth direction can give an impression that the entire game effect unit 4 is lit up in front view, and the depth of the game effect unit 4 It is strongly emphasized that the depth (more specifically, the depth of the production space 510G) is deep. Note that this wide production space 510G is widely formed behind the game panel 409 (particularly, it is formed up to the back of the guide rail 482).

  In addition, the main body frame 3 has a housing portion (game effect unit installation recess) formed so as to be surrounded by the peripheral wall 290 to 293 with almost no opening on the side surface from the first peripheral wall 290 to the fourth peripheral wall 293. 30). The main body frame 3 is integrally molded. Therefore, there are no gaps or the like that can occur when a plurality of plate members are screwed, and the security is improved. Further, a box-shaped game whose main components are the front component member 680, the panel holder 540, the game panel 409, the back unit 510, the effect display device 115, the main control board box 25 and the peripheral control board box 24. The production unit 4 can be accommodated as it is. Thereby, it is only necessary to design the game effect unit 4 in consideration of only the space secured by the peripheral walls 290 to 293, and it is not necessary to consider the balance with other components constituting the pachinko machine 1. The production unit 4 can be easily designed. The gaming panel 409 is provided with winning members such as the start ports 602 and 604, the general winning port 614, and the opening / closing device 500. However, by inserting foreign objects from the side of the gaming panel 409, It is possible to suppress fraud such as operation, and the pachinko machine 1 with excellent security can be provided.

  Moreover, the main body frame 3 is from the peripheral wall 290-293 (in this embodiment, the side wall of the 1st peripheral wall 290 and the 2nd peripheral wall 291) which opposes the side frame plates 12 and 13 among the peripheral walls 290-293. It extends toward the rear. In addition, the main body frame 3 is integrally molded, and the back cover 58 is provided on the rear end surface of the main body frame 3 (open side rear wall 294, upper rear wall 295, shaft support side rear wall 296). As a result, the back cover 58 can be provided without worrying about the interference between the hinge for opening and closing the back cover and the outer frame (more specifically, the side frame plate) as in the prior art. Accordingly, the peripheral wall 290 to 293 can be brought closer to the inner ends of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the width in the left-right direction between the peripheral wall 290 to 293 on the pivot support side and the peripheral wall 290 to 293 on the open side can be increased. Can be wide.

  Here, the flow of the game balls flowing through the prize ball tank 50, the tank rail member 51, the ball path unit 52, and the ball payout device 53 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50. FIG. FIG. 48 is as described above, and FIG. 50 is a side sectional view of the pachinko machine.

  The prize ball tank 50 is disposed in front of the open side rear wall 294 and above the outer frame 2 (more specifically, the peripheral wall 290 to 293 extending from the upper side of the main body frame 3 toward the rear. Placed on the top surface). By the way, since the prize ball tank 50 receives the game balls circulated and supplied from the island facility, the position of the pachinko machine 1 is uniquely determined. That is, since the island facility cannot be remodeled unnecessarily, it is necessary to be able to receive a game ball supplied from the island facility even if any pachinko machine is installed on the island. However, the prize ball tank 50 of this embodiment includes a position (region) for receiving a game ball supplied from the island facility, and is disposed over a wide region extending from the upper surface of the peripheral wall 290 to 293. Thereby, even if the prize ball tank 50 is formed in a shallow dish shape, a large amount of game balls can be stored, so that the peripheral walls 290 to 293 extending from the upper side of the main body frame 3 to the rear are removed from the outer frame 2. As a result, the game effect unit 4 can be enlarged in the vertical direction (the height direction viewed from the player). Therefore, the game area 20 can be enlarged both in the left-right direction and the up-down direction, and the effect space 510G provided behind the game panel 409 can be enlarged both in the left-right direction and the up-down direction. As a result, the game area 20 and the effect space 510G that are enlarged in both the left and right directions and the up and down direction can be formed, so that it is possible to provide a game full of three-dimensionality and profound feeling.

  The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 50 flow to the tank rail member 51 by a gravitational action. The tank rail member 51 is a double rail, and game balls are alternately sent from the rails to the ball path unit 52 one by one by the order supply device 51a. The tank rail member 51 is disposed along the rear surface of the open-side rear wall 294.

  The ball passage unit 52 is a single rail, and is meandered in the width direction (left and right direction as viewed from the player) so that the game ball flowing down by its own weight meanders and flows down. Thereby, the ball pressure more than necessary is not applied to the game ball flowing down in the tank rail member 51. Then, the game balls flowing through the ball passage unit 52 are sent to the ball payout device 53 one by one. The ball passage unit 52 is disposed along the rear surface of the open-side rear wall 294. Further, by making the ball passage unit 52 a single rail, the thickness of the ball passage unit 52 can be reduced in both the front-rear direction and the left-right direction as viewed from the front, and the ball passage unit 52 can be made compact. Can do. Furthermore, since the ball passage unit 52 can meander in the left-right direction, a wide-area effect space 510G formed by the back unit 510 over the entire back side of the game panel 409 can be secured.

  The ball payout device 53 is a device that pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 in accordance with winning, and has a payout motor 1465 for ball cutting. And along the rear surface of the open side rear wall 294, it is disposed below the ball passage unit 52. However, since the game ball paid out from the ball payout device 53 is supplied to the storage unit 361 by the action of gravity, the ball payout device 53 needs to be arranged at a position higher than the storage unit 361. In the present embodiment, the ball payout device 53 is disposed behind the open-side rear wall 294 and slightly higher than the storage portion 361, and is disposed as low as possible ( At least below the effect display device 115).

  Here, a ball supply passage 59 formed in the internal space is formed between the ball payout device 53 and the storage unit 361 so that the flow path of the game ball meanders (see FIG. 16 and the like). A ball outlet 1536 (see FIG. 24) which is an opening formed on the most downstream side of the game ball in the ball supply passage 59 is a prize ball communication rod 431 (see FIGS. 46 and 47) of the dish unit 300 described later. Furthermore, it communicates with the passage notch 478 (see FIG. 26). Then, the game balls paid out from the ball payout device 53 are paid out to the storage unit 361 through the ball supply passage 59 and the prize ball communication rod 431. The ball supply passage 59 can store game balls as much as possible from the rear of the open side rear wall 294 to the storage unit 361. That is, although this ball supply passage 59 cannot be visually recognized by the player, it can substantially store the paid-out game balls, so that there are more game balls than the number of game balls that can be stored in the storage unit 361 (part that can be viewed). Can actually be stored. In particular, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment can store the same or more game balls in the storage unit 361, although there is no conventional lower dish.

  On the other hand, on the most upstream side of the game ball in the ball supply passage 59, the above-described ball payout device 53 is connected and a foul ball inlet 1538 (see FIG. 24), which is an opening through which the game ball can flow, is formed. Yes. The foul ball entrance 1538 communicates with the communication port 473 on the back side of the game effect unit 4. Here, of the game balls that have been ejected by the launching device 57 and entered the game effect unit 4, the game is formed in the gap between the launch guide path 29 (the outer rail 472 and the inner rail 462) without reaching the game area 20. The hit ball that has flowed backward through the injection path of the ball is received by the foul port 489 and enters the communication port 473. Then, the game balls that have entered the communication port 473 are guided from the back side of the game effect unit 4 to the ball supply passage 59 via the foul ball entrance 1538, and the ball supply passage 59 and the prize ball communication pole 431 are the same as described above. After that, it is discharged to the storage unit 361. The ball dispensing device 53 is also provided with a ball removal connecting passage 415 that is a flow path for discharging the game balls with the ball removed from the bottom of the pachinko machine 1 to the inside of the island.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the tank rail member 51, the ball passage unit 52, and the ball dispensing device 53 are all disposed along the rear surface of the open-side rear wall 294 (that is, the above-mentioned). It will be arranged on the rear side of the game box. Thereby, it does not interfere with the display device control board box 119 which is arranged behind the above-mentioned wide-area effect space 510G and attached to the rear side of the effect display device 115. Therefore, it is possible to freely design the arrangement positions of the tank rail member 51, the ball path unit 52, and the ball payout device 53 while ensuring the wide production space 510G and increasing the size of the production display device 115. In particular, it is necessary for the ball passage unit 52 to escape the ball pressure by folding back so that a load exceeding a predetermined ball pressure is not applied. However, since the ball passage unit 52 in the present embodiment is a compact single rail, and is arranged meandering in the left-right direction along the rear surface of the open-side rear wall 294, the arrangement position and the meandering method can be changed. It can be designed freely, and it is possible to avoid clogging due to abnormal ball pressure.

  In addition, since the ball payout device 53 is arranged as low as possible, it is possible to secure a certain amount or more of the game balls present in the pachinko machine 1 and to suppress a ball shortage trouble. That is, if a certain amount or more of game balls existing in the pachinko machine 1 cannot be secured, for example, when a large amount of game balls are paid out, the game paid out more than the amount of game balls existing in the pachinko machine 1 There is concern that the amount of spheres will exceed. Since the amount of game balls existing in the pachinko machine 1 is determined by the amount of game balls existing between the prize ball tank 50 and the ball payout device 53, the ball payout device 53 is arranged as low as possible. Trouble caused by the shortage of balls can be suppressed.

  If the ball payout device 53 is arranged below, the time from winning a game ball to paying out a game ball as a winning ball is shortened, and it is confirmed that the game ball as a prize ball has been paid out reliably. May not be able to confirm. In other words, if there is a certain time lag between winning a prize and paying out a prize ball and paying out a game ball as a winning ball, rather than a series of actions of winning and winning a ball being performed instantaneously It is easy to perform both checks. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the ball supply passage 59 is provided between the ball payout device 53 and the storage portion 361, and the ball passage unit 52 is a single rail. By disposing 53 below, it is possible to provide a certain time lag between winning a prize and paying out a prize ball while suppressing a problem of running out of balls.

  By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, the game board attached to the main body frame is a mountain shape in which only the center portion where the effect display device is provided in the lateral width direction protrudes backward in plan view (that is, when viewed from above). It was common to have a shape or a pyramid shape. However, the game effect unit 4 according to the present embodiment has a square shape having substantially the same protruding width in the rear direction in the horizontal width direction in plan view (that is, when viewed from above). Therefore, the game effect unit 4 has a substantially box-shaped appearance as a whole, but such a characteristic shape is caused by the following points.

  That is, in the game effect unit 4, the effect display device 115 is disposed behind (in the depth direction) the game panel 409 as described above, and a wide effect space 510G is formed in the gap between the effect display device 115 and the game panel 409. is doing. With this structure, the substantially center portion of the game effect unit 4 in the front view largely protrudes behind the game panel 409 (in the depth direction).

  Further, in the game effect unit 4, each light emitting decoration body 1720 as a plurality of light emitting members each having an LED substrate is disposed behind the game panel 409 around the effect display device 115 in a front view. Various substrates are provided behind these light-emitting decorative bodies 1720 (more specifically, on the back side of the back box 514) to control the lighting / flashing of LEDs of the light-emitting decorative bodies 1720.

  In this way, the game effect unit 4 has a plurality of light emitting members and various substrates related to them on the outer peripheral portion with respect to the substantially central portion in front view. Therefore, the outer peripheral portion with respect to the substantially central portion of the game effect unit 4 also largely protrudes behind the game panel 409 (depth direction). With this structure, almost the entire area of the game effect unit 4 in the front view protrudes greatly behind the game panel 409 (in the depth direction), and forms a substantially box-shaped appearance as a whole. Then, the substantially box-shaped game effect unit 4 can be closely fitted into the effect space 510G having a space shape substantially equal to that of the game effect unit 4.

[Detailed configuration of the game production unit]
Next, a detailed configuration of the above-described game effect unit 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a front view of the game effect unit. FIG. 52 is a perspective view of the game effect unit as seen from the front. FIG. 53 is a perspective view of the game effect unit as seen from the back. FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of each main member constituting the game effect unit as seen from the front. 55 is a perspective view of the exploded view of FIG. 54 viewed from the back.

  As shown in the figure, the game effect unit 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 472 and an inner rail 462, and a player operates a handle unit 318 to play a game ball (simply “ A frame-shaped front component member 680 that defines and forms the outer periphery of the game area 20 into which the game area 20 is to be driven, and a transparent plate-like game that is disposed so as to close the game area 20 behind the front component member 680 A panel-shaped panel holder 540 that covers the outer periphery of the panel 409 and the game panel 409 and holds the game panel 409 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear side of the front component 680, and is attached to the rear side of the panel holder 540 A rear unit 510 to be displayed, and an effect display device 115 as an effect display means arranged on the rear side of the back unit 510 and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image. Eteiru. The effect display device 115 is provided with a larger one (for example, about 21 inches) than the effect display device used in the conventional pachinko machine.

  In the game area 20 of the game effect unit 4, a frame-shaped center accessory 620 is disposed at a substantially central portion thereof. The effect image to be displayed can be visually recognized. A chucker inlet 1601 and a chucker outlet 1602 are formed on the left edge of the outer periphery of the center accessory 620 so as to be lined up and down, and a chucker passage through which game balls can flow so as to connect the chucker inlet 1601 and the chucker outlet 1602. (Passing gate 612) is formed (see FIG. 59). A gate sensor 760 that detects a game ball that circulates is provided in the passage gate 612, and after the game ball that has entered from the chucker inlet 1601 is detected by the gate sensor 760, The game area 20 is returned to the left side.

  Further, a warp inlet 1605 is formed below the chucker outlet 1602 in the center accessory 620, and a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 1605 passes through the warp passage 1606, and a lower frame of the center accessory 620. It is guided on a stage 1607 formed on the upper surface.

  In this game area 20, an attacker unit 600 is disposed below the center of the center accessory 620. The attacker unit 600 has a first start port 602 that is always open upward and from which a game ball can be won, and a second start port 604 that is provided below the first start port 602 and has a pair of movable pieces 606 that can be opened and closed. And an opening / closing device 500 arranged below the second start port 604. When the pair of movable pieces 606 is in the closed state, the second start port 604 is unable to receive the game ball or difficult to receive, and when the pair of movable pieces 606 is in the open state, The game ball can be received more easily than the start port 602.

  The opening / closing device 500 includes a special prize opening 500a and a special prize opening / closing door 500b provided corresponding to the special prize opening 500a. The big prize opening 500a is an opening that can accept a game ball. The special prize opening / closing door 500b is a member for switching the special prize opening 500a between an open state in which a game ball can be received and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be received or difficult. It should be noted that when the special winning opening 500a is in the closed state, it is not necessarily limited to the fact that it is not always possible to accept the game ball that is driven toward the game area 20, and it is difficult, preferably extremely difficult. good.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 51, the game area 20 has a winning port member 670 having two general winning ports 614, a special symbol display, a normal symbol display, and the like on the right side of the attacker unit 600. An LED symbol display unit 80 is provided. A slope 683 having a lower left end is provided on the upper surface of the LED symbol display unit 80, and the game ball flowing down on the LED symbol display unit 80 is moved toward the center in the horizontal direction of the game area 20 by the slope 683. It is supposed to be.

  The LED symbol display unit 80 includes a first special symbol display 84 for displaying a lottery result by a first special symbol lottery means 900 to be described later, and a second special symbol display for displaying a lottery result by a second special symbol lottery means 910. 86, the first special symbol hold indicator 88 for displaying the number of lotteries held by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (the number of lottery processes performed by the first special symbol lottery means 900 in the hold state) There is provided a second special symbol hold indicator 90 for displaying the number of lotteries held by the two special symbol lottery means 910 (the number of lottery processes performed by the second special symbol lottery means 910 in the hold state). In addition, the LED symbol display unit 80 is provided with a normal symbol display 82 for displaying a lottery result by the normal symbol lottery means 920 and a normal symbol hold indicator 92 for displaying the number of lotteries held by the normal symbol lottery means 920. It has been. These displays can recognize that a plurality of processes relating to the progress of the game sequentially executed by the main control board 710 described later are functioning based on control data stored in the RAM 713 described later. It can also be said to be a main control function diagnostic display.

  Each of these indicators 82, 84, 86, 88, 90, 92 is composed of, for example, an LED, and the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 900, the second special symbol lottery means, depending on the lighting state of this LED. The lottery result by 910, the lottery result by the normal symbol lottery means 920, the holding number of lotteries by the first special symbol lottery means 900, the holding number of lotteries by the second special symbol lottery means 910, and the holding number of lotteries by the normal symbol lottery means 920 Is notified.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the “number of lottery holds” refers to the number of holds for the determination (lottery process) of whether or not the acquired random number for determination is correct, although the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired. This means, but is not limited to this, and it may be the number of determinations of the random number for determination of the success / failure for which the acquisition of random numbers for determination of the determination / rejection is suspended.

  In the present embodiment, the number of lots to be retained by the first special symbol lottery means 900 may be referred to as “the number of first special symbols to be retained” or “the number of starting memories of the first special symbol”. In addition, the number of lotteries held by the second special symbol lottery means 910 may be referred to as “the number of second special symbols held” or “the number of stored starting symbols of the second special symbol”.

  Further, the first special symbol hold indicator 88 and the second special symbol hold indicator 90 may be the number of lots to be held instead of the lottery hold number. In other words, although it is determined whether or not the random number for determination of success / failure is obtained and whether or not the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired, the determination result is not displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86. , The number of such hold may be displayed.

  The game area 20 further includes a guide member 690 that guides the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 620 in the direction of the attacker unit 600 on the side opposite to the LED symbol display unit 80 in the left-right direction. ing. A slope 691 having a lower right end is formed on the upper surface of the guide member 690, and the game ball is guided to the center side where the attacker unit 600 is arranged by the slope 691.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when a game ball wins the general winning port 614, the first starting port 602, the second starting port 604, and the big winning port 500a, a predetermined number of gaming balls are set according to the winning port. Will be paid out. For example, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 614, 10 game balls win three winning balls when entering the first starting slot 602, and four gaming balls win when winning the second starting slot 604. Then, 13 game balls are paid out when winning the winning prize opening 500a.

  When a game ball that has entered from the chucker entrance 1601 is detected by the gate sensor 760, a predetermined lottery is performed, and after the symbols are variably displayed on the normal symbol display 82, the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. Is done. When a symbol suggesting "winning" is displayed on the normal symbol display 82, the pair of movable pieces 606 having the second start port 604 closed are opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), Meanwhile, a winning can be made to the second starting port 604.

  On the other hand, when a game ball wins one of the first start port 602 and the second start port 604, a random number for success / failure determination is acquired, and when a special symbol variation start condition is satisfied, a predetermined lottery is performed. Then, after the special symbol variation display based on the lottery is started, a predetermined mode indicating the lottery result in either the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 corresponding to the lottery. The special symbol is stopped and displayed. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 84 and 86 in a manner suggesting “big hit”, a game in which the big prize opening / closing door 500b of the opening / closing device 500 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern (for example, A big hit game) occurs, and during that time, a game ball is awarded to the big prize opening 500a, so that more game balls can be obtained. The special symbol variation start condition is satisfied when the special symbol variation display is not performed on either the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86. In addition, when the special symbol variation display is performed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86, the special symbol variation start condition is satisfied when the variation display ends.

  In the game effect unit 4 of this example, a game panel 409 having a obstacle nail planted on the front surface (front surface) has a transparent plate shape, and the player can visually recognize the rear side of the game panel 409. As described above, various decorations and the like of the back unit 510 disposed on the rear side of the game panel 409 can be visually recognized through the game panel 409.

<Retaining structure of game panel in game effect unit>
The holding structure of the game panel 409 in the game effect unit 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the front component member, the game panel, and the panel holder in the game effect unit cut in the vertical direction in an assembled state. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of a front component member, a game panel, a panel holder, and the like that mainly constitute the game effect unit, as viewed from the front. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 57 viewed from the back.

  As described above, the game effect unit 4 of the present embodiment includes a plate-like game panel 409 made of a transparent synthetic resin having a size corresponding to the game area 20, and a composite that holds the game panel 409 detachably from the front. A frame-shaped panel holder 540 made of resin, and an outer rail 472 and an inner rail 462 that are arranged on the front side of the panel holder 540 and define the outer periphery of the game area 20 and guide the game ball into the game area 20 are provided. And a plate-like panel back plate 504 disposed in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height on the rear surface side of the panel holder 540.

  As shown in the figure, the front component member 680 is provided with a plurality of positioning bosses 680a and positioning protrusions 680b protruding rearward on the rear surface side. Although the positioning boss 680a and the positioning projection 680b will be described in detail later, the positioning boss 680a and the positioning projection 680b can be positioned with respect to the panel holder 540, the substrate holder 505, and the game panel 409 disposed on the rear side.

  The gaming panel 409 in the gaming effect unit 4 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 20, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, or the like. Yes. The game panel 409 is thinner than the panel holder 540 and has a minimum thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail 410 (see FIG. 56) is installed. Yes.

  The game panel 409 has a plurality of fitting holes 409a formed by round holes arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 409b extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. Each is provided. The fitting hole 409a and the long hole 409b are arranged outside the game area 20 and are positioned with the panel holder 540. Further, the game panel 409 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 409c whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and the lower side, respectively. The engagement step portion 409c has a shape in which approximately half of the thickness of the game panel 409 is cut out, and is disposed outside the game area 20 in the same manner as the fitting hole 409a and the long hole 409b. The game panel 409 is engaged and fixed to the panel holder 540.

  Further, the game panel 409 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 409d at predetermined positions. The inner rail 462 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 680b protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 462 into the inner rail fixing hole 409d.

  In addition, as shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 56, the game panel 409 has a lower hole 409f for planting the obstacle nail 410 so as to penetrate the game panel 409. The lower hole 409f The inner diameter of the hanger 410 is slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the obstacle nail 410 on the planting side. A plurality of lower holes 409f are drilled at predetermined positions in the game panel 409, and obstacle nails 410 are planted in the lower holes 409f from the front side by using an obstacle nail planting device (not shown). A large number of obstacle nails 410 are arranged in a predetermined gauge arrangement.

  The obstacle nail 410 according to the present embodiment has a head diameter of 4 to 5 mm and a total length of 25 to 30 mm. And the driving | running | working part formed in the axial part of the obstruction nail 410 is rounded at the front-end | tip, and the helical part cut | disconnected helically is formed. That is, since the tip shape of the driving portion of the obstacle nail 410 is rounded, the obstacle nail 410 can be easily inserted into the small-diameter pilot hole 409f. Furthermore, it is easy to embed the obstacle nail 410 in the game panel 409 by the torsion part formed in the driving part of the obstacle nail 410. The depth at which the obstacle nail 410 is implanted with respect to the game panel 409 (so-called driving dimension) is preferably about 10 mm.

  Further, the game panel 409 is formed with an opening 409e having a predetermined inner diameter and penetrating in the front-rear direction so as to be provided with a center accessory 620, an attacker unit 600, a prize opening member 670, an LED symbol display unit 80, and the like. In addition, fixing holes for fixing them are formed at appropriate positions.

  The panel holder 540 in the game effect unit 4 has a size that includes the game panel 409 and has a substantially rectangular shape, and is a member made of wooden plywood in the game effect unit of a conventional pachinko machine (for example, a game effect unit base). It is made of a thermoplastic synthetic resin having a thickness substantially equal to the thickness of (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 540 includes a holding step 540a that detachably holds the game panel 409 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 20 inside the holding step 540a. It mainly includes a through hole 540b penetrating in the direction.

  The holding step portion 540a of the panel holder 540 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 409. It is designed to be almost the same surface. Further, the holding step portion 540 a has a front inner peripheral surface that is sized so that a predetermined amount of clearance C is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the game panel 409. With this clearance C, even if the game panel 409 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed (see FIG. 56). An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance C.

  Further, the panel holder 540 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 409a and the long hole 409b formed in the game panel 409 held by the holding step portion 540a, and forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 540a. A plurality of projecting pins 540c that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 409a and the long holes 409b of the game panel 409 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 540c into the fitting holes 409a and the long holes 409b of the game panel 409, the panel holder 540 and the game panel 409 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 540 is provided with an engaging claw 540d and an engaging piece 540e that engage with the engaging step portion 409c at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 409c of the game panel 409. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the engaging claw 540d is disposed on the upper holding step portion 540a of the panel holder 540, and corresponds to the upper engaging step portion 409c of the game panel 409. The holding step 540a protrudes forward from the front surface and is elastically engaged with the engagement step 409c. The engaging claw 540d has such a size that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 540. On the other hand, the engagement piece 540e is disposed on the lower holding step portion 540a of the panel holder 540, corresponds to the lower engagement step portion 409c of the game panel 409, and is played between the front surface of the holding step portion 540a. It is configured such that a predetermined amount is extended toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 540 in a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 409c of the panel 409 to be inserted is formed. By engaging the engagement step portion 409c of the game panel 409 with the engagement claws 540d and the engagement pieces 540e, the game panel 409 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 540.

  Further, the panel holder 540 is provided with a boss insertion hole 540f penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the positioning boss 680a provided in the front component member 680 can be inserted. By inserting the positioning boss 680a of the front component 680 through the boss insertion hole 540f, the panel holder 540 and the front component 680 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 and 58, the panel holder 540 has a mounting support portion 540g that is recessed by a predetermined amount on the rear side so as to leave a lower side and an outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. Is provided. With this attachment support portion 540g, the rear surface of the panel holder 540 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to the predetermined height and the rear outer peripheral portion protrudes backward, and the amount of the depression ( The depth (depth) is about 2.5 mm that can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 514d (see FIG. 67, etc.) of the back box 514 in the back unit 510 attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 540g. And preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 540g, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 514d from projecting to the rear side of the panel holder 540, and the panel holder 540, that is, the game effect unit 4 is connected to the pachinko machine. It can be securely installed and installed in one game effect unit installation recess 30.

  Further, on the rear surface side of the panel holder 540, it is formed below the position where the mounting support portion 540g is formed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and is recessed toward the front side to accommodate the panel back plate 504. A storage recess 540h, and a locking portion 540i that is disposed so as to penetrate through the storage recess 540h in the front-rear direction and that can lock a locking claw 504c formed on the panel back plate 504. The housing recess 540h detachably accommodates the panel back plate 504 by engaging the locking claw 504c of the panel back plate 504 with the locking portion 540i, and the rear surface of the accommodated panel back plate 504 is a panel. The holder 540 is formed so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the panel holder 540 has a plurality of mounting holes 540j arranged in a rear surface side of the mounting support portion 540g and on the upper side of the housing recess 540h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw in a predetermined arrangement. Has been placed. Further, the panel holder 540 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 540k arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 540j. The positioning hole 540k is for inserting a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion 514f formed on the fixing portion 514d of the back box 514) formed on a member that is mounted and fixed using the mounting hole 540j. In this example, the positioning hole 540k is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the back.

  The mounting hole 540j has a large diameter and a small diameter so that the diameter of the mounting hole can be appropriately set according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 540j may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 540 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 540l that open to the rear side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 540 is reduced by the thinned portions 540l. It has become. By the way, as shown in FIG. 57, these thinning portions 540l are not formed in a predetermined range from the front side of the housing recess 540h, that is, from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 540 to a predetermined height. That is, within this predetermined range, since the front surface of the panel holder 540 is a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the connection passage portion 477 of the front component member 680 disposed on the front surface is a substantially flat surface. Become. Therefore, the game balls launched from the launching device 57 are guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 540 is formed with a thinned portion 540l so that the mounting holes 540j and the like are formed in a boss shape, and support them and maintain the strength of the panel holder 540. For this reason, lattice-shaped ribs are formed.

  The panel holder 540 has a obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and a positioning portion 540m corresponding to positioning means such as an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 409 on the obstacle nail planting device. Can be set in the state. Further, an opening 540n that communicates with the out port 471 of the front component 680 and a communication hole 540o that communicates with the foul port 489 of the front component 680 are further provided at the lower portion of the panel holder 540.

  Next, the panel back plate 504 is disposed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 540 so as to cover the lightening portion 540l within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the rear surfaces of the housing recess 540h of the panel holder 540 A plurality of screw holes 504a that can be accommodated so as to be substantially on the same surface, are arranged in a predetermined arrangement on the planar rear surface, and can be screwed into predetermined screws, and a plurality of screw holes 504a are arranged to correspond to the screw holes 504a. A positioning hole 504b, a locking claw 504c that can be locked to the locking portion 540i of the panel holder 540, and a concave portion 504d for reducing the weight so as not to penetrate from the front side are provided.

  The screw holes 504a and the positioning holes 504b in the panel back plate 504 have substantially the same configuration as the mounting holes 540j and the positioning holes 540k in the panel holder 540. Similarly to the panel holder 540, the panel back plate 504 is formed into a boss-like portion where the screw holes 504a and the positioning holes 504b are formed by the recessed portion 504d, and supports the panel back plate. In order to maintain the strength of 504, grid-like ribs are formed. Further, the panel back plate 504 is provided with an opening 504e penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 540n of the panel holder 540, the communication hole 540o, and the boss insertion hole 540f.

  The panel back plate 504 is housed in the housing recess 540h of the panel holder 540, and the locking claw 504c of the panel back plate 504 is locked to the locking portion 540i of the panel holder 540, thereby being integrated with the panel holder 540. In this state, the rear surface of the panel back plate 504 is substantially flush with the rear surface of the panel holder 540. By integrating the panel holder 540 and the panel back plate 504 in this way, the mounting holes 540j and screw holes are arranged on the rear surface side of the panel holder 540 in a predetermined arrangement over the entire outer periphery of the through-hole 540b. The mounting holes made of 504a and the like and the positioning holes 540k and 504b are arranged, and the presence of these mounting holes allows a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed at an arbitrary position.

  As described above, according to the holding structure of the gaming panel 409 in this example, the gaming panel 409 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 540a of the panel holder 540 from the front, and the engaging claws 540d and the engaging pieces 540e By engaging the engagement step portion 409c, the game panel 409 can be held by the panel holder 540, and the front side of the game panel 409 and the panel holder 540 are substantially flush with each other. Therefore, it becomes possible to set the game panel 409 on the conventional obstacle nail planting device while holding the game panel 409 on the panel holder 540 without modifying the conventionally used obstacle nail planting device. An increase in the cost of planting can be suppressed.

  In addition, the game effect unit 4 having the game area 20 is divided into a game panel 409, a panel holder 540, and a front component member 680. Therefore, depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1, the position of obstacle nails, winning holes, etc. The game panel 409 with a variable speed can be used as a replacement part, and the panel holder 540 and the front component member 680 can be used as a common part. The panel holder 540, the front component member 680, and the like can be recycled and the game panel can be recycled. The pachinko machine 1 provided with the game effect unit 4 that can be adapted to various types of models by simply exchanging only 409 can be obtained.

  Further, since the panel holder 540 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 540j in a predetermined arrangement in advance, various predetermined units such as the back unit 510 and the substrate holder 505 that are mounted and fixed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 540 according to the model. Even if the mounting and fixing positions of the members are different from each other, the panel holder 540 is designed to correspond to the position of the mounting hole 540j, so that the panel holder 540 and the common parts of the pachinko machine 1 are independent of the model. Can be done.

  As described above, in the game effect unit 4 according to the present embodiment, at least the game panel 409 is configured by the transparent member, and the electrical decorations and the like arranged behind the game panel 409 can be visually recognized. In other words, it is not necessary to provide an electric decoration or the like in the game area, and the area where the game ball can actually flow down in the game area 20 can be widened as much as possible. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating. Further, since the game panel 409 in which the game area 20 is formed is configured by a transparent member, the player can visually recognize what is arranged behind the game panel 409. For example, a large effect display device 115 extending over the entire game area 20 is arranged behind the game panel 409 to display an unprecedented large effect image, and various effects and decorations are displayed in depth. It can be set as the structure of the game production | presentation unit 4 with a sense of depth which is not arranged until now. Thereby, it becomes possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can attract the player's interest.

<Center role>
A detailed configuration of the center accessory 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61. FIG. 59 is a front view of the center accessory. FIG. 60 is a perspective view of the center accessory as viewed from the front. FIG. 61 is a perspective view of the center accessory as seen from the back.

  The center accessory 620 has a size that occupies a width of three quarters or more with respect to the width direction of the game area 20 (see FIG. 51 and the like), and is substantially around the periphery of the opening 409e formed in the game panel 409. It is formed in a frame shape along. An effect image displayed on the effect display device 115 arranged behind can be viewed through the frame of the center accessory 620.

  On the upper edge of the center accessory 620, an effect decoration body 1608 in which the letters “MAGMA ZONE” and “FREEZE ZONE” are formed in a circular shape is disposed slightly from the center in the left-right direction. Yes. On the upper surface of the effect decoration body 1608, a guide shelf 1609 having a lower right side is provided, and a game ball that has been driven to the upper side of the effect decoration body 1608 is guided to the induction shelf 1609, and plays a center role. The object 620 is guided to the right outer periphery. On the other hand, the upper surface on the left side of the decoration body 1608 for the production at the upper edge is provided with a guide shelf 1610 having a lower left side, and the game ball flowing down on the guide shelf 1610 is the outer periphery on the left side of the center accessory 620. To be guided to.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the effect decoration body 1608 of the center accessory 620 is formed such that a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball is formed between the guide shelf 1609 and the inner peripheral upper portion in the game area 20. It extends upward. As long as the game ball driven into the game area 20 does not roll along the inner periphery of the game area 20, the game ball does not flow down the right outer periphery of the center accessory 620 beyond the effect decoration body 1608. Yes.

  At the left edge of the center accessory 620, a chucker inlet 1601, a chucker outlet 1602, and a warp inlet 1605 are provided on the outer peripheral surface from above. The chucker inlet 1601 and the chucker outlet 1602 communicate with each other as a passing gate 612. A game sensor circulating in the passage gate 612 can be detected by the gate sensor 760 disposed in the passage gate 612.

  In addition, a right edge guiding path 1611 in which a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball is formed between the outer periphery of the center accessory 620 and the inner periphery right part of the game area 20 at the right edge portion. The game ball guided to the guidance shelf 1609 beyond the decoration for decoration 1608 is supplied to the slope 683 of the LED symbol display unit 80 through the right edge guide path 1611. Yes. The right edge guide path 1611 is formed with a plurality of ridges 1612 protruding toward the inside of the guide path, and a game ball flowing through the right edge guide path 1611 abuts on the ridges 1612. It is possible to suppress the circulation speed of the game ball from being attenuated and the flow speed of the game ball from increasing. Thereby, it is possible to prevent damage to the LED symbol display unit 80 and the like disposed below the right edge guiding path 1611 due to the game balls released from the right edge guiding path 1611.

  A stage 1607 on which a game ball can roll in the left-right direction is formed at the lower edge of the center accessory 620 on the upper surface in the frame. The stage 1607 has a shape in which the center in the left-right direction is lowered, and includes a first stage 1607a and a second stage 1607b that have different rolling surfaces and are arranged in the front-rear direction. A first start port 602, a second start port 604, and a big prize opening 500a are arranged below the center of the stage 1607 in the left-right direction. The game balls that have entered the warp inlet 1605 are supplied to the stage 1607, and when the game balls flowing down the left side of the center object 620 in the game area 20 enter the warp inlet 1605, the stage After being supplied onto 1607 and rolling on the stage 1607 in the left-right direction, the game balls can be released to the first start port 602 and the second start port 604 so as to win with a high probability. Yes.

  The center accessory 620 in this example is a flange-shaped portion 620a that contacts the front peripheral edge of the opening 409e in the game panel 409, and the flange-shaped portion 620a extends in a substantially perpendicular direction and is inserted into the opening 409e of the game panel 409. Insertion portion 620b. By the flange-shaped portion 620a and the insertion portion 620b, the inner peripheral surface (cut surface) of the opening 409e in the game panel 409 is hidden from the player. The insertion portion 620b is configured such that a part thereof extends to the vicinity of the front surface of the effect display device 115 inside the back unit 510. Although details will be described later, the insertion portion 620b of the center accessory 620 is formed in a shape such that a part thereof is continuous with the wall-shaped side surface of the light emitting decorative body 1720 disposed in the back unit 510.

  The center accessory 620 is composed of a member that combines a white opaque member and a white translucent member from the decoration element 1608 at the upper edge to the lower end of the right edge, and the decoration for the effect. From the guide shelf 1610 arranged on the left side of 1608, the left edge portion and the lower edge portion (including the stage 1607) are made of a colorless transparent member. The outer surface of the center accessory 620 is shaped into a shape simulating ice or an iceberg.

<Attacker unit and prize opening member>
The configurations of the attacker unit 600 and the winning opening member 670 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62A is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the front and obliquely upward, and FIG. 62B is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the obliquely upward and rear side.

  The attacker unit 600 is inserted from the front into the opening 409e of the game panel 409, and protrudes from the rear side of the game panel 409 to the rear, and extends from the front surface of the casing 600a along the surface of the game panel 409. The flange part 600b contact | abutted with the front side peripheral part of the part 409e is provided. The casing 600a includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 774 for opening and closing a pair of movable pieces 606 for opening and closing the second start opening 604, and a large winning opening opening / closing door 500b for opening and closing the large winning opening 500a of the opening / closing device 500. And an opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 778 for driving the opening / closing device, and the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 774 and the opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 778 are each provided with a pair of movable pieces 606 and a prize opening opening / closing door 500b by a link mechanism (not shown). Can be driven to open and close.

  Further, the casing 600a is provided with a second start port sensor 782 for detecting a game ball won in the second start port 604, and an opening / closing device count sensor 776 for detecting a game ball won in the big winning port 500a. Yes. Although not shown, the game balls detected by the second start port sensor 782 and the opening / closing device count sensor 776 are discharged downward from different discharge ports formed on the lower surface of the casing 600a. ing.

  As shown in the figure, a first start port 602, a second start port 604, and a general winning port 614 are provided on the front surface of the flange portion 600b of the attacker unit 600 so as to protrude forward. Further, a guide rod 1641 integrally formed with the flange portion 600b extends rearward from the first start port 602 and the general winning port 614. A plurality of through holes 1642 are formed in the flange portion 600b, and a predetermined screw is screwed into the front surface of the game panel 409 through the attachment holes 1642, whereby the attacker unit 600 is attached to the game panel 409. It can be fixed.

  Reference numeral 1643 in the drawing is a protrusion for positioning the fixed position of the attacker unit 600 with respect to the game panel 409, and a positioning hole into which the protrusion 1643 is inserted at the position of the game panel 409 corresponding to the protrusion 1643. Are drilled (not shown).

  On the other hand, the winning hole member 670 includes a main body portion 1671 having two general winning holes 614 arranged in the vertical direction, a flange portion 1672 extending from the rear of the main body portion 1671 along the front surface of the game panel 409, and a main body portion. And a guide rod 1673 extending rearward from each of the general winning ports 614 of 1671. The flange portion 1672 of the winning opening member 670 is formed with a through-hole mounting hole 1694, and a predetermined screw is screwed into the front surface of the gaming panel 409 through the mounting hole 1674 so that the winning port member 670 is connected to the gaming panel. It can be fixed to 409.

  In addition, each of the guide rods 1641 and 1673 of the above-described attacker unit 600 and prize opening member 670 has a length that extends rearward from the rear surface of the game panel 409 through the opening 409e of the game panel 409. The guide rods 1641 and 1673 communicate with a ball guide unit 1760 provided in the back unit 510 to be described later, and a game ball guided through each guide rod 1641 and 1673 is detected by each sensor in the ball guide unit 1760. Then, it is discharged downward.

  Further, in this example, the attacker unit 600 and the winning prize opening member 670 are formed of a white non-translucent member. It is considered as a color.

<Board holder>
The configuration of the substrate holder 505 will be described with reference to FIGS. The board holder 505 in the game effect unit 4 is disposed on the rear surface side of the panel back plate 504, has a box shape with the front and upper sides opened, and includes a game ball discharge port 505a and a bottom plate 505b. The game ball discharge port 505a is a game medium discharge port having a size through which a game ball can pass. The bottom plate 505b is a plate-like portion that is inclined so that the upper surface thereof becomes lower toward the game ball outlet 505a. The substrate holder 505 collects game balls that have been driven into the game area 20 and can discharge them downward from the game ball discharge port 505a. The substrate holder 505 supports the main control substrate box 25 having the main control substrate 710 on the back side thereof.

  Further, the substrate holder 505 is provided with a cylindrical fixed boss 505e that fits with the positioning boss 680a of the front component 680 at a predetermined position on the front side thereof. Then, the fixed boss 505 e is fitted to the positioning boss 680 a of the front component 680 with the panel holder 540 sandwiched between the fixed boss 505 e and the front component 680. At the same time, by screwing a predetermined screw into the positioning boss 680a of the front component 680 through the through hole 505f penetrating the fixed boss 505e from the rear of the substrate holder 505, the front component 680, the panel holder 540, and the substrate holder 505 are attached. It can be fixed together.

  Further, the substrate holder 505 is provided with an opening receiving portion 505g communicating with the communication port 473 of the front component member 680 at the lower part of the front surface thereof. The opening receiving portion 505g can guide the game ball to the lower side of the substrate holder 505 at a position different from the game ball discharge port 505a. The “dead ball” received inside the substrate holder 505 can be distinguished from the game ball that was missed when the game ball was driven into the game area 20.

  With this structure, the main members (the front component member 680, the game panel 409, the panel holder 540, the panel back plate 504, the board holder 505, etc.) constituting the game effect unit 4 can be easily and integrally assembled. In particular, a transparent resin game panel 409 is suitably held, and a center role 620, a back unit 510, an effect display device 115, and the like are arranged before and after the game panel 409, thereby providing an unprecedented depth game. The production unit 4 can be realized.

<Back unit>
A detailed configuration of the back unit 510 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 63 is a front view of the back unit. FIG. 64 is a perspective view of the rear unit as viewed from the front and obliquely above. FIG. 65 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the rear and obliquely above. FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view in which the back unit is disassembled for each member and viewed obliquely from the upper front. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view in which the back unit is disassembled for each member and viewed obliquely from the rear. 68A is an exploded perspective view showing the upper left light-emitting decorative body in the back unit disassembled for each member and shown obliquely from the upper front, and FIG. 68B shows the diffuser lens member in FIG. FIG. FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the lower left light-emitting decorative body in the back unit, disassembled for each member and viewed obliquely from the front upper side. 70A is an exploded perspective view in which the upper right light emitting decorative body in the back unit is disassembled for each member and viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 70B is the lower right light emitting decorative body in the back unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every and was seen from diagonally forward. FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right corner light emitting decorative body in the back unit, disassembled for each member and viewed obliquely from the front upper side.

  FIG. 72 is a perspective view of the right middle movable light-emitting decorative body as seen obliquely from the front and above. 73A is a left side view showing a state in which the pair of first surface forming members in the middle right movable light emitting decorative body is opened, and FIG. 73B shows a state in which the pair of first surface forming members are closed. It is a left view shown. FIG. 74 is a perspective view of the upper left movable light emitting decorative body as seen obliquely from the upper front. FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view showing the moving mechanism in the upper left movable light emitting decoration. FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the mobile assembly in the upper left movable light emitting decorative body in an exploded manner. FIG. 77 is a perspective view of the lower left movable light emitting decorative body as seen obliquely from the upper front. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view showing the moving mechanism in the lower left movable light emitting decorative body in an exploded manner. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view showing the moving body assembly in the lower left movable light emitting decorative body in an exploded manner. FIG. 80 is a front view of the upper left upper light emitting decorative body. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view showing the left upper left light emitting decorative body in an exploded manner. FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view showing the left middle lower light emitting decorative body in an exploded manner. 83 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG.

  The back unit 510 in the game effect unit 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a box of a predetermined depth (depth) that is attached to the rear side of the panel holder 540 and is open on the front side, and is an opening that penetrates the rear wall 514a. A back box 514 having 514b, and a plurality of light emitting decorations 1720 arranged on the outer periphery of the opening 514b of the rear wall 514a in the back box 514 are provided.

  The back box 514 in the back unit 510 has a rectangular outer shape in front view and a rectangular tube-shaped outer tube portion 514c extending in the front-rear direction with a predetermined width, and a plurality of flange-shaped flange portions extending outward from the front end of the outer tube portion 514c. A fixing portion 514d, a rear wall 514a for closing the rear end opening of the outer cylinder portion 514c, and a rectangular opening 514b penetrating the rear wall 514a are provided. A fixing hole 514e penetrating in the front-rear direction and a positioning protrusion 514f protruding forward are formed in the fixing portion 514d. After the fixing portion 514d is brought into contact with the rear surface side of the panel holder 540, a predetermined screw is screwed into the mounting holes 540j and 504a of the panel holder 540 and the panel back plate 504 through the fixing hole 514e. The box 514, that is, the back unit 510 can be attached and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 540. Further, the positioning protrusion 514f can be positioned in the relative position between the panel holder 540 and the back unit 510 by fitting with the positioning holes 540k and 504b formed on the rear side of the panel holder 540 and the panel back plate 504. It has become. In addition, as shown in the drawing, some of the fixing portions 514d are not formed with the positioning projections 514f.

  On the front wall side of the back wall 514a of the back box 514, an attachment hole for attaching and fixing the light emitting decorative body 1720, a boss having an attachment hole formed at the tip, and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, on the rear surface side of the rear wall 514a, a panel relay terminal plate fixing portion 514g for mounting and fixing the panel relay terminal plate 750 (see FIGS. 55 and 84) and a first connected to the panel relay terminal plate 750 are provided. A first decoration control board box fixing portion 514h for attaching and fixing the first decoration control board box 1713 having the decoration control board 746 (see FIG. 85), and a first decoration control board 746 of the first decoration control board box 1713. A second decoration control board box fixing portion 514i for mounting and fixing a second decoration control board box 1715 having a second decoration control board 748 (see FIG. 85) connected to

  The panel relay terminal board 750 is a relay board for connecting the main control board 710 of the main control board box 25 and the game effect unit 4. Further, the first decoration control board 746 is the LED 1740 (corresponding to the unit decoration lamp 852 in FIG. 85) on each board (upper left board 1726h, lower left board 1730h, left middle board 1748, etc.) included in each light emitting decoration body 1720. It is a control board for controlling a light emission mode. In addition, the second decoration control board 748 is provided with each moving mechanism 1725d, each moving mechanism 1725d, and the like in each board (right middle movable light emitting decoration body 1725, upper left movable light emitting decoration body 1726, lower left movable light emitting decoration body 1730, etc.). It is a control board for controlling the drive mode of 1726b, 1730b (equivalent to the drive unit for effect 854 in FIG. 85). That is, the first decoration control board 746 and the second decoration control board 748 cooperate with each other to control decorations of the light emitting decorations 1720 and the like.

  In addition, the back box 514 is provided with liquid crystal fixing portions 514j for detachably mounting and fixing the effect display device 115 on the left and right sides of the opening 514b on the rear surface side of the rear wall 514a. The liquid crystal fixing portion 514j on one of the left and right sides (right side in the rear view) is provided with a slide piece 1716 that can slide in the vertical direction. The fixing piece 115a (see FIGS. 54 and 55) of the effect display device 115 is inserted into the liquid crystal fixing portion 514j, and the opposite fixing piece (not shown) is inserted into the corresponding liquid crystal fixing portion 514j, and the slide piece. By sliding 1716 downward, the effect display device 115 can be attached and fixed to the rear side of the back box 514.

  In this back box 514, the effect display device 115 is attached and fixed to the rear surface side of the rear wall 514a, so that the opening 514b of the rear wall 514a is closed by the effect display device 115. Then, by attaching and fixing the effect display device 115 to the back box 514, the back box 514 becomes a box shape whose front is opened by the cylindrical outer tube portion 514c, the rear wall 514a, and the effect display device 115. With the back box 514, a space of a predetermined volume that is substantially sealed except for the front side can be formed on the rear side of the game panel 409. In this example, a light emitting decorative body 1720 capable of various effects is arranged in this space. Note that game balls may be distributed in this space. Further, as shown in the figure, the back box 514 of the present example does not have a rear wall 514a formed on a single plane, and the distance (depth) from the front surface of the back box 514 to the rear wall 514a is 50 mm to 100 mm. It is within the range.

  That is, the back box 514 is formed with an opening 514b substantially in the center, and the effect display device 115 is arranged so as to face the opening 514b. The back unit 510 is attached to the back side of the game panel 409 so as to form an effect space 510G described later. The effect display device 115 is arranged so that the liquid crystal display surface is substantially parallel to the game panel 409, and thereby, the effect display is performed from the front side of the game effect unit 4 through the opening of the center accessory 620. The liquid crystal display surface of the device 115 becomes visible. Note that a transparent shielding plate that shields from the game area 20 is provided in the opening of the center accessory 620, and the rear of the shielding plate is also included in the above-described effect space 510G.

  A light emitting decoration body 1720 in the back unit 510 includes an upper left light emitting decoration body 1721 disposed from the upper left center in the back box 514, an upper right light emitting decoration body 1722 disposed adjacent to the right side of the upper left light emitting decoration body 1721, A lower left light emitting decoration body 1723 arranged from the lower left center in the back box 514 and a lower right light emission decoration body 1724 arranged adjacent to the right side of the lower left light emission decoration body 1723 are provided. In addition, a right middle movable light emitting decoration body 1725 that is movable in accordance with the gaming state is disposed at a substantially central position in the vertical direction on the right side in the back box 514.

  Further, the light emitting decoration body 1720 is disposed at the upper left end in the back box 514 and adjacent to the left side of the upper left light emission decoration body 1721, and is movable according to the gaming state. The left middle upper light emitting decorative body 1727 disposed adjacent to the lower side of the decorative body 1726 and the left middle light emitting element disposed adjacent to the lower side of the left middle upper light emitting decorative body 1727 and approximately at the center in the vertical direction of the back unit 510. The decorative body 1728, the left middle lower light emitting decoration body 1729 arranged adjacent to the lower side of the left middle light emitting decoration body 1728, and the lower left light emitting decoration body 1723 adjacent to the lower side of the left middle lower light emitting decoration body 1729. A lower left movable light emitting decoration body 1730 which is arranged adjacent to the left side and is movable according to the gaming state, and these upper left movable light emission decoration body 1726, left middle upper light emission decoration body 1727, left middle light emission decoration body 1728, lower left middle decoration Light emission Kazaritai 1729 and lower left movable luminous decorative body 1730, is as shown, the left end of the back box 514, are arranged in the vertical direction.

  On the left side of the back box 514, the light emitting decorations 1720 arranged in the vertical direction have the letter “E” on the front surface of the upper left movable light emission decoration body 1726 and “AG” on the front surface of the left middle upper light emission decoration body 1727. , The letter “CE” is formed on the front face of the left middle lower light emitting decorative body 1729, and the letter “I” is formed on the front face of the lower left movable light emitting decorative body 1730, respectively. The “ICEAGE” logo, which characterizes the model, is now appearing.

  Although the right middle movable light emitting decoration 1725 will be described in detail later, when the pair of first surface forming members 1725a is opened, the second surface forming member 1725b appears to protrude, and the pair of first surface forming members 1725a When closed, the second surface forming member 1725b can be retracted and hidden.

  Further, the upper left movable light emitting decoration body 1726 and the lower left movable light emission decoration body 1730 can be moved in the left-right direction, respectively, and the left half of the upper left light emission decoration body 1721 and the lower left light emission decoration body 1723 in the state of moving to the rightmost side. Is formed so that it can be substantially covered.

  The light emitting decorative body 1720 further includes a right lower corner light emitting decorative body 1731 disposed at the lower right corner in the back box 514 and disposed adjacent to the right side of the lower right light emitting decorative body 1724. 66 and 67, reference numeral 1732 is an upper left corner decoration member disposed on the front surface of the upper left corner of the back box 514, and reference numeral 1733 is a lower left corner decoration member disposed on the front surface of the lower left corner of the back box 514. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 68, the upper left light emitting decorative body 1721 in the light emitting decorative body 1720 includes a first surface forming member 1721a and a first surface forming member 1721a having a surface shape in which a plurality of planes having different arrangement angles are combined. A second surface forming member 1721b which is arranged adjacent to the surface and has a shape of a combination of a plurality of curved ridges, and a diffusion which is arranged behind the first surface forming member 1721a and the second surface forming member 1721b. The lens member 1721c is composed of an upper left substrate 1741 and a part of the upper right back substrate 1744, which are arranged on the rear side of the diffuser lens member 1721c and have a plurality of LEDs 1740 mounted on the surface thereof.

  The first surface forming member 1721a of the upper left light-emitting decorative body 1721 is formed in a multi-sided shape using a blue transparent member and having an angular surface shape. That is, a plurality of relatively large multi-faceted prisms are formed on the surface, whereby light from the front side and light from the LED 1740 are gently diffused to express a waved sea surface (water surface). Is. The second surface forming member 1721b uses a red transparent member, and a plurality of ridges with curved surface shapes are arranged in a curved line to represent flowing lava (magma). It is.

  The diffuser lens member 1721c of the upper left light emitting decorative body 1721 is made of a colorless and transparent member, and has a plurality of first ridges 1721d extending in the up and down direction in a curved shape on the front side, and a rear surface. There are a plurality of second ridges 1721e arranged on the side at intervals smaller than the arrangement interval of the first ridges 1721d and extending in the left-right direction in a wavy shape in cross section (see FIG. 68B). By the first convex line 1721d, the front surface side of the diffusing lens member 1721c expresses the flow in the same manner as the second surface forming member 1721b. The second ridge 1721e expresses waves in the sea. In addition to the appearance due to the surface shape, the diffusion lens member 1721c can diffuse light from the LED 1740 disposed on the rear side more widely by the lens action of the first ridge 1721d and the second ridge 1721e. In addition, the thickness of the diffusing lens member 1721c can be reduced.

  The upper left light emitting decorative body 1721 has a configuration in which a diffusing lens member 1721c extends to the left side of the first surface forming member 1721a, and the extended portion does not go through the first surface forming member 1721a. It can be exposed directly to the front side. The portion of the diffusing lens member 1721c that extends to the left is covered with the front left exposure by the upper left movable light emitting decoration 1726 with the upper left movable light emitting decoration 1726 moved to the right end (see FIG. 63). The upper left movable light emitting decoration 1726 is exposed to the front side in a state where it moves to the left end side.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the lower left light emitting decorative body 1723 in the light emitting decorative body 1720 includes a first surface forming member 1723a and a first surface forming member 1723a having a surface shape in which a plurality of planes having different arrangement angles are combined. A second surface forming member 1723b which is arranged adjacent to the surface and has a shape of a combination of a plurality of curved ridges, and a diffusion which is arranged behind the first surface forming member 1723a and the second surface forming member 1723b. The lens member 1723c, and a lower left substrate 1742 and a part of the lower middle substrate 1745 arranged on the rear side of the diffusing lens member 1723c and having a plurality of LEDs 1740 mounted thereon.

  Similarly to the upper left light-emitting decorative body 1721, the lower left light-emitting decorative body 1723 also has a first surface forming member 1723a made of a blue transparent member and waved by a plurality of relatively large multifaceted prisms formed on the surface. While representing the standing sea surface, the second surface forming member 1723b represents a lava (magma) flowing out using a red transparent member. Further, the diffusing lens member 1723c is also configured in the same manner as the diffusing lens member 1721c of the upper left light emitting decorative body 1721, and a plurality of first ridges 1723d on the front side and a plurality of first ridges 1723d on the rear side of the colorless and transparent member. Second ridges (not shown) are formed, respectively, so that light from the LEDs 1740 such as the lower left substrate 1742 can be diffused widely.

  The lower left light-emitting decorative body 1723 is configured such that a diffusing lens member 1723c extends to the left side of the first surface forming member 1723a, and the extended portion does not go through the first surface forming member 1723a. It can be exposed directly to the front side. The portion of the diffusing lens member 1723c that extends to the left is covered with the front left exposure by the lower left movable light emitting decorative body 1730 in a state where the lower left movable light emitting decorative body 1730 moves to the right end side (see FIG. 63). The lower left movable light emitting decoration 1730 is exposed to the front side in a state of moving to the left end side.

  As shown in FIG. 70A, the upper right light emitting decorative body 1722 of the light emitting decorative body 1720 has a circular upper right front board 1743 mounted with a plurality of LEDs 1740 on the surface and an upper right front board 1743 attached to the front side. A surface forming member 1722b having a circular substrate fixing portion 1722a that has a substantially flat front surface, and a decoration auxiliary member 1722c disposed at a position visible from the front side behind the surface forming member 1722b, The upper right back substrate 1744 and a part of the upper left substrate 1741 are arranged on the rear side of the surface forming member 1722b and the decoration auxiliary member 1722c, and a plurality of LEDs 1740 are mounted on the surface.

  A white translucent member is used for the surface forming member 1722b in the upper right light emitting decorative body 1722. Further, the decoration assisting member 1722c of the upper right light emitting decorative body 1722 uses a white non-translucent member, and the outer shape of the front view is a shape (see FIG. 63) in the image of a ground crack. A penetrating portion 1722d that penetrates in the direction and has an inner shape substantially in line with the outer shape is provided. In addition, this penetration part 1722d has the form which was pulled out downward (open | released) in the lower end of the decoration auxiliary member 1722c.

  In addition, as shown in the drawing, an inverted L-shape for supporting the left middle movable light emitting decoration body 1725 to the back box 514 is provided between the surface forming member 1722 b and the decoration auxiliary member 1722 c and the upper right back substrate 1744. A part of the support base 1735 is disposed, and a decoration auxiliary member 1722c is attached and fixed to an attachment boss 1735a formed on the front surface of the support base 1735. The support base 1735 is made of a colorless and transparent member, and can transmit light from the LED 1740 such as the upper right back substrate 1744 to the surface forming member 1722b side so that the light can be decorated in a good state.

  The upper right light emitting decorative body 1722 is disposed at the rear of the right side of the upper edge portion of the center accessory 620 including the effect decoration body 1608 and the guide shelf 1609 of the center accessory 620 described above. The upper right front substrate 1743 fixed to the front surface of the surface forming member 1722b is positioned at the rear position corresponding to the effect decoration 1608. The decoration part on the right side of the upper edge of the center accessory 620 and the upper right light emitting decoration body 1722 cooperate to form an iceberg, clouded ice, or the like.

  The LED 1740 mounted on the surface of the upper right back substrate 1744 so as to correspond to the penetrating portion 1722d of the decoration auxiliary member 1722c is a red color that is completely different from the white light in addition to the same white light as the color of the surface forming member 1722b. Light (including orange) can also emit light. When the LED 1740 emits red light, it is possible to project a light emitting effect that shines red on the right side of the upper edge portion of the center accessory 620 in the form of a crack that is the same shape as the inner shape of the penetrating portion 1722d. Yes.

  Further, the surface forming member 1722b of the upper right light emitting decorative body 1722 has a wall-like side surface 1722e extending in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 67 and the like). The length of the back box 514 extends to the vicinity of the rear wall 514a.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (B), the lower right light emitting decorative body 1724 in the light emitting decorative body 1720 is formed with a stepped plane substantially along the surface of the game effect unit 4 on the front surface side and extends in the front-rear direction on the side surface side. A surface forming member 1724a having a surface shape formed in a multi-surface shape in which a plurality of elongated planes are arranged in a side surface direction (a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction) and a rear surface of the surface forming member 1724a are arranged. The decorative auxiliary member 1724b is composed of a lower middle substrate 1745 and a lower right substrate 1746, which are disposed on the rear side of the surface forming member 1724a and the decorative auxiliary member 1724b, and a plurality of LEDs 1740 are mounted on the surface.

  As the surface forming member 1724a of the lower right light emitting decorative body 1724, a white translucent member is used and the front side surface is subjected to a textured process. Similarly to the decoration auxiliary member 1722c of the upper right light emitting decoration body 1722, the decoration auxiliary member 1724b uses a white light-impermeable member, and the external shape of the front view is a shape that looks like a ground crack. In addition, a penetrating portion 1724c penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner shape substantially parallel to the outer shape is provided.

  In the lower right light emitting decorative body 1724, the LED 1740 arranged at a position corresponding to the through-hole 1724c of the decoration auxiliary member 1724b on the lower right substrate 1746 arranged on the rear side of the decoration auxiliary member 1724b is connected to the surface forming member 1724a. In addition to white light having the same color, red light (including orange) completely different from white light can be emitted. When the LED 1740 emits red light, the surface forming member 1724a can project a light emitting effect that shines red in the same shape as the inner shape of the penetrating portion 1724c.

  As shown in FIG. 51 and the like, the lower right light emitting decoration body 1724 is disposed on the rear side of the attacker unit 600 and the winning hole member 670, and the rear end of the attacker unit 600 is attached to the surface forming member 1724a. A notch portion 1724d that can be inserted, and an insertion portion 1724e that can be inserted through the guide rod 1673 of the prize winning opening member 670 are formed.

  As shown in FIG. 70B, a ball guiding unit 1760 is disposed between the surface forming member 1724a of the lower right light emitting decorative body 1724 and the lower middle substrate 1745 and the lower right substrate 1746. The ball guiding unit 1760 includes an attacker unit 600 and a prize opening member 670 that protrude to the rear side of the surface forming member 1724a through the notch 1724d and the insertion portion 1724e formed in the surface forming member 1724a of the lower right light emitting decoration body 1724. After receiving the game balls guided by the guide rods 1641 and 1673, it is detected by a sensor which one of the winning holes is won and discharged downward. The sphere guiding unit 1760 is formed of a thin white transparent member, and can sufficiently transmit light emitted from the LEDs 1740 such as the lower middle substrate 1745 and the lower right substrate 1746 to the surface forming member 1724a side. At the same time, the light from the LED 1740 can be diffused.

  In this example, the surface forming member 1724a of the lower right light emitting decorative body 1724 is a white translucent member, and the attacker unit 600 and the winning opening member 670 are white non-translucent members, so that a ball guide is provided. Units 1760 are each formed of a white transparent member. For this reason, the surface forming member 1724a can make it difficult for the player side to see the portion of the attacker unit 600 and the winning hole member 670 protruding rearward from the game panel 409 and the ball guiding unit 1760. Yes. More specifically, the color of the surface forming member 1724a (in this case, white) is substantially the same as the colors of the attacker unit 600, the winning opening member 670, and the ball guiding unit 1760. The colors of the attacker unit 600, the ball guiding unit 1760, and the like are mixed with the color. Thereby, the ball guiding unit 1760 and the like disposed on the rear side of the surface forming member 1724a can be made difficult to see from the front side.

  The surface forming member 1724a of the lower right light emitting decorative body 1724 has a wall-like side surface 1724f extending in the front-rear direction. The box 514 extends to the vicinity of the rear wall 514a.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the lower right corner light emitting decorative body 1731 in the light emitting decorative body 1720 is formed with a stepped plane substantially along the game effect unit 4 surface on the front side, and extends in the front-rear direction on the left side. A surface forming member 1731a having a surface shape formed in a multi-surface shape such that a plurality of rows are arranged in a side surface direction (a direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction), and a diffusing lens disposed on the rear side of the surface forming member 1731a It comprises a member 1731b, a lower right substrate 1746 and a right lower substrate 1747 arranged on the rear side of the surface forming member 1731a and the diffusing lens member 1731b and having a plurality of LEDs 1740 mounted on the surface. Although not shown, the front surface of the lower right substrate 1747 is covered with the lower end of the transparent support base 1735.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the lower right corner light emitting decoration 1731 is arranged on the rear side of the LED symbol display unit 80, and is a groove for passing wiring connected to the rear side of the LED symbol display unit 80. 1731c is formed on the front surface of the surface forming member 1731a. This groove 1731c is formed so as to be pulled out to the right side so that the wiring can be guided to the right outside of the back box 514.

  Similar to the surface forming member 1724a of the lower right light emitting decoration body 1724, the surface forming member 1731a of the lower right corner light emitting decoration body 1731 is made of a white translucent member, and the front side surface is textured. ing. Further, a colorless transparent member is used for the diffusion lens member 1731b of the lower right corner light emitting decoration body 1731, and on the front side, similarly to the diffusion lens members 1721c and 1723c of the upper left light emission decoration body 1721 and the lower left light emission decoration body 1723. A plurality of first ridges 1731d and a plurality of second ridges (not shown) are formed on the rear surface side, respectively, and light from the LEDs 1740 such as the lower right substrate 1746 can be diffused widely. ing.

  In addition, the surface forming member 1731a of the lower right corner light emitting decorative body 1731 has a wall-like side surface 1731e extending in the front-rear direction. The wall-shaped side surface 1731e has substantially the same length as the depth of the back box 514, and extends to the vicinity of the rear wall 514a of the back box 514.

  In the lower right corner light emitting decorative body 1731, the wall-shaped side surfaces 1731 e and 1724 f of the surface forming members 1731 a and 1724 a are not in contact with each other and narrower than the depth at the boundary with the lower right light emitting decorative body 1724. A crevice is formed, and the crevasse generated on the glacier and the snowy valley is expressed by this gap. In addition, at the bottom (back) of the gap, the first ridge 1731d of the diffusing lens member 1731b is arranged as desired, and the fluid flowing in the crevasse is expressed by the first ridge 1731d. (See FIG. 63). In addition to the blue light and white light, the LED 1740 disposed at a position corresponding to the gap can emit red light. The LED 1740 emits red light according to the gaming state, so It is now possible to produce a light-emitting effect as if a magma came out from.

  The light emitting decorative body 1720 is configured as described above, and is a decorative body that represents an iceberg, a glacier, and the like in this example. More specifically, in the case where a plurality of multi-faceted prisms are formed on the surface, such as the first surface forming members 1721a and 1723a of the upper left light emitting decorative body 1721 and the lower left light emitting decorative body 1723, the light from the front side Because it can be diffusely reflected in various directions, the surface of the broken ice and the rippling sea surface can be reproduced more realistically. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 1740 arranged on the rear side of these can be appropriately blinked to express a wave, and the upper left light emitting decoration body 1721 and the lower left light emission decoration body 1723, which are solid objects, are provided to the player. On the other hand, the illusion is as if the sea surface is actually there, and it is possible to attract attention.

  In addition, as in the surface forming members 1722b, 1724a, and 1731a of the upper right light emitting decorative body 1722, the lower right light emitting decorative body 1724, and the lower right corner light emitting decorative body 1731, the white translucent member and the surface are subjected to a texture. According to the present invention, the member arranged on the rear surface side can be made invisible from the player side. At the same time, light and shade from the LED 1740 arranged on the rear surface side (a deviation from the optical axis, shielding, transmission and reflection by other members) appears on the surface. On the other hand, it is possible to express the thickness of the ice as if it were different, so that the depth can be felt strongly in a limited space. In addition, the texture formed on the surface prevents the light from the front side from being diffusely reflected and reflected in a planar shape, so that it can be displayed on a flat snow shelf, iceberg shelf, etc. Realistic feelings such as icebergs are increasing.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the right middle movable light emitting decorative body 1725 in the light emitting decorative body 1720 includes a pair of first surface forming members 1725a and a pair of first surface forming members 1725a arranged in the vertical direction. A second surface forming member 1725b disposed between the surface forming members and on the rear side; a right middle substrate 1725c disposed on the rear side of the second surface forming member 1725b and having a plurality of LEDs 1740 mounted thereon; and a first surface A moving mechanism 1725d for moving the forming member 1725a and the second surface forming member 1725b is provided. When the second surface forming member 1725b is moved forward, the moving mechanism 1725d separates the pair of first surface forming members 1725a from each other, and when the second surface forming member 1725b is moved backward, the pair of first surface forming members 1725a are moved closer to each other. Is.

  That is, the right middle movable light emitting decorative body 1725 appears so that the second surface forming member 1725b protrudes when the pair of first surface forming members 1725a is opened by the moving mechanism 1725d, and the pair of first surface forming members 1725a When closed, the second surface forming member 1725b can be retracted and hidden.

  The moving mechanism 1725d of the right middle movable light emitting decorative body 1725 will be described in detail. The moving mechanism 1725d meshes with a motor 1725f having a rotating shaft 1725e, a pinion gear 1725g that rotates together with the rotating shaft 1725e of the motor 1725f, and a pinion gear 1725g. A rack gear 1725h, a slide member 1725i to which the right middle substrate 1725c and the second surface forming member 1725b are fixed at the front end side, a detection piece 1725j protruding outward from the slide member 1725i, and a slide position capable of detecting the detection piece 1725j A sensor 1725k and a base member 1725l that holds the slide member 1725i slidably in the front-rear direction and holds the motor 1725f, the slide position sensor 1725k, and the like are provided.

  Further, the moving mechanism 1725d is arranged at a position on the rear side of the position where the right middle substrate 1725c of the slide member 1725i is fixed, and a transmission pin 1725m protruding outward in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction, and a transmission pin 1725m. And a substantially L-shaped flange member 1725o formed with a long hole 1725n through which can be inserted. The flange member 1725o is pivotally supported by the base member 1725l at a position corresponding to the substantially vertical direction with respect to the transmission pin 1725m, and is one end extending forward substantially along the slide direction from the pivotally supported portion. The first surface forming member 1725a is fixed to the side, and is formed on the other end side extending in the direction of the slide member 1725i in a direction substantially perpendicular to the slide direction from the pivotally supported portion. As shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, a pair of flange members 1725o are provided so as to face each other vertically with a slide member 1725i interposed therebetween, and also provided on the left and right sides with a base member 1725l interposed therebetween. . The upper flange member 1725o supports the upper first surface forming member 1725a and the lower flange member 1725o supports the lower first surface forming member 1725a with the slide member 1725i interposed therebetween. Yes.

  In the moving mechanism 1725d, the pinion gear 1725g fixed to the rotating shaft 1725e is rotated by the rotation of the motor 1725f, and the slide member 1725i is slidable in the front-rear direction by the feeding action of the rack gear 1725h engaged with the pinion gear 1725g. Yes. For example, when the slide member 1725i is slid forward by the rotation of the motor 1725f, the transmission pin 1725m moves forward together with the slide member 1725i. And the advance of the transmission pin 1725m is transmitted to the other end side of the flange member 1725o through the long hole 1725n, and the other end side of the flange member 1725o moves forward. At this time, since the flange member 1725o is pivotally supported by the base member 1725l, the transmission pin 1725m slides in the long hole 1725n, and rotates around the portion where the flange member 1725o is pivotally supported. One end side of 1725o moves in a direction away from the slide member 1725i.

  That is, by advancing the slide member 1725i, the second surface forming member 1725b fixed to the tip of the slide member 1725i is advanced, and the first surface forming member 1725a fixed to one end side of the flange member 1725o is the slide member 1725i, that is, the first member. The second surface forming member 1725b moves away from the surface. In this embodiment, since the flange member 1725o and the first surface forming member 1725a are provided so as to face each other with the slide member 1725i interposed therebetween, the slide member 1725i is advanced to form a pair of first surface formations. The member 1725a moves in a direction away from each other, and moves forward (moves in the right direction in FIG. 73) as if the second surface forming member 1725b protrudes from there.

  On the other hand, when the motor 1725f is reversely rotated and the slide member 1725i is reversely moved, the transmission pin 1725m is reversely moved contrary to the above, and accordingly, the other end side of the flange member 1725o is also rotated backwardly. To do. Thereby, the one end side of the collar member 1725o moves in a direction approaching the slide member 1725i (left direction in FIG. 73). That is, when the slide member 1725i is moved backward, the second surface forming member 1725b moves backward and the pair of first surface forming members 1725a move in a direction approaching each other.

  When the slide member 1725i moves backward (retracts) to a position where the pair of first surface forming members 1725a is closed, the slide position sensor 1725k detects the detection piece 1725j formed on the slide member 1725i. ing. In this example, a photo sensor is used as the slide position sensor 1725k.

  By the way, in the middle right movable light emitting decorative body 1725, the first surface forming member 1725a is formed of a white opaque member, and the second surface forming member 1725b is formed of a red transparent member. Although not shown in detail, the second surface forming member 1725b has a plurality of first ridges formed on the front side thereof extending in the left and right directions in a circular arc shape in cross section, and on the rear side. And a plurality of second ridges that are arranged at intervals narrower than the arrangement interval of the first ridges on the front side and that have a circular cross section and extend in the vertical direction. Thus, the second surface forming member 1725b can express the flow of red lava and can diffuse light from the LED 1740 of the right middle substrate 1725c widely.

  As described above, the middle right movable light emitting decorative body 1725 opens and closes the pair of first surface forming members 1725a arranged in the vertical direction by moving the slide member 1725i forward and backward by the rotation of the motor 1725f. The second surface forming member 1725b disposed therebetween can appear or be concealed. At the same time, the second surface forming member 1725b can be moved forward and backward along with the opening / closing operation of the pair of first surface forming members 1725a. By these movements, it is possible to suppress the interest of the game from being lowered by attracting the player's interest strongly or making the player entertained.

  In the middle right movable light emitting decoration 1725, the first surface forming member 1725a is white, and the second surface forming member 1725b is red. Therefore, when the second surface forming member 1725b is made to appear or concealed by the opening / closing operation of the pair of first surface forming members 1725a, not only the shape decoration mode but also the color decoration mode can be greatly changed. It is possible to attract the player's interest more strongly.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, the upper left movable light emitting decoration body 1726 in the light emitting decoration body 1720 includes a movable body assembly 1726a that can emit light decoration and a moving mechanism 1726b that moves the movable body assembly 1726a in the left-right direction. And. As shown in detail in FIG. 76, the moving body assembly 1726a of the upper left movable light emitting decoration 1726 has a surface shape in which a plurality of planes having different arrangement angles are combined. That is, the moving body assembly 1726a includes a light-transmitting outer shell member 1726d having an opening 1726c having a predetermined inner peripheral shape (here, E-shape) on the front side, and an opening 1726c of the outer shell member 1726d. A light-transmitting front surface forming member 1726e, a sheet-like diffusion lens member 1726f disposed on the rear side of the front surface forming member 1726e and having a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface, and a rear surface of the diffusion lens member 1726f. A transparent holding member 1726g that sandwiches the diffusing lens member 1726f in cooperation with the front surface forming member 1726e, and an upper left substrate 1726h that is arranged behind the holding member 1726g and has a plurality of LEDs 1740 mounted on the surface. The upper left substrate 1726h and the holding member 1726g are accommodated and the rear opening of the outer shell member 1726d is closed. It includes a base member 1726i to, a.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the base member 1726i of the upper left movable light emitting decoration 1726 has an extending portion 1726j extending to the right side of the outer shell member 1726d. Similar to the surface shape of the outer shell member 1726d, the surface shape of the extending portion 1726j is formed by combining a plurality of planes having different arrangement angles.

  In the upper left movable light emitting decorative body 1726 of this example, the surface of the outer shell member 1726d is silver-plated to represent the silver world in a snowy landscape, and the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1726c allows the logo to be displayed. The letter “E” is shown. Further, the front surface forming member 1726e is colorless and transparent, and the front surface side has a gentle and smooth shape, and the opening 1726c expresses “E” -shaped transparent ice. Further, the base member 1726i is a blue transparent member, and an extending portion 1726j extending to the right side forms the first surface forming member 1721a of the upper left light emitting decorative body 1721 and the first surface formation of the lower left light emitting decorative body 1723. Similar to the member 1723a, a waved sea surface (water surface) is expressed.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the movement mechanism 1726b in the upper left movable light emitting decoration 1726 includes a motor 1726l having a rotation shaft 1726k, a pinion gear 1726m rotating together with the rotation shaft 1726k of the motor 1726l, and a rack gear 1726n meshing with the pinion gear 1726m. A slide member 1726o having a sliding edge, a detection piece 1726p projecting outward from the slide member 1726o, a slide position sensor 1726q capable of detecting the detection piece 1726p, and a slide member 1726o and a movable body assembly 1726a are slidable in the left-right direction. And a base member 1726r that holds the motor 1726l, the slide position sensor 1726q, and the like at predetermined positions.

  In the moving mechanism 1726b, a slide member 1726o is disposed on the rear side of the base member 1726r. Further, a slit 1726s extending in the left-right direction is formed at a position corresponding to the slide member 1726o of the base member 1726r, and a horizontally long support member 1726t is disposed so as to face the slide member 1726o across the slit 1726s. ing. The slide member 1726o and the support member 1726t are connected by the connecting pin 1726u through the slit 1726s, so that the slide member 1726o is slidably held by the base member 1726r. As shown in the figure, both ends of the slide member 1726o and the support member 1726t are connected to each other by a connecting pin 1726u at both ends in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction).

  Further, another slit 1726v extending in parallel with the slit 1726s is formed on the base member 1726r below the slit 1726s. A slide support member 1726x having a projecting pin 1726w that passes through the slit 1726v is disposed on the front side of the slit 1726v, and a rear end of the slit 1726v is fitted with the projecting pin 1726w of the slide support member 1726x. A mating fixed bush 1726y is disposed. Then, by fitting the fixed bush 1726y to the projecting pin 1726w of the slide support member 1726x penetrating the slit 1726v, the slide support member 1726x can be slidably held with respect to the base member 1726r. .

  The moving mechanism 1726b fixes the moving body assembly 1726a to the support member 1726t and the slide support member 1726x, so that the moving body assembly 1726a can slide in the left-right direction. Since the movable body assembly 1726a is slidably supported by a slide support member 1726x in addition to the support member 1726t, the movable body assembly 1726a can be slid in the left-right direction by the slide support member 1726x without rattling. In FIG. 75, reference numeral 1726z denotes a bracket for fixing the motor 1726l to the rear side of the base member 1726r.

  The upper left movable light emitting decoration 1726 can slide the moving body assembly 1726a in the left-right direction by the rotational drive of the motor 1726l of the moving mechanism 1726b. At the same time, by appropriately controlling the rotation of the rotating shaft 1726k in the motor 1726l, the slide member 1726o (moving body assembly 1726a) is freely moved back and forth between the right moving end and the left moving end, and a desired performance operation is performed. It can be made to. The slide position sensor 1726q is arranged to detect the right side moving end of the slide member 1726o.

  Further, when the moving body assembly 1726a is moved to the position of the right moving end by the moving mechanism 1726b, the upper left movable light emitting decoration body 1726 has a diffusing lens member in the upper left light emitting decoration body 1721 by the extension portion 1726j of the moving body assembly 1726a. The front side of the portion exposed to the front side of 1721c is covered. By moving the movable body assembly 1726a to the left side, a part of the diffusing lens member 1721c of the upper left light emitting decorative body 1721 is exposed to the front side and can be viewed by the player.

  As described above, the upper left movable light emitting decoration body 1726 can slide the moving body assembly 1726a in the left-right direction by the moving mechanism 1726b, so that the front surface forming member 1726e decorated with the LED 1740 is moved. It is possible to attract the player's interest. At the same time, the blue extending portion 1726j is moved together with the moving body assembly 1726a by the moving mechanism 1726b, so that the transparent (white) diffusing lens member 1721c arranged on the rear side can appear or concealed. . Thereby, not only the change of the shape decoration aspect but also the color decoration aspect can be changed, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Next, the lower left movable light emitting decoration body 1730 in the light emitting decoration body 1720 has the same basic configuration as the upper left movable light emission decoration body 1726 as shown in FIGS. The movable body assembly 1730a and the moving mechanism 1730b for moving the movable body assembly 1730a in the left-right direction are provided. As shown in detail in FIG. 79, the moving body assembly 1730a of the lower left movable light emitting decoration 1730 has a surface shape in which a plurality of planes having different arrangement angles are combined. That is, the movable body assembly 1730a includes a translucent outer shell member 1730d having an opening 1730c having a predetermined inner peripheral shape (here, I shape) on the front side, and an opening 1730c of the outer shell member 1730d. A light-transmitting front surface forming member 1730e, a sheet-like diffusing lens member 1730f disposed on the rear side of the front surface forming member 1730e and having a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface, and the diffusing lens member 1730f A transparent holding member 1730g that sandwiches the diffusing lens member 1730f in cooperation with the front surface forming member 1730e, and a lower left substrate 1730h that is arranged behind the holding member 1730g and has a plurality of LEDs 1740 mounted on the surface. In addition, at least the lower left substrate 1730h and the holding member 1730g are accommodated and the rear opening of the outer shell member 1730d is closed. It includes a base member 1730i to, a.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the base member 1730i of the lower left movable light emitting decorative body 1730 has an extending portion 1730j extending to the right side from the outer shell member 1730d. Similar to the surface shape of the outer shell member 1730d, the surface shape of the extending portion 1730j is a form in which a plurality of planes having different arrangement angles are combined.

  In the lower left movable light emitting decorative body 1730 of this example, the surface of the outer shell member 1730d is silver-plated to represent the silver world in a snowy landscape, and the logo is formed by the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1730c. The letter “I” is shown. Further, the front surface forming member 1730e is colorless and transparent, and the front surface side thereof has a shape having gentle and smooth irregularities, and expresses “I” -shaped transparent ice by the opening 1730c. Further, the base member 1730 i is a blue transparent member, and an extending portion 1730 j extending to the right side forms the first surface forming member 1721 a of the upper left light emitting decorative body 1721 and the first surface formation of the lower left light emitting decorative body 1723. Similar to the member 1723a, a waved sea surface (water surface) is expressed.

  As shown in FIG. 78, a moving mechanism 1730b in the lower left movable light emitting decoration body 1730 includes a motor 1730l having a rotating shaft 1730k, a pinion gear 1730m that rotates together with the rotating shaft 1730k of the motor 1730l, and a rack gear 1730n that meshes with the pinion gear 1730m. A sliding member 1730o having a sliding edge, a detection piece 1730p protruding outward from the sliding member 1730o, a slide position sensor 1730q capable of detecting the detection piece 1730p, and a sliding member 1730o and a movable body assembly 1730a can be slid in the left-right direction. And a base member 1730r that holds the motor 1730l, the slide position sensor 1730q, and the like at predetermined positions.

  In the moving mechanism 1730b, a slide member 1730o is disposed on the rear side of the base member 1730r. A slit 1730s extending in the left-right direction is formed at a position corresponding to the slide member 1730o of the base member 1730r, and a horizontally long support member 1730t is disposed so as to face the slide member 1730o with the slit 1730s interposed therebetween. ing. Then, the slide member 1730o and the support member 1730t are connected by the connecting pin 1730u via the slit 1730s, so that the slide member 1730o is slidably held by the base member 1730r. As shown in the drawing, both ends of the slide member 1730o and the support member 1730t are connected to each other by connecting pins 1730u in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction).

  Further, another slit 1730v extending in parallel with the slit 1730s is formed on the base member 1730r below the slit 1730s. A slide support member 1730x having a projecting pin 1730w penetrating the slit 1730v is disposed on the front side of the slit 1730v, and a rear end of the slit 1730v is fitted with the projecting pin 1730w of the slide support member 1730x. A mating fixed bushing 1730y is arranged. Then, by fitting the fixed bush 1730y to the projecting pin 1730w of the slide support member 1730x penetrating the slit 1730v, the slide support member 1730x can be slidably held with respect to the base member 1730r. .

  The moving mechanism 1730b is configured such that the moving body assembly 1730a can be slid in the left-right direction by fixing the moving body assembly 1730a to the support member 1730t and the slide support member 1730x. Since the movable body assembly 1730a is slidably supported by a slide support member 1730x in addition to the support member 1730t, it can be slid by the slide support member 1730x in the left-right direction without rattling. In FIG. 78, reference numeral 1730z denotes a bracket for fixing the motor 1730l to the rear side of the base member 1730r.

  This lower left movable light emitting decoration body 1730 can slide the moving body assembly 1730a in the left-right direction by the rotational drive of the motor 1730l of the moving mechanism 1730b. At the same time, by appropriately controlling the rotation of the rotating shaft 1730k in the motor 1730l, the slide member 1730o (moving body assembly 1730a) can freely move back and forth between the right moving end and the left moving end to perform a desired performance operation. It can be made to. Note that the slide position sensor 1730q is arranged to detect the right side moving end of the slide member 1730o.

  The lower left movable light emitting decorative body 1730 has a diffuser lens member in the lower left light emitting decorative body 1723 by the extending portion 1730j of the moving body assembly 1730a when the moving body assembly 1730a is moved to the position of the right moving end by the moving mechanism 1730b. The front side of the portion exposed to the front side of 1723c is covered. By moving the movable body assembly 1730a to the left side, a part of the diffusing lens member 1723c of the lower left light emitting decorative body 1723 is exposed to the front side and can be viewed by the player.

  Since the lower left movable light emitting decoration body 1730 can slide the moving body assembly 1730a in the left-right direction by the moving mechanism 1730b as described above, the front surface forming member 1730e decorated with the light emission by the LED 1740 moves. It is possible to attract the player's interest. At the same time, the blue extension portion 1730j is moved together with the moving body assembly 1730a by the moving mechanism 1730b, so that the transparent (white) diffusing lens member 1723c arranged on the rear side can appear or concealed. . Thereby, not only the change of the shape decoration aspect but also the color decoration aspect can be changed, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the left middle upper light emitting decorative body 1727 in the light emitting decorative body 1720 includes a colorless and transparent first surface forming member 1727a having a gentle and smooth unevenness formed on the front surface side. The first surface forming member 1727a has a predetermined inner peripheral shape (here, A-shaped and G-shaped) opening 1727b on the front side. Furthermore, a non-translucent outer shell member 1727c having a surface shape in which a plurality of planes having different arrangement angles are combined, and a surface disposed behind the first surface forming member 1727a inside the outer shell member 1727c. A sheet-like diffusion lens member 1727d having a plurality of fine prisms formed thereon, and a transparent member that is disposed behind the diffusion lens member 1727d and holds the diffusion lens member 1727d in cooperation with the first surface formation member 1727a. A holding member 1727e and a colored transparent second surface forming member 1727f arranged on the left side surface of the holding member 1727e and having an outer shape that continues from the side surface of the outer shell member 1727c are provided.

  The left middle upper light emitting decorative body 1727 is disposed on the rear side of the holding member 1727e and supported on the front side of the rear wall 514a of the back box 514, and a plurality of LEDs 1740 are mounted on the surface of the left middle board 1748. Is provided. Specifically, a portion above the middle in the vertical direction of the left middle substrate 1748 is disposed on the rear side of the holding member 1727e. The left middle substrate 1748 is a substrate for light emission decoration, and in addition to the left middle upper light emission decoration body 1727, a plurality of LEDs 1740 for decorating the left middle light emission decoration body 1728 and the left middle lower light emission decoration body 1729 are also provided. Has been implemented.

  The left middle upper light emitting decorative body 1727 is configured such that the first surface forming member 1727a is fitted so as to close the opening 1727b from the rear side of the outer shell member 1727c, and is diffused inside the outer shell member 1727c. A lens member 1727d and a holding member 1727e are arranged. The second surface forming member 1727f is fixed to the rear side of the outer shell member 1727c, so that the first surface forming member 1727a, the diffusing lens member 1727d, and the holding member 1727e do not come out of the outer shell member 1727c. Is to be supported.

  The upper left upper light emitting decorative body 1727 of this example has a silver plating process on the surface of the outer shell member 1727c, and represents a silver world in a snow scene. At the same time, the letters “A” and “G” of the logo are shown by the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1727b, and transparent ice of “A” and “G” shape is formed by the first surface forming member 1727a through the opening 1727b. It is expressed. Further, the second surface forming member 1727f is a blue transparent member, and expresses a waved sea surface (water surface), and an outer shell member 1727c arranged on the front side thereof protrudes from the water surface (floating). State).

  Further, the left middle upper light emitting decoration 1727 has a wiring cord connected to the gate sensor 760 at a position (a rear side) corresponding to the position where the gate sensor 760 is disposed in the passing gate 612 in the center accessory 620. A conduction path 1727g for guiding the rear side to the rear side of the back box 514 is formed. More specifically, the conduction path 1727g is disposed on the left side of the left middle upper light emitting decorative body 1727 where the letter “A” is formed, penetrates the outer shell member 1727c in the front-rear direction, and opens to the left side surface. The portion opened to the side surface is bent into a crank shape when viewed from the front. By inserting the wiring cord connected to the gate sensor 760 through the conduction path 1727g, the wiring cord can be hidden from view by the player, and the wiring cord is passed into the conduction path 1727g through the portion opened to the side surface. Can be inserted easily. Note that the second surface forming member 1727f of the upper left middle light emitting decoration 1727 is in a state of being divided into two at the portion where the conduction path 1727g is formed.

  Further, the left middle upper light emitting decorative body 1727 has a wall-like side surface 1727h extending in the front-rear direction on the side surface, and this wall-like side surface 1727h has a length substantially the same as the depth of the back box 514. 514 extends to the vicinity of the rear wall 514a. The wall-shaped side surface 1727h is formed in a shape that is continuous with the insertion portion 620b of the center accessory 620 (see FIGS. 51 and 52).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82, the left middle light-emitting decorative body 1728 in the light-emitting decorative body 1720 has a red cross-section in which a plurality of ridges 1728a extending in the left-right direction are formed in a circular arc shape in a cross section on the front side. It is a transparent member, and a substantially middle portion in the vertical direction of the left middle substrate 1748 having a plurality of LEDs 1740 mounted on the surface thereof is disposed on the rear side. The left middle light emitting decorative body 1728 represents a flow of red lava by a plurality of ridges 1728a formed on the front side.

  The left middle light emitting decorative body 1728 has a wall-like side surface 1728b extending in the front-rear direction. The wall-like side surface 1728b has a length substantially the same as the depth of the back box 514, and the rear wall 514a of the back box 514. It extends to the vicinity. The wall-shaped side surface 1728b is formed in a shape that is continuous with the insertion portion 620b of the center accessory 620 (see FIG. 52).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 82, the left middle lower light emitting decorative body 1729 in the light emitting decorative body 1720 includes a colorless and transparent first surface forming member 1729a in which gentle and smooth irregularities are formed on the front surface side, and a first surface. An opening 1729b having a predetermined inner peripheral shape (here, C shape and E shape) closed by the forming member 1729a is provided on the front surface side. Furthermore, a non-translucent outer shell member 1729c having a surface shape in which a plurality of planes having different arrangement angles are combined, and a surface disposed on the rear side of the first surface forming member 1729a inside the outer shell member 1729c. A sheet-like diffuser lens member 1729d having a plurality of fine prisms formed thereon, and a transparent member that is disposed behind the diffuser lens member 1729d and holds the diffuser lens member 1729d in cooperation with the first surface forming member 1729a. A holding member 1729e and a colored transparent second surface forming member 1729f arranged on the left side surface of the holding member 1729e and having an outer shape that continues from the side surface of the outer shell member 1729c are provided.

  The left middle lower light emitting decorative body 1729 has a portion below the middle in the vertical direction of the left middle substrate 1748 on the surface of which a plurality of LEDs 1740 are mounted on the rear side of the holding member 1729e.

  Furthermore, the left middle lower light emitting decorative body 1729 is configured such that the first surface forming member 1729a is fitted so as to close the opening 1729b from the rear side of the outer shell member 1729c. A diffusing lens member 1729d and a holding member 1729e are arranged. The second surface forming member 1729f is fixed to the rear side of the outer shell member 1729c, so that the first surface forming member 1729a, the diffusing lens member 1729d, and the holding member 1729e do not come out of the outer shell member 1729c. To be supported.

  In the left middle lower luminescent decorative body 1729 of this example, the surface of the outer shell member 1729c has been subjected to silver plating, and represents the silver world in a snow scene. At the same time, the letters “C” and “E” of the logo are shown by the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1729b, and transparent ice of “C” and “E” shape is formed by the first surface forming member 1729a through the opening 1729b. It is expressed. Further, the second surface forming member 1729f is a blue transparent member, and expresses the undulating sea surface (water surface), and an outer shell member 1729c arranged on the front side thereof protrudes from the water surface (floating). State).

  Further, the left middle lower light emitting decorative body 1729 has a wall-like side surface 1729g extending in the front-rear direction on the side surface. The wall-like side surface 1729g has a length substantially the same as the depth of the back box 514. It extends to the vicinity of the rear wall 514a. Further, the wall-shaped side surface 1729g is formed in a shape that is continuous with the insertion portion 620b of the center accessory 620 (see FIGS. 51 and 52).

  As shown in FIG. 83, the left middle substrate 1748 of the light emitting decorative body 1720 is supported so as to be close to the front side of the rear wall 514a of the back box 514, and the left middle upper light emitting decorative body 1727, The light emitting decorative body 1728 and the left middle lower light emitting decorative body 1729 are arranged as far as possible from the front surface. Further, it is difficult to understand that the light of the LED 1740 provided on the left middle board 1748 from the player side is emitted in a spot shape when viewed from the player side, and the depth feeling of the light emitting decorative body 1720. Can be improved.

  By the way, the upper left movable luminous ornament 1726, the upper left middle luminous ornament 1727, the lower left middle luminous ornament 1729, and the diffusion lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f of the lower left movable luminous ornament 1730 in the luminous ornament 1720 are: The prism sheet has a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface. And, it is also possible to radiate light incident from the front side to the front side by the action of the prism, and even if the LED 1740 arranged on the rear side does not emit light, it can be shimmering like a pearl, and the rear side Can be made invisible to the player. Further, when the LED 1740 disposed on the rear side of the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f is caused to emit light, the light can be finely diffused in various directions, and is further pearl-shaped when viewed from the player side. It is designed to sparkle.

  Further, the upper left movable light emitting decoration body 1726, the left middle upper light emission decoration body 1727, the left middle lower light emission decoration body 1729, and the front surface forming member 1726e, the first surface forming member 1727a of the lower left movable light emission decoration body 1730 in the light emission decoration body 1720, As described above, the first surface forming member 1729a and the front surface forming member 1730e are formed so that the surfaces thereof are smooth and uneven, and the rear surfaces thereof are formed substantially flat, and the thickness thereof is smooth. The thickness is uneven. As a result, the surface design looks distorted, and transparent ice can be reproduced with a natural feeling.

<Action and effect of luminous decoration>
Here, the actions and effects of the light-emitting decorative body 1720 described above will be summarized. According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the side frame plates 12 and 13 in the outer frame 2 are made of metal extrusion molds, thereby increasing the horizontal dimension of the game effect unit installation recess 30 in the main body frame 3. At the same time, the vertical size of the gaming window 101 is increased by providing only one dish unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame 5, and the rearward projecting amount of the peripheral wall 291, 292, 293 in the main body frame 3 is increased. Is made substantially the same position as the rear end side of the prize ball tank 50 so that the depth of the game effect unit installation recess 30 is increased. Thereby, the volume of the game effect unit installation recessed part 30 can be enlarged as much as possible, and the larger game effect unit 4 can be supported favorably.

  Further, the game effect unit 4 can be further increased in size, and a light emitting decoration 1720 is disposed on the rear side of the transparent game panel 409 forming the game area 20 at that time. The light emitting decoration 1720 includes a transparent front surface forming member 1726e, a first surface forming member 1727a, a first surface forming member 1729a, and diffusing lens members 1726f and 1727d having a plurality of minute prisms on the rear side of the front surface forming member 1730e. , 1729d, 1730f, an upper left substrate 1726h, a lower left substrate 1730h, and a left middle substrate 1748 are sequentially provided. Therefore, the light incident by the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f of the light emitting decorative body 1720 is spectrally diffused to emit glitter and seven colors of light, and the light condition changes depending on the position viewed by the player. It becomes. Then, it is possible to give the player an impression that is completely different from a flat pattern or image like a conventional pachinko machine, and attracts the player's attention strongly, and this pachinko machine 1 It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f having a plurality of fine prisms are arranged on the light emitting decorative body 1720, the LED 1740 and the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f arranged on the rear side are arranged. The upper left substrate 1726h, the lower left substrate 1730h, the left middle substrate 1748, and the like can be hidden from the front side. The LED 1740 and the like disposed on the rear side of the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f can be visually recognized, thereby preventing the decorativeness of the light-emitting decorative body 1720 from being deteriorated and reducing the interest of the player. be able to. Further, the light incident on the diffuser lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f from the front side of the light emitting decoration 1720 can be emitted to the front side by the diffuser lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f, so that the LED 1740 emits light. Even if it is not, the light emitting decoration 1720 can be shined to some extent, and the player's interest can be attracted.

  Furthermore, the light emitting decorative body 1720 is arranged in the back box 514 having a predetermined depth, and the light emitting decorative body 1720 can be three-dimensionally shaped. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 1, the three-dimensional light-emitting decorative body 1720 can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 409 at a position where a planar pattern or image in the game area can be visually recognized in the conventional pachinko machine. . At first glance, it is possible to give the player an impression different from that of a conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be greatly differentiated from other pachinko machines. The possibility that this pachinko machine 1 is selected can be increased.

  Further, since the thickness of the transparent front surface forming member 1726e, the first surface forming member 1727a, the first surface forming member 1729a, and the front surface forming member 1730e is nonuniform, the refraction of the transmitted light is nonuniform. It becomes possible. Therefore, the diffuser lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f arranged on the rear side from the player side appear to be distorted so that the player can see the front surface forming member 1726e, the first surface forming member 1727a, and the first surface. It is possible to easily recognize the shapes of the forming member 1729a and the front forming member 1730e, and to realize a decorative effect by the shape and surely exhibit the above-described effects. Further, the front surface forming member 1726e, the first surface forming member 1727a, the first surface forming member 1729a, and the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f arranged on the rear side of the front surface forming member 1730e are distorted from the player side. Can be seen in. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the appearance of the surface design of the geometrical diffuser lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f to be distorted and to make an artificial feeling. The real feeling of the first surface forming member 1727a, the first surface forming member 1729a, and the front surface forming member 1730e) can be further enhanced to attract the player's attention strongly. Further, since the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f appear to be distorted, the light emitted from the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f also becomes non-uniform. Therefore, the light condition of the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f that glitters can be non-uniform so that the glittering feeling can be further increased, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

  Further, an upper left substrate 1726h having an LED 1740, a lower left substrate 1730h, and a left middle substrate 1748 are provided. Therefore, the light from the LED 1740 can be diffused widely by the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f, and the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f can be lit in a pearl shape, and the light emitting decoration 1720 can be emitted. With this luminous decoration, the player's interest can be more strongly attracted and the expectation for the game in the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Further, the diffusion lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f are narrowed by the front surface forming member 1726e, the first surface forming member 1727a, the first surface forming member 1729a, and the front surface forming member 1730e and the holding members 1726g, 1727e, 1729e, and 1730g. Can be held and held. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 which can hold | maintain the flexible diffuser lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f reliably by being made into a sheet shape, and can produce the above-mentioned operation effect surely is realized. be able to.

  Further, the diffusion lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f are narrowed by the front surface forming member 1726e, the first surface forming member 1727a, the first surface forming member 1729a, and the front surface forming member 1730e and the holding members 1726g, 1727e, 1729e, and 1730g. I have to hold it. Therefore, the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f are arranged at positions where the front surface forming member 1726e, the first surface forming member 1727a, the first surface forming member 1729a, and the rear surface of the front surface forming member 1730e are in contact with each other. Is done. Thus, the diffusion lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f are arranged near the front surface of the back box 514 together with the front surfaces of the front surface forming member 1726e, the first surface forming member 1727a, the first surface forming member 1729a, and the front surface forming member 1730e. Will be. This makes it possible to provide a distance between the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f and the rear wall 514a of the back box 514. A moving means (moving mechanism) for moving 1720 can be arranged, and the decorative effect of the light emitting decorative body 1720 can be further enhanced.

  Further, the diffuser lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f are configured to be able to radiate light incident from the front, and the light incident on the diffuser lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f from the front of the decorative body is The light is reflected or refracted by the prism and emitted forward from the diffusion lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f. Therefore, if there is a light source in front of the diffusing lens members 1726f, 1727d, 1729d, and 1730f, the light emitting decorative body 1720 can be shining at any time regardless of the gaming state in the pachinko machine 1, and the appeal to the player is enhanced. This pachinko machine 1 can be selected as a pachinko machine to play.

  Further, a back box 514 having a depth of 50 mm to 100 mm is disposed on the rear side of the transparent gaming panel 409 that forms the gaming area 20, and extends in a substantially vertical direction (front-back direction) with respect to the surface of the gaming panel 409. A light-emitting decorative body 1720 having wall-like side surfaces 1724f, 1727h, 1728b, 1729g, and 1731e having a length substantially the same as the depth of the back box 514 is disposed. That is, the lower right light emitting decoration body 1724, the left middle upper light emitting decoration body 1727, the left middle light emitting decoration body 1728, and the left middle lower light emission whose depth (front and rear direction) is emphasized by the wall-shaped side surfaces 1724f, 1727h, 1728b, 1729g, and 1731e. A decorative body 1729 and a lower right corner light emitting decorative body 1731 are arranged. Therefore, this three-dimensional light-emitting decorative body 1720 can be recognized as completely different from the game effect unit in the conventional pachinko machine, and can attract the player's interest strongly. It is possible to prevent a player's interest from decreasing by raising the sense of expectation for the game.

  Further, the lower right light emitting decoration body 1724, the left middle upper light emitting decoration body 1727, the left middle light emitting decoration body 1728, the left middle lower light emitting decoration body 1729, and the lower right corner light emitting decoration body 1731 have substantially the same length as the depth of the back box 514. Wall-like side surfaces 1724f, 1727h, 1728b, 1729g, 1731e. Accordingly, the front surface of the light emitting decoration 1720 is disposed at a position close to the front surface of the back box 514, that is, the rear surface of the game panel 409. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to reduce the difference in distance between the front surface of the light-emitting decorative body 1720 and the game ball flowing down in the game area 20, and the light-emitting decorative body 1720 and the game ball can be reduced. The focal shift can be reduced as much as possible. Further, it is possible to make it easy to see both the light emitting decoration 1720 and the game ball at the same time, and to prevent eyeball fatigue from occurring at an early stage, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, a light-emitting decorative body 1720 (lower right light-emitting decorative body 1724, left-hand side) provided with wall-like side surfaces 1724f, 1727h, 1728b, 1729g, and 1731e having a length substantially the same as the depth of the back box on the rear side of the transparent gaming panel 409. A middle upper light emitting decorative body 1727, a left middle light emitting decorative body 1728, a left middle lower light emitting decorative body 1729, and a lower right corner light emitting decorative body 1731) are disposed, and an effect display device 115 is disposed on the rear side of the back box 514. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the restriction of the focal length of the player by the game effect unit surface (game panel 409) and to further increase the restricted range of the focal distance, so that the player who faces the game effect unit 4 It is possible to suppress the feeling of pressure against the player, and it is possible to relax the player and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the depth of the back box 514 is set to a depth of 50 mm to 100 mm and the effect display device 115 is disposed in the opening 514b of the rear wall 514a, the display screen of the effect display device 115 is displayed on the game effect unit. A predetermined distance from the surface (the distance of the depth of the back box) is arranged on the rear side. In other words, since the effect display device 115 is arranged at a position farther away from the player than the conventional pachinko machine, the focal distance for the effect image is likely to be longer, which suppresses the occurrence of eyeball fatigue and enhances the player's interest. Can be prevented from decreasing.

  Furthermore, the wall-shaped side surfaces 1724f, 1727h, 1728b, 1729g, and 1731e of the light emitting decorative body 1720 are disposed so as to substantially follow the opening 514b of the back box 514 in which the effect display device 115 is disposed. Therefore, the outer periphery of the effect display device 115 can be substantially covered with the wall-shaped side surfaces 1724f, 1727h, 1728b, 1729g, and 1731e, and the effect display device 115 and the light emitting decorative body 1720 can be clearly separated to make the appearance clear. It is possible to attract the player's interest by using the game production unit 4 having the above. At the same time, it is possible to block light incident on the display screen of the effect display device 115 from the up / down or left / right oblique directions with respect to the game effect unit 4, thereby preventing reflection of unnecessary light. Thus, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 115 can be easily seen.

  In addition, since the depth of the back box 514 is in the range of 50 mm to 100 mm, the light emitting decoration body 1720 having a high degree of three-dimensional effect that is undulating in the depth direction (depth direction) is reliably disposed in the back box 514. be able to. Thereby, it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 which attracts a player's interest strongly and can raise the expectation with respect to the game by this pachinko machine 1.

  Further, an upper right back board 1744, a lower middle board 1745, a lower right board 1746, a right lower board 1747, and a left middle board 1748 are provided, and a lower right light emitting decoration body 1724, a left middle upper light emitting decoration body 1727, and a left middle light emitting decoration body. 1728, the lower left middle light emitting decoration body 1729, and the lower right corner light emitting decoration body 1731 can be decorated with light emission. Further, the light-emitting decorative body 1720 that is lit, blinks, or emits light in various colors can further attract the player's interest, and can suppress the player's interest from decreasing. Further, the lower right light emitting decoration body 1724, the left middle upper light emitting decoration body 1727, the left middle light emitting decoration body 1728, the left middle lower light emitting decoration body 1729, and the lower right corner light emitting decoration body 1731 can be decorated with light emission. The light-emitting decorative body 1720 disposed on the rear side of the gaming panel 409 can be prevented from being dark and difficult to see, and the decoration effect of the light-emitting decorative body 1720 can be further enhanced to suppress the player's interest from being lowered. be able to. The lower right light emitting decoration body 1724, the left middle upper light emitting decoration body 1727, the left middle light emitting decoration body 1728, the left middle lower light emitting decoration body 1729, and the lower right corner light emitting decoration body 1731 are substantially the same as the depth of the back box 514. The wall-like side surfaces 1724f, 1727h, 1728b, 1729g, and 1731e are long, and the front surface of the light emitting decorative body 1720 is disposed near the front surface of the back box 514 as described above. Therefore, the upper right back substrate 1744, the lower middle substrate 1745, the lower right substrate 1746, the right lower substrate 1747, and the left middle substrate 1748 can be easily arranged near the rear wall 514a of the back box 514. As a result, by moving the front surface (front surface) of the light emitting decoration 1720 and the LED 1740 as far as possible, the light of the LED 1740 that emits light in a dotted manner further spreads, and the entire light emitting decoration 1720 is light-decorated substantially uniformly. In addition, the light source of the LED 1740 that emits light in a dot shape can be made inconspicuous. Further, the upper right back board 1744, the lower middle board 1745, the lower right board 1746, the right lower board 1747, the left middle board 1748, and the LED 1740 are difficult to see from the player side, and the decoration effect of the light emitting decoration 1720 is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the portion where the wall-like side surfaces 1724f and 1731e are arranged to face each other, the depth is deeper than the interval, so that the bottom portion is difficult to see and the depth is emphasized, and the light emitting decorative body The depth feeling of 1720 can be further emphasized, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. In addition, since it becomes difficult to see the bottom portion where the wall-shaped side surfaces 1724f and 1731e face each other, it is possible to make the player think that there is something in that portion, It is possible to prevent the interest in games from deteriorating with a sense of expectation. Further, a crack, a crevasse, a hole, or the like can be expressed by a portion where the wall-shaped side surfaces 1724f and 1731e are opposed to each other, and a more realistic light emitting decoration 1720 can be obtained. In addition, since the substrate having the LED 1740 is arranged at the bottom of the portion where the wall-shaped side surfaces 1724f and 1731e face each other, a light-emitting effect in which light is emitted from a ground crack or the like is possible, and the player is more entertained. The pachinko machine 1 can be used.

  Further, a center accessory 620 having an insertion portion 620b disposed on the rear side of the gaming panel 409 and formed so as to be continuous with the wall-like side surfaces 1724f, 1727h, 1728b, 1729g, and 1731e of the light emitting decorative body 1720 is provided in the gaming panel 409. It is arranged in front of. Therefore, the length from the front surface of the center accessory 620, that is, the front surface of the game effect unit 4 to the rear wall 514a of the back box 514 is determined by the wall-shaped side surfaces 1724f, 1727h, 1728b, 1729g, 1731e and the insertion portion 620b. A wall-like portion extending in the depth direction (front-rear direction) having a sword is formed in the game effect unit 4. The depth of the game effect unit 4 can be further emphasized by the long wall-like portion at the back, and the pachinko machine 1 with a prominent depth can be obtained as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. A pachinko machine 1 that can be distinguished from other pachinko machines at a glance and can attract the interest of the pachinko machine 1 and can increase the interest of the game by the pachinko machine 1 and increase the interest of the player. It can be. Further, since the game panel 409 is provided with a frame-shaped center accessory 620 that surrounds the outer periphery of the effect display device 115, a pachinko machine 1 similar to a pachinko machine having a conventional center accessory can be obtained. This makes it difficult for a player who is used to a conventional pachinko machine to have the impression of “a completely unknown pachinko machine” and allows the player to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play without a sense of incongruity.

  Moreover, since the depth of the game effect unit installation recessed part 30 can be enlarged, the back side from the panel holder 540, ie, the depth of the back unit 510 (depth of the back box 514) can be enlarged. Thereby, the wall-like side surfaces 1724f, 1727h, 1728b, 1729g, and 1731e of the light emitting decoration 1720 can be made longer, and the sense of depth of the space behind the game panel 409 can be further emphasized. In addition, it is possible to provide a game effect unit 4 having an apparently different appearance from the conventional planar game effect unit. This game effect unit 4 strongly attracts the player's interest, and this pachinko machine 1 It becomes the pachinko machine 1 which can raise the expectation with respect to the game in and can suppress a fall of interest.

  Furthermore, the first surface forming member 1725a and the moving body assemblies 1726a and 1730a that mimic a predetermined object that characterizes the model of the pachinko machine 1, and the first surface forming member 1725a and the moving body assemblies 1726a and 1730a appear along with the movement. A second surface forming member 1725b and diffuser lens members 1721c and 1723c are disposed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an impression that is completely different from a flat picture or image like a conventional pachinko machine, and the part that has not changed with the conventional pachinko machine is shaped By changing to, it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest in combination with the large-sized game effect unit 4 and to increase the sense of expectation for the pachinko machine 1 and to suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the background of the game effect unit 4 is changed by moving the first surface forming member 1725a and the moving body assemblies 1726a, 1730a arranged on the rear side of the transparent gaming panel 409 by the moving mechanisms 1725d, 1726b, 1730b. Like that. Thereby, compared with the case where a large liquid crystal display device is arranged behind the transparent game effect unit and the background of the game effect unit is changed by the effect image (including moving images), the manner of change It is possible to make it easy to understand, and even if a game ball circulates in front of the light emitting decoration 1720, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being hard to see and to prevent the interest in the game from being lowered. it can.

  Further, the moving body assemblies 1726a and 1730a can be decorated with light emission by the upper left substrate 1726h and the lower left substrate 1730h, and the moving body assemblies 1726a and 1730a can be moved by the moving mechanisms 1726b and 1730b. Therefore, the LED 1740 provided on the upper left board 1726h and the lower left board 1730h can turn on and blink the mobile body assemblies 1726a and 1730a and emit light in various colors. Furthermore, it can attract more strongly and can suppress that a player's interest falls. Further, since the moving body assembly 1726a, 1730a can be decorated with light emission, the moving body assembly 1726a, 1730a disposed on the rear side of the transparent gaming panel 409 can be prevented from being dark and difficult to see. The decoration effect by the body assemblies 1726a and 1730a can be further enhanced to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

  Further, since the upper left substrate 1726h and the lower left substrate 1730h are provided inside the movable body assemblies 1726a and 1730a, the dimensions of the movable body assemblies 1726a and 1730a in the front-rear direction (depth) are compared with the case where illumination is performed from the front side. Can be made as large as possible. The shapes of the moving body assemblies 1726a and 1730a can be made more three-dimensional, and the realistic moving body assemblies 1726a and 1730a can entertain the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating. . Further, since the upper left substrate 1726h and the lower left substrate 1730h are arranged on the rear side of the holding members 1726g and 1730g, the LED 1740 can be arranged as far back as possible, and the distance between the LED 1740 and the front surface of the front surface forming members 1726e and 1730e is reduced. Can be made as large as possible, and the light source of the LED 1740 that emits light in the form of dots can be made inconspicuous.

  Further, since the LED 1740 emits light on the rear side of the front surface shape members 1726e and 1730e, it is possible to suppress the surface shape of the front surface shape members 1726e and 1730e from being emphasized, which is imitated by the front surface shape members 1726e and 1730e. The ice that has translucency as a predetermined object can reproduce not only the shape but also the texture of the ice, making the player entertained by the more realistic front shape members 1726e and 1730e and less interesting Can be suppressed.

  Further, the second surface forming member 1725b and the diffusing lens members 1721c and 1723c appear or disappear as the first surface forming member 1725a and the moving body assemblies 1726a and 1730a are moved by the moving mechanisms 1725d, 1726b, and 1730b. . Thereby, the shape decoration aspect of the game effect unit 4 can be greatly changed, the player's interest can be more attracted, and the expectation for the game can be given by the change of the decoration aspect. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to the expectation. Further, the colors of the second surface forming member 1725b and the diffuser lens members 1721c and 1723c are different from those of the first surface forming member 1725a and the moving body assemblies 1726a and 1730a. The movement of the first surface forming member 1725a and the moving body assemblies 1726a and 1730a causes the second surface forming member 1725b and the diffusing lens members 1721c and 1723c having different colors to appear. Can be recognized by the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

  In addition, the surface forming member 1721a of the light emitting decoration 1720 has the same color as an iceberg or glacier as a predetermined object, and the LED 1740 disposed on the rear side thereof emits light in substantially the same color or white as the predetermined object. ing. As a result, the surface forming member 1721a and the like emit light with a feeling similar to a predetermined object, the surface forming member 1721a and the like become more realistic, the appeal to the player is increased, and the player's interest is increased. Can be attracted.

  Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, the three-dimensional surface forming member 1721a and the like are arranged through the transparent game panel 409 at a position where a planar picture or image can be visually recognized in the game area. It is possible to give the player an impression different from that of a conventional pachinko machine. And this pachinko machine 1 can be greatly differentiated from other pachinko machines, and the possibility of selecting this pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play can be increased.

  In addition, the surface forming member 1721a and the like disposed on the rear side of the game panel 409 is a light-emitting decorative body 1720 that emits light of a predetermined color by light emission of the LED 1740, so that the light emission simply flashes or the color changes. Just do it. Therefore, compared with the case where a moving image is displayed as in a conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to prevent the game balls flowing down the front of the game panel 409 from being difficult to see, and the game balls are difficult to see. This can prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, the model of the pachinko machine 1 can be characterized by a three-dimensional surface forming member 1721a disposed on the rear side of the game panel 409. Therefore, unlike conventional pachinko machines, there is no need to place a specially shaped accessory or decoration to characterize the model in the game area, and it is possible to suppress the narrowing of the basin of the game ball due to them. It is possible to prevent the movement of the game ball from becoming monotonous and to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  In addition, since a multi-faceted prism or grain is formed on the surface of the surface forming member 1721a or the like, even if the surface forming member 1721a or the like is formed of a highly transparent material, the player can follow the surface forming member 1721a or the like from the player side. It is difficult to recognize the side member. Then, when the LED 1740 is not emitting light, etc., the light emitting decoration substrates 1741 and the LEDs 1740 arranged on the rear side of the surface forming member 1721a and the like can be recognized, and the real feeling of the surface forming member 1721a and the like is reduced. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, since the depth of the game effect unit installation recess 30 can be increased, the depth of the rear side from the panel holder 540, that is, the back unit 510 can be increased. Accordingly, the surface forming member 1721a or the like having a large depth can be used, or the distance between the surface forming member 1721a or the like and each substrate 1741 for light emitting decoration can be increased. And it is set as the pachinko machine 1 which can make it easy to embody the more realistic light-emitting decoration body 1720 resembling a predetermined thing, can attract a player's interest strongly, and can prevent that interest falls. Can do.

  Moreover, since the game effect unit 4 can be enlarged, even if the display area of the effect image by the effect display device 115 is widened, the sphere of the game ball is suppressed from being narrowed, and the movement and effect of the game ball are reduced. Both of the images can be enjoyed together, and the game area 20 of the game effect unit 4 can be enlarged to give various movements to the flowing game balls, and large movable accessories and decorative bodies (movable The pachinko machine 1 can be made more entertaining by arranging a decorative body) and the like to entertain the player.

<About the position of the light emitting decorative body and the features of the light emitting mode>
Here, in the game effect unit 4, as described above, a plurality of electrical decoration components and light emitters (specifically, LEDs 1740 of the light ornament 1720) are disposed behind the game panel 409. As described above, by arranging an illumination member or the like on the deeper side of the game effect unit 4 and controlling its light emission mode in various ways, the following actions and effects can be achieved.

  First, in a conventional pachinko machine, a game window (glass unit) formed on the door frame is usually formed in a substantially circular shape in accordance with the game area of the game effect unit. However, in the present embodiment, the gaming window 101 (glass unit 190) formed in the door frame 5 is vertically long and has a size that greatly exceeds the gaming area 20 and includes substantially the entire gaming panel 409 in a front view. It is formed in a substantially octagonal shape. That is, the area of the game window 101 (glass unit 190) is extremely large compared to the conventional one. Thereby, the player can more strongly experience the depth of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, and light emitted from the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740) from the back side of the game effect unit 4 is pachinko machine. 1 can be easily displayed on the front side of 1 (that is, the light emission mode is easily grasped by the player's vision).

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the depth in which the game effect unit 4 is arranged is deep, it is difficult for light to enter the game area 20 from the outside of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, when the effect display device 115, the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740), and the like are not driven, the gaming area 20 is darker than the conventional pachinko machine. The effect display device 115 and the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740) are located on the back side of the game effect unit 4 that is difficult to be illuminated by light from the outside.

  Thus, the effect display device 115 and the light emitting decorative body 1720 (LED 1740) are prevented from preventing a player from visually recognizing the display mode and the light emission mode by the light entering from the outside of the pachinko machine 1. The That is, the effect display device 115 and the light-emitting decorative body 1720 (LED 1740) are displayed or light-emitted on the back side of the game effect unit 4 kept in a relatively dark state, so that the player can view the image on the effect display device 115. It is easy to visually recognize the display and the light emission mode of the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740).

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment can effectively perform light decoration on the entire periphery of the door frame 5 except the lower side of the game window 101 as described above. In the conventional pachinko machine 1, the light-decorated range is mainly limited to the game area 20, but when the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is viewed from the front, the game area 20 and the door frame 5 are light-decorated. The range is extremely large. In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a planar spread of light decoration that could not be achieved with a conventional gaming machine.

  In addition to this, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the light decoration by the light emitting decoration body 1720 (LED 1740) is performed from the back side of the game effect unit 4, thereby realizing a sense of depth due to the light decoration that is not conventional. . In other words, combined with the flatness and depth of light decoration, players will feel as if they are wrapped in light decoration, and they will be able to concentrate on the game while experiencing an unprecedented interest. it can.

  Furthermore, by performing light decoration by the light emitting decoration body 1720 (LED 1740) from the back side of the game effect unit 4, the game balls flowing down the game area 20 are illuminated by the light. Thereby, an impression can be given to the player as if the game ball flowing down the game area 20 is floating. Furthermore, since the light that illuminates the game sphere is irregularly reflected on the surface of the game sphere, it is possible to give the game ball a variety of colors.

  Further, the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740) provided in the game effect unit 4 has the following effects, particularly in relation to the effect display device 115. That is, in this embodiment, the back unit 510 has a plurality of light emitting decorations 1720 (LEDs 1740). The light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740) is in a later-described effect space 510G for accommodating the effect device behind the game panel 409, and in the front view, the outer periphery of the effect display device 115 (ie, the back unit 510). The outer edges of the openings formed in the Thereby, the light emission mode of the light emitting decorative body 1720 (LED 1740) can be grasped via the transparent game panel 409. In addition, the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740) is disposed on the back side of the gaming panel 409 in which the gaming area 20 is formed (it is not necessary to be disposed in the gaming area 20), so that the space for playing the game ball is reduced. There is no hindrance. Thereby, a plurality of or relatively large light emitting decorations 1720 (LEDs 1740) can be employed, and a large effect display device 115 can be employed as long as it is not wasted. In addition, it is possible to prevent the cost from increasing.

  By the way, if the effect display device 115 is made larger than necessary, not only a wasteful display area is increased, but also the cost is increased. In other words, since the human eye cannot gaze at all the large area screen, even if the production display device 115 is enlarged more than necessary, it is the specific area of the large area screen that is being watched during the game. This is the only area. Therefore, even if an effect or the like is performed in an area where the player can watch, the player hardly notices it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the “light emitting decorative body”, a lamp (LED 1740 of the light emitting decorative body 1720) having higher luminance than the liquid crystal display, such as a lamp or LED, is employed. Thereby, the player can display the display image of the effect display device 115 by arranging the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740) on the outer periphery of the effect display device 115 in front view (that is, an area where the player cannot gaze or is difficult). While recognizing, it is also possible to grasp the light emission mode such as lighting, blinking and / or extinguishing of the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740).

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the light emission mode of the electrical decoration member provided in the game effect unit 4 is appropriately controlled according to the game state in the pachinko machine 1. For example, in a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a special gaming state), the light-emitting decorative body 1720 (LED 1740) is in an advantageous mode, and a flashing light effect is performed. Thereby, the player can confirm that the flashy effect is performed without gazing at the effect display device 115. In addition, this flashy production is performed in a wide production area (production space 510G) using substantially the entire area on the back side of the game panel 409, so that a three-dimensional deep aura can be created from the entire pachinko machine 1. It can suppress the decline of interest. In addition, since this light emission effect is performed around the effect display device 115 (that is, a portion where it is difficult for the player to gaze), a flashy light emission effect can be performed without adversely affecting the player's eyes. The “flashy lighting effect” refers to an effect that enhances the player's mood, such as an effect of performing illumination with each light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740). On the other hand, in a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a normal gaming state), the light emitting decoration body 1720 (LED 1740) is controlled to a normal mode. This normal mode is a modest mode than the advantageous mode, and corresponds to, for example, light extinction or dark lighting. Thereby, the player can grasp that the gaming state is not advantageous to the player.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the presentation is performed in the presentation space 510G as a wide three-dimensional space extending in the left-right direction, the up-down direction, and the depth direction of the game area 20 behind the game area 20. It is the composition which can perform.

  In the wide effect space 510G, the effect display device 115 is arranged substantially in the center, and the light emitting decorations 1720 (LEDs 1740) are arranged around the effect display device 115. By arranging the light emitting decorations 1720 (LEDs 1740) uniformly in the left and right direction and the up and down direction of the game area 20, it is possible to produce effects in substantially the entire area of the game area 20. Note that the arrangement in the effect space 510G is not limited to the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740), and other plural types of lamps, LEDs, and the like may be arranged.

  By the way, conventionally, since it is necessary to secure a space for a game ball to flow down, a space such as an obstruction nail, it has been difficult to arrange a light emitting decorative body over the entire game area. Moreover, in recent years, since the production display devices have been enlarged, the space for arranging the light emitting decorative body has been eroded. For this reason, there has been a flow of production using an effect display device rather than production using a light-emitting decorative body.

  However, the area that can be watched by the human eye (hereinafter referred to as “gaze area”) is a limited range, and even if the effect display device is enlarged, only the useless area that cannot be watched is increased. Further, increasing such a useless area leads to high cost. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 115 is arranged in the gaze area, and the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740) is arranged in the area outside the gaze area. Therefore, it is preferable that the light emitting decorative body 1720 (LED 1740) disposed outside the gaze area is a lamp or LED having higher luminance than the liquid crystal display.

  In addition, the effect display device 115 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 20 as the gaze area, and the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740) is arranged along the periphery of the effect display device 115, so that Direct information transmission and indirect information transmission can be performed.

  This point will be described in detail. Since the effect display device 115 is arranged in the gaze area, the display state of the effect display device 115 can directly inform the player of information such as the current game state. . For example, if it is an aspect in which information related to a gaming state is transmitted by displaying a character or the like on a liquid crystal, unless it is a rare case such as looking away, if you normally play the game by looking at the effect display device 115, It can be confirmed whether or not the character is displayed on the effect display device 115. In this sense, the display by the effect display device 115 is direct information transmission.

  On the other hand, when the light emission mode of the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740) arranged outside the gaze area is changed, the player may not notice the change unless the change is very large. The light emitting decorations 1720 (LEDs 1740) arranged outside the gaze area (specifically, on the outer peripheral side of the effect display device 115) are arranged uniformly distributed over substantially the entire area of the game area 20, and thus each light emission. Although the light emitting mode of the decorative body 1720 (LED 1740) is easy to visually recognize, it is difficult to visually recognize the light emitting modes of all the light emitting decorative bodies 1720 (LED 1740) at a time. In other words, it is easy for the player to grasp the light emission mode of each light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740) individually, but the light emission modes of all the light emission decorations 1720 (LED 1740) dispersed in a wide area. It is difficult to grasp at a time. Therefore, it is possible to indirectly transmit information to the player by changing the light emission mode of the light emitting decoration body 1720 (LED 1740) that is uniformly arranged over the entire game area 20.

  In addition, as an example of changing the light emission mode of the light emitting decoration body 1720 (LED 1740), in addition to changing only the light emission mode of some light emission decoration bodies, the duty ratio of the pulse wave transmitted to the light emission decoration body 1720 (LED 1740) It is conceivable that a slight change is given to the overall light emission mode by changing. Conventionally, since a small number of light-emitting decorative bodies are arranged in the game area, when information is transmitted to a player using the light-emitting decorative bodies, it is necessary to clearly change the light-emitting decorative bodies. For example, it is turned off in the normal gaming state and blinked in the special gaming state. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, information can be transmitted using substantially the entire game area 20, so that a fuzzy change is given to the light emission mode of the light emitting decoration 1720 (LED 1740) (that is, a slight change is given). This makes it possible to send information indirectly to the player.

[Control structure of main board and peripheral board]
Next, a control configuration of the main board and the peripheral board of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. FIG. 84 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration, and mainly showing the configuration around the main board. FIG. 85 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration, and mainly showing the configuration around the peripheral substrate. In these drawings, bold arrows indicate connection and direction of the power source, and thin arrows indicate connection and direction of the signal.

  Control of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is broadly divided into a group of main boards 700 (shown in FIG. 84) and a group of peripheral boards 800 (shown in FIG. 85). The group of the main board 700 controls game operations (winning detection, random number acquisition and winning judgment, special symbol display, prize ball payout, etc.), and the group of peripheral boards 800 is a production operation (light emitting decoration, sound output, liquid crystal display). And the operation of the decorative body).

  As shown in FIG. 84, the main board 700 includes a main control board 710 and a payout control board 720. The main control board 710 includes a CPU 711 as a central processing unit, a ROM 712 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 713 as a readable / writable memory.

  The CPU 711 controls various games performed in the pachinko machine 1 by executing a control program stored in the ROM 712, and creates a command signal to be output to the peripheral board 800 or the payout control board 720.

  The RAM 713 temporarily stores information such as various data and input signals generated in various processes executed by the main control board 710.

  Note that the main board 700 is connected to the power supply board 395 so that operating power is supplied from the power supply board 395. Specifically, operating power is supplied from the power supply board 395 to the payout control board 720, and operating power is supplied to the main control board 710 via the payout control board 720. However, as described above, in this embodiment, a main drawer relay board 648 is provided between the payout control board 720 and the main control board 710, and the main control board 710 is connected to the main drawer relay board 648 (main drawer board 648). The power supply from the payout control board 720 is received via the connector 2000). Various information exchanges between the main control board 710 and the payout control board 720 are also performed via the main drawer relay board 648 (main drawer connector 2000).

  The input interface of the main control board 710 detects the winning state to the first starting port sensor 780 and the second starting port 604 for detecting the winning state to the first starting port 602 via the panel relay terminal plate 750. A second start port sensor 782 that is connected, a gate sensor 760 that detects that a game ball has passed through the passing gate 612, and a general winning port sensor 762 that detects that a game ball has been won are connected to the general winning port 614.

  Further, an opening / closing device count sensor 776 is connected to an input interface of the main control board 710 via an opening / closing device relay terminal plate 754 connected to the panel relay terminal plate 750.

  Detection signals from the sensors are input to the main control board 710.

  On the other hand, a normal symbol / special symbol display substrate 768 is connected to an output interface of the panel relay terminal board 750 via a symbol limiting resistor substrate 766. Thereby, the main control board 710 can output drive signals to the normal symbol display 82, the first special symbol display 84, and the second special symbol display 86.

  Also, the output interface of the switchgear relay terminal plate 754 is connected to a normal electric accessory solenoid 774 and a switchgear open / close solenoid 778. From the main control board 710, the normal electric accessory solenoid 774 and the switchgear open / close solenoid 778 are connected. A drive signal is output toward. Note that the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 774 drives a pair of movable pieces 606 provided at the second start opening 604, and the opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 778 is an opening / closing device 500 (more specifically, a big prize opening opening / closing door). 500b).

  On the other hand, the payout control board 720 includes a CPU 722 as a central processing unit, a ROM 724 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 726 as a readable / writable memory.

  Then, the payout control board 720 processes the command signal input from the main control board 710 and outputs a drive signal to the ball payout device 53 and the launching device 57 including the launching handle and the firing motor. Thereby, the ball payout device 53 pays out the game ball according to the drive signal, and the launch device 57 can fire the game ball according to the drive signal.

  Also connected to the input interface of the payout control board 720 are an inner frame opening switch 736 for detecting the opening state of the front frame (not shown) of the main body frame 3 and a door opening switch 738 for detecting the opening state of the door frame 5. Has been.

  Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the main control board 710 and the payout control board 720 via the respective input / output interfaces. For example, when the main control board 710 transmits a prize ball command, it responds to this. An ACK signal is returned from the payout control board 720 to the main control board 710.

  The payout control board 720 is also connected to a full tank switch 730 that detects that the game balls stored in the dish 360 are full. Please remove it from the office. "

  An external terminal board 753 is connected to the main control board 710 and the payout control board 720. Various information such as a winning state at each start opening 602, 604, a variation state of a normal symbol / special symbol, and a gaming state based on a lottery result are provided via a hall computer provided in the gaming facility via the external terminal board 753. Is output.

  On the other hand, the peripheral substrate 800 includes a peripheral control substrate 810 and a display device control substrate 816 as shown in FIG. Note that communication in only one direction is performed between the output interface and the input interface between the main control board 710 and the peripheral control board 810. That is, even if a command is transmitted from the main control board 710 to the peripheral control board 810, no command is transmitted from the peripheral control board 810 to the main control board 710. Further, the operating power supplied to the peripheral board 800 is supplied via the main control board 710.

  The peripheral control board 810 also includes electronic components such as a CPU 811, ROM 812, and RAM 813, and a predetermined effect control program can be executed by these electronic components.

  In addition, the peripheral control board 810 includes a ROM 819 that stores sound sources that are the basis for effect sounds and musical effects such as music, and effects such as sound effects and music that are based on the contents of the effects based on the sound sources stored in the ROM 819. A sound source IC 818 that outputs sound is provided.

  Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the peripheral control board 810 and the display device control board 816 with each input / output interface.

  On the other hand, a liquid crystal display (LCD) as an effect display device 115 is connected to the display device control board 816. The display device control board 816 processes the command signal transmitted from the peripheral control board 810 and outputs a drive signal to the effect display device 115. Note that the display device control board 816 includes a CPU 832, a RAM 834, a ROM 836, a VDP 838, and an image ROM 839.

  The CPU 832 receives the command signal sent from the peripheral control board 810 via the input / output interface, performs arithmetic processing based on the command, and controls the VDP 838.

  The RAM 834 provides a work area for the CPU 832 and temporarily stores information included in the display command. The ROM 836 holds a program for the CPU 832 (for display control).

  A VDP (video display processor) 838 is a drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the effect display device 115. A register is provided in the VDP 838, and it is possible to hold the operation mode of the VDP 838, setting information of various display functions, and the like. Then, the CPU 832 rewrites various information held in the register, whereby the display mode on the effect display device 115 can be changed variously.

  The image ROM 839 is a non-volatile memory that stores various image data, and stores bitmap image data of various display patterns, JPEG image data for a background image, and the like.

  As described above, the peripheral board 800 (peripheral control board 810 and display device control board 816) performs effect control for an image displayed on the effect display device 115, including a variable display effect for a decorative design 1153 described later. It is a part to do. The variation display of the decorative symbol 1153 is synchronized with the variation display of the special symbol. As will be described later, the decorative symbol variation start condition is to receive a command including information about a variation pattern transmitted from the main control board 710 at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol.

  In addition, a first decoration control board 746, a second decoration control board 748, and a frame decoration relay terminal board 240 are connected to the peripheral control board 810.

  The unit decoration lamp 852 is connected to the output interface of the first decoration control board 746. The first decoration control board 746 controls the light emission mode of the unit decoration lamp 852 (that is, each LED 1740 of the light emitting decoration body 1720). Further, the above-described effect drive unit 854 is connected to the output interface of the second decoration control board 748. The second decoration control board 748 controls the drive mode of the effect driving unit 854 (that is, the moving mechanisms 1725d, 1726b, and 1730b of the light emitting decoration 1720).

  The frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 connected to the peripheral control board 810 is connected to speakers 144 and 341 connected to the door frame 5, operation buttons 327, a frame decoration lamp 842, and the like. The frame decoration relay terminal board 240 is connected to the peripheral control board 810 via the sub drawer relay board 649 described above. The peripheral control board 810 switches the effect mode output to the effect display device 115 based on the operation state of the operation button 327, and outputs a drive signal to the speakers 144, 341 and the frame decoration lamp 842.

[Functional configuration of main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, functional configurations of the main control board 710 constituting the main board 700 of the pachinko machine 1 and the peripheral control board 810 constituting the peripheral board 800 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a functional block diagram schematically showing functional configurations of the main control board and the peripheral control board.

  As shown in FIG. 86, the main control board 710 includes a gaming state control means 934, a first special symbol lottery means 900, a first special symbol display control means 702, a first special symbol hold display control means 930, First special symbol hold counter 903, second special symbol lottery means 910, second special symbol display control means 704, second special symbol hold display control means 932, second special symbol hold counter 913, hold order Storage means 940, right / no-go determination random number storage area 5131, processing area 5132, jackpot game execution means 715, opening / closing operation control means 938, normal symbol lottery means 920, normal symbol display control means 716, normal symbol A hold display control means 718, a normal symbol hold means 923, a movable piece opening / closing control means 928, and a command transmission means 946 are provided.

  First, the gaming state control means 934 determines which gaming state the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is, and controls the gaming state based on the determined gaming state. In this embodiment, as the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1, the normal gaming state in which neither the probability changing function nor the time-shortening function is operated, the special gaming state in which both the probability changing function and the time-shortening function are operated, and the time saving in which only the time-shortening function is operated. The game state is controlled to any one of the game states. When the probability changing function is activated, the winning / non-winning determination process is performed with a winning probability that is easier to win the jackpot than when the probability varying function is not activated, so that the player has a high expectation for the jackpot and is advantageous to the player. In addition, when the time reduction function is activated, the pair of movable pieces 606 are more easily opened and closed than when the time reduction function is not activated, which makes it easier for the second start port 604 to accept the game ball and is advantageous to the player. .

  The first special symbol lottery 900 determines whether or not a game ball is generated with a predetermined random number width (for example, 0 to 640) when a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 780 based on winning of the first start port 602. One random number for determination is acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902. The acquired random number is stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure, and the number of the acquired random number is held to a first predetermined number (for example, 4) by the first special symbol hold counter 903. Then, when the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 903 is released, the random numbers stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determining whether or not to be determined are transferred to the processing area 5132 in the order of acquisition, and the first special symbol determination unit 904 performs the determination. It is determined whether or not the jackpot is won.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery hold by the first special symbol hold counter 903 may be referred to as “first special symbol start-up storage”. The lottery hold by the second special symbol hold counter 913 may be referred to as “second special symbol start memory”.

  If the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 904 determines whether the probability change function is a normal game state or a short-time game state, the random number value acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition unit 902 and the first normal symbol state are determined. It is controlled by the gaming state control means 934 so as to be performed based on the special figure determination table 906. On the other hand, in the special game state in which the probability variation function is activated, the game is performed based on the random number value acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902 and the first probability variation special figure determination table 908. It is controlled by the state control means 934. Then, it is determined whether or not the random value acquired by the first special symbol winning / determining random number acquiring means 902 is a big hit random number. If the big hit random number is determined, the big hit game executing means 715 executes the big hit game.

  When the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 782 based on the winning at the second start port 604, the second special symbol lottery means 910 is the same as when the game ball has won the first start port 602. The second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition unit 912 acquires one random number among random numbers for special symbol success / failure determination generated in a predetermined random number width (for example, 0 to 640). The acquired random number is stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure, and the number of the acquired random number is held by the second special symbol hold counter 913 up to a second predetermined number (for example, 4). Then, when the hold by the second special symbol hold counter 913 is released, the random numbers stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure are transferred to the processing area 5132 in the order of acquisition, and are determined by the second special symbol determination unit 914. It is determined whether or not the jackpot is won.

  If the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 determines whether the probability change function is in a normal game state or a short-time game state, the random number value obtained by the second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 912 and the second normal symbol state are determined. It is controlled by the gaming state control means 934 so as to be performed based on the special figure determination table 907. On the other hand, in the special game state in which the probability variation function is activated, the game is performed based on the random number value acquired by the second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 912 and the second probability variation special figure determination table 909. It is controlled by the state control means 934.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number stored in the first normal special figure determination table 906 is the same as the jackpot random number stored in the second normal special figure determination table 907. More specifically, in the first normal special figure determination table 906 and the second normal special figure determination table 907, 2 of the random numbers for determining whether or not a special symbol is generated with a predetermined random number width (for example, 0 to 640). One (for example, 0 and 1) may correspond to the jackpot random number. In this case, the jackpot probability in the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state is approximately 1 / 320.5.

  Similarly, the jackpot random number stored in the first probability variation special figure determination table 908 is the same as the jackpot random number stored in the second probability variation special figure determination table 909. More specifically, in the first probability variation special figure determination table 908 and the second probability variation special figure determination table 909, among the random numbers for special symbol success / failure determination generated in a predetermined random number range (for example, 0 to 640), 13 One (for example, 0 to 12) may correspond to the jackpot random number. In this case, the jackpot probability in the special gaming state is approximately 1/49.

  When a jackpot game is being executed, even if a game ball wins at the first start port 602, the winning / nothing determination is not performed, and the acquired random number for determining whether or not the winning ball is determined is stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determining whether or not the game is successful. At the same time, the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is counted up. Also, the first normal special figure determination table 906, the second normal special figure determination table 907, the first probability variation special figure determination table 908 and the second probability variation special figure determination table 909 are all stored in the ROM 712 (see FIG. 84). ing.

  Thus, different tables are used for the hit determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 and the hit determination by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914. In this way, by varying the lottery process depending on which start opening among the respective start openings 602 and 604, it becomes possible to increase the variation of the game contents, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In this case, the winning probability in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 900 may be different from the winning probability in the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 910. Furthermore, a mode (for example, given to a player) is different between the jackpot game mode when winning in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 900 and the jackpot game mode when winning in the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 910. It is also possible to adopt a mode in which profits differ. Of course, the tables used for the success / failure determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 may be the same common table.

  In addition, the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure stores a lottery order for each special symbol lottery means (that is, a lottery order by the first special symbol lottery means 900 and a lottery order by the second special symbol lottery means 910). However, the lottery order in which both are merged is not stored. That is, a lottery based on a winning at the first starting port 602 (so-called first special symbol holding ball) and a lottery based on a winning at the second starting port 604 (so-called second special symbol holding ball) The order in which the lottery results are derived when the both exist (in other words, whether the reserved balls are digested) is set by the hold order storage means 940. Therefore, based on the order set by the hold order storage means 940, the first special symbol lottery means 900 (specifically, the first special symbol determination unit 904) or the second special symbol lottery means 910 (specifically, the second special symbol lottery means 904). The special symbol success / failure determination means 914) determines whether the acquired random numbers are correct or not (performs the determination for each random number).

  In the present embodiment, the holding order storage means 940 includes a lottery based on a winning at the first starting port 602 (starting memory of the first special symbol) and a lottery based on a winning at the second starting port 604 (the second special symbol). In the first special symbol lottery means 900 (detailed to the first special symbol lottery means 914). The lottery order is set so as to be given priority over the determination of whether or not the special symbol is determined by the special symbol determination unit 904). Therefore, the start memory of the second special symbol is controlled so as to be derived (so-called “holding digestion”) preferentially over the start memory of the first special symbol, details of which will be described later.

  By the way, when the result of the success / failure determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is determined to be a big hit, a symbol generated by a random number range of 0 to 99 by a symbol random number acquisition means (not shown). One random number is acquired from the random numbers. And if this acquired random number value is 0-67, it will be determined as a special jackpot, and if it is 68-99, it will be determined as a normal jackpot. In this case, both the probability of transition from the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state to the special gaming state (so-called probability variation entry rate) and the probability that the special gaming state will continue (so-called probability variation continuation rate) will be both Approximately 2/3 (68%).

  When the determined jackpot type is a special jackpot, the long open jackpot game execution means 715a displays an effect image indicating that the jackpot is won on the display surface of the effect display device 115. Thus, a long open jackpot game (a jackpot game in which a large amount of game balls are paid out to the player) for opening / closing the opening / closing device 500 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the determined jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the normal jackpot is due to the first special symbol (that is, winning to the first start port 602), or the second special symbol (that is, winning). Depending on whether it is due to winning a prize at the second start opening 604), the mode of the jackpot game is different. Specifically, the normal jackpot consists of a short open normal jackpot, which is a normal jackpot according to the first special symbol, and a long open normal jackpot, which is a normal jackpot according to the second special symbol. The profit given to the player differs depending on whether it is an open big jackpot.

  First, in a case where the determined jackpot type is a short-open normal jackpot, the short-open jackpot game execution means 715b does not display an effect image indicating that the jackpot has been won on the display surface of the effect display device 115. Then, a short-open big hit game (a big hit game that does not prompt the player to pay out a certain amount of game balls) is executed to open and close the opening / closing device 500. On the other hand, when the determined jackpot type is a long-open normal jackpot, an effect image indicating that the jackpot is won by the long-open jackpot game execution means 715a is displayed in the effect display device 115 in the same manner as the special jackpot. The long open jackpot game (a jackpot game in which the player is encouraged to pay out a certain amount of game balls) is executed to open and close the opening / closing device 500.

  When the special jackpot is won, the gaming state after the long open jackpot game based on the special jackpot is executed is controlled by the gaming state control means 934 to the special gaming state. As described above, in the special game state, the probability changing function and the time-shortening function are operated, so that the player can easily win a big hit and can play the game without reducing the ball.

  On the other hand, when a long-opening normal jackpot is won, the gaming state after the long-opening jackpot game based on the long-opening normal jackpot is executed is controlled by the gaming state control means 934 to the short-time gaming state for a predetermined period. In addition, even if a short-open normal jackpot is won in the special game state and the short-time game state, the game state after the short-open big jackpot game based on the short-open normal jackpot is executed is determined by the game state control means 934. It is controlled to the short-time gaming state until it is established. As described above, in the short game state at this time, the short time function is activated until a predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the player can play a game without reducing the ball for a predetermined period.

  However, in this embodiment, the short-time function end condition is different between the short-time game state triggered by the long open normal jackpot and the short-time game state triggered by the short open normal jackpot. More specifically, when the long open big hit game is won, if the number of changes in the special symbol reaches “50” after the long open big hit game is finished, the predetermined condition is satisfied and the time-saving function is stopped. . On the other hand, in the special game state and the short-time game state, when the short open big hit game is won, when the number of times the special symbol changes to “100” after the short open big hit game ends, the predetermined condition is satisfied and the short time is reached. The function stops. That is, it is controlled so that the number of time reductions given depending on the type of jackpot is different.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the big jackpot game mode in the case of winning the normal jackpot (short open normal jackpot) in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 900 and the normal jackpot in the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 910 ( The jackpot game and the mode of the short-time function (that is, the profit given to the player) are controlled differently from the jackpot game mode when winning the long open normal jackpot. Details of various functions and effects realized by such a configuration will be described later.

  In addition, as described above, whether the first special symbol lottery means 900 and the second special symbol lottery means 910 are successful or not is determined by the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913 being released. Based on. The release condition in the present embodiment is the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, but is not limited thereto. For example, when a random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained is determined, the determination result may be stored until the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started.

  By the way, in this embodiment, according to the number of each hold in the 1st special symbol reservation counter 903 and the 2nd special symbol reservation counter 913, the 1st when a high expectation effect (what is called reach effect) mentioned later is not performed. Control is performed so that the variation times of the special symbol and the second special symbol are different. For example, when the high expectation effect is not performed, the details will be described later. In a gaming state where the time-shortening function does not operate (normal gaming state), the first special symbol holding counter 903 has a larger number of retained balls. The variation time of the second special symbol is constant regardless of the number of retained balls of the second special symbol retention counter 913. At this time, in the normal gaming state in which the short function does not operate, the first starting port 602 is easier to win the game ball than the second starting port 604, and even if the gaming ball wins the second starting port 604 in rare cases The lottery for the second start memory has priority over the first start memory. Therefore, the state where the first start memory is larger than the second start memory is almost the case. Therefore, when the game state is controlled in the normal game state, the data storage stored in the ROM 712 is performed by setting the variation time of the second special symbol to be a constant time regardless of the number of retained balls of the second special symbol reservation counter 913. The amount can be reduced, and the control load on the CPU 711 can be suppressed from increasing.

  In the gaming state in which the time-shortening function is activated (special gaming state and short-time gaming state), the second special symbol holding counter 913 is controlled so that the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened as the number of held balls is increased. The variation time of the first special symbol is constant regardless of the number of retained balls of the first special symbol retention counter 903. In the gaming state in which the short function is activated at this time, in addition to promoting the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 604, the lottery for the second starting memory is performed in preference to the first starting memory. The frequency with which the lottery for the first start information is performed is low. Therefore, the amount of data stored in the ROM 712 can be reduced by setting the variation time of the first special symbol to be a constant time regardless of the number of balls held in the first special symbol holding counter 903. It is possible to prevent the control load from increasing.

  The result of the determination by the first special symbol determination unit 904 or the second special symbol determination unit 914 is determined by the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display control unit 704 by the first special symbol display control unit 702 or the second special symbol display control unit 704. 2 is displayed on the special symbol display 86. However, since the display is displayed by lighting patterns of a plurality of LEDs, it is difficult for the player to grasp the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 904 or the second special symbol appropriateness determination unit 914. .

  The number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913 is set by the first special symbol hold display control means 930 or the second special symbol hold display control means 932, respectively. It is displayed on the display 88 or the second special symbol hold display 90.

  The jackpot game execution means 715 executes a jackpot game accompanied by the operation of the condition device based on the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914. More specifically, if the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is a big hit, the jackpot game execution means 715 is opened and closed by the opening / closing operation control means 938. The opening / closing solenoid 500 is operated to open / close the opening / closing device 500, and the jackpot game is executed.

  The condition device operates only when the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is a big hit, and the one gaming state from the one gaming state. The change (transition) to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player is possible only when the condition device is activated. For example, a change (transition) from the normal gaming state to the special gaming state is a condition that the condition device is activated.

  Note that a change (transition) from one gaming state to a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the one gaming state is not only the operation of the condition device, but also a gaming state changing lottery (from one gaming state to the one gaming state). In the case of winning a lottery (whether or not to change to a disadvantaged gaming state by the player than the gaming state of), or when a special symbol change is performed a certain number of times is there. Therefore, for example, a change (transition) from the special gaming state to the normal gaming state may be performed when the other condition described above is satisfied even when the condition device does not operate. However, the present embodiment is configured to shift from the special gaming state to the normal gaming state (or the short-time gaming state) triggered by a short open normal jackpot accompanied by the operation of the condition device.

  By the way, in this embodiment, as the type of jackpot game, the maximum opening time of the opening / closing device 500 is relatively long (for example, 30 sec) and the maximum opening time of the opening / closing device 500 is relatively short (for example, 0) .6 sec) short open big hit games. If the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is the above-mentioned special big hit or long open normal big hit, the long open big hit game execution as the big hit game execution means 715 is executed. The means 715a executes a long open jackpot game. On the other hand, if the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is the above-mentioned short-opening normal jackpot, the short-opening big-hit game execution means as the jackpot game execution means 715 715b executes a short open jackpot game.

  Here, the long open jackpot game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 is performed 15 rounds by the opening / closing operation control means 938. The short open big hit game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 is performed two rounds by the opening / closing operation control means 938. When a game ball wins the open / close device 500, the open / close device count sensor 776 counts the number of winning balls. Then, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls as prize balls are paid out from the ball payout device 53 to the tray by the payout control board 720. Note that, in the short-open big hit game, as described above, the maximum open time of the opening / closing device 500 is only performed twice (two rounds) as compared to the long open big hit game, and it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize. (Even if you win a prize, you will barely win 1 or 2 balls), you can hardly get the prize ball. In addition, even if a short open big hit game is executed, the player often does not notice.

  Note that the types of jackpot games are not limited to long-open jackpot games and short-open jackpot games, and the maximum opening time of the opening / closing device 500 is substantially the same (for example, 30 seconds), but the maximum number of opening times is relative. A large jackpot (for example, 15 rounds) and a jackpot (for example, two rounds) with a relatively small maximum number of releases may be used. Further, although the maximum number of times of opening is substantially the same (for example, 15 rounds), the maximum opening time of the switching device 500 is relatively long (for example, 30 sec) and the maximum opening time of the switching device 500 is relatively short (for example, 15 rounds). For example, it may be 0.3 sec).

  Here, the “round” is a unit of opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 at the time of the big hit game, and after the opening / closing device 500 is opened, the closing condition is established from the opened state until the opening / closing device 500 is closed. Round. The closing condition is that a predetermined time elapses after the opening / closing device 500 is opened or that the maximum number of game balls wins the opening / closing device 500. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the opening / closing device 500 is closed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the closing conditions at the time of a long open big hit game and the closing conditions at the time of a short open game are different. The closing condition in the long open jackpot game is that 30 seconds elapse after the opening / closing device 500 is opened, or that nine game balls win. On the other hand, the closing condition in the short open big hit game is that 0.6 sec elapses after the opening / closing device 500 is opened, or that three game balls win.

  The closing conditions of the opening / closing device 500 are not limited to these. However, in the long open big hit game, the closing condition is set so that the maximum number of winning game balls can win the opening / closing device 500 until a predetermined time elapses after the opening / closing device 500 is opened. It is preferable. On the other hand, in the short-open big hit game, it is preferable that the closing condition is set so that one or two game balls can be won by the opening / closing device 500 while the opening / closing device 500 is open.

  In this way, even if the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is a big hit, a case where a long open big hit game is played and a case where a short open big hit game is executed Thus, the benefits given to the player are very different. That is, when the winning jackpot type is a special jackpot or a long open normal jackpot, a large amount of game balls can win the opening / closing device 500. On the other hand, when the winning jackpot type is the short open normal jackpot, the game device can barely win one or two game balls.

  Next, lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 920 will be described.

  When the game ball passes through the passing gate 612 and is detected by the gate sensor 760, the normal symbol lottery means 920 obtains one random number among the normal symbol appropriateness determination random numbers generated in the random number range of 0 to 250 as the normal symbol. It is acquired by the random number acquisition means 922 for determining whether or not it is correct. The acquired random number is stored up to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 4) by a normal symbol holding means 923 having a storage area for storing the acquired random number and a normal symbol holding counter for storing the number of the acquired random numbers as a counter value. Deferred. When the normal symbol holding means 923 cancels the hold, the normal symbol appropriateness determination means 924 determines whether or not the normal symbol is determined.

  In the normal gaming state in which the time reduction function does not operate, the normal symbol determination determination unit 924 determines whether or not the normal symbol is correct based on the random number value acquired by the normal symbol determination random number acquisition unit 922 and the normal normal symbol determination table 926. As described above, the game state control means 934 controls the game. In this embodiment, since 246 to 250 are hit random numbers, it is determined whether or not the random number values acquired by the normal symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 922 are those hit random numbers. The opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 is executed by the means 928. At this time, the variation time of the normal symbol is 4000 msec, and the pair of movable pieces 606 performs an opening / closing operation once for an opening time of 180 ms (normal mode).

  On the other hand, if it is a special game state or a time-saving game state in which the time reduction function is activated, the normal symbol determination unit 924 determines whether or not the normal symbol determination unit 924 determines whether or not the random number value acquired by the normal symbol determination unit random number acquisition unit 922 and the open extended normal determination. It is controlled by the gaming state control means 934 so as to be performed based on the table 927. In the present embodiment, since 1 to 250 is a hit random number, it is determined whether or not the random number values acquired by the normal symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 922 are those hit random numbers. The opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 is executed by the means 928. At this time, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1024 msec, and the pair of movable pieces 606 executes the opening / closing operation with an opening time of 1300 msec three times and the opening / closing operation with an opening time of 856 msec twice (promotion mode).

  As described above, in the special game state or the short-time game state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second start port 604 is dramatically improved as compared with the normal game state. Therefore, in the special game state in which the time saving function is activated or the time saving game state, the player can enjoy the game without reducing the ball. Furthermore, the number of special symbol lottery opportunities increases dramatically, the expectation that a jackpot game will be executed increases, and the decline in interest is suppressed.

  Here, the normal map determination table 926 and the open extended map determination table 927 are both stored in the ROM 712 (see FIG. 84).

  In this embodiment, whether or not the normal symbol is determined by the normal symbol determination unit 924 is determined to be a win even in the normal gaming state, and the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 can be executed. In the normal gaming state, the hit probability may be zero. That is, the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 may be performed only in the special gaming state or the short-time gaming state.

  The determination result by the normal symbol appropriateness determination unit 924 is displayed on the normal symbol display 82 by the normal symbol display control unit 716. Also, the number of holds by the normal symbol holding means 923 is displayed on the normal symbol hold display 92 by the normal symbol hold display control means 718.

  The movable piece opening / closing control means 928 operates the normal electric accessory solenoid 774 to open / close the pair of movable pieces 606 when the lottery result determined by the normal symbol appropriateness determination means 924 is winning. However, as described above, the opening / closing operation mode of the pair of movable pieces 606 is different between the special game state or the short-time game state and the normal game state (the special game state or the short-time game state). In this case, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 604 is made easier than in the normal game state).

  In the present embodiment, when the pair of movable pieces 606 are closed, it is impossible to win a game ball in the second starting port 604, and the pair of movable pieces 606 are opened and closed. Thus, winning a game ball at the second start port 604 is easier than winning a game ball at the first start port 602. However, when the pair of movable pieces 606 are closed, it is not limited to a mode in which a game ball cannot be won in the second start port 604, and a game ball win in the second start port 604 is the first start. It may be more difficult than winning a game ball in the mouth 602.

  The command transmission unit 946 transmits the lottery result by the first special symbol determination unit 904 or the second special symbol determination unit 914 and information related to the lottery result to the peripheral board 800. The “information related to the lottery result” corresponds to a variation time of the decorative symbol performed in the effect display device 115.

  It should be noted that the result of the determination by the first special symbol determination unit 904, the second special symbol determination unit 914, and the normal symbol determination unit 924 does not necessarily include a loss.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control board 810 includes command receiving means 950, effect lottery means 960, and effect control means 962, as shown in FIG.

  The command receiving unit 950 is a part that receives the determination result by the first special symbol admission / rejection determination unit 904 or the second special symbol adequacy determination unit 914 transmitted from the main control board 710 and information related to the determination result.

  Further, the effect lottery means 960 provides an effect mode to be displayed on the effect display device 115 based on a command transmitted from the main control board 710, an effect sound output from the speakers 144 and 341, an effect sound such as music, and the like. Is a part for determining various aspects of the lamps and the light-emitting decorative body 1720.

  The effect control unit 962 is a part that transmits information to the display device control board 816 so that the effect mode determined by the effect lottery unit 960 is displayed on the effect display device 115. In addition, the effect sound and display are controlled via the frame decoration relay terminal board 240 so that the speakers 144 and 341 and the frame decoration lamp 842 are output. Further, light emission and driving in the light emitting decoration 1720 are also controlled via the first decoration control board 746 and the second decoration control board 748.

[Protection circuit against inrush current]
By the way, as described above, in this embodiment, the game effect control unit 99 (the game effect unit 4 and various control boards attached thereto) is only stored in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3. The unit-side main drawer connector 2000a on the game effect control unit 99 side and the frame-side main drawer connector 2000b on the main body frame 3 side are electrically connected. However, in such a structure in which the unit-side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame-side main drawer connector 2000b are easily connected, the unit-side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame-side main drawer connector 2000 with the power switch turned on. A situation where the drawer connector 2000b is erroneously connected is also assumed.

  That is, in the pachinko machine, the main control board 710 is usually provided on the upstream side of the power supply line with respect to the peripheral board and various sensors including the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment. Therefore, power is supplied to other electrical components. Also, pachinko machines are equipped with various electrical components such as MPU that performs control related to effect display, actuators such as motors, etc., and these electrical components require voltage values for power supply required depending on the type and the like. Therefore, for the main control board 710 provided on the upstream side of the power supply line, a plurality of types of power supply lines such as “+ 34V”, “+ 18V”, and “+ 9V” are relatively large. It is structured to be supplied via the connector 2000. Accordingly, if the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are erroneously connected with the power switch turned on, the terminal 2001a in the main drawer connector 2000 may be connected. When a large current (inrush current described later) flows through the contact point between the contact point 2001b and the contact point 2001b, they may be welded to supply power to the main control board 710 and electric parts downstream from the main control board 710. Such reliability is significantly reduced.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, as shown in the circuit diagram showing the hot-wire failure prevention circuit of FIG. 87, the hot-wire failure prevention that protects various electrical components below the main control board 710 from such inrush current. A circuit 2100 is provided in the main control board 710. That is, in the main control board 710, although not shown in the figure, it is determined whether or not there is a power failure through a constant voltage circuit for generating “5V” which is the operating voltage of the CPU 711, or monitoring a voltage drop in the power supply line. The internal circuit including the CPU 711 is protected from the inrush current by supplying power to the internal circuit such as a power failure monitoring circuit to be performed via the live line failure prevention circuit 2100. Further, power is supplied from the main control board 710 to the electrical components downstream of the main control board 710 via the live line failure prevention circuit 2100.

  Hereinafter, such a hot-wire failure prevention circuit 2100 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the main control board 710 according to this embodiment, the three types of DC power supplies “+ 34V”, “+ 18V”, and “+ 9V” are first subjected to the hot line failure as shown in FIG. Input to the prevention circuit 2100. On the other hand, in the hot line failure prevention circuit 2100, the hot line failure prevention circuit 2100a for "+ 34V", the hot line failure prevention circuit 2100b for "+ 18V", and the hot line failure prevention circuit 2100c for "+ 9V". It is configured with. However, among these, in the hot line failure prevention circuit 2100b for "+ 18V", the voltage input as the DC power supply "+ 18V" is firstly converted into its ripple component (voltage) by the CR filter comprising the resistor R100 and the electrolytic capacitor C100. The superimposed alternating current component) is removed and smoothed. The smoothed voltage of “+ 18V” is the hot line failure prevention circuit 2100a for “+ 34V”, the hot line failure prevention circuit 2100b for “+ 18V”, and the hot line failure prevention circuit for “+ 9V”. It is used for on / off control in relay switch circuits RL1 to RL3 described later provided in 2100c.

  Hereinafter, the configuration of these three types of hot-wire failure prevention circuits 2100 will be described separately.

<Hot-line failure prevention circuit for “+ 34V”>
The hot line failure prevention circuit 2100a for “+ 34V” includes a relay switch circuit RL1 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Fujitsu Takamizawa: JV-18S-KT), and a thermistor TH1 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Ishizuka Electronics: 5D2-11LC). And an electrolytic capacitor C101 and a capacitor C102. The relay switch circuit RL1 includes a coil, an iron piece, a switch, and the like. When a voltage is applied between the coil side input pins and a current is passed through the coil, the iron piece moves and the switch is turned on (turned on). The circuit between the side input pins is connected. The first pin as the coil side input pin is grounded and the fourth pin as the coil side input pin is electrically connected to the above-mentioned smoothed “+ 18V”. As a result, a current flows through the coil and the switch is turned on. The 2nd and 3rd pins as the switch side input pins are electrically connected in parallel with the thermistor TH1, and + 34V from the payout control board 720 is electrically connected to one of these connected in parallel. The other side is electrically connected to the grounded and grounded electrolytic capacitor C101. By this electrolytic capacitor C101, ripples (AC components convolved with voltage) are removed and smoothed. Further, noise is removed by the capacitor C102 grounded to the ground.

  Here, when the game effect control unit 99 (the game effect unit 4 and various control boards attached thereto) is stored in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3, the electrolytic capacitor in the main control board 710 is stored. C101 is already discharged. According to such a configuration, even if the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are erroneously connected in a state where the power switch is turned on, the inrush current described above is the thermistor TH1. And is charged by the electrolytic capacitor C101. As a result, welding due to the inrush current between the + 34V voltage supply line of the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the + 34V voltage supply line of the frame side main drawer connector 2000b is suppressed, and the main control board 710, And the reliability concerning the power supply of the electrical components and the like downstream of the main control board 710 is preferably maintained.

  In addition, in a state where the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are properly connected, a current flows so that the switch in the relay switch circuit RL1 is turned on to avoid the thermistor TH1. Since the circuit structure is adopted, it is possible to suitably suppress power consumption during normal use while suppressing welding due to the inrush current of the + 34V voltage supply line. The characteristics of the thermistor TH1 in this embodiment are an initial resistance value of 5 ohms (Ω), a maximum capacity current of 4A, and a residual resistance value of 0.35Ω. When a current flows through the thermistor TH1, the thermistor TH1 generates heat. The resistance value changes. As a result, even if the relay switch circuit RL1 does not operate, for example, when an inrush current flows through the thermistor TH1, the resistance value decreases and the thermistor TH1 itself is prevented from generating heat, thereby preventing the thermistor TH1 from being damaged. be able to.

  Incidentally, when a fixed resistance that does not change its resistance value, such as cement resistance, is used as a protective resistance against inrush current, it is necessary to use a large type of high power that can withstand heat generation. For this reason, it is difficult to arrange electronic components that malfunction due to the influence of heat in the vicinity of the fixed resistance, and it is necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 710. On the other hand, when the thermistor TH1 whose resistance value changes with temperature is used as a protective resistance against the inrush current, when the inrush current flows through the thermistor TH1, the resistance value decreases and the heat generation of the thermistor TH1 itself is suppressed. . For this reason, electronic components can be arranged in the vicinity of the thermistor TH1, and it is not necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 710 with respect to the heat generated by the thermistor TH1. The characteristics of the relay switch circuit RL1 in the present embodiment are an on voltage of 13.5 V and an off voltage of 0.9 V, and the on / off time of the switch built in the relay switch circuit RL1 is the resistance R100 described above. The time constant of the capacitor C100 is preset, and when the switch of the relay switch circuit RL1 is turned on, the inrush current has already been lowered, and the relay has a very small resistance value compared to the thermistor TH1. It flows to the switch of the switch circuit RL1.

<Hot-line failure prevention circuit for “+ 18V”>
The hot line failure prevention circuit 2100b for "+ 18V" includes a relay switch circuit RL2 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Fujitsu Takamizawa: JV-18S-KT), and a thermistor TH2 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Ishizuka Electronics: 5D2-11LC). And an electrolytic capacitor C103 and a capacitor C104. The relay switch circuit RL2 has the same configuration as the relay switch circuit RL1, and when a voltage is applied between the coil side input pins and a current flows through the coil, the iron piece moves and the switch is turned on (turned on), and the switch side A circuit between input pins is connected. The first pin as the coil side input pin is grounded and the fourth pin as the coil side input pin is electrically connected to the above-mentioned smoothed “+ 18V”. As a result, a current flows through the coil and the switch is turned on. The 2nd and 3rd pins as the switch side input pins are electrically connected in parallel with the thermistor TH2, and one of these connected in parallel is electrically connected to “+ 18V” from the dispensing control board 720. The other is electrically connected to the grounded and grounded electrolytic capacitor C103. The electrolytic capacitor C103 removes and smoothes ripples (alternating current component convolved with voltage). Further, noise is removed by the capacitor C104 grounded.

  Here, when the game effect control unit 99 (the game effect unit 4 and various control boards attached thereto) is stored in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3, the electrolytic capacitor in the main control board 710 is stored. C103 is already discharged. According to such a configuration, even if the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are erroneously connected in a state where the power switch is turned on, the inrush current described above is not affected by the thermistor TH2. And is charged by the electrolytic capacitor C103. As a result, welding due to the inrush current between the + 18V voltage supply line of the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the + 18V voltage supply line of the frame side main drawer connector 2000b is suppressed, and the main control board 710, And the reliability concerning the power supply of the electrical components and the like downstream of the main control board 710 is preferably maintained.

  In addition, in a state where the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are properly connected, a current flows so as to avoid the thermistor TH2 by turning on the switch in the relay switch circuit RL2. Since the circuit structure is adopted, the power consumption during normal use can be suitably suppressed while suppressing welding due to the inrush current of the + 18V voltage supply line. The characteristic of the thermistor TH2 in the present embodiment is the same as the characteristic of the thermistor TH1, and when a current flows through the thermistor TH2, its resistance value changes as the thermistor TH2 generates heat. As a result, even when the relay switch circuit RL2 does not operate, for example, when an inrush current flows through the thermistor TH2, the resistance value thereof decreases and the heat generation of the thermistor TH2 itself is suppressed, thereby preventing the thermistor TH2 from being damaged. be able to.

  Incidentally, when a fixed resistance that does not change its resistance value, such as cement resistance, is used as a protective resistance against inrush current, it is necessary to use a large type of high power that can withstand heat generation. For this reason, it is difficult to arrange electronic components that malfunction due to the influence of heat in the vicinity of the fixed resistance, and it is necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 710. On the other hand, when the thermistor TH2 whose resistance value changes with temperature is used as a protective resistance against the inrush current, when the inrush current flows through the thermistor TH2, the resistance value decreases and the heat generation of the thermistor TH2 itself is suppressed. . For this reason, an electronic component can be disposed in the vicinity of the thermistor TH2, and it is not necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 710 with respect to the heat generated by the thermistor TH2. Note that the characteristics of the relay switch circuit RL2 in the present embodiment are the same as the characteristics of the relay switch circuit RL1 described above, and the inrush current has already decreased when the switch of the relay switch circuit RL2 is turned on. Therefore, the resistance value of the relay switch circuit RL2 is much smaller than that of the thermistor TH2.

<Hot-line failure prevention circuit for “+ 9V”>
The hot line failure prevention circuit 2100c for “+ 9V” includes a relay switch circuit RL3 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Fujitsu Takamizawa: JV-18S-KT), and a thermistor TH3 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Ishizuka Electronics: 5D2-11LC). And an electrolytic capacitor C1 and a capacitor C2. The relay switch circuit RL3 has the same configuration as the relay switch circuits RL1 and RL2, and when a voltage is applied between the coil side input pins and a current is passed through the coil, the iron piece moves and the switch is turned on (ON). A circuit between switch side input pins is connected. The first pin as the coil side input pin is grounded and the fourth pin as the coil side input pin is electrically connected to the above-mentioned smoothed “+ 18V”. As a result, a current flows through the coil and the switch is turned on. The 2nd pin and 3rd pin as switch side input pins are electrically connected in parallel with the thermistor TH3, and “+ 9V” from the dispensing control board 720 is electrically connected to this one connected in parallel. The other side is electrically connected to the grounded and grounded electrolytic capacitor C1. The electrolytic capacitor C1 removes and smoothes the ripple (the AC component convolved with the voltage). Further, noise is removed by the capacitor C2 grounded.

  Here, when the game effect control unit 99 (the game effect unit 4 and various control boards attached thereto) is stored in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3, the electrolytic capacitor in the main control board 710 is stored. C1 is already discharged. According to such a configuration, even if the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are erroneously connected while the power switch is turned on, the inrush current described above is not affected by the thermistor TH3. And is charged by the electrolytic capacitor C1. This suppresses welding due to the inrush current between the + 9V voltage supply line of the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the + 9V voltage supply line of the frame side main drawer connector 2000b, and the main control board 710, And the reliability concerning the power supply of the electrical components and the like downstream of the main control board 710 is preferably maintained.

  In addition, when the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are properly connected, a current flows so as to avoid the thermistor TH2 by turning on the switch in the relay switch circuit RL2. Since the circuit structure is adopted, it is possible to suitably suppress power consumption during normal use while suppressing welding due to the inrush current of the + 9V voltage supply line. The characteristics of the thermistor TH3 in the present embodiment are the same as the characteristics of the thermistors TH1 and TH2, and when a current flows through the thermistor TH3, the resistance value changes as the thermistor TH3 generates heat. As a result, even when the relay switch circuit RL3 does not operate, for example, when an inrush current flows through the thermistor TH3, the resistance value decreases and the thermistor TH3 itself is prevented from generating heat, thereby preventing the thermistor TH3 from being damaged. be able to.

  Incidentally, when a fixed resistance that does not change its resistance value, such as cement resistance, is used as a protective resistance against inrush current, it is necessary to use a large type of high power that can withstand heat generation. For this reason, it is difficult to arrange electronic components that malfunction due to the influence of heat in the vicinity of the fixed resistance, and it is necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 710. On the other hand, when the thermistor TH2 whose resistance value changes with temperature is used as a protective resistance against the inrush current, when the inrush current flows through the thermistor TH3, the resistance value decreases and the heat generation of the thermistor TH3 itself is suppressed. . For this reason, electronic components can be arranged in the vicinity of the thermistor TH3, and it is not necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 710 with respect to the heat generated by the thermistor TH3. Note that the characteristics of the relay switch circuit RL3 in this embodiment are the same as the characteristics of the relay switch circuits RL1 and RL2 described above, and when the switch of the relay switch circuit RL3 is turned on, the inrush current has already decreased. Thus, the resistance value is much smaller than that of the thermistor TH3 and flows through the switch of the relay switch circuit RL3.

  In the above embodiment, the unit-side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame-side main drawer connector 2000b are electrically connected only by housing the game effect control unit 99 in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3. The main control board 710 is provided with a hot-wire failure prevention circuit 2100 under the background that the power supply is supplied to the electrical components below the main control board 710. That is, in this case, the live line failure prevention circuit 2100 is provided on the power line immediately below where the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are erroneously connected with the power switch turned on. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately ensure the reliability related to the power supply of the electrical components below the main control board 710. However, in terms of protection from the inrush current, the board (discharging control board 720) provided on the upstream side of the main control board 710 or downstream of the main control board 710 is inferior to the case of the above embodiment. A hot-wire failure prevention circuit 2100 may be provided on a power supply line of a substrate provided on the side.

  In the above embodiment, the thermistors TH1, TH2, and TH3 are used as resistances for protecting against inrush current. However, appropriate resistances may be used. That is, in this case, the electrolytic capacitors C1, C101, and C103 are electrically connected in series with the resistors and the relays RL1, RL2, and RL3. However, when an inrush current flows, the electrolytic capacitors C1, C101, and C103 flow to the electrolytic capacitors C1, C101, and C103 through the resistors. . For this reason, the inrush current which flows into electrolytic capacitor C1, C101, C103 can be reduced by converting inrush current into heat with resistance. On the other hand, after the inrush current flows, current is passed through the electrolytic capacitors C1, C101, and C103 through the relays RL1, RL2, and RL3 without passing through the resistors. Thereby, destruction of resistance can be prevented.

  Next, various control processes executed on the main board 700 according to the game progress of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 111.

[About main system processing]
First, a description will be given based on FIG. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of main system processing executed by the CPU mounted on the main control board of the main board.

  As shown in FIG. 88, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the CPU 711 (see FIG. 84) executes power-on processing (step S10). In the power-on process, first, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM 713 (see FIG. 84) is normal (is a set value when a power failure occurs). That is, the RAM 713 (data memory) of this embodiment has a backup area in which various control data are backed up by constantly supplying power. When the power supply is stopped, the pachinko machine 1 performs a process of temporarily saving various control data stored in the processing area of the RAM 713 to the backup area, and the temporarily saved data when the power is restored. Is read out to the processing area of the RAM 713, so that a game with continuity can be executed from the time of power-off.

  Therefore, in this power-on process (step S10), if the backup data (data in the backup area) is normal, the process of returning to the power supply stop state according to the backup data stored in the RAM 713 (power recovery) Time processing). On the other hand, if the backup data is abnormal, the backup data stored in the RAM 713 is deleted. After that, in the RAM 713, various control data necessary for the progress of the game such as jackpot winning probability and control data indicating the current game state are written with respective initial parameters (initialization). processing). Also, when the power is turned on for the first time after commercialization, various control data necessary for game progress are written with respective initial parameters.

  The current gaming state written in the power-on process is transmitted to the peripheral control board 810, and the display on the effect display device 115 is controlled based on this command. In this way, the current gaming state at the time of power failure is stored in the RAM 713 of the main control board 710, and the current gaming state is transmitted to the peripheral control board 810 after power recovery, so that even if a power failure occurs, The gaming state displayed on the effect display device 115 can be matched (the peripheral control board 810 does not store the gaming state at the time of a power failure). By the way, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, in order to synchronize the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 and the special symbol corresponding symbol of the effect display device 115 with the variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern which will be described later is started at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol. Send information about the command. Immediately after transmitting the command, a command for the current game information is transmitted from the main control board 710 to the peripheral control board 810 each time. As a result, the peripheral control board 810 can always grasp the current gaming state.

  However, in this power-on process (step S10), it is also determined whether or not the RAM erase switch that instructs to erase the backup data stored in the RAM 713 is on. That is, even when this RAM erase switch is on, the backup data stored in the RAM 713 is erased. At the same time, various control data necessary for the game progress, such as the jackpot winning probability and the control data indicating the current game state, are written in the processing area of the RAM 713 with respective initial parameters. Processing).

  In the power-on process (step S10), a power-on command indicating that the main control board 710 (see FIG. 84) is activated when such initialization processing is executed is sent to the peripheral control board 810 (FIG. 85). The process of setting to a state where transmission is possible is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 810 that the main control board 710 has been activated. In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the amusement store is closed, the backup data is stored in the RAM 713, and the power supply is started when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started again. Processing at the time of execution is executed.

  When the power-on process (step S10) ends, the CPU 711 starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for gaming. At the start of this loop process, the CPU 711 first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S20). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board 395. That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Power is supplied to the device. When a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 710 is stopped is transmitted. Is done. Then, when a power failure notice signal is detected by the CPU 511 mounted on the main control board 710 in step S20, a process at the time of power failure occurrence is executed (step S40).

  The process at the time of the power interruption occurs when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after a power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as “recovery”). This is a process of temporarily saving data in the backup area of the RAM 713 when a power failure occurs in order to start. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the processing at the time of power-off occurrence is not an interrupt processing, but a branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  If the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S20 (NO in step S20), that is, if the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the non-winning random number update for updating the random number used in the game Processing is performed (step S30). Note that the random numbers updated in the non-winning random number update process will be described later.

[Power failure occurrence processing]
FIG. 89 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing upon occurrence of power interruption. As described above, the power interruption occurrence process (step S40) is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main system process (YES in step S20). First, the CPU 711 performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S42). Then, the checksum in the processing area of the RAM 713 is calculated, and the calculation result and various game data are stored in the backup area of the RAM 713 (step S44). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM 713 before the power failure are properly maintained at the time of power recovery.

  Next, the CPU 711 sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 713 (step S46). When the above processing is completed, the CPU 711 prohibits access to the RAM 713 (step S48) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. By the way, in this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure or the like (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power interruption”) and the process at the time of power interruption occurs, the power supply voltage is not actually stopped. Therefore, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such adverse effects, the CPU 711 of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed, but is not updated when the process when the power is cut off is entered. As a result, a power interruption occurrence process is entered due to a momentary power interruption, and even after entering the infinite loop of FIG.

  Instead of the backup area of the RAM 713, a rewritable nonvolatile memory (EEPROM or the like) may be provided. In this case, there is a merit that a constant power supply is not required to back up data.

  Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 713 may be a backup area in which data is backed up by constantly supplying power. In this case, it is not necessary to save the data stored in the specific area of the RAM 713 to another area when the power is shut off. In addition, since it is not necessary to read the saved data to the processing area when the power is restored, the load required for these processes is reduced.

[About timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the CPU 711 mounted on the main control board 710 of the main board 700 during execution of the main system process. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 711 executes the process from step S60 to step S270 after executing the register standby process (step S50).

  In the sensor monitoring process in step S60, a process for monitoring detection signals of the various sensors described above (gate sensor 760, first start port sensor 780, second start port sensor 782, opening / closing device count sensor 776, etc.) is executed.

  In the winning random number update process of step S70, a process of updating a random number used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the winning random number update process is different from the random number updated in the non-winning random number update process. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the winning random number updating process may be updated in the non-winning random number updating process.

  In the payout control process in step S80, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control board 720 based on the signal detected in the sensor monitoring process (step S60).

  In the normal symbol / ordinary electric accessory control process in step S90, the control process related to the normal symbol display 82 is executed based on the signal detected from the gate sensor 760 in the sensor monitoring process (step S60). The process for performing opening / closing control of the movable piece 606 is executed.

  In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process in step S100, a series of processing from the start of the special symbol change to the start of the winning game is executed, and the opening / closing control of the opening / closing device 500 as the special electric accessory is performed. Execute the process.

  In the output data setting process of step S260, a process of generating a command to be transmitted from the main control board 710 to the peripheral control board 810 is executed based on information determined in the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step S100). .

  In the command transmission process of step S270, a process of transmitting the command set in the output data setting process (step S260) to the peripheral control board 810 is performed. When the processing from step S60 to step S270 is executed, the register return processing (step S280) is executed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the CPU 711 in the above-described non-winning random number update processing (step S30) and winning random number update processing (step S70) will be described.

  In the present embodiment, various random numbers used in the game include a random number for determination of success / failure, a random number for design, a random number for determination of reach, a random number for variation pattern, a random number for determination of success / failure of normal symbol, and the like.

  The success / failure determination random number is a success / failure determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game. The symbol random number is a random number used to determine the type of jackpot (special jackpot, long open normal jackpot, and short open normal jackpot) when it is determined that a jackpot game will be generated. The reach determination random number is a random number that is used for determining whether or not to perform a highly anticipated effect such as a reach effect without winning a jackpot (that is, losing) in the success / failure determination. The variation pattern random number is a random number used to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 84 and the second special symbol display 86. The normal symbol determination random number is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the pair of movable pieces 606 to be in an open state.

  It should be noted that the variation pattern of the decorative design that is displayed and controlled by the effect display device 115 may be determined by a random number for variation pattern, and is applied to the CPU 811 or the display device control board 816 mounted on the peripheral control board 810 of the peripheral board 800. It may be determined by the CPU 832 to be mounted (both refer to FIG. 85). Further, the random number for the variation pattern is not essential, and the variation pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the random number for reach determination.

  Of these random numbers, in the winning random number update process, the random number for determining whether or not to win the jackpot game, the design random number, and whether or not to control the pair of movable pieces 606 in an open state in which a game ball can be easily received. The random number for determining whether or not the symbol is correct is updated. Here, the random numbers used for determining whether or not the big hit game is generated and whether or not the pair of movable pieces 606 are controlled to be opened are updated every 4 ms as a fixed timing. By doing this, the probability (probability determined to generate a jackpot game, probability determined to control the pair of movable pieces 606 to be opened) in a predetermined period in each random number is made constant (that is, aiming) And the like can be prevented from being biased, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

  On the other hand, in the non-winning random number update process, the reach determination random number and the fluctuation pattern random number are updated regardless of the occurrence of the winning game and the display result of the normal symbol. Note that the random numbers updated on the main control board 710 are not limited to those described above. In the non-winning random number update process, when the counter for updating the random number for determining whether or not the circuit has made one round, the determination is made to start counting next. The initial value determination random number or the like for determining the initial value of the random number is also updated.

  In the present embodiment, as means for acquiring the random number for determination of success / failure, there are provided two means: a random number acquisition means for the first special symbol determination 902 and a second random number acquisition means for determination 912 of the second special symbol. However, only one of these may be provided.

[Regarding special symbol / special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol / special electric accessory control process.

  In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process, first and second start opening winning process (step S110) is performed. Specifically, as will be described later, it is determined whether or not a game ball is received in the first start port 602 or the second start port 604, and a series of processing is performed based on this. Once the first and second start opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the process flag is confirmed (step S120 to step S230), and the process corresponding to the process flag is performed.

  When the first and second start opening winning processes (step S110) are finished, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120). If the processing flag is 0 (YES in step S120), the fluctuation occurs. A start process (step S130) is executed. In the variation start process (step S130), settings for starting the variation display of the special symbol are performed. As will be described in detail later, it is determined whether or not to start the big hit game, and the processing flag is updated to “1”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 in step S120 (NO in step S120), the process proceeds to step S140.

  In step S140, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). If the process flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 and the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 115 is determined, and the variation pattern is set as the variation pattern. A correspondingly set fluctuation time (the time from the start of the special symbol fluctuation display to the stop display on either the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86) is set in the timer. The processing flag is updated to “2”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 in step S140 (NO in step S140), the process proceeds to step S170.

  In step S170, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S170). If the processing flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the changing process (step S180) is executed. In the changing process, the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and the special symbol in the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 is determined based on the time-out. The fluctuation display of is stopped. At this time, the process selection flag is updated to “3” if it is determined to be a big hit in the change start process (step S130), and the process selection flag is set to “0” if it is not determined to be a big hit. Update. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 in step S170 (NO in step S170), the process proceeds to step S190.

  In step S190, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 3 (step S190). If the process flag is 3 (YES in step S190), a big hit game start process (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game start process, the jackpot type is determined, the number of rounds for controlling the opening / closing operation of the switchgear 500 according to the jackpot type, the opening time and the game ball winning limit number are set, and the processing flag is set to “ Update to "4". On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S230.

  In step S230, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 4 (step S230). If the process flag is 4 (YES in step S230), the special electric utility jackpot control process (step S240) is executed. In this special electric utility jackpot control process, the opening / closing operation of the switchgear 500 is controlled based on the number of rounds, the opening time and the number of game balls that can be won in the jackpot game start process (step S200), and the jackpot game ends. In this case, a process for updating whether or not to activate the probability changing function and the time reduction function and updating the processing flag to “0” is performed.

  When any of the various processes from step S130 to step S240 is executed, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process is terminated.

[About the 1st and 2nd starting prize winning process]
Next, the first / second start opening winning process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the first and second start-up winning prize process.

  In the first and second start opening winning processes, the CPU 711 first determines whether or not a game ball has won the second start opening 604 (step S1101). Specifically, the presence / absence of game ball detection by the second start port sensor 782 is confirmed. At this time, if a game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 782, it is determined that the game ball has won the second start port 604 (YES in step S1101). If no game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 782, it is determined that no game ball has won the second start port 604 (NO in step S1101).

  When it is determined in step S1102 that the game ball has won the second starting port 604, various data (random determination random number, symbol random number, special symbol type acquired by the second special symbol determination random number acquisition means 912) are stored. get. Then, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1102).

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1102), the CPU 711 performs a second hold storage process (step S1103), and then proceeds to step S1104. move on. The second hold storage process stores various data (random determination randomness, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired by winning the game ball in the second starting port 604 in the random number storage region 5131 for determination of success / failure, This is a process of adding 1 to the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913. The random number storage area 5131 for determining whether or not to win has a random number storage area for determining whether or not to win, a design random number storage area, and a special symbol type storage area, and various types of game balls acquired by winning a game ball at the second starting port 604. Data is stored in each storage area.

  When the CPU 711 determines in step S1101 that a game ball has not won the second starting port 604 (NO in step S1101), and in step S1102, the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is an upper limit value of 4. When it is determined that the value has reached (NO in step S1102), the process proceeds to step S1104.

  In step S1104, the CPU 711 determines whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 602 (step S1104). Specifically, the presence or absence of game ball detection by the first start port sensor 780 is confirmed. At this time, if a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 780, it is determined that the game ball has won the first start port 602 (YES in step S1104). If no game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 780, it is determined that no game ball has been won in the first start port 602 (NO in step S1104).

  When it is determined in step S1104 that the game ball has won the first starting port 602, various random numbers (random determination random numbers, symbol random numbers, special symbol types acquired by the first special symbol determination random number acquisition means 902) are displayed. It is acquired and it is determined whether or not the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1105).

  If it is determined in step S1104 that the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1105), the CPU 711 performs a first hold storage process (step S1106), and the first and second The start opening winning process is terminated. The first hold storage process stores various data (random determination random number, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired by winning a game ball in the first start port 602 in the random number storage area 5131 for determination on success / failure, This is a process of adding 1 to the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903. Similar to the various data acquired by winning the game ball in the second starting port 604, the various data acquired by winning the game ball in the first starting port 602 is stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of validity. It is stored in each storage area.

  When the CPU 711 determines in step S1104 that a game ball has not won the first start port 602 (NO in step S1104), and in step S1105, the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is an upper limit value of 4. When it is determined that the number has reached (NO in step S1105), the first and second start opening winning processes are both terminated.

  In step S1102, if the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is the upper limit value when the game ball wins the second start port 604, the various data acquired in step S1101 are discarded. Similarly, in step S1105, when the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is the upper limit value when the game ball wins the first start port 602, the various data acquired in step S1104 are discarded.

  When it is determined that a game ball has won at the second starting port 604, acquisition of various data (randomness number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) is not necessarily performed in step S1101, but step S1101 to step S1101. What is necessary is just to perform between S1103. For example, without acquiring various data in step S1101, it is possible to acquire various data after determining that the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is less than the upper limit value in step S1102, or in step S1103 You may make it acquire by a 2nd pending | holding memory | storage process.

  Similarly, when it is determined that a game ball has won at the first start port 602, acquisition of various data (randomness number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) is not necessarily performed in step S1104; What is necessary is just to perform between step S1106. For example, without acquiring various data in step S1104, it is possible to acquire various data after determining that the counter value of the first special symbol holding counter 903 is less than the upper limit value in step S1105, You may make it acquire by a 1st pending | holding memory | storage process.

  Thus, in this embodiment, after performing the winning process (steps S1101 to S1103) to the second starting port 604, the winning process (steps S1104 to 1106) to the first starting port 602 is performed. Yes. However, instead of this, after the winning process for the first starting port 602 is executed, the winning process for the second starting port 604 may be executed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, even if any of the lottery process by the 1st special symbol lottery means 900 and the lottery process by the 2nd special symbol lottery means 910 is performed, the winning probability to the jackpot is the same. It is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot winning probability when the lottery process is performed by the first special symbol lottery means 900 and the jackpot winning probability when the lottery process is performed by the second special symbol lottery means 910 are different. good.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the ratio of winning a special jackpot in the jackpot in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900 and the special jackpot in the jackpot in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910 There is no difference in the winning percentage, but it is not limited to this. For example, in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900, the probability of winning a special jackpot among the jackpots is set relatively high, while in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910, This corresponds to the case where the probability of winning a special jackpot is set relatively low.

[About variation start processing]
Next, the variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the change start process.

  In the variation start process (step S130) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the CPU 711 first sets the number of random numbers (starting storage number) stored in the randomness determination random number storage area 5131 to zero. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1301). When the starting storage number stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of validity is 0, it means that the counter values of the first special symbol hold counter 903 and the second special symbol hold counter 913 are both 0. .

  If the starting storage number is not 0 (NO in step S1301), a shift process of the random number storage area 5131 for determination of validity is performed (step S1302). This shift process is a process for shifting the order in which the determination of whether or not the random numbers acquired based on the winning of the game balls to the respective start ports 602 and 604 are made is performed. That is, in principle, whether or not the special symbol is successful is determined in the order in which the game balls are won in the respective start ports 602 and 604, and therefore the order is shifted as the change starts. The random number acquired earliest among the random numbers acquired based on the winning of the game balls at the start ports 602 and 604 is transferred to the processing area 5132. However, in this embodiment, the random number acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 604 is acquired after the random number acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 602. Even so, it is preferentially moved to the processing area 5132 by a random number based on a winning at the first start port 602. If the start memory number is 0 in step S1301 (YES in step S1301), the variation start process is terminated.

  After performing the shift process in step S1302, the CPU 711 determines the type (whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol) stored in the processing area 5132 (step S1303). If the type is the second special symbol type (YES in step S1303), the second special symbol flag is turned on (step S1303), and the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is decremented by one. (Step S1305), the process proceeds to step S1308. On the other hand, if the type is the first special symbol type (NO in step S1303), the first special symbol flag is turned on (step S1306) and the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is decremented by one. (Step S1307), the process proceeds to step S1308.

  In step S1308, it is determined whether or not the gaming state in which the probability changing function is operating (ie, the special gaming state) (step S1308). Here, if the gaming state in which the probability changing function is operating (YES in step S1308), the first probability variation special figure determination table 908 or the second probability variation special figure determination table 909 is selected (step S1309). Specifically, if the first special symbol flag is in the ON state, the first probability variation special figure determination table 908 is selected, and if the second special symbol flag is in the ON state, the second probability variation special symbol determination table 909 is selected. The

  On the other hand, if the probability changing function is not activated in step S1308 (NO in step S1308), the first normal special figure determination table 906 or the second normal special figure determination table 907 is selected (step S1310). Specifically, if the first special symbol flag is ON, the first normal special symbol determination table 906 is selected, and if the second special symbol flag is ON, the second normal special symbol determination table 907 is selected. The

  Then, the determination is made based on the determination table selected in step S1309 or step S1310 and the determination random number stored in the processing area 5132 (step S1311).

  The jackpot determination in step S1311 is performed by the first special symbol determination unit 904 if the first special symbol flag is ON, and the second special symbol determination unit if the second special symbol flag is ON. 914.

  If it is determined in step S1311 that it is a big hit (YES in step S1311), the type of jackpot is determined based on the acquired symbol random number (step S1312). Thereafter, the flag corresponding to the jackpot type is turned on (step S1313). Specifically, if the special big hit, the special big hit flag is turned ON, if the long open normal big hit, the long open normal big hit flag is turned ON, and if the short open normal big hit, the short open normal big hit flag is turned ON. To. Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “1” (step S1316), and the variation start process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1311 that it is not a big hit (NO in step S1311), the process proceeds to step S1316, the processing flag is updated to “1”, and the variation start process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, after the shift process is performed in step S1302, whether or not the determination is correct is made based on the determination table selected in step S1309 or step S1310 and the determination random number stored in the processing area 5132. Although it is performed (step S1311), it is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform the determination based on the determination table and the random number stored first in the determination and determination random number storage area 5131 and then perform the shift process. At this time, the validity determination random number stored in the validity determination random number storage area 5131 can be referred to only when the change starts.

[About variation pattern setting processing]
Next, the variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  The variation pattern setting process is a process of setting a variation pattern according to the determination result. In this process, first, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol flag is ON (step S1510). That is, it is determined whether or not the current variation is based on a winning / not-determining random number extracted based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 780. If it is determined that the first special symbol flag is ON (YES in step S1510), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag for the first special symbol is ON (step S1520). That is, whether or not the big hit is derived based on the current variation of the first special symbol is determined in step S1313 based on whether or not a flag corresponding to the big hit type (big hit flag) is in an ON state. Here, if the jackpot flag for the first special symbol is ON (YES in step S1520), the variation pattern table setting process for the first special symbol is performed (step S1530), and then the variation pattern determination process is performed (step S1580). ). On the other hand, if the jackpot flag of the first special symbol is not ON (NO in step S1520), a first special symbol loss variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S1540), and then a variation pattern determination process is performed (step S1580). .

  If the first special symbol flag is not ON in step S1510 (NO in step S1510), the second special symbol flag is ON, and this variation is detected by the second start-up sensor 782. It is determined that the result is based on the randomness determination random number extracted based on the fact. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag for the second special symbol is ON (step S1550). That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is derived based on the current variation of the second special symbol. Here, if the jackpot flag for the second special symbol is ON (YES in step S1550), the variation pattern table setting process for the second special symbol is performed (step S1560), and then the variation pattern determination process is performed (step S1580). ). On the other hand, if the jackpot flag of the first special symbol is not ON (NO in step S1550), a second special symbol loss variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S1570), and then a variation pattern determination process is performed (step S1580). .

  In the variation pattern determination process in step S1580, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table set in each variation pattern table setting process (steps S1530, 1540, 1560, 1570). Next, when the variation pattern is determined in step S1580, the determined variation pattern is set as a selection value (step S1590), and the variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern is set in the timer (step S1600). Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S1610), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  In addition, based on the variation pattern set in this variation pattern setting process, it is displayed by a lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs as the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86.

[Details of the first special symbol variation pattern table setting process]
Details of the first special symbol variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 101. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the first special symbol variation pattern table setting process. 96 and 97 are flowcharts showing an example of the first special symbol loss variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a first special symbol / normal time loss table (tables T1H and T1R) showing a loss variation pattern of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a first special symbol / normal time hitting table (table T1A) showing a hit variation pattern of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a first special symbol / variation type setting table for determining a variation type related to the variation pattern of the first special symbol. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a first special symbol / specific time table (table J1) showing a variation pattern of the first special symbol in the specific gaming state.

  First, with reference to FIG. 95, the variation pattern table setting process of the first special symbol when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (special big hit or normal big hit) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 95, in the first special symbol variation pattern table setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the time saving function is not activated, that is, whether or not a specific gaming state is being executed (step S15301). ). If it is determined that the time-saving function is not activated (YES in step S15301), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type for the first special symbol is a special jackpot (step S15303). Specifically, in step S15303, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag set in step S1313 is a special jackpot flag. If it is determined that it is a special jackpot (YES in step S15303), the first special symbol / normal special jackpot table is selected (step S15305).

  Specifically, one of the first special symbol / normal special jackpot table that can be selected in the case of winning the special jackpot in the first special symbol / normal jackpot table (table T1A) shown in FIG. Is selected based on the random number value of the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern. In the present embodiment, one of the tables T1AA to T1AG is selected based on the random number value of the variation pattern random number 1. In this case, in the above-described variation pattern determination process (step S1580), the variation pattern is determined from the table selected in step S15305 based on the random number value of the variation pattern random number 2. Further, the variation type (10H to 13H) of the variation pattern is determined based on the random number value of the variation type random number (see FIG. 100).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S15303 that the jackpot type is not a special jackpot (NO in step S15303), since the jackpot type is a normal jackpot (specifically, a short open normal jackpot), the first special symbol / normal time A normal jackpot table is selected (step S15307).

  Specifically, one of the first special symbol / normal normal jackpot table that can be selected in the case of winning the normal jackpot from the first special symbol / normal jackpot table (table T1A) shown in FIG. Is selected based on the random number value of the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern. In this embodiment, since there is only one first special symbol / normal normal jackpot table (table T1AH), the table T1AH is selected regardless of the random value of the random number 1 for the variation pattern. In this case, in the above-described variation pattern determination process (step S1580), only the variation pattern “predetermined variation” of the variation number “95” is selected from the table selected in step S15307, regardless of the random number value of the variation pattern random number 2. It is determined. Furthermore, regardless of the random number value of the variation type random number, only the variation type 10H of the variation pattern is determined (see FIG. 100).

  By the way, if it is determined that the time-saving function in step S15301 is not activated (NO in step S15301), the game state is a specific gaming state in which the time-saving function is activated. Also in this case, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type for the first special symbol is a special jackpot (step S15309). If it is determined that the jackpot is a special jackpot (YES in step S15309), the first special symbol / specific time is determined. A special jackpot table is selected (step S15311).

  Specifically, one of the first special symbols / special time special jackpot tables that can be selected in the first special symbol / special time table (table J1) shown in FIG. Is selected based on the random value of the random number 1 for the variation pattern. In this embodiment, since there is only one first special symbol / special time special jackpot table (table J1A), the table J1A is selected regardless of the random number value of the random number 1 for the variation pattern. In this case, in the above-described variation pattern determination process (step S1580), the variation pattern is determined from the table selected in step S15311 based on the random value of variation pattern random number 2. Since the variation type is not set in the specific gaming state, the symbol variation time matches the variation time of each variation pattern.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S15309 that the jackpot type is not a special jackpot (NO in step S15309), the jackpot type is a normal jackpot (specifically, a short open normal jackpot), so the first special symbol / specific time A normal jackpot table is selected (step S15313).

  Specifically, one of the first special symbols / specific time normal jackpot tables that can be selected in the case of winning the normal jackpot in the first special symbol / specific time table (table J1) shown in FIG. Is selected based on the random value of the random number 1 for the variation pattern. In the present embodiment, since there is only one first special symbol / specific normal jackpot table (table J1AH), the table J1AH is selected regardless of the random value of the random number 1 for the variation pattern. In this case, in the above-described variation pattern determination process (step S1580), the variation pattern is determined from the table selected in step S15313 based on the random number value of the variation pattern random number 2. Since the variation type is not set in the specific gaming state, the symbol variation time matches the variation time of each variation pattern.

  Next, the variation pattern table setting process for the first special symbol when the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big win (that is, when the lottery is lost) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, in the first special symbol loss variation pattern table setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the time reduction function is inactive, that is, whether or not a specific gaming state is being executed. (Step S 15401). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S 15401), it is determined whether or not the reserved ball of the first special symbol is 0 (step S 15403). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of stored starting symbols for the first special symbol immediately after the start of fluctuation (that is, the counter value by the first special symbol hold counter 903) is zero. If it is determined that the reserved ball of the first special symbol is 0 (YES in step S15403), it is determined whether or not a high expectation effect (so-called reach fluctuation) is executed (step S15405). Note that details of the determination as to whether or not to perform this high expectation effect (high expectation effect lottery) will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S15405 that the high expectation effect is to be executed (YES in step S15405), the first special symbol / normal high expectation loss table is selected (step S15407).

  Specifically, among the first special symbol / normal time loss table (tables T1H and T1R) shown in FIG. 98, the first special symbol / normal high expectation loss table that can be selected when executing a high expectation effect. One of the (table T1R) is selected based on the random value of the variation pattern random number 1. In the present embodiment, one of the tables T1RA to T1RD is selected based on the random value of the variation pattern random number 1. In this case, in the above-described variation pattern determination process (step S1580), the variation pattern is determined from the table selected in step S15407 based on the random number value of variation pattern random number 2. Further, the variation type (10H to 13H) of the variation pattern is determined based on the random number value of the variation type random number (see FIG. 100).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S15405 that the high expectation effect is not executed (NO in step S15405), the first special symbol / normal low expectation loss table A is selected (step S15409).

  Specifically, among the first special symbol / normal time loss table (tables T1H and T1R) shown in FIG. 98, the first special symbol / normal time low expectation loss table that can be selected when the high expectation effect is not executed. One of the tables A corresponding to the reserved ball “0” of the first special symbol is selected based on the random number value of the variation pattern random number 1 from (Table T1H). In the present embodiment, since there is only one first special symbol / normally low expected loss table A (table T1H0), the table T1H0 is selected regardless of the random number value of the variation pattern random number 1. In this case, in the above-described variation pattern determination process (step S1580), the variation pattern is determined from the table selected in step S15409 based on the random number value of variation pattern random number 2. Further, the variation type (10H to 13H) of the variation pattern is determined based on the random number value of the variation type random number (see FIG. 100).

  If it is determined in step S15403 that the reserved ball of the first special symbol is not 0 (NO in step S15403), it is determined whether or not the reserved ball of the first special symbol is 1 (step S15411). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 1 (YES in step S15411), it is determined whether or not a high expectation effect is executed (step S15413). If it is determined in step S15413 that the high expectation effect is to be executed (YES in step S15413), the first special symbol / normally high expectation loss table is selected (step S15415). This step S15415 is the same processing as step S15407 described above.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S15413 that the high expectation effect will not be executed (NO in step S15413), the first special symbol / normal low expectation loss table B is selected (step S15417).

  Specifically, among the first special symbol / normal time loss table (tables T1H and T1R) shown in FIG. 98, the first special symbol / normal time low expectation loss table that can be selected when the high expectation effect is not executed. One of the tables B corresponding to the reserved ball “1” of the first special symbol is selected from (table T1H) based on the random number value of the random number 1 for the variation pattern. In this embodiment, since there is only one first special symbol / normally low expected loss table B (table T1H1), the table T1H1 is selected regardless of the random number value of the variation pattern random number 1. In this case, in the above-described variation pattern determination process (step S1580), the variation pattern is determined from the table selected in step S15417 based on the random number value of variation pattern random number 2. Further, the variation type (10H to 13H) of the variation pattern is determined based on the random number value of the variation type random number (see FIG. 100).

  Further, if it is determined in step S15411 that the reserved ball of the first special symbol is not 1 (NO in step S15411), it is determined whether or not the reserved ball of the first special symbol is 2 (step S15419). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 2 (YES in step S15419), it is determined whether or not a high expectation effect is executed (step S15421). If it is determined in step S15421 that the high expectation effect is to be executed (YES in step S15421), the first special symbol / normally high expectation loss table is selected (step S15423). This step S15423 is the same processing as step S15407 described above.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S15421 that the high expectation effect is not executed (NO in step S15421), the first special symbol / normal low expectation loss table C is selected (step S15425).

  Specifically, among the first special symbol / normal time loss table (tables T1H and T1R) shown in FIG. 98, the first special symbol / normal time low expectation loss table that can be selected when the high expectation effect is not executed. One of the tables C corresponding to the reserved ball “2” of the first special symbol is selected based on the random number value of the variation pattern random number 1 from (Table T1H). In this embodiment, since there is only one first special symbol / normally low expected loss table C (table T1H2), the table T1H2 is selected regardless of the random number 1 of the variation pattern random number 1. In this case, in the above-described variation pattern determination process (step S1580), the variation pattern is determined from the table selected in step S15425 based on the random number value of variation pattern random number 2. Further, the variation type (10H to 13H) of the variation pattern is determined based on the random number value of the variation type random number (see FIG. 100).

  If it is determined in step S15419 that the reserved ball of the first special symbol is not 2 (NO in step S15419), it is determined that the reserved ball of the first special symbol is 3. Then, it is determined whether or not a high expectation effect is executed (step S15427). If it is determined in step S15427 that the high expectation effect is to be executed (YES in step S15427), the first special symbol / normal high expectation loss table is selected (step S15429). This step S15429 is the same processing as step S15407 described above.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S15427 that the high expectation effect is not executed (NO in step S15427), the first special symbol / normally low expectation loss table D is selected (step S15431).

  Specifically, among the first special symbol / normal time loss table (tables T1H and T1R) shown in FIG. 98, the first special symbol / normal time low expectation loss table that can be selected when the high expectation effect is not executed. One of the tables D corresponding to the reserved ball “3” of the first special symbol is selected from (table T1H) based on the random number value of the random number 1 for the variation pattern. In the present embodiment, since there is only one first special symbol / normally low expected loss table D (table T1H3), the table T1H3 is selected regardless of the random number value of the variation pattern random number 1. In this case, in the above-described variation pattern determination process (step S1580), the variation pattern is determined from the table selected in step S15431 based on the random number value of variation pattern random number 2. Further, the variation type (10H to 13H) of the variation pattern is determined based on the random number value of the variation type random number (see FIG. 100).

  By the way, if it is determined in step S 15401 that the time saving function is not in operation (NO in step S 15401), the game state is a specific gaming state in which the time saving function is activated. Also in this case, it is determined whether or not the high expectation effect is executed (step S15433), and if it is determined that the high expectation effect is executed (YES in step S15433), the first special symbol / specific high expectation loss table is selected. (Step S15435).

  Specifically, in the first special symbol / specific time high expectation loss table that can be selected when executing the high expectation effect in the first special symbol / specific time table (table J1) shown in FIG. One is selected based on the random value of the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern. In the present embodiment, since there is only one first special symbol / specific high expectation loss table (table J1R), the table J1R is selected regardless of the random value of the random number 1 for the variation pattern. In this case, in the above-described variation pattern determination process (step S1580), the variation pattern is determined from the table selected in step S15435 based on the random number value of variation pattern random number 2. Since the variation type is not set in the specific gaming state, the symbol variation time matches the variation time of each variation pattern.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S15433 that the high expectation effect is not executed (NO in step S15433), the first special symbol / special time low expectation loss table is selected (step S15437).

  Specifically, in the first special symbol / specific low-expected loss table that can be selected when the high-expected effect is not executed in the first special symbol / specific-time table (table J1) shown in FIG. One is selected based on the random value of the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern. In the present embodiment, since there is only one first special symbol / specific low expected loss table (table J1H), the table J1H is selected regardless of the random value of the random number 1 for the variation pattern. In this case, in the above-described variation pattern determination process (step S1580), regardless of the random number value of variation pattern random number 2, the variation pattern “7D” variation pattern “open extension extended / normal variation” is selected from the table selected in step S15437. Only "is determined. Since the variation type is not set in the specific gaming state, the symbol variation time matches the variation time of each variation pattern.

[Details of the second special symbol variation pattern table setting process]
The details of the second special symbol variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 108. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of the second special symbol variation pattern table setting process. 103 and 104 are flowcharts showing an example of the second special symbol loss variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a second special symbol / normal time loss table (tables T2H and T2R) showing a variation variation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a second special symbol / normal hour hit table (table T2A) showing a hit variation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a second special symbol / variation type setting table for determining the variation type related to the variation pattern of the second special symbol. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing a second special symbol / specific time table (table J2) showing a variation pattern of the second special symbol in the specific gaming state.

  First, with reference to FIG. 102, the variation pattern table setting process for the second special symbol when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big jackpot (special jackpot or normal jackpot) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 102, in the second special symbol variation pattern table setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the time saving function is not activated, that is, whether or not a specific gaming state is being executed (step S15601). ). If it is determined that the time-saving function is not activated (YES in step S15601), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type for the second special symbol is a special jackpot (step S15603). Specifically, in step S15603, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag set in step S1313 is a special jackpot flag. If it is determined that it is a special jackpot (YES in step S15603), the second special symbol / normal special jackpot table is selected (step S15605).

  Specifically, one of the second special symbol / normal special jackpot table that can be selected in the case of winning the special jackpot in the second special symbol / normal jackpot table (table T2A) shown in FIG. Is selected based on the random number value of the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern. In the present embodiment, one of the tables T2AA to T2AG is selected based on the random number value of the variation pattern random number 1. In this case, in the above-described variation pattern determination process (step S1580), the variation pattern is determined from the table selected in step S15605 based on the random number value of the variation pattern random number 2. Further, based on the random number value of the variation type random number, the variation type (40H to 43H) of the variation pattern is determined (see FIG. 107).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S15603 that the jackpot type is not a special jackpot (NO in step S15603), the jackpot type is a normal jackpot (specifically, a long open normal jackpot), so the second special symbol / normal time A normal jackpot table is selected (step S15607).

  Specifically, one of the second special symbol / normal normal jackpot table that can be selected in the case of winning the normal jackpot among the second special symbol / normal jackpot table (table T2A) shown in FIG. Is selected based on the random number value of the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern. In the present embodiment, since there is only one second special symbol / normal normal jackpot table (table T2AT), the table T2AT is selected regardless of the random number value of the random number 1 for the variation pattern. In this case, in the above-described variation pattern determination process (step S1580), only the variation pattern “chance big hit” with the variation number “9A” is selected from the table selected in step S15607, regardless of the random number value of the variation pattern random number 2. It is determined. Furthermore, regardless of the random number value of the variation type random number, only the variation type 40H of the variation pattern is determined (see FIG. 107).

  By the way, if it is determined that the time-saving function in step S15601 is not inactive (NO in step S15601), the game state is a specific gaming state in which the time-saving function is activated. Also in this case, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type for the second special symbol is a special jackpot (step S15609). If it is determined that the jackpot is a special jackpot (YES in step S15609), the second special symbol / specific time is determined. A special jackpot table is selected (step S15611).

  Specifically, one of the second special symbol / special time special jackpot table that can be selected when the special jackpot is won in the second special symbol / special time table (table J2) shown in FIG. Is selected based on the random value of the random number 1 for the variation pattern. In this embodiment, since there is only one second special symbol / special time special jackpot table (table J2A), the table J2A is selected regardless of the random number value of the variation pattern random number 1. In this case, in the above-described variation pattern determination process (step S1580), the variation pattern is determined from the table selected in step S15611 based on the random number value of variation pattern random number 2. Since the variation type is not set in the specific gaming state, the symbol variation time matches the variation time of each variation pattern.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S15609 that the jackpot type is not a special jackpot (NO in step S15609), the jackpot type is a normal jackpot (specifically, a long open normal jackpot), so the second special symbol / specific time A normal jackpot table is selected (step S15613).

  Specifically, one of the second special symbol / special time normal jackpot table that can be selected in the case of winning the normal jackpot in the second special symbol / special time table (table J2) shown in FIG. Is selected based on the random value of the random number 1 for the variation pattern. In this embodiment, since there is only one second special symbol / specific normal jackpot table (table J2AT), the table J2AT is selected regardless of the random number value of the random number 1 for the variation pattern. In this case, in the above-described variation pattern determination process (step S1580), the variation pattern is determined from the table selected in step S15613 based on the random number value of variation pattern random number 2. Since the variation type is not set in the specific gaming state, the symbol variation time matches the variation time of each variation pattern.

  Next, the variation pattern table setting process for the second special symbol when the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big win (that is, when it is a loss) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 103 and 104, in the second special symbol loss variation pattern table setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the time-shortening function is not activated, that is, whether or not a specific gaming state is being executed. (Step S15701). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S15701), it is determined whether or not a high-expected effect is to be executed (step S15703). If it is determined that the high expectation effect is to be executed (YES in step S15703), the second special symbol / normal high expectation loss table is selected (step S15705).

  Specifically, the second special symbol / normal high-expected loss table that can be selected in the case of executing the high-expected effect in the second special symbol / normal-time loss table (tables T2H and T2R) shown in FIG. One of the (table T2R) is selected based on the random number value of the random number 1 for the variation pattern. In the present embodiment, one of the tables T2RA to T2RC is selected based on the random number value of the variation pattern random number 1. In this case, in the above-described variation pattern determination process (step S1580), the variation pattern is determined from the table selected in step S15705 based on the random number value of variation pattern random number 2. Further, based on the random number value of the variation type random number, the variation type (40H to 43H) of the variation pattern is determined (see FIG. 107).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S15703 that the high expectation effect is not executed (NO in step S15703), the second special symbol / normal low expectation loss table is selected (step S15707).

  Specifically, among the second special symbol / normal time loss table (tables T2H and T2R) shown in FIG. 105, the second special symbol / normal low expected loss table that can be selected when the high-expected effect is not executed. One of (table T2H) is selected based on the random number value of random number 1 for the variation pattern. In the present embodiment, since there is only one second special symbol / normally low expected loss table (table T2H), the table T2H is selected regardless of the random value of the random number 1 for the variation pattern. In this case, in the above-described variation pattern determination process (step S1580), only the variation pattern “normal variation” of the variation number “01” is determined from the table selected in step S15707, regardless of the random number value of the variation pattern random number 2. Is done. Further, based on the random number value of the variation type random number, the variation type (40H to 43H) of the variation pattern is determined (see FIG. 107).

  By the way, if it is determined in step S15701 that the time-shortening function is not inactive (NO in step S15701), the game state is a specific gaming state where the time-shortening function is activated. Then, it is determined whether or not the reserved ball of the second special symbol is 0 (step S15709). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of stored starting symbols of the second special symbol immediately after the start of fluctuation (that is, the counter value by the second special symbol holding counter 913) is zero. If it is determined that the reserved ball of the second special symbol is 0 (YES in step S15709), it is determined whether or not a high expectation effect is to be executed (step S15711).

  If it is determined in step S15711 that the high expectation effect is to be executed (YES in step S15711), the second special symbol / specific high expectation loss table is selected (step S15713).

  Specifically, in the second special symbol / specific time high expectation loss table that can be selected in the second special symbol / specific time table (table J2) shown in FIG. One is selected based on the random value of the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern. In the present embodiment, since there is only one second special symbol / specific high expectation loss table (table J2R), the table J2R is selected regardless of the random value of the random number 1 for the variation pattern. In this case, in the above-described variation pattern determination process (step S1580), the variation pattern is determined from the table selected in step S15713 based on the random number value of variation pattern random number 2. Since the variation type is not set in the specific gaming state, the symbol variation time matches the variation time of each variation pattern.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S15711 that the high expectation effect is not to be executed (NO in step S15711), the second special symbol / special low expectation loss table A is selected (step S15715).

  Specifically, in the second special symbol / specific time table (table J2) shown in FIG. 108, the second special symbol / specific low-expected loss table (table J2H) that can be selected when the high expectation effect is not executed. ) To select one of the tables A corresponding to the reserved ball “0” of the second special symbol based on the random number value of the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern. In the present embodiment, since there is only one second special symbol / special-time low expected loss table A (table J2HA), the table J2HA is selected regardless of the random number value of the variation pattern random number 1. In this case, in the above-described variation pattern determination process (step S1580), regardless of the random number value of the variation pattern random number 2, the variation pattern “96” variation pattern “opening extended / disconnected” is removed from the table selected in step S15715 ( Only “no hold” is determined. Since the variation type is not set in the specific gaming state, the symbol variation time matches the variation time of each variation pattern.

  If it is determined in step S15709 that the reserved ball of the second special symbol is not 0 (NO in step S15709), the reserved ball of the second special symbol is one of 1 to 3. Also in this case, it is determined whether or not the high expectation effect is to be executed (step S15717), and if it is determined that the high expectation effect is to be executed in step S15717 (YES in step S15717), the second special symbol / specific high expectation loss table Is selected (step S15719). This step S15719 is the same process as step S15713 described above.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S15717 that the high expectation effect is not to be executed (NO in step S15717), the second special symbol / specific low expectation loss table B is selected (step S15721).

  Specifically, in the second special symbol / specific time table (table J2) shown in FIG. 108, the second special symbol / specific low-expected loss table (table J2H) that can be selected when the high expectation effect is not executed. ) To select one of the tables B corresponding to the reserved balls “1” to “3” of the second special symbol based on the random number value of the random number 1 for the variation pattern. In the present embodiment, since there is only one second special symbol / special-time low expected loss table B (table J2HB), the table J2HB is selected regardless of the random number value of the variation pattern random number 1. In this case, in the above-described variation pattern determination process (step S1580), regardless of the random number value of variation pattern random number 2, the variation pattern “7E” variation pattern “open extension extended / shortened variation” is selected from the table selected in step S15721. Only "is determined. Since the variation type is not set in the specific gaming state, the symbol variation time matches the variation time of each variation pattern.

[About change processing]
Next, the changing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process. In the changing process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S1801). Here, if any one of the first special symbol display 84 and the second special symbol display 86 is changing, it is determined that it is changing. If the special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1801), the changing process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step S1801 that the special symbol is changing (YES in step S1801), the process proceeds to step S1802, and it is determined whether or not the variable time has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time set in the timer has elapsed in the variation pattern setting process. If the variation time has not elapsed, the process waits until the variation time has elapsed (NO in step S1802). When the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in step S1802), the special symbol fluctuation is stopped (step S1803). That is, the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910 is derived and displayed on the changing display of the first special symbol indicator 84 or the second special symbol indicator 86.

  When the variation of the special symbol is stopped (step S1803), it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags is ON (step S1804). That is, as a result of the fact that the current fluctuation is stopped and the lottery result is derived, it is determined whether or not any jackpot game is started. If any of the jackpot flags is in the ON state (YES in step S1804), the processing flag is updated to “3” (step S1805), and the changing process is terminated. If none of the jackpot flags is in the ON state (NO in step S1804), the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S1808), and the changing process is terminated.

[About jackpot game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the jackpot game start process. In the jackpot game start process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability changing function is in operation (step S2001). As described above, since the probability variation function does not operate when the jackpot game is being executed, if the probability variation function is activated, the operation of the probability variation function is stopped (step S2002), and the process proceeds to step S2003. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2001 that the probability variation function is not operating (NO in step S2001), step S2002 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2003.

  In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the time reduction function is in operation. As described above, the time saving function is not activated when the jackpot game is being executed. Therefore, when the time saving function is activated, the operation of the time saving function is stopped (step S2004), and the process proceeds to step S2005. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2003 that the time reduction function is not activated (NO in step S2003), step S2004 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2005.

  In step S2005, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is accompanied by a long open jackpot game. Specifically, if any one of the special jackpot flag and the long-open normal jackpot flag is ON, it is determined that the jackpot is accompanied by a long-open jackpot game (YES in step S2005). The number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) and the maximum opening time (for example, 30 seconds) of the switchgear 500 per round and the maximum number of winnings (for example, 9 balls) are set (step S2006). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2008, the processing flag is updated to “4”, and the jackpot game start processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in step S2005, if the short open normal jackpot flag is in the ON state, it is determined that the jackpot is not a jackpot with a long open jackpot game but a short jackpot game with a short open jackpot game (NO in step S2005). The number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is set, and the maximum opening time (for example, 0.6 sec) and the maximum number of winnings (for example, 3 balls) of the switching device 500 per round are set, and the process proceeds to step S2008.

[Special electric utility jackpot control processing]
Next, based on FIG. 111, the special electric utility jackpot control process will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special electric utility jackpot control process. In the special electric utility jackpot control process, it is first determined whether or not the opening / closing device 500 is open (step S2401). If the opening / closing device 500 is open (YES in step S2401), it is determined whether a preset maximum opening time of the opening / closing device 500 has elapsed (step S2402). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in step S2006 or step S2007 has elapsed. If it is determined that the maximum opening time of switchgear 500 has elapsed (YES in step S2402), switchgear 500 is closed (step S2404), and the process proceeds to step S2405.

  If the opening time of the opening / closing device 500 has not elapsed in step S2402 (NO in step S2402), it is determined whether or not a game ball having a preset maximum number of winnings has been received by the opening / closing device 500 (step S2403). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the count value by the opening / closing device count sensor 776 has reached the maximum number of winnings set in step S2006 or step S2007. If it is determined that the maximum number of winning game balls has been received by the switchgear 500 (YES in step S2403), the process proceeds to step S2404, and the switchgear 500 is closed. On the other hand, if the maximum number of winning balls has not been accepted by the opening / closing device 500, the process returns to step S2402.

  In step S2405, it is determined whether a preset number of rounds has been reached (step S2405). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds set in step S2006 or step S2007 has been reached. If the number of rounds set in advance is reached (YES in step S2405), the process proceeds to step S2407, and the jackpot flag is turned OFF. On the other hand, if the preset round number has not been reached (NO in step S2405), the opening / closing device 500 is opened (step S2406), and the process returns to step S2402.

  If it is determined in step S2401 that the opening / closing device 500 is not open (NO in step S2401), the process proceeds to step S2405.

  After turning off the jackpot flag in step S2407, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function should be activated (step S2408). If the probability variation function is to be activated, the probability variation function is activated (step S2409). Specifically, if the jackpot flag turned off in step S2407 is a special jackpot flag, the probability changing function is activated. That is, if the jackpot game that has been played so far is a long-open jackpot game based on a special jackpot, the probability changing function is activated.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the time reduction function should be activated (step S2410). If the time reduction function should be activated, the operation of the time reduction function is performed (step S2411). At this time, since the setting of the number of time-shortening function operations in step S2414 described later is not performed, the time-shortening function is continuously operated until the next jackpot (next condition device operation). Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S2415), and the special electric utility jackpot control processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2410 that the time reduction function is not to be activated (NO in step S2410), the process proceeds to step S2415 to update the process flag to “0”, and the special electric accessory big hit control process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, if the jackpot flag turned off in step S2407 is a special jackpot flag, the time reduction function is activated in conjunction with the probability changing function (YES in step S2410). In the special game state, the probability changing function and the time shortening function continue to operate until the next jackpot is won (until the next condition device is activated). Thus, in the special gaming state, the player can easily win the next jackpot under the gaming state where the winning probability of the jackpot is high without reducing the number of balls.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2408 that the probability variation function should not be activated (NO in step S2410), it is then determined whether or not the time reduction function should be activated (step S2412), and the time reduction function should be activated. If so, a time-short function operation process is performed (step S2413). At this time, the number of times the short-time function is activated is set according to the type of jackpot (specifically, the jackpot) (step S2414). In this embodiment, “50 times” is set as the number of times the short-time function is activated for long open normal big hits, and “100 times” is set as the number of times for the short time normal big hits according to the gaming state. The details will be described later. Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S2415), and the special electric utility jackpot control processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2412 that the time reduction function is not to be activated (NO in step S2412), the process proceeds to step S2415 to update the process flag to “0”, and the special electric accessory big hit control process is terminated.

  Specifically, if the jackpot flag turned OFF in step S2407 is a long open normal jackpot flag, only the time reduction function is activated without activating the probability changing function. That is, if the jackpot game that has been played so far is a long-open jackpot game based on the long-open normal jackpot, the probability changing function is activated. Even if the jackpot flag turned OFF in step S2407 is a short open normal jackpot flag, only the time shortening function may be activated without activating the probability changing function.

  Here, in this embodiment, the gaming state when the jackpot is won may affect whether or not the time saving function should be activated. Specifically, when a special jackpot or a long open normal jackpot is won and a jackpot game is executed, it is determined that the time saving function should be activated in step S2410 or step S2412 regardless of the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning. The On the other hand, if the short-open normal jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed in the normal game state, it is determined in step S2412 that the time-saving function is not activated, but the special game state or the time-short game state is selected. When a short hit normal jackpot is won and a jackpot game is executed, it is determined in step S2412 that the time saving function should be activated.

  In such a configuration, for example, when in a special game state, even if a normal jackpot (long open normal jackpot or short open normal jackpot) is won, after a jackpot game according to the corresponding selection is performed, Expected to be in a short-time gaming state within a predetermined period, so that the player can enjoy the game without reducing the number of balls during the predetermined period, and win a big win again (so-called “retraction” expectation) By maintaining the value, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the mode of short-time function (benefits given to the player) differs between the short-time gaming state triggered by the long open normal jackpot and the short-time gaming state triggered by the short open normal jackpot. . Specifically, if the long open big hit game is won and the special symbol changes to “50 times” after the long open big hit game ends, the predetermined condition is satisfied and the short time function stops ( That is, it shifts to the normal gaming state). On the other hand, in the special game state and the short-time game state, when the short open big hit game is won, when the number of times the special symbol changes to “100” after the short open big hit game ends, the predetermined condition is satisfied and the short time is reached. The function stops (i.e. transitions to the normal gaming state). That is, the number of time reductions set in step S2414 is controlled differently depending on the type of jackpot.

  This is because if the player wins a short-open normal jackpot in the special game state, the player will end the special game state with almost no prize ball, and the player will be very discouraged, It will drop significantly. Therefore, if you win a short-open normal jackpot in the special game state (or short-time game state), the number of short-time times (here, 50 times) more than the short-time number given here (here 50 times) Then, 100 times) is given. In this way, in the special gaming state (or the short-time gaming state), the player who wins the short open normal jackpot is given a more advantageous short-time function benefit, so that the discouragement caused by the end of the special gaming state Can be suppressed. Furthermore, by providing a short-time gaming state that is maintained for a longer period of time, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation that brings back a big hit again during the short-time gaming state, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In particular, in this embodiment, the short open normal jackpot can be won only by a lottery based on a winning at the first start port 602 (a lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 900). In the gaming state in which the short-time function is activated (special gaming state and short-time gaming state), the game ball is likely to win the second starting port 604 by opening and closing the pair of movable pieces 606, and more than the first special symbol. The second special symbol is preferentially displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, in the gaming state in which the short-time function is activated (special gaming state and short-time gaming state), the smaller the lottery suspension based on the winning at the second starting port 604 (second special symbol retaining ball), the higher the expected performance (so-called When the reach effect is not performed, the variation time of the second special symbol becomes long, and the state where the lottery suspension based on the winning at the second starting port 604 is always accumulated is easily maintained.

  As a result, in the gaming state in which the short-time function is activated (special gaming state and short-time gaming state), the lottery suspension based on the winning at the first starting port 602 (the holding ball of the first special symbol) goes to the second starting port 604. It is very difficult to digest compared to the lottery hold based on the winning of (the reserved ball of the first special symbol) (that is, the lottery result of the first special symbol is difficult to be derived). Therefore, in this pachinko machine 1, the short open normal jackpot in the special game state is positioned as an irregular jackpot that is extremely difficult to win. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the disadvantageous state of the player as much as possible by winning the short open normal jackpot and falling from the special gaming state.

  However, even in such a configuration, it is possible to win a short open normal jackpot during a special gaming state, which is extremely rare. Therefore, in the special gaming state, when a short-open normal jackpot is won, it is possible to compensate for the disadvantage of falling from the special gaming state by giving a privilege of a short time function more advantageous to the player. A decrease can be reliably prevented.

[About game content]
Next, game contents in each game state will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 112 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the effect display device 115 in the normal gaming state. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the effect display device 115 in the special game state. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the effect display device 115 in the short-time gaming state. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the normal game state, the special game state, and the short-time game state are set as described above.

  When a game ball wins one of the start ports 602 and 604, a special symbol lottery is performed by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910. The lottery result is displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 and also displayed on the effect display device 115 by a combination of stop symbols of the decorative symbol 1153.

  As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the effect display device 115 displays a decorative symbol 1153 in the center area, a first special symbol corresponding symbol 1000, a second special symbol corresponding symbol 1002, and a hold display. And a region 1150. The decorative symbol 1153 is composed of three symbol columns, the left symbol column 1153a displayed on the left side when viewed from the player, the middle symbol column 1153b displayed in the middle when viewed from the player, and the right symbol column when viewed from the player. The right symbol row 1153c to be displayed is composed of three symbol rows. In the present embodiment, a plurality of symbols 1 to 8 are sequentially arranged and displayed in the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c of the decorative symbol 1153. Among these symbols, hereinafter, a symbol displayed in red is referred to as a specific symbol, and a symbol displayed in blue is referred to as a non-specific symbol.

  The hold display area 1150 is arranged in the left edge area of the effect display device 115 and displays information related to the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 903 and the second special symbol hold counter 913. The display mode in the hold display area 1150 will be described later in detail.

  When winning a special jackpot in the lottery process (hereinafter simply referred to as “special symbol lottery process”) by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910, each symbol row 1153a of the decorative symbol 1153 is displayed. 1153c is scrolled in the vertical direction, and then stopped and displayed, for example, at a doublet (three symbol rows 1153a to 1153c become the same symbol).

  The result of the special symbol lottery process is displayed not only on the decorative symbol 1153 but also on the upper left of the image displayed on the effect display device 115 as the special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002. Here, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 900 is displayed as the first special symbol corresponding symbol 1000, and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 910 is displayed as the second special symbol corresponding symbol 1002.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 112 is controlled as the standard gaming state. Then, when the result of the special symbol lottery process is a special jackpot, the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) are stopped and displayed, for example, at a slot of a specific symbol or a chance to be described later, and then based on the special jackpot A long open jackpot game is executed. The gaming state after the long-opening jackpot game ends is a special gaming state in which the time-shortening function and the probability function are operated as shown in FIG. 113 until the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery process.

  On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol lottery processing is a long-open normal jackpot, the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) are stopped and displayed at a non-specific symbol or a chance to be described later (a specific symbol). After that, a long open jackpot game based on the long open normal jackpot is executed. The gaming state after the long open jackpot game is ended is a short gaming state when the time function operates until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG.

  In addition, the above-mentioned chance eyes are the symbol aspects which show the winning of the jackpot other than the decoration symbol 1153 becoming a doublet. The chance of the present embodiment is that the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed in such a sequence that the left symbol column 1153a is “3”, the middle symbol column 1153b is “5”, and the right symbol column 1153c is “7”. . Specifically, this chance item can be displayed on the effect display device 115 when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 910 in the normal gaming state is a special jackpot or a long open normal jackpot.

  And, when the jackpot is derived by this chance, the player cannot grasp which of the special jackpot or the long open normal jackpot is won. However, even if the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol sequence 1153a to 1153c) displayed on the effect display device 115 is a chance, if the special jackpot is won, the special symbol is displayed during the jackpot game or after the jackpot game ends. It is reported that it was a big hit. Therefore, the player executes the jackpot game while having a sense of expectation that he or she will enter the special game state, and therefore, a decrease in interest during the jackpot game, which tends to be monotonous, is suppressed.

  In the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 112, when the result of the special symbol lottery process is a short-open normal big hit, the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) are arranged so as not to be a doublet or a chance. A stop display is made at a predetermined loss, and then a short open big hit game based on the short open normal big hit is executed. FIG. 114 shows the gaming state after the short-opening jackpot game is ended, if the gaming state when the short-opening normal jackpot is won is a specific gaming state (either a special gaming state or a short-time gaming state). As described above, the short-time function is activated until a predetermined end condition is satisfied.

[About the display mode in the hold display area]
Here, the display mode in the hold display area 1150 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 117. FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining a mode in which the hold of the first special symbol is accumulated in the hold display area (a), and (b) the start memory of the second special symbol is accumulated in the hold display area. It is a figure for demonstrating the aspect which is. 116 (a) is another diagram for explaining a mode in which the start memory of the first special symbol is accumulated in the hold display area, and FIG. 116 (b) is the start memory of the second special symbol in the hold display area. It is another figure for demonstrating the aspect which accumulate | stores. FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining a mode in which the start memory of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is digested in the hold display area.

  As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the hold display area 1150 has a plurality of hold storage display sections arranged in a line in the vertical direction. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 115 to 117, the first hold storage display unit 1150 a, the second hold storage display unit 1150 b, and the third hold storage display from below to above in the hold display area 1150. Unit 1150c, fourth reserved storage display unit 1150d, fifth reserved storage display unit 1150e, sixth reserved storage display unit 1150f, seventh reserved storage display unit 1150g, and eighth reserved storage display unit 1150h It consists of eight on-hold storage display units.

  In addition, each of the storage storage display units 1150a to 1150h in the holding display area 1150 is an area in which a lottery hold by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or a lottery hold by the second special symbol lottery means 910 can be displayed one by one. is there. The hold display area 1150 displays the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 903 and the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 913 in a manner that can be easily grasped visually. Therefore, by referring to the hold display area 1150, the player can check the current total number of reserved special symbols (total number of start memories).

  In the following description, the random number held by the first special symbol hold counter 903 (the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900) may be referred to as the starting storage of the first special symbol. Also, the random number held by the second special symbol hold counter 913 (the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910) may be referred to as the start memory of the second special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit value (first predetermined number) for holding by the first special symbol holding counter 903 and the upper limit value (second predetermined number) for holding by the second special symbol holding counter 913 are the same. Specifically, the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number are both “4” based on the pre-suspended digestion (“3” based on the post-suspended digestion). Therefore, the hold display area 1150 also has eight hold storage display sections 1150a to 1150h in order to be able to display the maximum holdable number (here, eight) including both special symbol hold counters 903 and 913. ing.

  The reserved storage display units 1150a to 1150h are regularly arranged in this order in the vertical direction, and the lottery result is derived in the area where the decorative symbols 1153 are displayed (common symbol display region) according to this arrangement order. Derived. That is, the lottery hold corresponding to each hold storage display unit from the first hold (hold corresponding to the first hold storage display unit 1150a) to the end hold (for example, the eighth hold storage display unit 1150h) in order. It will be derived in the order of the hold. Thereby, the player can clearly grasp the order in which the lottery results are derived in the common symbol display area.

  Each hold storage display unit 1150a to 1150h is held by the first special symbol hold image 1151 and the second special symbol hold counter 913 which are display modes indicating that the hold is held by the first special symbol hold counter 903. Any one of the second special figure hold image 1152, the first special symbol hold counter 903, and the second special symbol hold counter 913, which is a non-display form indicating that the display is not held. Displayed in a manner.

  The display mode in the hold display area 1150 will be described. For example, in FIGS. 112 to 114, the second special figure hold image 1152 is displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1150a and the second hold storage display unit 1150b, respectively. The first special figure hold image 1151 is displayed on each of the third hold storage display section 1150c to the fifth hold storage display section 1150e. Thereby, the total number of reserved special symbols (total number of start memories) in FIGS. 112 to 114 is five, that is, three start memories for the first special symbol and two start memories for the second special symbol. Can be visually grasped. The other on-hold storage display units 1150f to 1150h are not displayed, and the background image is displayed as it is on the display unit.

  In the present embodiment, an image imitating an acorn is displayed as the second special figure holding image 1152. On the other hand, as the first special figure reservation image 1151, an image showing a mode in which the acorns indicating the second special figure reservation image 1152 are confined in a rectangular ice block is displayed. In this way, the display mode that means being held by the first special symbol hold counter 903 and the display mode that means being held by the second special symbol hold counter 913 are different from each other. Can be clearly distinguished.

  Further, as described later, the start memory of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the start memory of the first special symbol. In other words, the start memory of the first special symbol is less digestible than the start memory of the second special symbol. Therefore, the acorn image shown in the first special figure reservation image 1151 presents an image in which the acorn image shown in the second special figure reservation image 1152 is frozen, so that the player can visually recognize the first special symbol. It is possible to grasp that the start memory of is harder to digest than the start memory of the second special symbol.

  Next, an accumulation mode of the start memory of each special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 115 and FIG. In FIGS. 115 and 116, a place where the start memory hold display is added is displayed with a bold line.

  First, as shown in FIG. 115 (a), when both the number of holds held by the first special symbol hold counter 903 and the number of holds held by the second special symbol hold counter 913 are zero, the hold is made. All display areas 1150 (holding storage display portions 1150a to 1150h) are not displayed.

  In such a state, when a game ball wins at the first start opening 602 and is held by the first special symbol hold counter 903 (specifically, the command receiving means 950 “has won the first start opening 602”). When the command for specifying the image is received from the main control board 710), the first hold storage display unit 1150a located at the lowermost end of the hold display area 1150 performs display control from the non-display mode to the first special figure hold image 1151. Is done. Thereby, it can be recognized that the number of holdings in the first special symbol holding counter 903 is “1”.

  Further, when the game ball continuously wins at the first start port 602 and is sequentially held by the first special symbol hold counter 903, the second hold storage display unit 1150b and the third hold storage display unit in the hold display area 1150 1150c and the fourth hold storage display unit 1150d are sequentially displayed on the first special figure hold image 1151 from the non-display mode.

  In this manner, the start memory of the first special symbol is accumulated and displayed so as to be sequentially added to the end (upward in the drawing) in the hold display area 1150. Then, when the number of reservations by the first special symbol reservation counter 903 becomes N (N is a natural number not less than 1 and not more than the first predetermined number), it corresponds to the start memory number of the first special symbol in the hold display area 1150 The first special figure reservation image 1151 is displayed adjacent to N (up to four) in a row.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 115 (b), in the state where all the hold display areas 1150 (hold storage display portions 1150a to 1150h) are in the non-display state as described above, a game ball wins a prize at the second start port 604. When it is held by the second special symbol holding counter 913 (specifically, when the command receiving means 950 receives a command from the main control board 710 for specifying “winning the second starting port 604”). ), The first hold storage display unit 1150a located at the lowermost end of the hold display area 1150 is controlled to be displayed on the second special figure hold image 1152 from the non-display mode. Thereby, it can be recognized that the number of holdings in the second special symbol holding counter 903 is “1”.

  Further, when the game ball wins at the second start opening 604 and is held by the second special symbol hold counter 913, the second special figure hold image 1152 shown in the first hold storage display portion 1150a in the hold display area 1150 is displayed. Is shifted and displayed on the second reserved storage display portion 1150b (that is, backward). Then, a new second special figure hold image 1152 is added to the first hold memory display unit 1150a instead of the second special figure hold image 1152 that is shifted and displayed on the second hold memory display unit 1150b. Is displayed.

  Here, “backward shift display” means that the display mode of the one hold storage display unit moves to the next hold storage display unit when the one hold storage display unit is used as a reference. It is displayed as a display mode in the display unit. Specifically, in the above example, the second special figure hold image 1152 displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1150a is moved to the second hold storage display unit 1150b, and the second hold is displayed. The second special figure holding image 1152 is displayed on the memory display unit 1150b.

  Further, when a game ball wins at the second start port 604 in a state where the start memory of the second special symbol is “2”, it is displayed on the first hold memory display portion 1150a and the second hold memory display portion 1150b, respectively. The second special figure hold image 1152 is shifted and displayed on the second hold storage display unit 1150b and the third hold storage display unit 1150c, respectively, and a new second special figure hold is displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1150a. An image 1152 is displayed to be added. Similarly, when a game ball wins the second starting opening 604 with the second special symbol holding ball being “3”, the first holding memory display unit 1150a, the second holding memory display unit 1150b, and the third The second special figure hold image 1152 respectively displayed on the hold storage display unit 1150c is shifted and displayed on the second hold storage display unit 1150b, the third hold storage display unit 1150c, and the fourth hold storage display unit 1150d. In addition, a new second special figure holding image 1152 is displayed to be added to the first holding storage display unit 1150a.

  As described above, the start memory of the second special symbol is accumulated and displayed so as to be sequentially added to the head (downward in the figure) in the hold display area 1150. Then, when the number of reservations by the second special symbol reservation counter 913 becomes N (N is a natural number not less than 1 and not more than the first predetermined number), it corresponds to the start memory number of the second special symbol in the hold display area 1150 The second special figure reservation image 1152 is displayed adjacent to N (up to four) in a row.

  By the way, when the start memory of the second special symbol is held in the hold display area 1150, the hold mode of the start memory of the first special symbol is as follows. For example, as shown in FIG. 116 (a), the start memory of the second special symbol is “4” reserved (the first special memory display unit 1150a to the fourth special memory display unit 1150d have the second special memory). It is assumed that a game ball has won a prize at the first start port 602 in a state where the figure hold image 1152 is displayed. At this time, the start memory (first special figure hold image 1151) of the first special symbol is accumulated in order from the next hold storage display section (here, the fifth hold storage display section 1150d) in the non-display state. Is displayed. In this case as well, in the same manner as described above, the fifth on-hold storage display is performed in such a manner that the game balls are sequentially added to the end (upper in the figure) in the on-hold display area 1150 in accordance with the winning of the game ball at the first start port 602 The first special figure hold image 1151 is accumulated and displayed in the order of the part 1150e to the eighth hold storage display part 1150h.

  Further, when the start memory of the first special symbol is held in the hold display area 1150, the hold mode of the start memory of the second special symbol is as follows. For example, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), the start memory of the first special symbol is “4” reserved (the first special memory display unit 1150a to the fourth special memory display unit 1150d have the first special memory). Assume that a game ball has won a prize at the second start port 604 in a state where the figure holding image 1151 is displayed. At this time, the start memory (second special figure hold image 1152) of the second special symbol is additionally displayed sequentially on the first hold storage display section (here, the first hold storage display section 1150a) in the hold display area 1150. The Also in this case, in the same manner as described above, the second special figure holding image 1152 is sequentially added to the head (downward in the figure) in the holding display area 1150 in accordance with the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 604. Is accumulated and displayed, the display mode of the previous hold storage display unit is sequentially shifted backward in the other hold storage display units. Specifically, when the start memory of the second special symbol is held “4” in the state shown in FIG. 116B, each of the first hold memory display unit 1150a to the seventh hold memory display unit 1150h. The display mode is shifted and displayed backward on each of the second hold storage display unit 1150b to the eighth hold storage display unit 1150h, and a second special figure hold image 1152 is newly displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1150a. Added.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, in the hold display area 1150, the start memory of the first special symbol is sequentially added to the end of the hold display area 1150 (upward in the drawing), while the start memory of the second special symbol is displayed on hold. The area 1150 is added sequentially from the top (downward in the figure). Therefore, in a state where the first special figure reservation image 1151 and the second special figure reservation image 1152 are displayed in the hold display area 1150, the second special figure reservation image 1152 is always before the first special figure reservation image 1151. Displayed on the hold storage display section.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, the lottery result is derived (so-called digested) preferentially in the start memory of the second special symbol over the start memory of the first special symbol, as will be described next. Therefore, when both the start memory of the first special symbol and the start memory of the second special symbol exist due to the display control of the hold display area 1150 as described above, the start memory of the second special symbol is the first. The player can clearly grasp that the special symbol is digested before the start memory.

  Next, the digest mode of the start-up memory of each special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, in FIG. 117, the place where the pending display of the start memory is deleted (digested) is displayed with a bold line. That is, as is apparent from FIG. 117, in this embodiment, the start-up memory corresponding to the display mode of the first reserved storage display unit (first reserved storage display unit 1150a) in the reserved display area 1150 is deleted (digested). The

  As shown in FIG. 117, for example, when there are “four” start memories of the first special symbol and “four” start memories of the second special symbol, the first hold memory display in the hold display area 1150 The second special figure hold image 1152 is displayed on the part 1150a to the fourth hold storage display part 1150d, and the first special figure hold image 1151 is displayed on the fifth hold storage display part 1150e to the fourth hold storage display part 1150h. Is displayed. In this state, when the derivation of the lottery result is started based on the start memory of the first special symbol (here, the start memory of the second special symbol), the second special figure hold of the first hold storage display unit 1150a is started. The image 1152 is deleted. Along with this, the display mode of the other reserved memory display units (second reserved memory display unit 1150b to eighth reserved memory display unit 1150h) is changed to the previous reserved memory display unit (first reserved memory display unit 1150a to 1150a). The seventh hold storage display unit 1150g) is shifted and displayed. In addition, as the display mode of each hold memory display unit is shifted forward, the display mode of the last hold memory display unit (eighth hold memory display unit 1150h) becomes a non-display mode.

  Here, “forward shift display” means that the display mode of the one hold storage display unit moves to the previous hold storage display unit when the one hold storage display unit is used as a reference, It is displayed as a display mode in the display unit. Specifically, in the above example, as the second special figure hold image 1152 of the first hold storage display unit 1150a is deleted, the fifth hold storage display unit 1150e to the eighth hold storage display. The first special figure hold image 1151 displayed on the part 1150h moves to the fourth hold storage display part 1150d to the seventh hold storage display part 1150g, respectively, so that the fourth hold storage display part 1150d ~ The first special figure hold image 1151 is displayed on the seventh hold storage display unit 1150g, and the eighth hold storage display unit 1150h is not displayed. Also, the second special figure hold image 1152 displayed on the second hold storage display unit 1150b to the fourth hold storage display unit 1150d is displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1150a to the third hold storage display unit 1150c. The second special figure hold image 1152 is displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1150a to the third hold storage display unit 1150c so as to move.

  In the same manner, in the hold display area 1150, the display mode of the head hold storage display unit (first hold storage display unit 1150a) is deleted in accordance with the digestion of the special symbol start-up memory, and another hold is made. A forward display of the display mode in the storage display unit is performed. As a result, the number of holdings (starting memory number) has decreased according to the digestion of the starting memory of the special symbol, and whether the symbol variation based on the starting memory of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been performed, The player can grasp visually.

  By the way, in this embodiment, as is clear from the fact that the second special figure reserved image 1152 is always displayed in the reserved storage display unit before the first special figure reserved image 1151 in the hold display area 1150, the first special figure hold image 1152 is displayed. Even if the hold by the 1 special symbol hold counter 903 is performed before the hold by the second special symbol hold counter 913, the start memory of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the start memory of the first special symbol. The In other words, as long as there is a hold by the second special symbol hold counter 913, the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 903 is not released. Therefore, the start memory of the first special symbol is not digested until only the start memory of the second special symbol is digested, and only the start memory of the second special symbol continues to be digested.

  When winning the second start port 604, the second special figure hold image 1152 is additionally displayed on the first hold storage display section (first hold storage display section 1150a) in the hold display area 1150. On the other hand, the start-up memory of the special symbol corresponding to the display mode of the first on-hold storage display unit (first on-hold storage display unit 1150a) in the on-hold display area 1150 is digested. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the player, when there are start memories of a plurality of second special symbols, it seems that the latest start memory held by the second special symbol hold counter 913 is digested first. . However, the hold order of the second special symbol hold image 1152 displayed in the hold display area 1150 does not necessarily coincide with the derivation order of the start memory of the second special symbol, and is the hold order by the second special symbol hold counter 913 to the last. It is digested (that is, in order from the previously stored start-up memory).

[Regarding normal gaming state]
Next, details of the normal gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 112, in the normal gaming state, an image reflecting the ice age is displayed as a background image displayed on the effect display device 115. In addition, in each of the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c of the decorative symbol 1153, a plurality of symbols 1 to 8 are specific symbols displayed in red. That is, in the normal gaming state, when each symbol row 1153a to 1153c is stopped and displayed with a doublet, it means that it is derived that all the special jackpots have been won.

  By the way, in this embodiment, there are jackpots (special jackpots) with the operation of the probability changing function and jackpots (long opening normal jackpot and short opening normal jackpots) without the operation of the probability changing function. Nevertheless, in this normal gaming state, it is understood from the player that only the jackpot accompanied by the operation of the probability changing function is won (that is, if the jackpot is won, the player enters a 100% probability fluctuation). As described above, in the normal gaming state of the pachinko machine 1, it is grasped that all the jackpots are the triggers of the probability change rush even though there is a jackpot where the probability changing function operates and a jackpot where the probability changing function does not operate. . This normal gaming state will be described below.

  First, in the normal game state, the time-shortening function is not activated, so that the operation mode of the pair of movable pieces 606 is the above-described normal mode, and the winning frequency of the game ball to the second start port 604 is suppressed. Therefore, in the normal game state, the game ball tends to win only at the first start port 602, and generally, only the start memory of the first special symbol is accumulated and derived. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, since the start memory of the second special symbol is derived with priority over the start memory of the first special symbol, the opening and closing operation of the movable piece 606 leads to the second start port 604. When the game ball is won, the start memory of the second special symbol based on the win is immediately derived prior to the start memory of the first special symbol.

  By the way, in the normal gaming state, since it is a game mode in which the accumulation and derivation of the start memory of the first special symbol is repeated, when the high expectation effect (so-called reach effect) is not performed, The control is performed so that the symbol variation time is shortened as the number of start memories (the number of holdings) increases. On the other hand, since the winning frequency of game balls to the second start port 604 is low, the symbol variation time of the second special symbol is substantially constant regardless of the start memory number (holding number). As a result, the amount of data stored in the ROM 712 can be reduced, and the control load on the CPU 711 can be suppressed from increasing. Details of the special symbol change time will be described later.

  When the special jackpot is won based on the start memory of the first special symbol, as described above, the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c are stopped and displayed with a doublet so that the special jackpot is won. At the same time, an effect image indicating that the jackpot is won is displayed on the effect display device 115. Then, a long open jackpot game based on the special jackpot is executed, and a lot of game balls as prize balls are paid out to the player. Then, the gaming state after the jackpot game is executed is controlled to the special gaming state (that is, the probability change rush is entered).

  On the other hand, when the normal jackpot is won based on the start memory of the first special symbol, as described above, the normal jackpot corresponds to the short open normal jackpot. In this case, each symbol row 1153a to 1153c is only stopped and displayed at a predetermined loss, and an effect image indicating that the jackpot is won is not displayed on the effect display device 115. And the short open big hit game which opens and closes the opening / closing device 500 in a manner that is difficult to be grasped by the player is executed. In this short open jackpot game, a large amount of prize balls are not paid out to the player.

  In this way, even if the normal jackpot (short open normal jackpot) is won based on the starting memory of the first special symbol, the player cannot clearly grasp that the normal jackpot has been won, or , You will not notice at all. In other words, this short open normal jackpot means that the player is executed so as not to be grasped as “one aspect of jackpot” by the player.

  By the way, in the normal gaming state, although the winning frequency of the game ball to the second starting port 604 is suppressed, the pair of movable pieces 606 are rarely opened by winning the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 920. In some cases, the second start port 604 can win a prize. At this time, if a game ball wins the second start opening 604 in a timely manner, the second special symbol is started and stored while being in the normal gaming state, and may be won based on the start memory of the second special symbol. In this way, if the winning is a special jackpot as a result of being rarely won in the normal gaming state, each symbol is the same as the special jackpot based on the starting memory of the first special symbol described above. It is derived that the columns 1153a to 1153c are stopped and displayed with a doublet to win a special jackpot, and an effect image indicating that the jackpot has been won is displayed on the effect display device 115. Then, a long open jackpot game based on the special jackpot is executed, and a lot of game balls as prize balls are paid out to the player. Then, the gaming state after the jackpot game is executed is controlled to the special gaming state (that is, the probability change rush is entered).

  On the other hand, as a result of winning rarely while in the normal gaming state, if the winning is a normal jackpot, a long open normal jackpot is performed as described above. In this case, each of the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c is stopped and displayed at the chance instead of the flat eye, and an effect image indicating that the jackpot is won is displayed on the effect display device 115. Then, the long open jackpot game based on the normal jackpot is executed, and a lot of game balls as prize balls are paid out to the player. Then, the gaming state after the jackpot game is executed is controlled to the short-time gaming state. Details of the winning mode for the long open normal jackpot (regular long open normal jackpot) in the normal gaming state will be described later.

  As described above, in the normal gaming state according to the present embodiment, the first special symbol (or rarely the second is rarely based on the game mode in which the start memory of the first special symbol is generally repeatedly held and derived. Only when a special jackpot is won in the special symbol), the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c are stopped and displayed with a doublet. In addition, when a normal jackpot is won with the first special symbol, the symbol display control and the jackpot game control are performed in such a manner that the player cannot clearly grasp that the jackpot has been won. For this reason, it is understood from the player that in the normal game state, only the jackpot accompanied by the operation of the probability changing function is won (that is, when the jackpot is won, the player enters a 100% probability fluctuation).

  By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that, when winning a jackpot without probability fluctuation in the normal gaming state, the player is disappointed because a so-called jackpot ream can not be expected, and the interest is lowered. However, according to this pachinko machine 1, since the jackpots that are derived from the doublet in the normal gaming state are all special jackpots with a probability variation, if the player wins the jackpot in the normal gaming state, the jackpot due to the probability variation Can be expected, and interest can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, there is a possibility of winning a normal jackpot without probability fluctuation based on the start memory of the second special symbol. However, as described above, in the normal gaming state in which the time reduction function does not operate, it is difficult to win the game ball to the second starting port 604, so the second special symbol of the normal jackpot (long open normal jackpot) is won. That is rare. In addition, the fact that the long open normal jackpot has been won is derived not by the slot of each symbol row 1153a to 1153c but by the chance. That is, for the player, the long open normal jackpot in the normal gaming state is grasped as an extremely rare irregular hit. For this reason, the jackpot in the normal gaming state basically does not have a great influence on the configuration that is a promising jackpot (special jackpot). On the contrary, winning the player by winning such a rare hit You can be surprised!

[Special game status]
Next, the details of the special game state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 113, in the special gaming state, an image that represents an erupting volcano group is displayed as a background image displayed on the effect display device 115, and a notation that clearly indicates the special gaming state. (“MAGMA ZONE” in the upper right of the screen) is displayed. In addition, in each of the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c of the decorative symbol 1153, the odd symbol among the plural symbols 1 to 8 becomes a specific symbol displayed in red, while the even symbol becomes a non-specific symbol displayed in blue. . That is, in the special game state, when each of the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c is stopped and displayed with a doublet, it means that it is derived that either the special jackpot or the normal jackpot is won. In this special game state, both the probability changing function and the time saving function are activated.

  By the way, in this embodiment, there are jackpots with a large amount of prize balls paid out (special jackpot and long open normal jackpot) and jackpots without a lot of prize balls paid out (short open normal jackpot). In spite of this, in this special game state, it is understood that the player wins only the jackpot with a large amount of prize balls paid out (that is, if a winner is won, a lot of prize balls can be won). Is done. As described above, in the special game state of the pachinko machine 1, all of the jackpots have a lot of prize balls despite having a jackpot with a lot of prize balls being paid out and a jackpot without a lot of prize balls being paid out. It is grasped to become an opportunity to acquire This special gaming state will be described below.

  First, in the special game state, the time-shortening function operates, so that the operation mode of the pair of movable pieces 606 is the above-described promotion mode, and the winning frequency of the game ball to the second start port 604 is improved. Therefore, in the special game state, it becomes easier for the game ball to win the second start port 604 than the first start port 602, and the game mode is such that the start memory of the second special symbol is generally accumulated and derived. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the start memory of the second special symbol is derived with priority over the start memory of the first special symbol. Therefore, in the special game state, the start memory of the first special symbol is difficult to be derived in combination with the promotion of winning of the game ball to the second start port 604. In other words, as long as the game ball continues to win the second start port 604 without losing the start memory of the second special symbol, the start memory of the second special symbol is not derived without deriving the start memory of the first special symbol. Continue to be derived.

  By the way, in the special game state, since the game mode in which the accumulation and derivation of the start memory of the second special symbol is generally repeated, when the high expectation effect (so-called reach effect) is not performed, about the second special symbol Is controlled so that the symbol variation time becomes shorter as the starting memory number (holding number) increases. On the other hand, since the winning frequency of the game ball to the first starting port 602 is lower than the winning frequency of the game ball to the second starting port 604, the first special symbol is a symbol regardless of the start memory number (holding number). The variation time becomes substantially constant. Details of the special symbol change time will be described later.

  Then, when the special jackpot is won based on the start memory of the second special symbol, as described above, each symbol row 1153a to 1153c is stopped and displayed with a specific symbol or a non-specific symbol, and the jackpot is won. It was derived. Here, when the stoppage is displayed with a specific symbol, the effect image indicating that the special jackpot is won is displayed on the effect display device 115. Then, the long open jackpot game based on the jackpot is executed, and a lot of game balls as prize balls are paid out to the player. Then, the gaming state after the jackpot game is executed is controlled to the special gaming state (that is, the probability changing function is continuously operated).

  If the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed, an effect image indicating that the jackpot has been won is displayed on the effect display device 115, but at this point, the player has won a special jackpot or is open for a long time. It is not possible to determine whether or not you usually win a jackpot. In this case, a special jackpot is notified during the jackpot game or after the jackpot game ends (so-called promotion effect). Therefore, the player executes the jackpot game while having a sense of expectation that the special game state will continue, so that a decrease in interest during the jackpot game, which tends to be monotonous, is suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the normal jackpot is won based on the start memory of the second special symbol, the normal jackpot corresponds to the long open normal jackpot as described above. Then, it is derived that each symbol row 1153a to 1153c is stopped and displayed with a non-specific symbol doublet and the jackpot is won. In this case, the player cannot determine whether he / she has won a special jackpot or a long-opening normal jackpot, but in the case of a long-opening normal jackpot, the long-opening jackpot game is executed without the promotion effect described above. A lot of game balls as prize balls are paid out to the player. Then, the gaming state after the jackpot game is executed is controlled to the short-time gaming state.

  In this way, when a big hit (special jackpot or long open normal jackpot) is won based on the start memory of the second special symbol, a long open jackpot is always paid out to the player as a large amount of prize balls. A game is executed. That is, if a big win is won with the second special symbol, a privilege that activates the probability variation function is not necessarily given, but at least a player is guaranteed to win a lot of prize balls.

  By the way, in the special game state, although the winning frequency of the game ball to the second start port 604 is promoted, the start memory of the second special symbol does not exist (in other words, the start memory of the second special symbol is completely consumed). In this state, a lottery result based on the start memory of the first special symbol is derived. And a special jackpot may be won based on the starting memory of the first special symbol. In this case, the jackpot control is executed in the same manner as the special jackpot based on the start memory of the second special symbol described above. That is, after it is derived that each symbol row 1153a to 1153c is stopped and displayed with a specific symbol or a non-specific symbol, and the jackpot is won, a long open jackpot game is executed and a game as a large number of prize balls The ball is paid out to the player. Then, the gaming state after the jackpot game is executed is controlled to the special gaming state (that is, the probability change continues).

  On the other hand, there is a rare case where a normal jackpot is won based on the starting memory of the first special symbol. As described above, the normal jackpot of the first special symbol corresponds to the short open normal jackpot. In this case, each symbol row 1153a to 1153c is only stopped and displayed at a predetermined loss eye (for example, reach lose), and an effect image indicating that the jackpot is won is displayed on the effect display device 115. Nor. And the short open big hit game which opens and closes the opening / closing device 500 in a manner that is difficult to be grasped by the player is executed. In this short open jackpot game, a large amount of prize balls are not paid out to the player. Details of the winning mode for a short open normal jackpot (irregular short open normal jackpot) in the special gaming state will be described later.

  By the way, when the short-open normal jackpot is won in the special gaming state, unlike the case where the short-open normal jackpot is won in the normal gaming state, the probability changing function is shifted from the operating state to the non-operating state (that is, the gaming state is special). Transition from the gaming state to the normal gaming state). In other words, in a very rare case, the special game state will be terminated by obtaining a small amount of prize balls without obtaining any prize balls, or even if a prize ball is obtained. It will be big.

  Therefore, in the special gaming state, when the short-opening normal jackpot is won, unlike the case of winning the short-opening normal jackpot in the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the short-opening jackpot game is executed becomes the short-time gaming state. To be controlled. Moreover, the privilege of the short-time function (for example, 100 times of time reduction) given in such a case is a game more than the privilege of the short-time function (for example, 50 times of time reduction) given when winning a long open regular jackpot. Made it advantageous. This will compensate for the player's disadvantage when winning a short open normal jackpot in a special gaming state, and will also win a big hit again without reducing the number of possessions by giving more benefits of short time function It increases the possibility (that is, pulls back the jackpot) and suppresses the decline of interest.

  As described above, in the special gaming state according to the present embodiment, the game is such that the starting memory of the second special symbol is generally repeatedly held and derived, so that whenever a big win is won with the second special symbol, A long open jackpot game where a large amount of prize balls are paid to the player is executed. In addition, when a special jackpot is won in the first special symbol, a long open jackpot game is executed in the same manner. Therefore, it is understood from the player that in the special game state, only a big win with a large amount of prize balls paid out is won (that is, if a big win is won, a large quantity of prize balls can always be obtained).

  By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, when winning a normal jackpot without paying a large amount of prize balls in a special game state, there is a disadvantage that not only the prize ball can be obtained but also the operation of the probability variation function is stopped. . For this reason, if you win the normal jackpot without paying a lot of prize balls, even if you win the odds jackpot and move to the special game state, the special game state will be almost without winning prize balls. It ends, and the player's discouragement is very large. In particular, in recent years, winning a probable jackpot (so-called sudden probability change) without paying out a large amount of prize balls and winning a promising game state (the special game state of this embodiment is generally referred to in this way). In this case, if you win a normal jackpot without paying out a large amount of prize balls, the probabilistic gaming state will end without acquiring a lot of prize balls in these series of games. The player's discouragement is enormous.

  However, according to this pachinko machine 1, when a big win is won in a special game state, a long open big hit game is almost certainly executed, so that the player can acquire a large number of prize balls in the special game state. The expectation to a game state can be improved and the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  Here, as described above, in the normal gaming state according to the present embodiment, most of the jackpot that triggers the transition to the special gaming state is a special jackpot that involves paying a large amount of prize balls. . Furthermore, in the special game state, it is configured so that only a jackpot (a special jackpot or a long open bonanza) with a lot of prize balls can be won. That is, a long open jackpot game with a large number of prize balls paid out is executed at least twice from the time when the special jackpot is won in the normal gaming state until the special gaming state based on the special jackpot ends. (In other words, payout of a large number of prize balls for two times is guaranteed).

  In this way, in addition to being able to expect approximately two or more jackpots for a special jackpot in the normal gaming state (so-called first hit), in addition to the special jackpot, two long open jackpot games ( The so-called “twice out” can be secured. Therefore, compared with the conventional gaming machine, a privilege given to the player with the winning of the special jackpot is large, and a gaming machine that can further improve the interest can be realized.

  In the present embodiment, there is a possibility of winning a normal jackpot without a large amount of prize balls being paid out based on the start memory of the first special symbol. However, as described above, in the special game state in which the time saving function is activated, it is rare to win the normal jackpot (short open normal jackpot) of the first special symbol. In addition, if a short-open normal jackpot is won, as described above, a special game state is terminated without acquiring a prize ball by giving a player a larger privilege of a short-time function. The disadvantage of the player can be compensated, and the discouragement of the player and the decrease in the interest can be suppressed to the minimum.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the number of special jackpot random numbers and the number of normal jackpot random numbers with respect to the random number width of the design random numbers described above, “probability of winning a special jackpot (probability of entering probability fluctuation”). ) "Is roughly two-thirds. This probability change entry rate (probability change continuation rate) is the same in both the special game state and the normal game state. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a jackpot ream can be expected with a high probability change entry rate (probability change continuation rate) of approximately two-thirds so that the player's interest is further enhanced. It has become.

  And while such a jackpot ream can be expected, the jackpot probability (probability of first hit) in the normal gaming state is about 1/320, relatively won compared to conventional gaming machines. The probability is easy. Therefore, coupled with the configuration in which winning of the winning ball is almost guaranteed with the jackpot as described above, the winning ball is not won and the player cannot easily win the winning ball (so-called humming state). As a result, the player not only expects to win a jackpot, but can easily enjoy the game because it is unlikely to fall into a stalemate.

[About short-time gaming state]
Next, details of the short-time gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 114, in the short-time game state, as the background image displayed on the effect display device 115, an image reflecting the fact that the same volcano group as in the special game state is dormant is displayed, and the short-time game is displayed. A notation clearly indicating the state (“FREEZE ZONE” in the upper right of the screen) is displayed. Furthermore, the remaining short time count (“50” in the figure) is displayed in the vicinity of the notation clearly indicating the short-time gaming state.

  Similarly to the special gaming state, in each of the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c of the decorative symbol 1153, the odd symbol among the plurality of symbols 1 to 8 is a specific symbol displayed in red, while the even symbol is displayed in blue. It becomes a non-specific symbol. That is, in the special game state, when each of the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c is stopped and displayed with a doublet, it means that the winning of either the special jackpot or the normal jackpot is derived.

  In the short-time game state of the present embodiment, the other game controls are the same as the special game state except that the probability changing function is not activated, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. The short-time game state and the special game state in which the short-time function is activated may be referred to as a “specific game state” in order to distinguish from the normal game state in which the short-time function is not activated.

  At this time, the short game state is triggered by the normal jackpot of the second special symbol (ie, long open normal jackpot) and the normal jackpot of the first special symbol in the specific game state (ie, short open normal jackpot). Is done.

  More specifically, when a normal jackpot of the second special symbol (ie, long open normal jackpot) is won, after the long open jackpot game based on the normal jackpot is executed, it is controlled to the short-time gaming state. Here, in the time-short gaming state executed with a long open normal jackpot as an opportunity, the time-shortening function operates until the number of times the special symbol fluctuates reaches “50”. After the special symbol variation count reaches “50”, the time saving function is terminated and the normal game state shown in FIG. 112 is entered.

  In addition, when a normal jackpot (that is, a short open normal jackpot) of the first special symbol is won, after the short open jackpot game based on the normal jackpot is executed, the game is controlled to the short-time game state. Here, in the short-time game state executed with a short open normal jackpot as an opportunity, the short-time function operates until the number of times the special symbol fluctuates reaches “100”. After the special symbol variation count reaches “100”, the time saving function is terminated and the normal game state shown in FIG. 112 is entered.

[About high-expected lottery]
Here, in the above-described variation pattern setting process (see FIG. 94), the highly anticipated effect lottery in each variation pattern table setting process (FIGS. 96 and 97, FIGS. 103 and 104) executed when the lottery result is lost. Will be described in detail.

  Judgment on whether or not to perform high-expected production (reach fluctuation) is determined to perform high-expected production if you win the high-expected production lottery, and high-expected production if you win the high-expected production lottery It is judged not to do. In the high-expected production lottery, the above reach determination random number is acquired when winning at each of the start ports 602 and 604, and when the winning / failing determination random number is lost, This is done by determining whether the random number for determination is successful.

  Specifically, one of the random numbers for reach determination from 0 to 240 is acquired, and if the acquired random number for reach determination corresponds to a predetermined reach determination value, the winning lottery for high expectation is won. Judge that Here, the probability of winning the high-expected production lottery is whether or not the time-shortening function or the probability changing function is activated, whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed, and each special symbol hold counter 903,913. The probability of winning the highly anticipated lottery varies depending on the counter value (so-called number of holds).

  More specifically, the high expectation effect lottery for the first special symbol is executed as follows. First, in the normal gaming state in which the time-shortening function and the probability changing function are not activated, for example, the reach determination value is 0 to 14, and the probability of winning the high-expected effect lottery is 15/241. In the short-time game state in which only the short-time function is activated, for example, the reach determination value is 0 to 6, and the probability of winning the high-expected effect lottery is 7/241. Further, in the special game state in which the time-shortening function and the probability changing function are activated, for example, the reach determination value is 0 to 4, and the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery is 5/241.

  On the other hand, the highly anticipated effect lottery for the second special symbol is executed as follows. First, in the normal gaming state in which the time-shortening function and the probability changing function are not activated, for example, the reach determination value is only 0, and the probability of winning the high-expected performance lottery is 1/241. In the short-time game state in which only the short-time function is activated, for example, the reach determination value is 0 to 6, and the probability of winning the high-expected effect lottery is 7/241. In the special game state in which the time-shortening function and the probability changing function are activated, for example, the reach determination value is 0 and 1, and the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery is 2/241.

  In this way, by changing the probability of winning the high-expected production lottery depending on the symbol variation based on the first special symbol and the symbol variation based on the second special symbol, the derivation mode of the lottery result based on each special symbol is different. Can be provided, and the production accompanying the derivation of the lottery result can be varied.

  Specifically, in the normal gaming state, the time shortening function does not operate, so that it is difficult for the game ball to win the second starting port 604. Therefore, if there is no winning to the first starting port 602, the first special symbol and the second special symbol There is a tendency that none of the holding balls exist. Therefore, the first special symbol is made easy to win the high expectation effect lottery (15/241), so that the variation time of the first special symbol is lengthened. As a result, a game ball is won at each start opening 602 and 604 during a period when a high expectation effect (reach fluctuation) is performed, and a special design reserve ball is generated, so that a special design reserve ball exists. It can suppress that the state which does not do occurs.

  On the other hand, in a normal gaming state in which the time reduction function does not operate, it is rare that a symbol change based on the second special symbol is performed because it is difficult to win a game ball at the second starting port 604. Therefore, for the second special symbol, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery is made extremely low (1/241) so that the high expectation effect is difficult to be performed. By the way, in this embodiment, the probability that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are won is equal regardless of the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery. Therefore, in a normal gaming state, if a high expectation effect is performed for the second special symbol, it means that there is a very high possibility that the player wins a big hit than when a high expectation effect is performed for the first special symbol. In this way, in the normal gaming state, the high expectation effect for the second special symbol is an effect with a very high degree of expectation from which the jackpot is derived (a so-called hot effect), and the first special symbol is differentiated from the high expectation effect. Can improve the interest of the game.

  In the specific game state (short-time game state and special game state), since the short-time function is activated, it is easy for a game ball to win the second start port 604. Therefore, even if there is no win at the first start port 602, the first It is difficult for a state in which neither the special symbol nor the second special symbol is present. Therefore, in the specific gaming state, it is more difficult to win the highly anticipated effect lottery than the first special symbol variation in the normal gaming state (for example, 7/241 in the short-time gaming state), and the variation time of each special symbol is I tried to shorten it. Thereby, since the derivation of the start memory of each special symbol is promoted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of game balls (so-called invalid balls) that are not held despite winning the respective start ports 602, 604.

  Furthermore, in the special game state, the probability variation function is activated and it is easy to win a jackpot. If many high-expected effects are generated, the player's interest may be cut off. Therefore, in the special gaming state, it is harder to win the high-expected production lottery than in the short-time gaming state, so that the lottery result other than the jackpot can be quickly derived, and the player wins the jackpot at an earlier stage. Can be earned. In the same manner as described above, even in the special game state, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery of the second special symbol (2/241) is the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery of the first special symbol (241 minutes). The special expectations are differentiated for each special symbol so as to be lower than 5).

[Variation time of special symbols]
By the way, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol have different variation times depending on whether or not the time reduction function is activated. Further, when the time reduction function is not activated, the variation time of the first special symbol when the high expectation effect is not performed depends on the counter value (the so-called first number of reservations) by the first special symbol reservation counter 903. On the other hand, when the high expectation effect is not performed, the variation time of the second special symbol is constant regardless of the counter value (so-called second reserved number) by the second special symbol hold counter 913. Similarly, when the time reduction function is activated, the variation time of the second special symbol when the high expectation effect is not performed depends on the counter value (so-called second reserved number) by the second special symbol hold counter 913. On the other hand, when the high expectation effect is not performed, the variation time of the first special symbol is constant regardless of the counter value (so-called first reserved number) by the first special symbol hold counter 903.

  Specifically, in the normal gaming state in which the time reduction function does not operate, the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the lottery result is lost and no high-expected performance is performed is determined as follows. Is done.

  First, the variation time of the first special symbol is the first special symbol / normal low expected loss table A to D in the first special symbol loss variation pattern table setting process (see FIG. 96) described above. It is selected according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, and is determined based on the variation pattern (and the variation type of the variation pattern) selected from the first special symbol / normally low expected loss table.

  Specifically, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, that is, the counter value by the first special symbol holding counter 903 at the start of the change (the counter value after the counter value is subtracted in accordance with the start of the change) ) Is 0, the first special symbol / normally low expected loss table A is selected (step S15409). Here, as shown in FIG. 98, according to the first special symbol / normally low expected loss table A (table T1H0), it is roughly based on the random number 2 for the variation pattern (specifically, at 426/500). The variation pattern “normal variation” with the variation number “01” is selected. As shown in FIG. 100, the variation type “10H” is selected for the variation pattern “normal variation” of the variation number “01” based on the variation type random number (specifically, 478/500). . Since this variation type “10H” is not accompanied by the addition of the variation time, the variation time of the first special symbol based on the variation pattern “normal variation” of the variation number “01” is almost the same as the base time (12800 ms).

  If the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 1, the first special symbol / normally low expected loss table B is selected (step S15417). Here, as shown in FIG. 98, according to the first special symbol / normally low expected loss table B (table T1H1), it is roughly based on the random number 2 for the variation pattern (specifically, at 456/500). The variation pattern “normal variation” with the variation number “01” is selected. Further, as shown in FIG. 100, the variation type “10H” is selected approximately (specifically, at 478/500) based on the random number for variation type. Therefore, the variation time of the first special symbol based on the variation pattern “normal variation” of the variation number “01” is almost the same as the base time (12800 ms).

  If the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 2, the first special symbol / normally low expected loss table C is selected (step S15425). Here, as shown in FIG. 98, according to the first special symbol / normally low expected loss table C (table T1H2), it is roughly based on the random number 2 for the variation pattern (specifically, at 492/500). The variation pattern “shortening variation 1” of the variation number “02” is selected. For the variation pattern “shortened variation 1” of the variation number “02”, as shown in FIG. 100, the variation type “10H” is always selected based on the variation type random number. Therefore, the variation time of the first special symbol based on the variation pattern “shortening variation 1” of the variation number “02” is almost the same as the base time (6200 ms).

  If the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 3, the first special symbol / normally low expected loss table D is selected (step S15431). Here, as shown in FIG. 98, according to the first special symbol / normally low expected loss table D (table T1H3), it is roughly based on the random number 2 for the fluctuation pattern (specifically, at 498/500). The variation pattern “shortening variation 2” of the variation number “03” is selected. For the variation pattern “shortened variation 2” of the variation number “03”, as shown in FIG. 100, the variation type “10H” is always selected based on the variation type random number. Therefore, the variation time of the first special symbol based on the variation pattern “shortening variation 2” of the variation number “03” is almost the same as the base time (2100 ms).

  As a result, in the normal gaming state in which the time reduction function does not operate, the variation time of the first special symbol when the lottery result is lost and no high expectation effect is performed is about 2100 msec if the number of balls to be held is 3,100 msec. If the number of balls is 2, it is about 6200 msec, and if the number of reserved balls is 0 or 1, it is about 12800 msec.

  On the other hand, the variation time of the second special symbol is the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and the normal low expected loss table in the second special symbol loss variation pattern table setting process (see FIG. 103). Regardless of the variation pattern, it is determined based on the variation pattern (and the variation type of the variation pattern) selected from the second special symbol / normally low expected loss table.

  Specifically, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, that is, the counter value by the second special symbol holding counter 913 at the start of the change (the counter value after the counter value is subtracted in accordance with the start of the change) ) Is 0-3, the second special symbol / normal low-expected loss table is selected (step S15707). Here, as shown in FIG. 105, according to the second special symbol / normally low expected loss table (table T2H), the variation pattern “normal variation” of the variation number “01” is always used regardless of the variation pattern random number 2. Is selected. As for the fluctuation pattern “normal fluctuation” of the fluctuation number “01”, as shown in FIG. 107, the fluctuation type “40H” is selected roughly (specifically, at 478/500) based on the random number for fluctuation type. . Since this variation type “40H” is not accompanied by the addition of the variation time, the variation time of the second special symbol based on the variation pattern “normal variation” of the variation number “01” is almost the same as the base time (12800 ms).

  As a result, in the normal gaming state in which the time reduction function does not operate, the variation time of the second special symbol when the lottery result is lost and no high-expected performance is performed is substantially constant regardless of the number of reserved balls (about 12800 msec) It is.

  As described above, in the normal gaming state, the game mode is such that the start memory of the first special symbol is repeatedly held and derived, and when the number of the start memories of the first special symbol is large, the start memory is stored in the start memory. Based on the lottery result, it is quickly derived. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of start memory (so-called invalid ball) that is not held despite winning the first start port 602. On the other hand, when the number of reserved start memories for the first special symbol is small, the lottery result based on the start memory is derived with a relatively long variation time, so that it is easy to win the high expectation effect lottery as described above. In combination with this, the occurrence of a state in which the start memory of each special symbol does not exist is suppressed.

  In the normal gaming state, it is difficult for the game ball to win the second start opening 604. As described above, it is difficult to win the high expectation effect lottery, but the start memory of the second special symbol is relatively long. It is derived with the fluctuation time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which there is no reserved ball of each special symbol by winning a game ball at each of the start ports 602 and 604 during a period in which the symbol variation of the second special symbol is performed. Can do. In particular, in the normal gaming state in which the time reduction function does not operate, the start memory of the second special symbol is rare, so the derivation can be suppressed by increasing the variation time, and the start memory of the second special symbol exists. It can be maintained as long as possible.

  In addition, in the specific game state in which the short-time function is activated (special game state and short-time game state), the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the case where the lottery result is lost and the high expectation effect is not performed is Is determined as follows.

  First, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol / special low expected loss table in the first special symbol loss variation pattern table setting process (see FIG. 97). Regardless of the variation pattern, the variation pattern (and the variation type of the variation pattern) selected from the first special symbol / special-time low-expected loss table is determined.

  Specifically, the first special symbol / special low expected loss table is selected regardless of the number of retained balls of the first special symbol from 0 to 3 (step S15437). Here, as shown in FIG. 101, according to the first special symbol / special low expected loss table (table J1H), the variation pattern “7D” always has the variation pattern “open extension extended” regardless of the variation pattern random number 2. “Normal fluctuation” is selected. As described above, in the specific gaming state in which the time reduction function operates, the variation type “10H” is determined regardless of the variation type random number. Therefore, the variation time of the first special symbol based on the variation pattern “during open extension / normal variation” of the variation number “7D” is almost the same as the base time (6000 ms).

  As a result, in the specific gaming state in which the time reduction function is activated, the variation time of the first special symbol when the lottery result is lost and no high-expected performance is performed is substantially constant regardless of the number of reserved balls (about 6000 msec). It is.

  On the other hand, the variation time of the second special symbol is determined based on whether the second special symbol / special low expected loss table A or B is the second special symbol in the second special symbol loss variation pattern table setting process (see FIG. 104). It is selected according to the number of reserved balls and is determined based on the variation pattern (and the variation type of the variation pattern) selected from the second special symbol / special time low expectation loss table.

  Specifically, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0, the second special symbol / specific low expected loss table A is selected (step S15715). Here, as shown in FIG. 108, according to the second special symbol / special low expected loss table A (table J2HA), the variation pattern “96” of the variation number “96” is always used regardless of the variation pattern random number 2. “Medium / out of hold (no hold)” is selected. As described above, in the specific gaming state in which the time reduction function operates, the variation type “40H” is determined regardless of the variation type random number. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol based on the fluctuation pattern “Opening extension / displacement (no hold)” of the fluctuation number “96” is almost the same as the base time (12200 ms).

  Further, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 to 3, the second special symbol / special time low expected loss table B is selected (step S15721). Here, as shown in FIG. 108, according to the second special symbol / special low expected loss table B (table J2HB), the variation pattern “7E” always has the variation pattern “open extension” regardless of the variation pattern random number 2. “Medium / shortening variation” is selected. As described above, in the specific gaming state in which the time reduction function operates, the variation type “40H” is determined regardless of the variation type random number. Therefore, the variation time of the second special symbol based on the variation pattern “7E” variation pattern “opening extended / shortening variation” is substantially the same as the base time (1800 ms).

  As a result, in the specific gaming state in which the time reduction function is activated, the variation time of the second special symbol when the lottery result is lost and no high expectation effect is performed is about 1800 msec if the number of reserved balls is 1 to 3. If the number of reserved balls is 0, it is about 12200 msec.

  From the above, in the specific gaming state, the game mode is such that the start memory of the second special symbol is repeatedly held and derived, and if the number of the start memories of the second special symbol is large, the start memory is stored in the game state. Based on the lottery result, it is quickly derived. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of start memory (so-called invalid ball) that is not held despite winning the second start port 604. On the other hand, when the number of holdings of the start memory of the second special symbol is small, the lottery result based on the start memory is derived with a relatively long fluctuation time, so that it is difficult to win the high expectation effect lottery as described above. Thus, the occurrence of a state in which there is no start memory for each special symbol is suppressed.

  In the specific gaming state, the game ball is more likely to win the second starting port 604 than the first starting port 602. As described above, the first special symbol is easy to win the high expectation effect lottery. In combination, the start memory of the first special symbol is derived with a relatively long variation time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which there is no reserved ball of each special symbol by winning a game ball at each of the start ports 602 and 604 during a period when the symbol variation of the first special symbol is performed. Can do. In particular, in the specific gaming state in which the time reduction function is activated, the start memory of the first special symbol is relatively rare. Therefore, the derivation can be suppressed by increasing the variation time, and the start memory of the first special symbol. Can be maintained for as long as possible.

  Note that the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the case where the high expectation effect is performed is not affected by the number of reserved balls of each special symbol, and the variation time depends on the mode (type) of the high expectation effect. Is determined. That is, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by the first special symbol / losing variation pattern table setting process (see FIGS. 96 and 97) described above (see FIG. 96 and FIG. 97). An hourly / expected loss table is selected and determined based on the variation pattern (and the variation type of the variation pattern) selected from the highly expected loss table. The variation time of the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol loss variation pattern table setting process (see FIGS. 103 and 104) described above (see FIG. 103 and FIG. 104). An hourly / expected loss table is selected and determined based on the variation pattern (and the variation type of the variation pattern) selected from the highly expected loss table.

  The variation of the decorative symbol 1153 and the special symbol corresponding symbol 1000, 1002 corresponds to the variation time of the special symbol, the variation time of the decorative symbol 1153, the variation time of the special symbol corresponding symbol 1000, 1002, and the variation of the special symbol. Time is almost the same time.

  By the way, in the specific game state (especially the special game state) in which the time-shortening function is activated, when the counter value by the second special symbol hold counter 913 is 0 (that is, the state in which the start hold of the second special symbol does not exist). The variation time of the second special symbol is longer than when the counter value by the second special symbol holding counter 913 is 1 to 3 (that is, the state where the second special symbol is on hold) (in the above example) When there is a holding ball, it is about 1800 ms, and when there is no holding ball, it is about 12200 ms). Such control further provides the following actions and effects.

  That is, in the specific game state as described above, when the big special jackpot (special jackpot or long open normal jackpot) of the second special symbol is won, the long open big hit game is always executed and a lot of prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, if the first special symbol short-open normal jackpot is won, a large amount of prize balls will not be paid out, and the special game state will be terminated particularly in the special game state. Therefore, especially in the special gaming state, it is desirable to avoid the disappearance of the start memory of the second special symbol and to always derive the symbol variation and the lottery result based on the start memory of the second special symbol.

  Therefore, as described above, in the state where the start suspension of the second special symbol does not exist, the second start port 604 is changed during the variation of the second special symbol by increasing the variation time of the second special symbol. This makes it easier for game balls to win. Thus, it is possible to avoid the disappearance of the start memory of the second special symbol, and to obtain a state where the symbol variation and the lottery result are always derived based on the start memory of the second special symbol. In particular, in the special game state, it is possible to avoid as much as possible the disadvantage that the special game state is ended by winning the short open normal jackpot of the first special symbol.

[Details of effect display mode based on variation pattern]
The effect display mode based on the lottery result of special symbol (pending lottery) is the variation pattern determined by the above-described variation pattern setting processing (see FIGS. 94, 95 to 97, 102 to 104). Specifically, it is executed based on a variation pattern determined based on the selected variation pattern table.

  Specifically, the lottery result of the first special symbol is the first special symbol display 84 for the variation time determined based on the variation pattern after the variation pattern is determined in each variation pattern setting process described above. At the same time, the symbols are changed, and an effect display mode based on the change pattern is derived by being executed by the effect display device 115 or the like. Similarly, the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 86 for the variation time determined based on the variation pattern after the variation pattern is determined in each variation pattern setting process described above. The design is changed, and an effect display mode based on the change pattern is executed by the effect display device 115 or the like.

  By the way, as will be apparent from each variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 94, 95 to 97, 102 to 104, and each variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 98 to 101 and 105 to 108. Fluctuation based on a winning based on winning in the first starting port 602 (starting memory of the first special symbol), or lottery based on winning a prize in the second starting port 604 (starting memory of the second special symbol) The variation pattern that can be selected differs depending on whether the variation is based on. Therefore, even if the gaming state is the same, a different variation pattern is selected depending on the special symbol type.

  Further, each table (each variation pattern) is selected from each variation pattern table depending on whether or not the external time-saving function is activated regardless of whether or not the internal probability changing function is activated. That is, even if the internal probability changing function is operating, the variation pattern that can be selected differs depending on the presence or absence of an external short-time operation. Therefore, in the specific game state in which the short-time function is activated (the short-time game state and the special game state), the same variation pattern is selected for the short-time game state in which the probability variation function is not activated and the special game state in which the probability variation function is activated. become.

  Furthermore, it depends not only on the type of special symbol and whether or not the short-time function is activated, but also on the winning type (either special jackpot or normal jackpot), random number for variable pattern, and number of balls held for special symbol (starting memory number). Then, each table (each variation pattern) is selected from each variation pattern table. In this embodiment, when there are a plurality of variation pattern tables as selection targets, a random number for arbitrarily selecting one table (variation pattern random number 1) and a plurality of selection targets in the selected variation pattern table. When there are two fluctuation patterns, a random number for randomly washing one fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern random number 2) and two fluctuation pattern random numbers are used. Further, depending on the gaming state, the variation type for the selected variation pattern is selected based on the variation type random number.

  By the way, in this embodiment, the special symbol variation time (the production time based on the variation pattern) and the expectation for the special jackpot have a close relationship. In other words, the longer the variation time of the special symbol (the production time based on the variation pattern), the higher the expectation that the special jackpot will be derived as the lottery result. In principle, in each variation pattern table, a variation pattern with a longer special symbol variation time (direction time based on the variation pattern) is easier to select when the lottery result is a special jackpot, while the lottery result is lost. This is because sometimes it is difficult to select. In other words, in each variation pattern table, as a rule, variation patterns with shorter special symbol variation times (production times based on variation patterns) are less likely to be selected when the lottery result is a special jackpot, while the lottery result is lost. This is because sometimes it is easy to be selected.

  In the following, details of each variation pattern and the effect display mode are specified with reference to the variation pattern names and variation numbers defined in the variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 98 to 101 and 105 to 108 as appropriate. I will explain it.

[Low Expected Loss Fluctuation in Normal Game State]
First, refer to FIG. 98, FIG. 100, FIG. 105, and FIG. 107 for the low expected loss variation that is executed when the lottery result is “lost” in the normal gaming state and is lost in the high expected production lottery. I will explain. This “low expectation loss variation” is a mode in which a loss is derived as a lottery result without a high expectation effect such as the occurrence of reach.

  As shown in FIG. 112, in the effect display device 115 in the normal gaming state, the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed before the change starts. When the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is started in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol), each symbol is displayed in the left symbol column 1153a, the middle symbol column 1153b, and the right symbol column 1153c. The variation is performed in a manner of scrolling in the vertical direction (more specifically, the direction from the top to the bottom when viewed from the player). And it stops in order of the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b. If the variation corresponds to the first special symbol, the first special symbol corresponding symbol 1000 is also stopped and displayed in the same manner as the decorative symbol 1153 after the symbol variation. On the other hand, if the variation corresponds to the second special symbol, the second special symbol corresponding symbol 1002 is also stopped and displayed in the same manner as the decorative symbol 1153 after the symbol variation.

  The effect display mode in which each stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c stops at a different symbol that is completely unrelated and “lost” is derived is “low” in the normal gaming state. Expected loss change ”. This “low-expected loss fluctuation” corresponds to “normal fluctuation” of fluctuation number 01, “shortening fluctuation 1” of fluctuation number 02, “shortening fluctuation 2” of fluctuation number 03, and “background transition fluctuation” of fluctuation number 04. .

  The “normal fluctuation” of the fluctuation number 01 is the most standard fluctuation pattern for executing the low expected loss fluctuation, and its base fluctuation time is 12800 ms. This variation pattern is obtained when the number of stored memories of the first special symbol (count value by the first special symbol hold counter 903) is calculated when the loss as the lottery result of the first special symbol is derived by “low expected loss variation”. It can be selectively executed when the number is 0 or 1 based on the post-pending digestion.

  The variation number 02 “shortening variation 1” is a variation pattern for executing a low expected loss variation (so-called shortening variation) having a base variation time shorter than the variation number 01 “normal variation”, and the base variation time is 6200 ms. It is. This variation pattern is selected when the number of starting memories of the first special symbol is 2 on the basis of the suspended digest when the loss as the lottery result of the first special symbol is derived by “low expected loss variation” Can be executed.

  The variation number 03 “shortening variation 2” is a variation pattern for executing a low expected loss variation (so-called shortening variation) in which the base variation time is shorter than the variation number 02 “shortening variation 2”. Is 2100 ms. This variation pattern is selected when the number of starting memories of the first special symbol is 3 on the basis of the suspended digest when the loss as the lottery result of the first special symbol is derived by “low expected loss variation” Can be executed.

  The variation number 04 “background transition variation” has a base variation time (6000 ms) substantially the same as the variation number 02 “shortening variation 1”, and the effect display device 115 is triggered by this “background transition variation”. It is the fluctuation pattern which changes the background image of. For example, a plurality of background images including a background image shown in FIG. 112 are stored in the image ROM 849 in advance as background images in the normal gaming state. When this “background transition variation” is executed, one background image excluding the background image displayed on the effect display device 115 is randomly selected by the effect lottery means 960 (FIG. 86) and selected. The background image is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 115 by the effect control means 962 (FIG. 86). In this variation pattern, when the loss as the lottery result of the first special symbol is derived by “low-expected loss variation”, the starting memory number of the first special symbol is 0 or 1 on the basis of the suspended digestion. Sometimes it can be selected and executed.

  On the other hand, when the loss as the lottery result of the second special symbol is derived by “low expectation loss fluctuation”, the fluctuation occurs regardless of the start memory number of the second special symbol (count value by the second special symbol hold counter 913). Only “normal fluctuation” with fluctuation number 01 is selected and executed as a pattern.

  As described above, the variation patterns 01, 02, 03, 04 have the first special symbol / ordinary when the loss as the lottery result of the first special symbol is derived by the “low expected loss variation”. When any one of the table T1H0 to the table T1H3 is selected from the time-low expected loss table (T1H) based on the start memory number (holding number) regardless of the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2 is changed from the table. Any variation pattern can be selected based on this. On the other hand, when the loss as the lottery result of the second special symbol is derived by “low expected loss variation”, the random number 1 for the variation pattern and the starting memory number (from the second special symbol / normally low expected loss table (T2H)) The table T2H is selected regardless of the number of holds), and only the variation pattern with the variation number 04 is selected from the table T2H regardless of the variation pattern random number 2.

  In the present embodiment, when the table T1H0 to the table T1H3 are selected from the first special symbol / normally low expected loss table (T1H), a variation pattern (variation associated with normal reach variation and character effect described later) is selected. Numbers 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 0A, 0B, and 9C are rarely selected and executed, so according to the above table, even when the high expectation lottery is missed, it is rare. Reach effects and character effects may occur.

  By the way, in the normal game state in which the time reduction function does not operate, when a variation pattern other than the variation numbers 1 to 4 is selected and executed, in principle, the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol of the right symbol row 1153c are displayed. Thus, the effect display device 115 displays a screen for deriving reach (reach notification). In the state where the reach is established, only the middle symbol row 1153b of the decorative symbols 1153 is changed, and the symbols are continuously changed in the special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002. Then, as described below, reach effects based on various variation patterns are executed.

[Normal reach fluctuation in normal gaming state]
Next, “normal reach fluctuation”, which is an effect display mode with normal reach when the normal gaming state is executed, will be described. This “normal reach fluctuation” is a mode in which a win or a loss is derived as a lottery result after performing a reach effect (normal reach) using only the decorative symbols 1153.

  In the “normal reach fluctuation”, as described above, after the reach notification is made in the effect display device 115, the symbol fluctuation is continued only in the middle symbol row 1153b. The effect display mode in which the middle symbol row 1153b is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c and “losing” is derived is “normal reach loss variation” in the normal gaming state. These “normal reach loss fluctuations” are “CL / normal reach 3” of fluctuation number 05, “CL / normal reach 5” of fluctuation number 06, “CL / normal reach 6” of fluctuation number 07, and “CL / normal reach 7 of fluctuation number 08”. "CL / normal reach 9" of variation number 09, "CL / normal reach 10" of variation number 0A, "CL / normal reach 11" of variation number 0B, and "CL / normal reach 13" of variation number 0C.

  Note that the time during which the middle symbol row 1153b fluctuates after reaching (in other words, the number of frames forwarded by the middle symbol row 1153b after reaching) varies depending on the variation time based on each variation pattern. Therefore, the number “N” written in each fluctuation pattern name “CL / normal reach N” indicates that the middle symbol row 1153b is advanced by N frames after the reach. Specifically, when the variation number 05 “CL / normal reach 3” is selected and executed, the effect control unit 962 (FIG. 86) performs the middle after the reach based on the variation time of the variation pattern (here, 15900 ms). After the symbol row 1153b is moved by three frames, it is stopped and displayed.

  Further, “CL” written in the variation pattern name means that the line is common. That is, in the present embodiment, as the reach mode, the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c are the same in only one row, the double reach in which the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c are the same in only one row, Exists. And what kind of reach mode should be used when performing a high expectation effect is preset for each variation pattern. However, in the case of the fluctuation pattern “CL” (common to lines), which reach mode is to be executed is not determined in advance and is determined by the peripheral control board 810.

  More specifically, when a highly anticipated effect is executed based on a fluctuation pattern of “CL” (common to all lines), the effect random drawing means 960 (see FIG. 86) randomly selects either single reach or double reach. The selection and decision are made, and the decided reach mode is executed by the effect control means 962 (see FIG. 86). For this reason, in general, double reach has a higher degree of expectation for jackpot than single reach. In the variation pattern (that is, normal reach) of “CL” (common line) in this embodiment, any reach mode is used. Have the same expectation of jackpot.

  The fluctuation number 05 of “CL / normal reach 3” has the shortest fluctuation time among the fluctuation patterns for executing the normal reach loss fluctuation, and the base fluctuation time is 15900 ms. As described above, the line is common, and after reaching, the middle symbol row 1153b is advanced by 3 frames. Then, on the reach symbol line shown in the left symbol column 1153a and the right symbol column 1153c, the middle symbol column 1153b stops at a symbol different from the reach symbol after the frame advance, and “losing” is derived.

  Similarly, “CL / normal reach 5” of variation number 06 is a variation pattern in which the base variation time is 17800 m and the middle symbol row 1153b is advanced by 5 frames. The variation number 07 “CL / normal reach 6” is a variation pattern in which the base variation time is 18800 ms and the middle symbol row 1153b is advanced by 6 frames. The variation number 08 of “CL / normal reach 7” is a variation pattern in which the base variation time is 19700 ms and the middle symbol sequence 1153b is advanced by 7 frames. The variation number 09 “CL / normal reach 9” is a variation pattern in which the base variation time is 21700 ms and the middle symbol row 1153b is advanced by 9 frames. The variation number 0A “CL / normal reach 10” is a variation pattern in which the base variation time is 22600 ms and the middle symbol row 1153b is advanced by 10 frames. “CL / normal reach 11” with variation number 0B is a variation pattern in which the base variation time is 23600 ms and the middle symbol row 1153b is advanced by 11 frames. “CL / normal reach 13” with variation number 0C is a variation pattern in which the base variation time is 25500 ms and the middle symbol row 1153b is advanced by 11 frames.

  The variation patterns of the above variation numbers 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 0A, 0B, and 0C are selected when the loss as the lottery result of the first special symbol is derived by “normal reach loss variation”. sell. That is, when the table T1RA is selected from the first special symbol / normal high-expected loss table (T1R) based on the random number for variation pattern 1, any variation pattern is selected from the table T1RA based on the random number for variation pattern 2 Can be selected. On the other hand, since the loss as the lottery result of the second special symbol is not derived by “normal reach loss variation”, the above variation pattern is not selected for the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, after the reach notification is made in the effect display device 115, only the middle symbol row 1153b continues to change, and the middle symbol row 1153b is stopped and displayed in the same symbols as the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c. The effect display mode from which is derived is “variation per normal reach” in the normal gaming state. This “variation per normal reach” is “CL / normal reach 4” with variation number 0D, “CL / normal reach 5” with variation number 0E, “CL / normal reach 6” with variation number 0F, and “CL / normal reach” with variation number 10 7 ”, variable number 11“ CL / normal reach 8 ”, variable number 12“ CL / normal reach 9 ”, variable number 13“ CL / normal reach 10 ”, variable number 14“ CL / normal reach 11 ”, variable number 15 “CL / normal reach 12”, variable number 16 “CL / normal reach 13”, and variable number 17 “CL / normal reach 14”.

  The fluctuation number 0D “CL / normal reach 4” has the shortest fluctuation time among the fluctuation patterns for executing fluctuation per normal reach, and its base fluctuation time is 18800 ms. As described above, the line is common, and after reaching, the middle symbol row 1153b is advanced by 4 frames. Then, on the reach symbol line shown in the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the middle symbol row 1153b stops at the same symbol as the reach symbol after the frame advancement, and the decorative symbol 1153 “ "Winning" is derived.

  Similarly, “CL / normal reach 5” with a variation number 0E is a variation pattern in which the base variation time is 19900 ms and the middle symbol row 1153b is advanced by 5 frames. “CL / normal reach 6” of variation number 0F is a variation pattern in which the base variation time is 20800 ms and the middle symbol row 1153b is advanced by 6 frames. The variation number 10 “CL / normal reach 7” is a variation pattern in which the base variation time is 21700 ms and the middle symbol sequence 1153b is advanced by 7 frames. The variation number 11 “CL / normal reach 8” is a variation pattern in which the base variation time is 22700 ms and the middle symbol sequence 1153b is advanced by 8 frames. The variation number 12 “CL / normal reach 9” is a variation pattern in which the base variation time is 23800 ms and the middle symbol sequence 1153b is advanced by 9 frames. The variation number 13 “CL / normal reach 10” is a variation pattern in which the base variation time is 24600 ms and the middle symbol row 1153b is advanced by 10 frames. The variation number 14 “CL / normal reach 11” is a variation pattern in which the base variation time is 31000 ms and the middle symbol row 1153b is advanced by 11 frames. The variation number 15 “CL / normal reach 12” is a variation pattern in which the base variation time is 26600 ms and the middle symbol row 1153b is advanced by 12 frames. The variation number 16 “CL / normal reach 13” is a variation pattern in which the base variation time is 27700 ms and the middle symbol row 1153b is advanced by 13 frames. The variation number 17 “CL / normal reach 14” is a variation pattern in which the base variation time is 33900 ms and the middle symbol row 1153b is advanced by 14 frames.

  However, in this embodiment, depending on each variation pattern for executing “variation per normal reach”, the winning derivation mode of the decorative symbol 1153 by the flat eye differs from that of “CL / normal reach 4” of the variation number 0D. Yes.

  Specifically, in “CL / normal reach 6” of variation number 0F and “CL / normal reach 9” of variation number 12, the same symbol as the reach symbol in the middle symbol column 1153b is the left symbol column 1153a and the right symbol. The frame further advances one frame from the position that is the same line as the reach symbol shown in the row 1153c, and temporarily stops. After that, the “hit” of the decorative symbol 1153 due to the doublet is derived (so-called “hit back”) in such a manner that one frame is returned to the position on the same line.

  Further, in the variation number 14 of “CL / normal reach 11” and variation number 17 of “CL / normal reach 14”, the middle symbol row 1153b is predetermined on the reach symbol lines shown in the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c. After a number of frames advance, temporarily stop with a symbol different from the reach symbol (that is, pretend as if "losing" was derived). After that, the temporarily stopped middle symbol row 1153b resumes fluctuation, and the middle symbol row 1153b reaches the reach after the frame advance on the reach symbol line shown in the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c. Stopping at the same symbol as the symbol, the “hit” of the decorative symbol 1153 by the doublet is derived (so-called “per change”).

  In addition, each variation pattern of the above variation numbers 0D, 0E, 0F, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 17 represents the special jackpot as the lottery result of the first special symbol “variation per normal reach”. Can be selected. That is, when the table T1AA is selected from the first special symbol / normal hourly table (T1A) based on the random number for variation pattern 1, any variation pattern is selected from the table T1AA based on the random number for variation pattern 2 Can be done. Further, it can be selected when the special jackpot as the lottery result of the second special symbol is derived by “normal fluctuation per reach”. That is, when the table T2AA is selected from the second special symbol / normal time table (T2A) based on the random number for variation pattern 1, any variation pattern is selected from the table T2AA based on the random number for variation pattern 2 Can be done.

  By the way, the “normal reach fluctuation” of the present embodiment is a fluctuation pattern having the following unprecedented features. In other words, most of the conventional “normal reach fluctuations” have a low fluctuation rate and a constant time since the expectation of jackpot is low. For this reason, the number of frames forwarded in the middle symbol row 1153b after the reach that the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c are aligned with the same symbol is also constant. From this, if the symbol displayed in the middle symbol row 1153b when a reach occurs, the player can predict whether the symbol variation is “win” or “lost” from the number of frame feeds after the reach has occurred. Met. In particular, since most of the conventional “normal reach fluctuations” are “losing”, if the player can be predicted to be “losing” before the symbol fluctuation ends, the significance of the existence of the symbol fluctuations There was a problem that the interest of the game declined as well as the retirement.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns having different base variation times are provided as “normal reach variation”. As a result, the number of frame feeds in the middle symbol row 1153b after reach varies depending on each variation pattern. It can be difficult to predict, and the player's interest can be maintained until the symbol variation ends.

  In addition, among the plurality of fluctuation patterns as “normal reach fluctuations”, the expectation that the special jackpot is derived is higher as the fluctuation pattern has a longer base fluctuation time. In particular, since there is no variation pattern (“CL / normal reach 14” of variation number 17) with the largest number of frame feeds in the middle symbol row 1153b, a special jackpot is always derived as a lottery result. (In other words, the special jackpot is confirmed). As described above, the conventional “normal reach fluctuation” has a low expectation for the big hit, but according to the present embodiment, the “normal reach fluctuation” can be won by the big hit. “But there ’s no decline in interest. In particular, when “normal reach change” is executed, the player pays attention to expecting that the production time will be longer so that the number of frame feeds in the middle symbol row 1153b is increased. Can be attracted more.

  Further, a variation pattern in which the frame advance number in the middle symbol row 1153b is “4” (“CL / normal reach 4” in the variation number 0D), and a variation pattern in which the frame advance number in the middle symbol row 1153b is “8” (variation number). 11 “CL / normal reach 8”), and the variation pattern in which the frame feed number of the middle symbol row 1153b is “12” (variation number 15 “CL / normal reach 12”) does not correspond to “losing”, respectively. . That is, a special jackpot is always derived as a lottery result for a variation pattern that stops when the number of frame feeds in the middle symbol row 1153b is “4”, “8”, “12” (that is, the special jackpot is determined).

  On the other hand, when the number of frame feeds in the middle symbol row 1153b reaches “4” after the occurrence of reach, the normal reach fluctuation may develop to “S reach” of the promoted reach fluctuation described later. Further, when the number of frame feeds in the middle symbol row 1153b reaches “8” after the occurrence of reach, the normal reach fluctuation may develop to “D reach” of the promoted reach fluctuation described later. Further, when the number of frame feeds in the middle symbol row 1153b reaches “8” after the occurrence of reach, the normal reach fluctuation may develop to “M reach” of the promoted reach fluctuation described later.

  In other words, when the number of frame advance of the middle symbol row 1153b after the occurrence of the reach is “4”, “8”, “12”, no losing is derived, and a special jackpot is won or a promotion reach is developed. It is either. In other words, when the number of frame advance of the middle symbol row 1153b after the occurrence of reach is “4”, “8”, “12”, it can be said that the expectation of jackpot for the player is very high.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of frame feeds in the middle symbol row 1153b after the occurrence of reach in the “normal reach fluctuation” is given meaning. For this reason, in the conventional “normal reach fluctuation”, the player was not interested in the frame advance number, but in the “normal reach fluctuation” of the present embodiment, the middle symbol string after the reach occurrence to the player. It is possible to give a strong interest to the frame feed number of 1153b. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's interest in “normal reach fluctuation” and to propose a new way of enjoying the reach effect by paying attention to the number of frames in the middle symbol row 1153b after the occurrence of the reach. .

[Normal long reach fluctuation in normal gaming state]
By the way, the “normal reach fluctuation” in the normal gaming state has a longer fluctuation time than the “normal reach loss fluctuation” described above, and the “normal reach reach fluctuation” longer than the “normal reach fluctuation fluctuation” described above. Fluctuations per long reach ”. These “normal long reach fluctuations” are drawn after performing the reach production using only the decorative design 1153 as in the case of the above “normal reach fluctuation” (that is, the normal long reach loss fluctuation and the normal long reach fluctuation). As a result, it is an aspect of deriving hit or loss.

  However, “normal long reach fluctuation” displays a special background effect different from “normal reach fluctuation”. For example, as this special background effect, an image imitating a snowstorm is displayed during symbol variation, and display control is performed so that the background image before the variation starts is hidden by the snowstorm.

  In addition, “normal long reach fluctuation” is not CL (common to lines) like “normal reach fluctuation”, but a reach mode (ie, single reach or double reach) is defined for each fluctuation pattern. In the present embodiment, in each variation pattern name, “SL” indicates single reach and “DL” indicates double reach.

  The “normal long reach loss variation” in the normal gaming state corresponds to “SL long reach” with a variation number 18 and “DL long reach” with a variation number 1C. The variation number 18 “SL long reach” is a variation pattern in which the base variation time is 33100 m and a single line reach mode is achieved. The variation number 1C “DL long reach” is a variation pattern in which the base variation time is 33100 m and a double-line reach mode is achieved.

  Each variation pattern of the variation number 18 or 1C can be selected when the “normal long reach loss variation” is performed on the decorative symbol 1153 corresponding to the first special symbol. That is, when the table T1RB is selected from the first special symbol / normally high expected loss table (T1R) based on the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern, any fluctuation pattern is selected from the table T1RB based on the random number 2 for the fluctuation pattern. Can be selected. Further, it can be selected when “normal long reach loss variation” is performed for the decorative symbol 1153 corresponding to the second special symbol. That is, when the table T2RA is selected from the second special symbol / normally expected high loss table (T2R) based on the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern, any fluctuation pattern is selected from the table T2RA based on the random number 2 for the fluctuation pattern. Can be selected.

  On the other hand, “variation per normal long reach” in the normal gaming state corresponds to “SL long reach” with a variation number 1A and “DL long reach” with a variation number 1F. The variation number 1A “SL long reach” is a variation pattern in which the base variation time is 36000 m and a single-line reach mode is achieved. The variation number 1F “DL long reach” is a variation pattern having a base variation time of 36200 m and a double-line reach mode.

  Each variation pattern of the variation number 1A or 1F can be selected when the special jackpot as the lottery result of the first special symbol is derived by “variation per normal long reach”. That is, when the table T1AB is selected from the first special symbol / ordinary hour table (T1A) based on the random number for variation pattern 1, any variation pattern is selected from the table T1AB based on the random number for variation pattern 2 Can be done. Further, it can be selected when the special jackpot as the lottery result of the second special symbol is derived by “normal fluctuation per long reach”. That is, when the table T2AB is selected from the second special symbol / ordinary hour table (T2A) based on the random number for variation pattern 1, any variation pattern is selected from the table T2AB based on the random number for variation pattern 2 Can be done.

[Promotion Reach Change in Normal Game State]
Next, “elevation reach fluctuation”, which is an effect display mode with promotion reach when the normal gaming state is executed, will be described. “Promotional Reach Variation” has evolved into a reach effect that derives a win or a loss as a lottery result after performing a specific character effect via a reach effect using the decorative design 1153 (that is, the above-described normal reach). It is an aspect to do. Further, “elevated reach fluctuation” is equivalent to so-called super reach because the degree of expectation for jackpot is higher than the above-mentioned “normal reach fluctuation”.

  In this “elevation reach change”, as in the above-described normal reach, after the reach notification is given in the effect display device 115, the design change is continued only in the middle symbol row 1153b, and a character peculiar to the pachinko 1 is used. Reach production was executed. Then, after the reach effect using the character, the effect display mode in which the middle symbol row 1153b is stopped and displayed in a symbol different from the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, and “losing” is derived is a normal game. It is “promotion reach loss change” in the state. Further, after the reach effect using the character, the effect display mode in which the middle symbol row 1153b is stopped and displayed in the same symbols as the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, and “winning” is derived, is the normal gaming state. “Change per promoted reach”.

  In the present embodiment, as the above-mentioned character, a character imitating a sloth (indicated in this embodiment as “S”), a character imitating a saber tiger (indicated in this embodiment as “D”), a character imitating a mammoth The promotion reach using three types of characters (indicated as “M” in the present embodiment) is executed. And the expectation to the big hit is high in the order of the reach production using “S” (S reach), the reach production using “D” (D reach), and the reach production using “M” (M reach). (That is, the symbol variation time and reach production time are long).

  Then, “promotion reach loss change” in the normal gaming state is “SL · S reach short” with a change number 22 “SL · S reach long” with a change number 25, “SL · S reach short development” with a change number 29, The variable number 37 corresponds to “SL · D reach”, the change number 3A “DL · D reach”, the change number 3E “SL · M reach”, and the change number 42 “DL · M reach”.

  The variation number 22 “SL / S reach short” has the shortest variation time among the variation patterns for executing the promoted reach loss variation, and its base variation time is 36500 ms. Then, the reach mode is a single line, and a reach effect (S reach) using the character “S” is executed. The variation number 25 “SL / S reach long” has a base variation time of 37500 ms and the reach mode is a single line. Reach effects that are different character effects and have a long effect time are executed. The variation number 29 “SL / S reach short development” has a base variation time of 57300 ms and the reach mode is a single line. In addition, a reach effect is performed in which a character effect that is continuous with the character effect is continuously performed.

  A variation effect (D reach) using the character “D” is executed for both “SL • D reach” of the variation number 37 and “DL • D reach” of the variation number 3A. However, “SL · D reach” with a variation number of 37 has a base variation time of 44700 ms and a reach mode of a single line. The variation number 3A “DL · D reach” has a base variation time of 48400 ms and a reach mode of double line.

  A variation effect (M reach) using the character “M” is executed for both “SL • M reach” of variation number 3E and “DL • M reach” of variation number 42. However, the fluctuation number 3E “SL · M reach” has a base fluctuation time of 55600 ms and the reach mode is a single line. The variation number 42 “DL · M reach” has a base variation time of 55600 ms and a reach mode of double line.

  Each variation pattern of the variation numbers 22, 25, 29, 37, 3A, 3E, and 42 can be selected when the loss as the lottery result of the first special symbol is derived by “elevated reach loss variation”. That is, when the table T1RC is selected based on the variation pattern random number 1 from the first special symbol / normally high expected loss table (T1R), any variation pattern is selected from the table T1RC based on the variation pattern random number 2. Can be selected. Further, it may be selected when the loss as the lottery result of the second special symbol is derived by “elevation reach loss change”. That is, when the table T2RB is selected from the second special symbol / normally expected high loss table (T2R) based on the random number for variation pattern 1, any variation pattern is selected from the table T2RB based on the random number for variation pattern 2 Can be selected.

  On the other hand, the “change per promoted reach” in the normal gaming state is “SL / S reach short” with a variable number 23, “SL / S reach long” with a variable number 27, “SL / S reach short development” with a variable number 2A. The variable number 38 corresponds to “SL · D reach”, the change number 3B “DL · D reach”, the change number 3F “SL · M reach”, and the change number 43 “DL · M reach”.

  The variation number 23 “SL · S reach short” has the shortest variation time among the variation patterns for executing the variation per promoted reach, and the base variation time is 38500 ms. And the reach mode is a single line, and the reach effect similar to the variation number 22 is executed. The variation number 27 “SL · S reach long” has a base variation time of 46700 ms and a reach mode of a single line, and the same reach effect as the variation number 25 is executed. The variation number 2A “SL / S reach short development” has a base variation time of 60300 ms and a reach mode of a single line, and the same reach effect as the variation number 29 is executed. “SL · D reach” of the variation number 38 has a base variation time of 46700 ms and a reach mode of a single line, and the same reach effect as the variation number 37 is executed. The variation number 3B “DL · D reach” has a base variation time of 47400 ms and a reach mode of a double line, and the same reach effect as the variation number 3A is executed. The variation number 3F “SL · M reach” has a base variation time of 56300 ms and a reach mode of a single line, and the same reach effect as the variation number 3E is executed. The variation number 43 “DL · M reach” has a base variation time of 48700 ms and a reach mode of a double line, and the same reach effect as the variation number 42 is executed.

  The variation patterns 23, 27, 2A, 38, 3B, 3F, and 43 are selected when the special jackpot as the lottery result of the first special symbol is derived by “variation per promoted reach”. sell. That is, when the table T1AC or the table T1AD is selected from the first special symbol / ordinary hour table (T1A) based on the random number 1 for the variation pattern, any one of the table T1AC or the table T1AD is selected based on the random number 2 for the variation pattern. Such a variation pattern can be selected. Further, it can be selected when the special jackpot as the lottery result of the second special symbol is derived by “variation per promoted reach”. That is, when the table T2AC or the table T2AD is selected from the second special symbol / normal time table (T2A) based on the variation pattern random number 1, any of the table T2AC or the table T2AD based on the variation pattern random number 2 is selected. Such a variation pattern can be selected.

[Special reach fluctuation in normal gaming state]
Next, “special reach fluctuation” which is an effect display mode with special reach when the normal gaming state is executed will be described. “Special reach fluctuation” is a mode in which a win or losing is derived as a lottery result after performing a specific character production, as with “elevation reach fluctuation”. It ’s a super-reach with high expectations. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is an effect display mode that is most advantageous to the player.

  In the “special reach fluctuation”, as in the above-described normal reach, after the reach notification is made in the effect display device 115, the symbol fluctuation is continued only in the middle symbol row 1153b (however, the glacial crack SC described later is excluded). ) As a general rule, it develops to reach production (special reach) using characters peculiar to this pachinko 1 through the above-described promotion reach. Then, after the reach effect using the character, the effect display mode in which the middle symbol row 1153b is stopped and displayed in a symbol different from the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, and “losing” is derived is a normal game. It is “special reach loss fluctuation” in the state. In addition, after the reach effect using the character, the effect display mode in which the middle symbol row 1153b is stopped and displayed in the same symbols as the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c and “winning” is derived is the normal gaming state. "Fluctuation per special reach".

  In the present embodiment, there are three modes of “AC reach”, “full rotation reach”, and “glacial crack SC” as reach effects accompanying “special reach fluctuation”. “AC reach” is a special reach production using all of the above-described three types of characters “S”, “D”, and “M”. “Full-rotation reach” is a special reach effect for determining the jackpot, in which the design changes while the decorative symbols 1153 are all aligned. “Glacier cracking SC” is a special reach effect that performs a role effect that drives the light emitting decoration 1720.

  In particular, when the “glacier cracking SC” is executed while the decorative symbol 1153 is changing, the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c do not stop at the same symbol (that is, without reach notification). It develops into a promotion reach or a special reach in a state in which all the design symbols of the decorative design 1153 fluctuate. That is, when “glacier cracking SC” is executed, the reach design (normal reach) by the decorative design 1153 is not performed, and a reach mode that directly develops to so-called super reach is obtained.

  Then, the “special reach loss fluctuation” in the normal gaming state is “SL · AC reach (via D)” with a change number 4A, “DL · AC reach (via D)” with a change number 4D, and “SL · AC reach (via D)”. AC reach (via M) ”, variation number 54“ DL / AC reach (via M) ”, variation number 65“ glacial crack SC / DL / D reach ”, variation number 69“ glacial crack SC / DL / M ” Reach, Variation number 70 “Glacier cracking SC / DL / AC reach (via D)”, Variation number 74 “Glacier cracking SC / DL / AC reach (via M)”, Variation number 78 “Glacier cracking SC · This corresponds to “SL / CH reach”.

  The variation numbers 4A, 4D, 51, and 54 are all variation patterns in which the reach effect (AC reach) using all the above-described characters is executed. However, the fluctuation number 4A “SL / AC reach (via D)” has a base fluctuation time of 70700 ms and a reach mode of a single line. Execute. “DL / AC reach (via D)” of the variation number 4D has a base variation time of 80400 ms and the reach mode is a double line. Perform AC reach. Variation number 51 “SL / AC reach (via M)” has a base variation time of 81600 ms and the reach mode is a single line. After executing the above M reach, the AC reach is executed following the M reach. To do. The variation number 54 “DL / AC reach (via M)” has a base variation time of 87600 ms, and the reach mode is a double line. Perform AC reach. In other words, these variation patterns cause an effect display mode to be developed from the above-described promotion reach (S, D, M reach) to AC reach.

  The variation numbers 65, 69, 70, 74, and 78 are all variation patterns in which the reach effect (glacial crack SC) using the light emitting decoration 1720 described above is executed. However, the fluctuation number 65 of “glacial crack SC / DL / D reach” has a base fluctuation time of 40400 ms and a reach mode of double line, and executes the D reach after executing the glacier crack SC. The fluctuation number 69 of “glacial crack SC / DL / M reach” has a base fluctuation time of 43700 ms and a reach mode of double line, and executes M reach after executing the glacier crack SC. Variation No. 70 “Glacier Cracking SC / DL / AC Reach (via D)” has a base variation time of 72400 ms and a reach mode of double line. AC reach is executed following D reach. Variation No. 74 “Glacier Crack SC / DL / AC Reach (via M)” has a base variation time of 75700 ms and a reach mode of double line. AC reach is executed following M reach. Variation No. 78 “Glacier Cracking SC / SL / CH Reach” has a base variation time of 51400 ms and a reach mode of a single line, and after performing the glacier cracking SC, reach production using character CH (CH reach) Execute. In other words, these fluctuation patterns are triggered by the highly anticipated production of glacier cracking SC, and are not normally via reach, but various types such as the above-described promotion reach (S, D, M reach), AC reach or CH reach. An effect display mode that directly develops into super reach is executed.

  The variation patterns 4A, 4D, 51, 54, 65, 69, 70, 74, and 78 described above are used when the loss as the lottery result of the first special symbol is derived by “special reach loss variation”. Can be selected. That is, when the table T1RD is selected from the first special symbol / normally expected high loss table (T1R) based on the random number 1 for the variation pattern, any variation pattern is selected from the table T1RD based on the random number 2 for the variation pattern. Can be selected. Also, it can be selected when the loss as a result of lottery of the second special symbol is derived by “special reach loss variation”. That is, when the table T2RC is selected from the second special symbol / normal high-expected loss table (T2R) based on the random number for variation pattern 1, any variation pattern is selected from the table T2RC based on the random number for variation pattern 2 Can be selected.

  In addition, the “variation per special reach” in the normal gaming state is “SL / AC reach (via S)” with a variation number 47, “SL / AC reach (via D)” with a variation number 4B, and “DL” with a variation number 4E. "AC reach (via D)", variable number 52 "SL / AC reach (via M)", variable number 55 "DL / AC reach (via M)", variable number 58 "branch 1 and full rotation reach" ”, Variation number 59“ branch 2 and full rotation reach ”, variation number 5A“ branch 3 and full rotation reach ”, variation number 66“ glacial crack SC · DL · D reach ”, variation number 6A“ glacial crack ” SC / DL / M reach ”, variation number 71“ glacial crack SC / DL / AC reach (via D) ”, variation number 75“ glacial crack SC / DL / AC reach (via M) ”, variation number 79 "Glacier Crack SC / SL / CH Reach , "Glacier cracking SC · all rotation reach" of the change number 7B, corresponds to the "glacier cracking SC · all rotation reach (via continuous)" of the change number 7C.

  The variation numbers 47, 4B, 4E, 52, and 55 are all variation patterns in which the reach effect (AC reach) using all the above-described characters is executed. However, the variation number 47 “SL / AC reach (via S)” is that the base variation time is 70500 ms and the reach mode is a single line. Execute. The variation number 4B “SL / AC reach (via D)” has a base variation time of 72700 ms and a reach mode of a single line, and the same reach effect as the variation number 4A is executed. The variation number 4E “DL / AC reach (via D)” has a base variation time of 76400 ms and a reach mode of a double line, and the same reach effect as the variation number 4D is executed. The variation number 52 “SL / AC reach (via M)” has a base variation time of 83600 ms and a reach mode of a single line, and the same reach effect as the variation number 51 is executed. The variation number 55 “DL / AC reach (via M)” has a base variation time of 83600 ms and a reach mode of double line, and the same reach effect as the variation number 54 is executed.

  The variation numbers 58, 59, and 5A are variation patterns in which a reach effect (full rotation reach) is performed in which the above-described decorative symbols 1153 are all aligned in a flat pattern. However, “branch 1 / full rotation reach” of the fluctuation number 58 has a base fluctuation time of 59200 ms, and after executing the above-described S reach, the full rotation reach is executed following the S reach. The fluctuation number 59 “branch 2 / full rotation reach” has a base fluctuation time of 63100 ms, and after executing the above-described D reach, the full rotation reach is executed following the D reach. The fluctuation number 5A “branch 3 / full rotation reach” has a base fluctuation time of 67000 ms, and executes the full rotation reach following the M reach after executing the M reach described above. In other words, these variation patterns cause an effect display mode to be developed from the above-described promotion reach (S, D, M reach) to full rotation reach.

  The variation numbers 66, 6A, 71, 75, 79, 7B, and 7C are all variation patterns in which the reach effect (glacial crack SC) using the light emitting decoration 1720 described above is executed. However, the variation number 66 “glacial crack SC / DL / D reach” has a base variation time of 39400 ms and the reach mode is a double line, and the reach effect similar to the variation number 65 is executed. The variation number 6A “glacial crack SC / DL / M reach” has a base variation time of 36800 ms and a reach mode of double line, and the reach effect similar to the variation number 69 is executed. The variation number 71 “glacial crack SC / DL / AC reach (via D)” has a base variation time of 68400 ms and a reach mode of double line, and the reach effect similar to the variation number 70 is executed. The variation number 75 “glacial crack SC / DL / AC reach (via M)” has a base variation time of 71700 ms and a reach mode of double line, and the same reach effect as the variation number 74 is executed. The variation number 79 “glacial crack SC / SL / CH reach” has a base variation time of 52400 ms and a reach mode of a single line, and the same reach effect as the variation number 78 is executed. The variation number 7B “glacier cracking SC / full rotation reach” has a base fluctuation time of 55100 ms and executes the full rotation reach after executing the glacier cracking SC. The variation number 7B “glacier cracking SC / full rotation reach” has a base fluctuation time of 55100 ms and executes the full rotation reach after executing the glacier cracking SC. The variation number 7C “glacial crack SC full rotation reach (continuous)” has a base variation time of 62000 ms, and executes the full rotation reach after executing the glacier crack SC through the continuous variation described later.

  Note that the variation patterns 47, 4B, 4E, 52, 55, 58, 59, 5A, 66, 6A, 71, 75, 79, 7B, and 7C described above are the lottery results of the first special symbol. It can be selected when the special jackpot is derived by “variation per special reach”. That is, when the table T1AE to the table T1AG are selected from the first special symbol / normal hourly table (T1A) based on the random number 1 for the variation pattern, any of the table T1AE to the table T1AG is selected based on the random number 2 for the variation pattern. Such a variation pattern can be selected. Further, it can be selected when the special jackpot as the lottery result of the second special symbol is derived by “variation per special reach”. That is, when the table T2AE to the table T2AG are selected from the second special symbol / ordinary hour table (T2A) based on the random number 1 for the variation pattern, any one of the table T2AE to the table T2AG is selected based on the random number 2 for the variation pattern. Such a variation pattern can be selected.

  More specifically, when the table T1AE or the table T2AE is selected, a variation pattern with AC reach (variation numbers 47, 4B, 4E, 52, 55) can be selected. When the table T1AF or the table T2AF is selected, a variation pattern (variation numbers 58, 59, 5A) with full rotation reach can be selected. When the table T1AG or the table T2AG is selected, a variation pattern (variation numbers 66, 6A, 71, 75, 79, 7B, 7C) accompanied by a glacier crack SC can be selected.

[Special reach fluctuation in normal gaming state]
Next, “special reach fluctuation” which is an effect display mode with special reach when the normal gaming state is executed will be described. The “special reach variation” is an effect display mode in which each symbol row of the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed in a mode other than a double-hulled pattern to derive a hit.

  In the “special reach variation”, similarly to the low expected loss variation described above, the effect display device 115 does not perform the reach effect, and each symbol sequence of the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed in a manner that does not become a flat eye. However, the stop mode of the decorative pattern 1153 is a hit mode (predetermined eye or chance eye) other than a predetermined flat eye, and there is an effect display mode in which “win” is derived by the predetermined eye or chance eye. The “special reach fluctuation” in the normal gaming state. In this “special reach fluctuation”, a loss as a lottery result is not derived.

  Then, the “special reach variation” in the normal gaming state corresponds to the “predetermined variation” of the variation number 95, the “chance hitting jackpot” of the variation number 9A, and the “chance passing jackpot” of the variation number 9B.

  The variation number 95 “predetermined variation” has a variation time of 12800 ms, and after the decoration symbol 1153 is varied, each symbol sequence is stopped and displayed in a mode (predetermined eye) that does not become a flat eye or a chance eye. The “predetermined eye” in the present embodiment is a reach lose mode in which the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c are the same symbol, and the middle symbol row 1153b is stopped and displayed in the next symbol as seen from the same symbol. Say. Specifically, after the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c are stopped and displayed as “7” and reach notification is made, the middle symbol row 1153b is stopped and displayed as “8”. The combination of the decorative symbols is displayed at the predetermined number of the variation number 95 when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a win. However, in order not to proactively indicate to the player that the lottery result is a win, the combination of decorative symbols is displayed in a reach-losing manner. The mode is the same as when it is lost. Moreover, even if the short open normal jackpot is won when the normal gaming state is controlled, the normal gaming state continues without shifting to the short-time gaming state. That is, the only difference in appearance from the time of losing is whether or not the opening / closing device 500 operates. However, since the operation of the opening / closing device 500 is also opened for an extremely short time as described above, it is almost the case that the player does not notice that the short win is usually won.

  Note that the variation pattern of the variation number 95 described above is derived from the “predetermined variation” in principle as a normal jackpot as the lottery result of the first special symbol. Except when the 9C variation pattern is selected). That is, the table T1AH is selected regardless of the variation pattern random number 1 from the first special symbol / normal time table (T1A), and the variation pattern is selected from the table T1RH regardless of the variation pattern random number 2. On the other hand, since the normal jackpot as the lottery result of the second special symbol is not derived by the “predetermined eye fluctuation”, the above variation pattern is not selected for the second special symbol.

  The variation number 9A “chance eye hit” has a variation time of 20000 ms, and after the decorative symbol 1153 changes, each symbol row is stopped and displayed at the chance. The “chance” in this embodiment is a mode in which the left symbol row 1153a is stopped and displayed as “3” and the right symbol row 1153c is stopped as “7”, and then the middle symbol row 1153b is stopped and displayed as “5”. Say. In addition, the variation number 9B “chance passing via jackpot” has a variation time of 21500 ms, and after the decorative symbol 1153 fluctuates, each symbol sequence temporarily stops at the chance, and then the decorative symbol 1153 changes again. Each symbol row is stopped and displayed with a flat eye.

  Note that the variation pattern of the variation number 9A is always selected because the normal jackpot as the lottery result of the second special symbol is derived by the “chance”. That is, the table T2AT is selected regardless of the variation pattern random number 1 from the second special symbol / normal time table (T2A), and the variation pattern is selected from the table T2AT regardless of the variation pattern random number 2. Further, the variation patterns of the variation numbers 9A and 9B can be selected when the special jackpot as the lottery result of the second special symbol is derived by “chance winning jackpot”. That is, the table T2AH can be selected based on the random number 1 for variation pattern from the second special symbol / normal time table (T2A), and the variation pattern can be selected based on the random number 2 for variation pattern from the table T2AH. On the other hand, since the normal jackpot or special jackpot as the lottery result of the first special symbol is not derived by the “chance item” or “chance item via jackpot”, the variation numbers 9A and 9B are used for the first special symbol. The variation pattern is never selected.

  By the way, in the normal gaming state where the time-shortening function does not operate, it is difficult for the game ball to win the second starting port 604, and it is extremely rare to win the “normal jackpot” as the lottery result of the second special symbol. is there. That is, in the present embodiment, the “ordinary jackpot” is positioned as an extremely irregular jackpot as the lottery result of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state. Therefore, when the variation pattern used for derivation of the jackpot (“chance eye jackpot” of variation number 9A) is selected, the effect display device 115 executes a very special reach effect based on the change pattern.

  Hereinafter, the effect display mode executed by the effect display device 115 when the normal big win is won with the second special symbol in the normal gaming state will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a screen flow showing a display mode on the effect display device when a normal jackpot is won with the second special symbol in the normal gaming state.

  First, when a normal jackpot (that is, a long open normal jackpot) as a lottery result of the second special symbol is won and a variation pattern with a variation number 9A is selected, an effect display device 115 as shown in FIG. 118 (a). Then, the variation of the second special symbol (the second special symbol display 86 and the second special symbol corresponding symbol 1002) and the decorative symbol 1153 is started based on the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 118 (b), when the variation time based on the variation pattern has elapsed, the effect display device 115 sequentially displays the left symbol row 1153a as “3” and the right symbol row 1153c as “7”. After that, the middle symbol row 1153b is stopped and displayed at “5” (that is, the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed in the form of “chance eyes”). Note that the variation pattern of the variation number 9A is the same as the base variation time (20000 ms) because the variation type is constant at 40H regardless of the variation type random number (see FIG. 107).

When “Chance Eye” is displayed on the effect display device 115, as shown in FIG. 118 (c),
Furthermore, a screen ("BIG BONUS" in this case) indicating that the jackpot is won, in which a long-open jackpot game is performed, is displayed, and a long-open jackpot game in which the player can acquire a large amount of prize balls is executed. Then, after the long open jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 118 (d), a screen (here “FREEZE ZONE”) is displayed on the effect display device 115 indicating the transition to the short-time game state. . Then, as shown in FIG. 118 (e), the state shifts to the short-time gaming state in which the short-time function is activated, and the short-time gaming state continues at this time until the number of changes in the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (here, 50 times). It will be.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the normal gaming state, basically, only the special jackpot with the probability variation function is won, so that all the decorative symbols 1153 are displayed in a specific symbol. . On the other hand, when a long open normal jackpot without a probability variation function is won, it is not possible to derive a jackpot with the specific symbol of the decorative symbol 1153.

  For this reason, when a normal jackpot is won with the second special symbol in the normal gaming state, the jackpot is derived at the chance instead of the hollow of the decorative symbol 1153. This gives the player the impression of winning only a big jackpot (special jackpot) with a probability change function in the normal gaming state, while winning an irregular long open normal jackpot. However, it is possible to derive the jackpot without impairing such a player's impression.

[Low Expected Loss Fluctuation in Specific Game State]
Next, the low-expected loss change that is executed when the lottery result is “losing” in the specific gaming state and is out of the high-expected production lottery will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 108. This “low expectation loss variation” is a mode in which a loss is derived as a lottery result without a high expectation effect such as the occurrence of reach.

  As shown in FIG. 113 and FIG. 114, in the effect display device 115 in the specific gaming state (short-time gaming state and special gaming state), a special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is provided as in the normal gaming state. When the decorative symbol 1153 starts to change in accordance with the change display, the symbols in the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c are in the vertical direction (more specifically, from the top to the bottom as viewed from the player). After the change is made in a manner of scrolling in the direction toward the direction) If the variation corresponds to the first special symbol, the first special symbol corresponding symbol 1000 is also stopped and displayed in the same manner as the decorative symbol 1153 after the symbol variation. On the other hand, if the variation corresponds to the second special symbol, the second special symbol corresponding symbol 1002 is also stopped and displayed in the same manner as the decorative symbol 1153 after the symbol variation.

  In addition, the effect display mode in which each stop symbol of the left symbol column 1153a, the middle symbol column 1153b, and the right symbol column 1153c stops at a different symbol that is completely unrelated and “losing” is derived is “low” in the specific gaming state. Expected loss change ”. These “low-expected loss fluctuations” are fluctuation number 7D “opening extension / normal fluctuations”, fluctuation number 7E “opening extension / shortening fluctuations”, and fluctuation number 96 “open extension / extraction (no hold)”. It corresponds to.

  The fluctuation number 7D “during open extension / normal fluctuation” is the most standard fluctuation pattern for executing the low expected loss fluctuation, and its base fluctuation time is 6000 ms. This variation pattern is selected and executed regardless of the start memory number of the first special symbol when the loss as the lottery result of the first special symbol is derived by the “low expected loss variation”.

  Variation No. 7E “Opening extended / shortening fluctuation” is a fluctuation pattern for executing low expected loss fluctuation (so-called shortening fluctuation) having a base fluctuation time shorter than that of fluctuation number 7D “Opening extension / normal fluctuation”. The base variation time is 1800 ms. This variation pattern is used when the number of starting memories of the second special symbol is 1 to 3 on the basis of the suspended digest when the loss as the lottery result of the second special symbol is derived by “low expected loss variation” Is selected and executed. Since this variation pattern has a very short variation time, each symbol row 1153a to 1153c stops almost simultaneously after a short-term symbol variation.

  The variation number 96 “open extension extended / disengagement (no hold)” is a variation pattern that executes a low expected loss variation having a base variation time longer than the variation number 7E “open extension extended / shortening variation”. The variation time is 12200 ms. This variation pattern is selected when the number of starting memories of the second special symbol is 0 on the basis of the suspended digest when the loss as the lottery result of the second special symbol is derived by “low expected loss variation” Executed. Note that this variation pattern is different from the variation number 7E “opening extension / shortening variation”, and stops in the order of the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b.

  Thus, each variation pattern of the variation numbers 7E and 96 has the second special symbol / special time table (J2) when the loss as the lottery result of the second special symbol is derived by the “low expected loss variation”. The table J2HA or the table J2HB is selected based on the variation pattern random number 1 and the starting storage number (holding number), and can be selected regardless of the variation pattern random number 2. On the other hand, when the loss as the lottery result of the first special symbol is derived by “low expected loss variation”, the random number 1 for the variation pattern and the starting memory number (holding number) from the first special symbol / specific time table (J1) Regardless of the table J1H, the variation pattern 7D is selected from the table J1H regardless of the variation pattern random number 2.

  By the way, when a variation pattern other than the variation numbers 7D, 7E, and 96 is selected and executed in the specific gaming state in which the time reduction function is activated, as a rule, the stop symbol in the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol in the right symbol row 1153c. And the effect display device 115 displays a screen for deriving reach (reach notification). In the state where the reach is established, only the middle symbol row 1153b of the decorative symbols 1153 is changed, and the symbols are continuously changed in the special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002. Then, as described below, reach effects based on various variation patterns are executed.

[Specific reach change in specific game state]
Next, “specific reach fluctuation” which is an effect display mode with specific reach when the specific game state is being executed will be described. “Specific reach change” is a result of a character effect unique to a specific gaming state without going through a reach effect using the decorative pattern 1153 (that is, the above-described normal reach), and a win or a losing is derived as a lottery result. It is an aspect that develops to reach production. In other words, in the specific gaming state, there is no reach effect using only the decorative symbol 1153 (the above-described normal reach fluctuation), and when reach occurs, the reach effect specific to the specific game state using the character is always used ( Specific reach) is executed.

  In this “specific reach variation”, reach notification (specific reach) unique to a specific game state using a character unique to the pachinko 1 is developed without direct reach notification by the decorative symbol 1153. In other words, the start of the specific reach means reach notification, and during the execution of the specific reach, the effect display device 115 displays each symbol row of the decorative symbol 1153 in a reduced size and the left symbol. A mode in which the column 1153a and the right symbol column 1153c stop at the same symbol and only the middle symbol column 1153b changes is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, there are mainly three forms of “Earth S Reach”, “Earth D Reach”, and “Earth M Reach” as reach effects accompanying “specific reach fluctuation”. “Earth S Reach” is a reach production in which the above-described character “S” struggles to achieve a specific purpose. “Earth D Reach” is a reach effect in which the above-mentioned character “D” struggles to achieve a specific purpose. “Earth M Reach” is a reach production in which the above-mentioned character “M” struggles to achieve a specific purpose.

  Then, it is displayed that each character has not achieved a specific purpose, and the middle symbol row 1153b is stopped and displayed in a symbol different from the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, and “losing” is derived. The effect display mode is “specific reach loss change” in the specific gaming state. In addition, it is displayed that each character has achieved a unique purpose, and the middle symbol row 1153b is stopped and displayed with the same symbols as the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, and “winning” is derived. The aspect is “variation per specific reach” in the specific gaming state.

  Then, the “specific reach loss change” in the specific game state is “open extension extended / ground S reach” with a change number 7F, “open extension extended / ground D reach” with a change number 84, and “open extension extended / Corresponds to “Earth M Reach”.

  The variation numbers 7F, 84, and 88 are variation patterns in which reach effects (specific reach) are executed using the above-described characters. However, the variation number 7F “open extension extended / ground S reach” has a base variation time of 37600 ms, and the above-mentioned “ground S reach” is executed. The variation number 84 “open extension extended / ground D reach” has a base variation time of 40800 ms, and the above-mentioned “ground D reach” is executed. The variation number 88 “open extended middle / ground M reach” has a base variation time of 49400 ms, and the above-mentioned “ground M reach” is executed.

  Each variation pattern of the variation numbers 7F, 84, and 88 can be selected when the loss as the lottery result of the first special symbol is derived by “specific reach loss variation”. That is, when the table J1R is selected regardless of the variation pattern random number 1 from the first special symbol / specific time table (J1), any variation pattern is selected from the table J1R based on the variation pattern random number 2. sell. Further, it can be selected when the losing as the lottery result of the second special symbol is derived by “specific reach losing fluctuation”. That is, when the table J2R is selected from the second special symbol / specific time table (J2) regardless of the variation pattern random number 1, any variation pattern is selected from the table J2R based on the variation pattern random number 2. sell.

  In addition, “variation per specific reach” in the specific gaming state is “open extension extended / ground S reach” with change numbers 81, 82, 83, “open extension extended / ground D reach” with change numbers 85, 86, 87, Variable No. 89, 8A, 8B “Opening Extension / Ground S Reach”, Variable No. 8C “Opening Extension / SL / S Reach Short”, Variable No. 8D “Open Extension Extended / SL / S Reach Long”, Fluctuation number 8E “Opening extension / SL / S reach short development”, Fluctuation number 8F “Opening extension / SL / D reach”, Fluctuation number 90 “Open extension / SL / M reach”, Fluctuation number 91 "Opening extension · SL · AC reach (via S)", Variation number 92 "Opening extension · SL · AC reach (via D)", Variation number 93 "Opening extension · SL · AC reach (M) Via)), variable number 94 It corresponds to an open extension, all rotation reach ".

  The variation numbers 81, 82, 83, 85, 86, 87, 89, 8A, and 8B are all variation patterns in which a reach effect (specific reach) using the above-described characters is executed. However, “open extension extended / ground S reach” of the variation numbers 81, 82, and 83 have base variation times of 74300 ms, 46600 ms, and 50800 ms, respectively, and the above-mentioned “ground S reach” is executed. The base change times of “open extension extended / ground D reach” of the variation numbers 85, 86, and 87 are 69600 ms, 42000 ms, and 47100 ms, respectively, and the above-mentioned “ground D reach” is executed. The base change times of the “open extension extended / ground S reach” of the variation numbers 89, 8A, and 8B are 78800 ms, 51100 ms, and 55500 ms, respectively, and the above-mentioned “ground M reach” is executed.

  However, in the present embodiment, depending on each variation pattern for executing the “specific reach loss variation”, the effect mode of each character and the hit derivation mode based on the decorative design 1153 are different.

  For example, in the variation patterns of the variation numbers 81, 85, and 89, the jackpot is derived in such a way that each character achieves a unique purpose as described above, and the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed with a non-specific symbol with a doublet. The Then, before or during the execution of the long open jackpot game, the promotion effect (also referred to as re-lottery) for deriving whether or not to shift to the special game state after the jackpot game (that is, whether or not the special jackpot is won). Is executed. If the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot”, it indicates that the promotion effect will shift to a special game state after the jackpot game, while if the lottery result of the special symbol is “normal jackpot”, it will be a jackpot in the promotion effect. This suggests that the game does not shift to the special game state after the game (in other words, shifts to the short-time game state).

  On the other hand, in the variation patterns of the variation numbers 82, 86, and 8A, the jackpot is derived in such a manner that each character achieves a specific purpose as described above, and the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed with a specific symbol of the flat eye. . Then, at the time of derivation of the jackpot, it is suggested that a transition to the special game state is made after the jackpot game. In other words, in this variation pattern, at the time of derivation of the jackpot, it is determined that the player wins the jackpot (special jackpot) with a probability fluctuation from the viewpoint of the player.

  In the variation patterns of the variation numbers 83, 87, and 8B, although the effect that each character failed to achieve the specific purpose is made, the jackpot is derived by the reversal effect that the character resumes and succeeds in achieving the purpose. At the same time, the decorative design 1153 is stopped and displayed at the specific design. Then, at the time of derivation of the jackpot, it is suggested that the game shifts to a special game state after the jackpot game. In other words, even with this variation pattern, at the time of derivation of the jackpot, it is determined that the player wins a jackpot (special jackpot) with a probability variation from the player's point of view.

  The variation numbers 8C, 8D, 8E, 8F, 90, 91, 92, 93, and 94 are all variation patterns in which the same reach effect is executed as the above-described promotion reach or special reach in the normal gaming state. However, in the variation number 8C “open extension extended / SL / S reach short”, the base variation time is 32900 ms, and the reach effect similar to the variation numbers 22 and 23 is executed. The variation number 8D “Opening extension / SL / S reach long” has a base variation time of 41000 ms, and the same reach effect as the variation numbers 25 and 27 is executed. In the variation number 8E “open extension extended / SL / S reach short development”, the base variation time is 54600 ms, and the reach effect similar to the variation numbers 29 and 2A is executed. The variation number 8F “open extension extended / SL / D reach” has a base variation time of 37200 ms, and the same reach effect as the variation numbers 37 and 38 is executed. The variation number 90 of “Opening extension / SL / M reach” has a base variation time of 42900 ms, and the same reach effect as the variation numbers 3E and 3F is executed. The variation number 91 “Opening extension / SL / AC reach (via S)” has a base variation time of 64900 ms, and the same reach effect as the variation number 47 is executed. The variation number 92 “Opening extension / SL / AC reach (via D)” has a base variation time of 63100 ms, and the same reach effect as the variation numbers 4A and 4B is executed. The variation number 93 “Opening extension / SL / AC reach (via M)” has a base variation time of 70200 ms, and the same reach effect as the variation numbers 51 and 52 is executed. Variation number 94 “Opening extension / full rotation reach” has a base variation time of 53600 ms and the same reach production as variation numbers 58, 59 and 5A is executed, but directly without going through the promotion reach. It develops to a full rotation reach.

  In the present embodiment, when the variation patterns of the variation numbers 8C, 8D, 8E, 8F, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94 are selected and executed, the character effect is the same as the above-described promotion reach and special reach. The jackpot is derived by, and the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed at a specific design with a flat eye. Further, in the specific gaming state, when the promotion reach or the special reach in the normal gaming state is executed, “losing” is not derived as a lottery result. By the way, in the normal gaming state, the promotion reach is a reach mode with a relatively low expectation to the jackpot, and even if it is a special reach, “losing” may be derived. On the other hand, when promotion reach or special reach is executed in a specific gaming state, a jackpot (special jackpot) with a probability variation function is surely determined, so these reach modes in the specific gaming state are extremely advantageous for the player. .

  The variation patterns 81, 82, 83, 85, 86, 87, 89, 8A, 8B, 8C, 8D, 8E, 8F, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94 are the first special patterns. This is selected when the special jackpot as the symbol lottery result is derived by “variation per specific reach”. That is, the table J1A is selected regardless of the variation pattern random number 1 from the first special symbol / specific time table (J1), and any variation pattern can be selected from the table J1A based on the variation pattern random number 2. Further, it can be selected when the special jackpot as the lottery result of the second special symbol is derived by “variation per specific reach”. That is, the table J2A is selected regardless of the variation pattern random number 1 from the second special symbol / specific time table (J2), and any variation pattern is selected from the table J2A based on the variation pattern random number 2. Since the normal jackpot as the lottery result of the second special symbol is always derived by “variation per specific reach”, the table J2AT is derived from the second special symbol / specific time table (J2) regardless of the random number 1 for the variation pattern. Based on the variation pattern random number 2, one of the variation patterns 81, 85, 89 is selected from the table J2AT.

[Special reach fluctuation in specific gaming state]
Next, “special reach fluctuation” which is an effect display mode with special reach when the specific game state is being executed will be described. The “special reach variation” is an effect display mode in which each symbol row of the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed in a mode other than a double-hulled pattern to derive a hit. The “special reach fluctuation” in the specific gaming state is basically derived in the same way as the “special reach fluctuation” in the normal gaming state when the decorative pattern 1153 has a predetermined pattern other than the flat eye. It is an effect display mode.

  Then, the “special reach fluctuation” in the specific gaming state is “change in open extension / per non-probability change 2R / ground S reach” of change number 97, and “change in open extension / per non-probability change 2R / ground D reach” in change number 98. , Corresponding to the variable number 99 “Opening extended / non-probable change 2R / ground M reach”.

  The variation number 97 “open extension extended / per non-probability variation 2R / ground S reach” has a base variation time of 45600 ms, and the same reach effect as the variation number 7F is executed. A variation number 98 of “Opening extended / Uncertain variation 2R / Ground D reach” has a base variation time of 40800 ms, and the same reach effect as the variation number 84 is executed. The change number 99 “open extension extended / per-non-probable change 2R / ground M reach” has a base change time of 49400 ms, and the reach effect similar to the change number 88 is executed.

  Note that the variation patterns 97, 98, and 99 have the variation pattern 97, 98, 99, and the variation pattern is always selected because the normal jackpot as the lottery result of the first special symbol is derived by a predetermined number. That is, the table J1AH is selected regardless of the variation pattern random number 1 from the first special symbol / specific time table (J1), and the variation pattern is selected from the table J1AH regardless of the variation pattern random number 2. On the other hand, since the normal jackpot as the lottery result of the second special symbol is not derived by “predetermined eyes”, the variation pattern with the above-mentioned variation numbers 97, 98, 99 may be selected for the second special symbol. Absent.

  By the way, in the specific gaming state in which the time reduction function is activated, the game ball is likely to win the second starting port 604 rather than the first starting port 602, and the second special symbol is changed more preferentially than the first special symbol. Therefore, it is extremely rare to win the “ordinary jackpot” with the second special symbol before winning the “big jackpot” with the first special symbol. That is, in the present embodiment, the “ordinary jackpot” is positioned as an extremely irregular jackpot as the lottery result of the first special symbol in the specific gaming state. Therefore, when the variation pattern used for derivation of the jackpot (variation numbers 97, 98, 99 “during open extension / non-probability variation 2R / ground reach”) is selected, the effect display device 115 is based on the variation pattern. A very special reach production is executed.

  Hereinafter, an effect display mode executed by the effect display device 115 when a normal jackpot is won with the first special symbol in the specific gaming state will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a screen flow showing a display mode on the effect display device when a normal jackpot is won with the first special symbol in the specific gaming state.

  First, when a normal jackpot (that is, a short open normal jackpot) as a lottery result of the first special symbol is won and one of the fluctuation patterns among the fluctuation numbers 97, 98, 99 is selected, FIG. As shown in), in the effect display device 115, the first special symbol (the first special symbol display 84 and the first special symbol corresponding symbol 1000) and the decorative symbol 1153 start to vary based on the variation pattern, The aforementioned earth reach is executed. When the variation time based on the variation pattern elapses, the effect display device 115 terminates the earth reach in the form of failure to achieve the purpose by the character, and the decorative symbol 1153 has a predetermined pattern as shown in FIG. 119 (b). Is stopped and displayed. As an example, FIG. 119 (b) shows a predetermined pattern in which the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c are stopped and displayed at “6” and the reach notification is made, and then the middle symbol row 1153b is stopped and displayed at “7”. Is shown. Since the variation type is not set in the specific gaming state, the symbol variation time is the same as the variation time based on the variation patterns of the variation numbers 97, 98, and 99.

  Note that the variation patterns 97, 98, and 99 have the same reach effect as the variation patterns 7F, 84, and 88 in that the ground reach is executed and “losing” is derived as the lottery result. It has become. However, when the variation pattern of the variation numbers 7F, 84, and 88 is executed, a mere loss is derived as the lottery result and the special gaming state continues, while the variation pattern of the variation numbers 97, 98, and 99 is performed. If this happens, the special game state is ended by winning the short open normal jackpot. Therefore, in the reach effect based on the change pattern of the change numbers 97, 98, 99, unlike the reach effect based on the change pattern of the change numbers 7F, 84, 88, the disadvantage that the special gaming state is ended indirectly or Deriving directly is desirable (for example, displaying a warning such as “Danger!” Or “DANGER”).

  When “predetermined” is displayed on the effect display device 115, a screen indicating that the jackpot is won is not displayed, and a short open jackpot game in which it is difficult for the player to acquire a large number of prize balls is executed. The Then, after the short-open big hit game is over, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), a screen (here, “FREEZE ZONE”) indicating the transition to the short-time game state is displayed on the effect display device 115. . Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (d), the state shifts to the short game state when the short time function is activated, and the short game state continues at this time until the number of special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (here, 100). It will be.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the specific gaming state, it is basically configured to win only a jackpot with a long open jackpot game (special jackpot or long open normal jackpot). If a special jackpot (that is, a short open normal jackpot) is won with one special symbol, a short open jackpot game will be executed, and the special game state will end without the player acquiring a large number of prize balls. It will be. In general, when a big hit is derived from the decorative symbol 1153, the player recognizes that a large amount of prize balls can be obtained. It cannot be derived.

  For this reason, when the player wins a normal jackpot with the first special symbol in the specific gaming state, the jackpot is derived with a predetermined eye instead of the flat eye of the decorative symbol 1153. This gives the player the impression of winning only a big jackpot (special jackpot or long open normal jackpot) that can win a large amount of prize balls in a specific game state, while providing an irregular short open normal jackpot Even in the case of winning, it is possible to derive a jackpot without impairing such a player's impression.

[Character breeding mode transition fluctuation]
Next, “character breeding mode transition variation”, which is an effect display mode that triggers the transition to the “character breeding mode” in which the player can breed a predetermined character in the normal gaming state, will be described. This “character breeding mode transition variation” is an effect display mode in which each symbol row of the decorative pattern 1153 is stopped and displayed at the losing eye, and the transition to the “character breeding mode” is notified.

  “Character breeding mode transition variation” corresponds to “CH chance entry effect” with a variation number 9C. The variation number 9C “CH chance entry effect” has a base variation time of 19600 ms, and the variation type is 10H regardless of the variation type random number. When this variation pattern is selected based on the normal jackpot, the short open jackpot game is executed after the “character breeding mode transition variation”.

  The “CH chance entry effect” with the variation number 9C is selected when the loss as the lottery result of the first special symbol is derived by the “character breeding mode transition variation” in the normal gaming state. That is, when any one of the tables T1H0 to T1H3 is selected from the first special symbol / normally low expected loss table (T1H) based on the start memory number (holding number) regardless of the random number 1 for the variation pattern, It can be selected from the table based on the random number 2 for the variation pattern. It is also selected when the normal jackpot as the lottery result of the first special symbol is derived by “character breeding mode transition variation” in the normal gaming state. That is, when the table T1AH is selected from the first special symbol / normal time table (T1A) regardless of the variation pattern random number 1, it can be selected from the table based on the variation pattern random number 2.

  That is, the “character breeding mode transition variation” can be executed based on the variation pattern of the variation number 9C when the lottery result of the first special symbol is “losing” or “ordinary big hit” in the normal gaming state. Then, after the “character breeding mode transition variation” is executed, the “character breeding mode” is executed in the normal gaming state. This “character breeding mode” can breed the character displayed on the effect display device 115 in a pseudo manner. For example, the player can arbitrarily press the operation button 327 to caress, hit, or feed the character. The “character breeding mode” ends when the special symbol changes by a predetermined number (for example, 30 times) or when super reach is executed.

  In this way, the transition to the “Character Breeding Mode” triggered by the “Character Breeding Mode Transition Fluctuation” may cause a change in the normal gaming state in which relatively monotonous games are repeated, making it difficult for the player to get bored. it can. In the “character breeding mode”, the player breeds the character in a pseudo manner, so that the interest in the normal gaming state is improved and the attachment to the pachinko machine 1 can be amplified.

[About variation types]
Next, variation types set for each variation pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 and 107. FIG. As described above, the variation type of each variation pattern is selected and determined with reference to the variation type table (FIGS. 100 and 107) based on the variation type random number in the normal gaming state. And the variation time of each special symbol and the decoration symbol 1153, and the production | presentation aspect in the production | presentation display apparatus 115 differ also with these fluctuation | variation types.

  As shown in FIG. 100, the variation types assigned to the variation pattern of the first special symbol include 10H, 11H, 12H, and 13H, and any variation type based on the variation type random number for each variation pattern. Is granted. As shown in FIG. 107, the variation types assigned to the variation pattern of the second special symbol include 40H, 41H, 42H, and 43H. For each variation pattern, any variation type is selected based on the variation type random number. A variation type is given.

  The variation types 10H and 40H are variation types serving as references for the variation types shown below, and indicate that the variation time of the variation pattern is the base variation time. Since the symbol variation time is not added to the variation patterns to which the variation types 10H and 40H are assigned, the variation time based on the variation pattern matches the base variation time. In addition, when an effect based on the variation pattern is executed, an additional effect based on the variation type (hereinafter referred to as a type addition effect) is not executed.

  The variation types 11H and 41H indicate that “svelling” is executed as the type addition effect at the time of the effect based on the variation pattern, and that the additional time for executing the “svelling” effect is 3800 ms. For the variation patterns to which the variation types 11H and 41H are assigned, 3800 ms is added as an additional time to the base variation time, so the variation time based on the variation pattern is the sum of the base variation time and the additional time. Matches. Then, when the effect based on the variation pattern is executed, the “slip” effect is executed using this additional time (3800 ms). In the “svelling” effect, after the right symbol row 1153c of the decorative symbol 1153 temporarily stops at a symbol different from the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c re-varies and stops at the same symbol as the left symbol row 1153a. This is an effect mode in which reach occurs.

  The variation types 12H and 42H indicate that “continuous variation twice” is executed as the type addition effect at the time of the production based on the variation pattern, and the additional time for executing the “continuous variation twice” effect is 7400 ms. . For the variation pattern to which the variation types 12H and 42H are assigned, 7400 ms is added as an additional time to the base variation time, so the variation time based on the variation pattern is the sum of the base variation time and the additional time. Matches. Then, when performing the effect based on the variation pattern, the “continuous variation twice” effect is performed using this additional time (7400 ms). In the “continuous variation twice” production, after each symbol row of the decorative symbol 1153 temporarily stops at “losing eyes”, the symbol row undergoes re-variation and the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c are the same. This is an effect that stops at the symbol (that is, reach occurs).

  Fluctuation types 13H and 43H indicate that “continuous fluctuation 3 times” is executed as a type addition effect at the time of production based on the fluctuation pattern, and that the additional time for executing the “3 continuous fluctuations” effect is 14200 ms. . For the variation patterns to which the variation types 13H and 43H are assigned, 14200 ms is added as an additional time to the base variation time, so the variation time based on the variation pattern is the sum of the base variation time and the additional time. Matches. Then, when performing the effect based on the variation pattern, the “continuous variation three times” effect is performed using this additional time (14200 ms). In the “3 consecutive fluctuations” effect, after each symbol row of the decorative symbol 1153 temporarily stops at “losing eye”, each symbol row again changes and temporarily stops at “losing eye” again. This is an effect mode in which each symbol row undergoes re-variation and the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c stop at the same symbol (that is, reach occurs).

  In the “slip” effect of the present embodiment, when the right symbol sequence 1153c is temporarily stopped, the aforementioned characters “S”, “D”, and “M” appear, and the right symbol sequence according to the action of the character. An effect of starting re-variation of 1153c is performed. Then, in the order of the characters “S”, “D”, and “M”, the degree of expectation that the jackpot is derived by the variation pattern is high. In other words, the control is performed such that the character used when the “svelling” effect is executed is selected in the order of “M”, “D”, and “S” as the variation pattern with the higher expectation degree of jackpots. .

  Further, in the “continuous variation” effect of the present embodiment, when each symbol row of the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped at “losing eyes”, the light emitting ornament 1720 is driven and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker. Then, re-variation of each symbol row of the decorative symbol 1153 is started. Thereby, the player can surely grasp that the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is not the normal symbol variation but the re-variation due to the “continuous variation” effect.

  By the way, as described above, the variation time of special symbols (execution time of the effect display mode based on the variation pattern) and the expectation degree won in the special jackpot are closely related, and the variation time (effect time) is The longer it is, the greater the expectation for a special jackpot. In relation to this, as for the variation type assigned to the variation pattern, the variation type with a longer additional time has a higher expectation for the special jackpot. In other words, a variation type with a longer additional time is likely to be given to a variation pattern with a high expectation for a special jackpot.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 107, in principle, only the fluctuation type 10H or 40H is given to the “low expected loss fluctuation” or “special reach fluctuation” that is not won by the special jackpot. In addition, the fluctuation type 10H, 11H or 40H, 41H is given to the “normal reach fluctuation” having a low expectation degree won in the special jackpot. In addition, the fluctuation types 10H to 13H or 40H to 43H are given to “normal long reach fluctuation”, “promotion reach fluctuation” and “special reach fluctuation” having high expectations for winning the special jackpot.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a variation pattern with a high expectation degree that is won by a special jackpot gives a variation type with a longer additional time, thereby further increasing the production time based on the variation pattern. Additional effects other than the reach effect based on the variation pattern are also executed. For this reason, when a reach effect based on a variation pattern and variation type with a high expectation level that is won by a special jackpot is executed, the player's sense of expectation is further increased, and the interest can be significantly improved.

  The gaming machine of the present embodiment described above can be embodied in the following technical idea. The following technical ideas are provided alone or in appropriate combination. In addition, since the following technical ideas express the present embodiment as the technical idea, the terms described in the present embodiment are expressed in terms of higher-level concepts. This generalized term will be described later.

[Technology 1]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 is
A symbol display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbol sequences when the variation start condition is satisfied;
A first entrance that can accept a game ball flowing down the game area;
First starting information extracting means capable of extracting first starting information based on the reception of the game ball at the first receiving port;
First starting information storage means for storing the first starting information extracted by the first starting information extracting means up to a first upper limit;
A winning determination means for determining a winning for the first starting information stored by the first starting information storage means one by one in the stored order when the variation condition is satisfied;
The symbol display control means for controlling the display result of the winning determination by the combination of stop symbols when the plurality of symbol strings are stopped by changing the plurality of symbol strings;
When the stop symbol is a combination indicating a win, a variable winning opening that allows a game ball to be won, and
A prize ball granting means for granting a player a predetermined amount of prize balls according to winning of the game balls at least in the variable prize opening;
When the stop symbol is displayed in a combination indicating winning, the winning per game that can facilitate the winning of the game ball to the variable winning opening in order to give a large amount of game balls to the player as a prize. Game execution means;
When a specific combination is displayed among the combinations indicating winning, the special game state with a relatively high probability of being determined as winning by the winning determination means is controlled and displayed in a combination other than the specific combination. A gaming state control means capable of controlling to a normal gaming state with a relatively low probability of being determined to be a hit by the winning determination means,
A gaming machine comprising:
A second receiving port disposed above the first receiving port and capable of receiving a game ball flowing down the gaming area;
Second starting information extracting means capable of extracting second starting information based on the reception of the game ball at the second receiving port;
Second starting information storage means for storing the second starting information extracted by the second starting information extracting means up to a second upper limit;
With
When the first receiving port is controlled to the special gaming state, the receiving of the game ball relative to the second receiving port can be facilitated by facilitating the receiving of the game ball to the first receiving port. And a movable member that makes it easier to receive a game ball than the second receiving port when controlled to the normal gaming state,
The winning determination means includes
While determining whether the second start information is successful when the variation start condition is satisfied,
As long as the first start information is stored, whether or not the first start information is stored is always determined regardless of whether the first start information is stored before the second start information. Is,
When the winning determination result for the first start information is winning, the winning game is executed regardless of whether or not the combination indicating the winning is displayed in the specific combination,
When the determination result of winning about the second start information is a win,
Even if the stop symbol is a combination indicating a winning combination, when the combination indicating the winning combination is a combination other than the specific combination, the winning determination result by the winning determining means is a winning combination. A game per prize where the variable prize opening is operated in a manner in which a game ball can barely win can be executed and the game can be controlled to the normal game state after the game per prize ends.
When the combination indicating the winning is the specific combination, the game per prize is executed and the special gaming state is controlled after the game per prize ends.
When the determination result of winning about the second start information is lost and the determination result of winning indicating the loss is displayed on the display means,
When the gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state,
When the number of the second start information stored in the second start information storage means is only the second start information related to the change, there is a normal change in which the change display of the plurality of symbol sequences is performed over a predetermined time. Can be displayed,
When the number of the second start information stored in the second start information storage means is the second upper limit value including at least the second start information related to the change, the plurality of symbol sequences While the variation display can be displayed a shortened variation that is performed over a time shorter than the predetermined time,
When the gaming state is controlled to the special gaming state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the plurality of symbol sequences can be displayed in a variable manner in a certain time regardless of the number of the second start information stored in the second start information storage means.

  According to the above technical idea, when the game ball is received in the first receiving port (second starting port 604), the first starting information is extracted. More specifically, when a game ball is received at the first receiving port, the first detection switch (second starter sensor 782) detects the reception of the game ball at the first receiving port, and the first detection switch. First start information is extracted based on the acceptance detection by. The extracted first start information is stored in the first start information storage means on condition that the number of the first start information stored in the first start information storage means is less than the first upper limit value. The On the other hand, if the first starting information stored in the first starting information storage means reaches the first upper limit value when the game ball is received at the first receiving port, the extracted first starting information is It is discarded without being stored in the first starting information storage means. When the first start information stored in the first start information storage means is the first upper limit value, instead of discarding the extracted first start information, a game ball is placed at the first receiving port. Even if accepted, the first start information may not be extracted. The first start information is information extracted when a game ball is received at the first entrance, for example, a winning determination random number used to determine whether it is a win or a loss, and a stop of a plurality of symbol sequences This corresponds to a stop symbol random number for determining a symbol combination.

  When the winning determination for the first start information is performed, the variation display of the plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the symbol display means is performed, and the result of the winning determination is suggested by the combination of the stopped symbols of the plurality of symbol sequences. The Here, the winning determination means not only determines whether it is a winning or losing, but also determines a winning type if it is a winning. In addition, the combination of stop symbols in a plurality of symbol sequences may suggest only the winning judgment result. When the winning judgment result is a win, the winning type is set in addition to the winning judgment result. May also be suggested. The symbol display means corresponds to the effect display device 115 of the present embodiment, but a liquid crystal display, a dot matrix display, a 7-segment display, a display composed of an EL panel, a plasma display, or a CRT display. Etc. are exemplified.

  If the combination of stop symbols of a plurality of symbol sequences is a combination that indicates a winning combination, a game per winning prize is executed. The winning game is a winning game in which the variable winning opening is operated in such a manner that a large number of game balls can win. Since a predetermined amount of game balls are awarded as prizes when winning in the variable prize opening, when a game per grand prize is executed, a large number of game balls as prizes can be given to the player.

  The game per grand prize is not executed in response to the combination of stop symbols in a plurality of symbol rows indicating a winning combination, but it is determined that the winning prize is determined in the determination by the winning determination means. It is executed in response to that. Similarly, a game per prize, which will be described later, is executed in response to the fact that winning per prize is determined in the determination by the winning determination means. In addition, the combination of the stop symbol of a some symbol row | line | column suggests the determination result by a winning determination means.

  By the way, there are a specific combination (a slot of a specific symbol) and a combination other than that (a slot of a non-specific symbol or a predetermined eye) as a combination of stop symbols indicating a hit. When the game is displayed in a specific combination, it is controlled to the special game state after the game per grand prize is finished, and when the game is displayed in a combination other than the specific combination (non-specific symbols), the game per grand prize After the game is over, it can be controlled to the normal gaming state. The specific combination is exemplified by an odd-numbered pattern or a double-colored color (for example, red) that gives an image of probability variation. In addition, combinations other than a specific combination include an even-numbered design of a double-eyed eye, a non-deterministic normal hit color (for example, blue) or a combination of symbols in which a plurality of design rows are different from each other (a combination that is not a double-eye), etc. Illustrated. This non-sloppy combination reminds players of a losing look, but if you do not want to suggest that you are a player, such a combination may be considered a winning combination. .

  Here, the special game state is a game state with a relatively high probability of being determined to be a winning by the winning determination means, and is generally referred to as a probability variation game state. In the above technical idea, the time-shortening function that promotes the reception of the game ball into the first receiving port is also activated at the same time when in this probability-changing gaming state. The normal gaming state is a gaming state that has a relatively low probability of being determined to be winning by the winning determination means. The probability of being determined to be a winning by the winning determination means in the special gaming state is preferably at least twice as high as the probability of being determined to be a winning by the winning determination means in the normal gaming state. It is set between -10 times. Note that “the game is controlled to the special game state after the game per prize is finished” means that if the game state before the game per prize is executed is the normal game state, the game is changed to the special game state with the game per prize as a trigger. On the other hand, if the game state before the game per prize is executed is the special game state, the special game state is continued even after the game per prize is executed. In addition, “the game can be controlled to the normal game state after the game per prize is finished” means that the game is controlled to the normal game state immediately after the game per prize is finished, or the short-time game after the game per prize is finished. This is a case where the state is controlled to the normal gaming state after the short gaming state has ended.

  When the stop symbol is a combination indicating a winning combination, the special game state is always controlled when the combination is a specific combination. On the other hand, even if the stop symbol is a combination indicating a winning combination, if the combination is a combination other than the specific combination, it can be controlled to the normal gaming state. However, if the stop symbol is a combination indicating a winning combination and the combination is a combination other than a specific combination, it is not always necessary to control to the normal gaming state after the winning game is completed, You may control to a special game state after it complete | finishes. For example, while suggesting that the combination of stop symbols can be controlled to the normal gaming state, it may be notified that the game is controlled to the special gaming state when the game per prize is being executed. At this time, the player thinks that the player has been promoted from being controlled to the normal gaming state to being controlled to the special gaming state, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game per grand prize that tends to be boring.

  Further, in this gaming machine, the first receiving port has a movable member, and when it is controlled to a special gaming state, it moves to promote the acceptance of the game ball into the first receiving port, When controlled to the normal gaming state, the reception of the game ball to the first receiving port is not promoted, and it becomes relatively difficult to receive the game ball to the first receiving port. However, even if the game is not controlled in the special game state, it is relatively easy to win a game ball at the first receiving port in a predetermined case such as a predetermined period after the game is won per grand prize. In some cases, the movable member may move so as to be (in such a case, it is generally called a short-time gaming state). As this movable member, a so-called “electric tulip” is generally adopted, but the movable member is not limited to this.

  Further, the gaming machine is provided with a second receiving port (first starting port 602) above the first receiving port. The second receiving port does not have a movable member unlike the first receiving port. In other words, the ease of accepting the game ball is constant regardless of the game state in the second entrance without changing the ease of accepting the game ball unlike the first entrance. Here, comparing the ease of accepting the game ball into the first entrance and the ease of accepting the game ball into the second entrance, when the game state is controlled to the special game state, the game ball to the first entrance Therefore, the first receiving port is relatively easier to receive game balls. In addition, when the normal gaming state in which the time saving function is not activated is controlled, the second receiving port is relatively easier to receive the game ball.

  Further, when the game ball is received at the second receiving port, second start information is extracted. More specifically, when a game ball is received at the second reception port, the reception of the game ball at the second reception port is detected by the second detection switch (first start port sensor 780), and the second detection switch The second start information is extracted based on the acceptance detection by. The extracted second start information is stored in the second start information storage means on condition that the number of the second start information stored in the second start information storage means is less than the second upper limit value. The The second upper limit value is generally the same as the first upper limit value, but is not limited thereto.

  Further, even when a game ball is received at the second receiving port, if the second start information stored in the second start information storage means reaches the second upper limit value, the extracted second start information Is discarded without being stored in the second starting information storage means. In the same way as when the game ball is received at the first receiving port, the second start information extracted when the second start information stored in the second start information storage means is the second upper limit value. Instead of discarding the second starting information, the second starting information may not be extracted even if a game ball is received at the second receiving port. The second start information is information extracted when a game ball is received at the second entrance, for example, a winning determination random number used for determining whether it is a win or a loss, and a stop of a plurality of symbol sequences This corresponds to a stop symbol random number for determining a symbol combination.

  When the winning determination for the second start information is performed, the variation display of the plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the symbol display means is performed, and the result of the winning determination is suggested by the combination of the stopped symbols of the plurality of symbol sequences. The Note that the winning determination means not only determines whether it is a winning or losing, but also determines the winning type if it is a winning. In addition, the combination of stop symbols in a plurality of symbol sequences may suggest only the winning judgment result. When the winning judgment result is a win, the winning type is set in addition to the winning judgment result. May also be suggested.

  By the way, when the first start information is stored by the first start information storage means and the second start information is stored by the second start information storage means, the first start information is prior to the second start information. Regardless of whether or not it is stored, the winning determination means always determines a winning for the first start information. That is, the winning determination for the first start information is performed in preference to the winning determination for the second start information. However, when performing the winning determination for the first starting information, the winning determination is performed in the order stored in the first starting information storage means. Also, when performing the winning determination for the second starting information, the winning determination is performed in the order stored in the second starting information storage means.

  When the gaming state is controlled to the special gaming state, when the winning determination result for the first start information or the winning determination result for the second start information is displayed, the following control is performed.

  First, when the first start information is stored, as described above, even if the second start information is stored, the winning determination for the first start information is performed with priority. When a winning determination is made for the first start information, if the winning determination result is a win, the stop symbol is displayed in a combination indicating a win, and whether or not the combination of the stop symbol is a specific combination Regardless, the game per grand prize is executed. Then, after the game for winning the grand prize is completed, the game is controlled to the special game state or the normal game state (the game state may be controlled to the normal game state via the short-time game state).

  More specifically, when the stop symbol indicating the winning determination result for the first start information is displayed in a combination indicating a winning combination, if the combination is a specific combination, If the combination is controlled to a special gaming state and the combination is a combination other than a specific combination, the game is controlled to the normal gaming state after the game per grand prize is finished (the normal gaming state is controlled via the short-time gaming state). In some cases).

  Next, when the first start information is not stored and only the second start information is stored, the winning determination for the second start information is performed. When the winning determination is made for the second start information, if the winning determination result is a win, the winning game is executed only when the stop symbol is a specific combination. Then, after the game per the grand prize is finished, the game is controlled to the special game state. Even if the winning determination result is a win, if the stop symbol is a combination (predetermined) other than a specific combination, a game per prize is executed. Then, after the game per prize is completed, the game state is controlled to the normal game state (the game state may be controlled to the normal game state via the short-time game state). Here, since the game per small prize is not a game for the purpose of giving a large amount of game balls to the player as a prize, the determination result by the success / failure determination means is a hit (with the operation of the condition device). Nevertheless, the variable winning opening only operates to the extent that one or two game balls are allowed to be accepted (one game ball may not win). In addition, when a game per prize is executed, the variable prize opening is operated in an instant, so that the player often cannot grasp that the variable prize opening has been activated.

  In addition, when the winning determination result for the second start information is lost, the variation display mode of the plurality of symbol sequences is controlled to the special gaming state and the normal gaming state. It is different.

  Specifically, when the game state control means controls the normal game state, the variation times of the plurality of symbol sequences differ depending on the number of second start information stored in the second start information storage means. ing. For example, the number of second start information stored in the second start information storage means is only the second start information related to the change (that is, the second start information stored in the second start information storage means immediately after the start of the change). If the number of pieces of starting information is zero), a variation display of a plurality of symbol sequences (corresponding to a normal variation of variation number 01) is performed over a predetermined time. Further, when the number of the second start information stored in the second start information storage means is the second upper limit value including the second start information related to the change (that is, the second start information immediately after the start of the change). In the case where the number of the second starting information stored in the information storage means is a number obtained by subtracting 1 from the second upper limit value), a plurality of symbol strings are displayed in a variable manner over a time shorter than the predetermined time (this The variation is referred to as a shortened variation and corresponds to the shortened variation 3 of the variation number 03). Note that the number of second start information stored in the second start information storage means is not only the second start information related to the change but also the second upper limit value including the second start information related to the change. If not, either normal fluctuation (variation number 01) or shortened fluctuation (variation number 03) may be performed. Further, a plurality of symbol strings may be displayed in a time shorter than the normal variation (variation number 01) and longer than the shortened variation (variation number 03). However, when a highly anticipated effect such as a so-called reach effect is performed, an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation is performed, so regardless of the number of second start information stored in the second start information storage means. The variation display of the plurality of symbol rows is performed over a relatively long time.

  In addition, when the game state control means controls the special game state, the time during which a plurality of symbol sequences are displayed is variable as long as the high expectation effect such as a so-called reach effect is not performed. Regardless of the number of second start information stored in the means, a plurality of symbol sequences are always displayed in a variable manner over a certain period of time, and stop symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a loss. However, when a highly anticipated effect such as a so-called reach effect is performed, an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation is performed, so that the variable display of a plurality of symbol sequences is performed over a relatively long time.

  Thus, when the winning determination result for the first start information is a win, the stop symbol is displayed in a combination indicating a win. Then, regardless of whether or not the combination of the stop symbols is a specific combination, the game per grand prize is executed. If the combination of stop symbols is a specific combination, the game state after the game per prize is executed is controlled to the special game state, and the combination of stop symbols is a combination other than the specific combination As described above, the gaming state after the game per grand prize is executed is controlled to the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the winning determination result for the second start information is a win, the winning game is executed only when the combination of stop symbols indicating a win is a specific combination, and the stop symbol indicating a win. If the combination is a combination other than a specific combination (predetermined), a game per prize is executed. In addition, when the combination of stop symbols is a specific combination, the game state after the game per grand prize is executed is controlled to the special game state, but the combination of stop symbols is a combination other than the specific combination The game state after the game per prize is executed is controlled to the normal game state or the short-time game state. That is, when the special game state is controlled, a win determination for the second start information is performed, and when winning per prize in the win determination, not only a game ball as a prize is not given to the player, The special gaming state ends (shifts to the short-time gaming state). In this normal gaming state, the probability that the winning determination means is determined to be a win is relatively lower than the probability that the winning determination means is determined to be a winning in the special gaming state, so that the special gaming state is controlled. If a player wins a small prize when he is, the player's disappointment will be very large.

  Therefore, according to the above technical idea, when the game state is controlled to be in the special game state, the first receiving port is more likely to receive the game ball than the second receiving port. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the special gaming state is terminated without giving a game ball as an award to the player, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, when the winning determination result for the second start information is displayed on the display means when the normal gaming state is controlled, the winning determination result is lost and a high expectation effect such as reach is achieved. As long as is not performed, the time during which the plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed differs depending on the number of second start information stored in the second start information storage means. That is, when the winning determination result for the second start information is displayed on the display means, the second start information stored in the second start information storage means is only the second start information related to the change. The normal variation (variation number 01) in which a plurality of symbol sequences are displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined time is performed, and the second start information stored in the second start information storage means is used as the second start information related to the change. If the second upper limit value is included, a shortening variation (variation number 03) shorter than the predetermined time is performed. This is because, when controlled to the normal gaming state, it becomes more difficult to receive the game ball into the first receiving port than to receive the game ball into the second receiving port. By doing so, even if the second receiving port is relatively easier to receive game balls than the first receiving port, the extracted first starting information is stored in the first starting information storage means. It is suppressed that it is discarded without being. In addition, even if a large number of game balls are received at the second receiving port, it is possible to suppress the player from being given stress due to the fact that the winning determination is not easily performed.

  Also, when the winning determination result for the second start information is displayed on the display means when controlled to the special gaming state, the winning determination result is lost and a high expectation effect such as reach is achieved. As long as is not performed, the variable display of a plurality of symbol sequences is performed in a fixed time regardless of the number of second start information stored in the second start information storage means. This is because when the special game state is controlled, the reception of the game ball into the first reception port is promoted so that the first reception port can receive the game ball more easily than the second reception port, This is because even if the game ball is received at the first receiving port, the winning determination for the first start information is performed with priority over the second start information. That is, the second start information stored in the second start information storage unit is almost in a state larger than the first start information stored in the first start information storage unit. Therefore, when the game state is controlled to the special gaming state, the display of the winning determination result as the loss of the second start information is related to the number of the second start information stored in the second start information storage means. It is possible to reduce the amount of data stored in the ROM by setting the variable display time of a plurality of symbol sequences to a certain time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in control load. It should be noted that the fluctuation display of a certain time by a plurality of symbol sequences corresponds to the fluctuation number 7D described in the embodiment “During open extension / normal fluctuation”, and the fluctuation time at this time is 6000 ms.

  In addition, when the gaming machine of the above technical idea is controlled to the normal gaming state, if the combination by the stop symbol is a specific combination, a game per prize is always performed and a special game is given after the game per prize is finished. Since the game state is controlled, once a game per grand prize is performed, another game per grand prize is likely to be executed. That is, when controlled to the special game state, the game per prize is not executed as long as the winning determination for the first start information is performed, so the first start information stored in the first start information storage means As long as the memory is not interrupted, another game per grand prize is executed. As a result, when the player wins the grand prize while being controlled in the normal gaming state, the game always enters the special gaming state, and at least two games per grand prize are executed before being controlled again in the normal gaming state. Therefore, the player's willingness to play is stimulated, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. Moreover, when the game per prize is executed twice, the special game state is not ended, but as long as the combination of stop symbols is displayed in a specific combination, the game per prize is executed at a relatively early stage. Become. In other words, as in the conventional so-called third type gaming machine, the winning game is not two or three times one set, as long as the special gaming state continues while at least two winning games are executed. There is a possibility that a game per the above grand prize will be executed. In this way, once a game per grand prize is executed, a large amount of game balls can be obtained as a prize ball. Therefore, even if the special game state is immediately ended, the player is immediately terminated. Discouragement can be alleviated and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[Technology 2]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2 is
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1,
The winning determination means includes
When the result of the winning determination for the first start information is a win, the special game is controlled by the special prize state controlled by the special game state using the game per prize and the special game triggered by the game per prize. While further determining whether the status is usually per winning grand prize,
When the result of the determination of winning for the second start information is a win, it is a win for either the special grand prize or the small prize that can be controlled in the normal gaming state with the game per the prize It is a gaming machine characterized by further determining whether or not.

  According to the above technical idea, when the winning determination result for the first start information or the second start information is a win, the win determining means further determines the win type. Here, the hit type includes a special big prize (special big prize), a normal big prize (long open normal big hit), and a small prize (short open normal big hit).

  When the winning type is a special grand prize jackpot, the game is controlled to a special game state triggered by a game per grand prize (long open jackpot game). When the winning type is a normal grand prize, the special game state can be ended with the game per grand prize. More specifically, when it is controlled in the normal gaming state, if it is normally won per grand prize, it will be controlled in the short-time gaming state triggered by the game per grand prize, but when it is controlled in the special gaming state Normally, when winning per grand prize, the special gaming state ends with the game per grand prize as a trigger, and the state shifts to the short-time gaming state. In addition, when the winning type is a prize big prize, it can be controlled to a normal gaming state with a game per prize as a trigger. More specifically, when the player is elected per prize when being controlled in the normal gaming state, the game is controlled to the normal gaming state (that is, the normal gaming state is continued) on the basis of the game per prize. If the prize is won per prize while being controlled in the special game state, the game can be controlled in the normal game state after the game per prize is completed. This “can be controlled to the normal gaming state after the game per prize is finished” means that the game is controlled to the normal gaming state immediately after the game per prize is finished, or after the game per prize is finished. This is a case where the short-time gaming state is controlled and the normal gaming state is controlled after the short-time gaming state ends.

[Technology 3]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3 is
In the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2,
When it is determined by the winning determination means that the prize is won per prize,
The symbol display control means includes:
An aspect of the gaming machine is characterized in that an aspect very similar to an aspect displayed when it is determined that the winning determination result by the winning determination means is lost is displayed on the symbol display means. is there.

  According to the above technical idea, even if a prize is won per prize, the symbol display means (the effect display device 115) is a mode that is very similar to the mode displayed when it is determined that the result of the winning determination is lost Is displayed. The “similar aspect” means an aspect similar to an aspect that suggests a loss to the extent that a player who has seen the aspect displayed on the symbol display means can recognize that it is a loss at first glance. Thus, even if the player wins per prize when controlled in the normal gaming state, the player is more likely to continue the game without recognizing that he has won per prize. In other words, when the player is controlled in the normal gaming state, the player recognizes that the winning type is only per winning prize, and thus plays the game. If you win, you will always be aware that you will be offered at least two games per Grand Prize, and you will be able to suppress the decline in interest.

[Technology 4]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4 is
In the gaming machine described in technical idea 3,
The symbol display control means includes:
When it is determined that the winning prize is won by the winning determination means, the combination of the stopped symbols is controlled so that the plurality of symbol rows are all displayed in the same symbol,
When it is determined by the winning determination means that the prize is won per prize, the combination of the stopped symbols is displayed such that at least one symbol of the plurality of symbol strings is different from other symbols. It is a gaming machine characterized by being controlled.

  According to the above technical idea, when winning per winning a prize, all the stopping symbols by a plurality of symbol sequences are displayed with the same symbol, while when winning per small prize, at least one of the plurality of symbol sequences is displayed. The symbol is displayed in a symbol different from other symbols. For example, when a plurality of symbol sequences are composed of three symbol sequences of a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, and when the symbol sequence being changed is stopped, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are stopped in this order. When the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol, a so-called reach state is established. Then, it is conceivable that only the middle symbol is displayed in a varying manner for a predetermined time, and then stopped at a symbol different from the left symbol and the right symbol. At this time, the player recognizes that he has lost. Since the probability of winning the winning determination means is generally set to be low, the winning type is a win that won't get a prize ball or shift to a special gaming state despite winning. If it recognizes, a player's discouragement will become large. Therefore, as in the above technical idea, even if a prize is won per prize, by causing the player to recognize that it is a loss, the possibility of disappointing the player is reduced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[Technology 5]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 5 is
A symbol display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbol sequences when the variation start condition is satisfied;
A first entrance that can accept a game ball flowing down the game area;
First starting information extracting means capable of extracting first starting information based on the reception of the game ball at the first receiving port;
First starting information storage means for storing the first starting information extracted by the first starting information extracting means up to a first upper limit;
A winning determination means for determining a winning for the first starting information stored by the first starting information storage means one by one in the stored order when the variation condition is satisfied;
The symbol display control means for controlling the display result of the winning determination by the combination of stop symbols when the plurality of symbol strings are stopped by changing the plurality of symbol strings;
When the stop symbol is a combination that indicates a winning combination, a variable winning opening that allows the winning of a game ball; and
A prize ball granting means for granting a player a predetermined amount of prize balls in accordance with at least the winning of a game ball to the variable prize opening;
When the stop symbol is displayed in a combination indicating winning, the winning per game that can facilitate the winning of the game ball to the variable winning opening in order to give a large amount of game balls to the player as a prize. Game execution means;
When a specific combination is displayed among the combinations indicating winning, the special game state with a relatively high probability of being determined as winning by the winning determination means is controlled and displayed in a combination other than the specific combination. A gaming state control means capable of controlling to a normal gaming state with a relatively low probability of being determined to be a hit by the winning determination means,
A gaming machine comprising:
A second receiving port disposed above the first receiving port and capable of receiving a game ball flowing down the gaming area;
Second starting information extracting means capable of extracting second starting information based on the reception of the game ball at the second receiving port;
Second starting information storage means for storing the second starting information extracted by the second starting information extracting means up to a second upper limit;
With
When the first receiving port is controlled to the special gaming state, the receiving of the game ball relative to the second receiving port can be facilitated by facilitating the receiving of the game ball to the first receiving port. And a movable member that makes it easier to receive a game ball than the second receiving port when controlled to the normal gaming state,
The winning determination means includes
While determining whether the second start information is successful when the variation start condition is satisfied,
As long as the first start information is stored, whether or not the first start information is stored is always determined regardless of whether the first start information is stored before the second start information. Is,
When the winning determination result for the first start information is winning, the winning game is executed regardless of whether or not the combination indicating the winning is displayed in the specific combination,
When the determination result of winning about the second start information is a win,
Even if the stop symbol is a combination indicating a winning combination, when the combination indicating the winning combination is a combination other than the specific combination, the winning determination result by the winning determining means is a winning combination. A game per prize where the variable prize opening is operated in a manner in which a game ball can barely win can be executed and the game can be controlled to the normal game state after the game per prize ends.
When the combination indicating the winning is the specific combination, the game per prize is executed and the special gaming state is controlled after the game per prize ends.
When the winning determination result for the first start information is lost and the winning determination result indicating the lost is displayed on the display means,
When the gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state,
While the variable display of the plurality of symbol sequences is performed in a fixed time regardless of the number of the first start information stored in the first start information storage means,
When the gaming state is controlled to the special gaming state,
When the number of the first start information stored in the first start information storage means is only the first start information related to the change, the change display of the plurality of symbol rows is performed over a first predetermined time. 1 normal variation can be displayed,
When the number of the first start information stored in the first start information storage means is the first upper limit value including at least the first start information related to the change, the plurality of symbol sequences A first shortening variation in which the variation display is performed over a time shorter than the first predetermined time may be displayed;
When the determination result of winning about the second start information is lost and the determination result of winning indicating the loss is displayed on the display means,
When the gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state,
When the number of the second start information stored in the second start information storage means is only the second start information related to the change, the change display of the plurality of symbol rows is performed over a second predetermined time. 2 Normal variation can be displayed,
When the number of the second start information stored in the second start information storage means is the second upper limit value including at least the second start information related to the change, the plurality of symbol sequences While the second shortened variation in which the variation display is performed for a time shorter than the second predetermined time may be displayed,
When the gaming state is controlled to the special gaming state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the plurality of symbol sequences can be displayed in a variable manner in a certain time regardless of the number of the second start information stored in the second start information storage means.

  According to the above technical idea, when the game ball is received in the first receiving port (second starting port 604), the first starting information is extracted. More specifically, when a game ball is received at the first receiving port, the first detection switch (second starter sensor 782) detects the reception of the game ball at the first receiving port, and the first detection switch. First start information is extracted based on the acceptance detection by. The extracted first start information is stored in the first start information storage means on condition that the number of the first start information stored in the first start information storage means is less than the first upper limit value. The On the other hand, if the first starting information stored in the first starting information storage means reaches the first upper limit value when the game ball is received at the first receiving port, the extracted first starting information is It is discarded without being stored in the first starting information storage means. When the first start information stored in the first start information storage means is the first upper limit value, instead of discarding the extracted first start information, a game ball is placed at the first receiving port. Even if accepted, the first start information may not be extracted. The first start information is information extracted when a game ball is received at the first entrance, for example, a winning determination random number used to determine whether it is a win or a loss, and a stop of a plurality of symbol sequences This corresponds to a stop symbol random number for determining a symbol combination.

  When the winning determination for the first start information is performed, the variation display of the plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the symbol display means is performed, and the result of the winning determination is suggested by the combination of the stopped symbols of the plurality of symbol sequences. The Here, the winning determination means not only determines whether it is a winning or losing, but also determines a winning type if it is a winning. In addition, the combination of stop symbols in a plurality of symbol sequences may suggest only the winning judgment result. When the winning judgment result is a win, the winning type is set in addition to the winning judgment result. May also be suggested. Examples of the symbol display means include a liquid crystal display, a dot matrix display, a 7-segment display, a display composed of an EL panel, a plasma display or a CRT display.

  If the combination of stop symbols of a plurality of symbol sequences is a combination that indicates a winning combination, a game per winning prize is executed. The winning game is a winning game in which the variable winning opening is operated in such a manner that a large number of game balls can win. Since a predetermined amount of game balls are awarded as prizes when winning in the variable prize opening, when a game per grand prize is executed, a large number of game balls as prizes can be given to the player.

  The game per grand prize is not executed in response to the combination of stop symbols in a plurality of symbol rows indicating a winning combination, but it is determined that the winning prize is determined in the determination by the winning determination means. It is executed in response to that. Similarly, a game per prize, which will be described later, is executed in response to the fact that winning per prize is determined in the determination by the winning determination means. In addition, the combination of the stop symbol of a some symbol row | line | column suggests the determination result by a winning determination means.

  By the way, there are a specific combination (a slot of a specific symbol) and a combination other than that (a slot of a non-specific symbol or a predetermined eye) as a combination of stop symbols indicating a hit. When the game is displayed in a specific combination, it is controlled to the special game state after the game per grand prize is finished, and when the game is displayed in a combination other than the specific combination (non-specific symbols), the game per grand prize After the game is over, it can be controlled to the normal gaming state. The specific combination is exemplified by an odd-numbered pattern or a double-colored color (for example, red) that gives an image of probability variation. In addition, combinations other than a specific combination include an even-numbered design of a double-eyed eye, a non-deterministic normal hit color (for example, blue) or a combination of symbols in which a plurality of design rows are different from each other (a combination that is not a double-eye), etc. Illustrated. This non-sloppy combination reminds players of a losing look, but if you do not want to suggest that you are a player, such a combination may be considered a winning combination. .

  Here, the special game state is a game state with a relatively high probability of being determined to be a winning by the winning determination means, and is generally referred to as a probability variation game state. In the above technical idea, the time-shortening function that promotes the reception of the game ball into the first receiving port is also activated at the same time when in this probability-changing gaming state. The normal gaming state is a gaming state that has a relatively low probability of being determined to be winning by the winning determination means. The probability of being determined to be a winning by the winning determination means in the special gaming state is preferably at least twice as high as the probability of being determined to be a winning by the winning determination means in the normal gaming state. It is set between -10 times. Note that “the game is controlled to the special game state after the game per prize is finished” means that if the game state before the game per prize is executed is the normal game state, the game is changed to the special game state with the game per prize as a trigger. On the other hand, if the game state before the game per prize is executed is the special game state, the special game state is continued even after the game per prize is executed. In addition, “the game can be controlled to the normal game state after the game per prize is finished” means that the game is controlled to the normal game state immediately after the game per prize is finished, or the short-time game after the game per prize is finished. This is a case where the state is controlled to the normal gaming state after the short gaming state has ended.

  When the stop symbol is a combination indicating a winning combination, the special game state is always controlled when the combination is a specific combination. On the other hand, even if the stop symbol is a combination indicating a winning combination, if the combination is a combination other than the specific combination, it can be controlled to the normal gaming state. However, if the stop symbol is a combination indicating a winning combination and the combination is a combination other than a specific combination, it is not always necessary to control to the normal gaming state after the winning game is completed, You may control to a special game state after it complete | finishes. For example, while suggesting that the combination of stop symbols can be controlled to the normal gaming state, it may be notified that the game is controlled to the special gaming state when the game per prize is being executed. At this time, the player thinks that the player has been promoted from being controlled to the normal gaming state to being controlled to the special gaming state, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game per grand prize that tends to be boring.

  Further, in this gaming machine, the first receiving port has a movable member, and when it is controlled to a special gaming state, it moves to promote the acceptance of the game ball into the first receiving port, When controlled to the normal gaming state, the reception of the game ball to the first receiving port is not promoted, and it becomes relatively difficult to receive the game ball to the first receiving port. However, even if the game is not controlled in the special game state, it is relatively easy to win a game ball at the first receiving port in a predetermined case such as a predetermined period after the game is won per grand prize. In some cases, the movable member may move so as to be (in such a case, it is generally called a short-time gaming state). As this movable member, a so-called “electric tulip” is generally adopted, but the movable member is not limited to this.

  Further, the gaming machine is provided with a second receiving port (first starting port 602) above the first receiving port. The second receiving port does not have a movable member unlike the first receiving port. In other words, the ease of accepting the game ball is constant regardless of the game state in the second entrance without changing the ease of accepting the game ball unlike the first entrance. Here, comparing the ease of accepting the game ball into the first entrance and the ease of accepting the game ball into the second entrance, when the game state is controlled to the special game state, the game ball to the first entrance Therefore, the first receiving port is relatively easier to receive game balls. In addition, when the normal gaming state in which the time saving function is not activated is controlled, the second receiving port is relatively easier to receive the game ball.

  Further, when the game ball is received at the second receiving port, second start information is extracted. More specifically, when a game ball is received at the second reception port, the reception of the game ball at the second reception port is detected by the second detection switch (first start port sensor), and the second detection switch Second start information is extracted based on acceptance detection. The extracted second start information is stored in the second start information storage means on condition that the number of the second start information stored in the second start information storage means is less than the second upper limit value. The The second upper limit value is generally the same as the first upper limit value, but is not limited thereto.

  Further, even when a game ball is received at the second receiving port, if the second start information stored in the second start information storage means reaches the second upper limit value, the extracted second start information Is discarded without being stored in the second starting information storage means. In the same way as when the game ball is received at the first receiving port, the second start information extracted when the second start information stored in the second start information storage means is the second upper limit value. Instead of discarding the second starting information, the second starting information may not be extracted even if a game ball is received at the second receiving port. The second start information is information extracted when a game ball is received at the second entrance, for example, a winning determination random number used for determining whether it is a win or a loss, and a stop of a plurality of symbol sequences This corresponds to a stop symbol random number for determining a symbol combination.

  When the winning determination for the second start information is performed, the variation display of the plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the symbol display means is performed, and the result of the winning determination is suggested by the combination of the stopped symbols of the plurality of symbol sequences. The Note that the winning determination means not only determines whether it is a winning or losing, but also determines the winning type if it is a winning. In addition, the combination of stop symbols in a plurality of symbol sequences may suggest only the winning judgment result. When the winning judgment result is a win, the winning type is set in addition to the winning judgment result. May also be suggested.

  By the way, when the first start information is stored by the first start information storage means and the second start information is stored by the second start information storage means, the first start information is prior to the second start information. Regardless of whether or not it is stored, the winning determination means always determines a winning for the first start information. That is, the winning determination for the first start information is performed in preference to the winning determination for the second start information. However, when performing the winning determination for the first starting information, the winning determination is performed in the order stored in the first starting information storage means. Also, when performing the winning determination for the second starting information, the winning determination is performed in the order stored in the second starting information storage means.

  When the gaming state is controlled to the special gaming state, when the winning determination result for the first start information or the winning determination result for the second start information is displayed, the following control is performed.

  First, when the first start information is stored, as described above, even if the second start information is stored, the winning determination for the first start information is performed with priority. When a winning determination is made for the first start information, if the winning determination result is a win, the stop symbol is displayed in a combination indicating a win, and whether or not the combination of the stop symbol is a specific combination Regardless, the game per grand prize is executed. Then, after the game for winning the grand prize is completed, the game is controlled to the special game state or the normal game state (the game state may be controlled to the normal game state via the short-time game state).

  More specifically, when the stop symbol indicating the winning determination result for the first start information is displayed in a combination indicating a winning combination, if the combination is a specific combination, If the combination is controlled to a special gaming state and the combination is a combination other than a specific combination, the game is controlled to the normal gaming state after the game per grand prize is finished (the normal gaming state is controlled via the short-time gaming state). In some cases).

  Next, when the first start information is not stored and only the second start information is stored, the winning determination for the second start information is performed. When the winning determination is made for the second start information, if the winning determination result is a win, the winning game is executed only when the stop symbol is a specific combination. Then, after the game per the grand prize is finished, the game is controlled to the special game state. Even if the winning determination result is a win, if the stop symbol is a combination other than a specific combination, a game per prize is executed. Then, after the game per prize is completed, the game state is controlled to the normal game state (the game state may be controlled to the normal game state via the short-time game state). Here, since the game per small prize is not a game for the purpose of giving a large amount of game balls to the player as a prize, the determination result by the success / failure determination means is a hit (with the operation of the condition device). Nevertheless, the variable winning opening only operates to the extent that one or two game balls are allowed to be accepted (one game ball may not win). In addition, when a game per prize is executed, the variable prize opening is operated in an instant, so that the player often cannot grasp that the variable prize opening has been activated.

  In addition, when the winning determination result for the first start information or the second start information is lost, the variation display mode of the plurality of symbol sequences is controlled to the special game state and the normal game state. It is different from the case where it is.

  First, the first start information will be described. Specifically, when the game state control means controls the game state to the normal game state, the time during which a plurality of symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner is a high level such as a so-called reach effect. Unless the expected effect is performed, regardless of the number of the first start information stored in the first start information storage means, the variable symbols are always displayed in a variable manner over a certain time (12800 ms), and the stop symbol is displayed. Displayed in a combination indicating a loss. However, when a highly anticipated effect such as a so-called reach effect is performed, an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation is performed, so that the variable display of a plurality of symbol sequences is performed over a relatively long time.

  Further, when the game state control means controls the special game state, the variation times of the plurality of symbol sequences differ depending on the number of first start information stored in the first start information storage means. For example, the number of first start information stored in the first start information storage means is only the first start information related to the change (that is, the first start information stored in the first start information storage means immediately after the start of the change). If the number of starting information is zero), a variation display of a plurality of symbol sequences over a first predetermined time (12200 ms) (in the above technical idea, this variation is referred to as a first normal variation, but the variation number 01) Unlike normal fluctuation, it corresponds to fluctuation number 96). Further, when the number of the first start information stored in the first start information storage means is the first upper limit value including the first start information related to the change (that is, the first start information immediately after the start of the change). In the case where the number of first start information stored in the information storage means is a number obtained by subtracting 1 from the first upper limit value), a plurality of symbol sequences over a time (1800 ms) shorter than the first predetermined time. Is displayed (in the above technical idea, this variation is referred to as a first shortened variation and corresponds to the variation number 7E). Note that the number of first start information stored in the first start information storage means is not only the first start information related to the change but also the first upper limit value including the first start information related to the change. If not, either the first normal variation (variation number 96) or the first shortened variation (variation number 7E) may be performed. In addition, the variation display of a plurality of symbol arrays may be performed over a time shorter than the first normal variation (variation number 96) and longer than the first shortened variation (variation number 7E). However, when a highly anticipated effect such as a so-called reach effect is performed, an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation is performed, so regardless of the number of first start information stored in the first start information storage means. The variation display of the plurality of symbol rows is performed over a relatively long time.

  Next, the second start information will be described. Specifically, when the game state control means is controlled to the normal game state, it depends on the number of second start information stored in the second start information storage means. The variation times of a plurality of symbol sequences are different. For example, the number of second start information stored in the second start information storage means is only the second start information related to the change (that is, the second start information stored in the second start information storage means immediately after the start of the change). If the number of pieces of starting information is zero), a variation display of a plurality of symbol sequences over a second predetermined time (12800 ms) (this variation is referred to as a second normal variation in the above technical idea). Which corresponds to normal fluctuations). Further, when the number of the second start information stored in the second start information storage means is the second upper limit value including the second start information related to the change (that is, the second start information immediately after the start of the change). In the case where the number of second start information stored in the information storage means is a number obtained by subtracting 1 from the second upper limit value), a plurality of symbol sequences over a time (2100 ms) shorter than the second predetermined time (This variation is referred to as a second shortened variation and corresponds to the shortened variation 3 of the variation number 03). Note that the number of second start information stored in the second start information storage means is not only the second start information related to the change but also the second upper limit value including the second start information related to the change. If not, either the second normal variation (variation number 01) or the second shortened variation (variation number 03) may be performed. Further, a plurality of symbol rows may be displayed for a time shorter than the second normal variation (variation number 01) and longer than the second shortened variation (variation number 03). However, when a highly anticipated effect such as a so-called reach effect is performed, an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation is performed, so regardless of the number of second start information stored in the second start information storage means. The variation display of the plurality of symbol rows is performed over a relatively long time.

  In addition, when the game state control means controls the special game state, the time during which a plurality of symbol sequences are displayed is variable as long as the high expectation effect such as a so-called reach effect is not performed. Regardless of the number of second start information stored in the means, a plurality of symbol sequences are always displayed in a variable manner over a certain period of time, and stop symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a loss. However, when a highly anticipated effect such as a so-called reach effect is performed, an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation is performed, so that the variable display of a plurality of symbol sequences is performed over a relatively long time.

  Thus, when the winning determination result for the first start information is a win, the stop symbol is displayed in a combination indicating a win. Then, regardless of whether or not the combination of the stop symbols is a specific combination, the game per grand prize is executed. If the combination of stop symbols is a specific combination, the game state after the game per prize is executed is controlled to the special game state, and the combination of stop symbols is a combination other than the specific combination As described above, the gaming state after the game per grand prize is executed is controlled to the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the winning determination result for the second start information is a win, the winning game is executed only when the combination of stop symbols indicating a win is a specific combination, and the stop symbol indicating a win. If the combination is a combination other than a specific combination, a game per prize is executed. In addition, when the combination of stop symbols is a specific combination, the game state after the game per grand prize is executed is controlled to the special game state, but the combination of stop symbols is a combination other than the specific combination The game state after the game per prize is executed is controlled to the normal game state or the short-time game state. That is, when the special game state is controlled, a win determination for the second start information is performed, and when winning per prize in the win determination, not only a game ball as a prize is not given to the player, The special gaming state ends (shifts to the short-time gaming state). In this normal gaming state, the probability that the winning determination means is determined to be a win is relatively lower than the probability that the winning determination means is determined to be a winning in the special gaming state, so that the special gaming state is controlled. If a player wins a small prize when he is, the player's disappointment will be very large.

  Therefore, according to the above technical idea, when the game state is controlled to be in the special game state, the first receiving port is more likely to receive the game ball than the second receiving port. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the special gaming state is terminated without giving a game ball as an award to the player, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, when the winning determination result for the first starting information is displayed on the display means, if the normal gaming state is controlled, the winning determination result for the first starting information is displayed on the display means. In this case, as long as the determination result of the win is lost and a high expectation effect such as reach is not performed, a constant value is obtained regardless of the number of first start information stored in the first start information storage means. Variation display of a plurality of symbol sequences is performed over time. This is because when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, the second receiving port is easier to receive the game ball than the first receiving port, and even if the game ball is received in the first receiving port, This is because the winning determination for the first start information is performed with priority over the second start information. That is, the second start information stored in the second start information storage unit is almost in a state larger than the first start information stored in the first start information storage unit. Therefore, when being controlled in the normal gaming state, when displaying the determination result of winning as a loss for the first start information, it depends on the number of first start information stored in the first start information storage means. It is possible to reduce the amount of data stored in the ROM by setting the variable display time of a plurality of symbol sequences to a certain time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in control load. It should be noted that the fluctuation display of a certain time by a plurality of symbol sequences corresponds to the normal fluctuation of the fluctuation number 01 described in the embodiment, and the fluctuation time at this time is 12800 ms.

  In addition, when the winning determination result for the first start information is displayed on the display means, when the special game state is controlled, the winning determination result is lost and a high expectation effect such as reach is achieved. As long as is not performed, the time during which the plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed differs depending on the number of first start information stored in the first start information storage means. That is, when the winning determination result for the first start information is displayed on the display means, the first start information stored in the first start information storage means is only the first start information related to the change. , A first normal variation (corresponding to the variable number 96 “open extension / losing (no hold)”, which is different from the normal variation of the variation number 01) is displayed in which a plurality of symbol sequences are displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined time. At the same time, if the first start information stored in the first start information storage means is the first upper limit value including the first start information related to the change, the first shortened change (change) shorter than the predetermined time. No. 7E (corresponding to “opening extension / shortening fluctuation”) is performed. This is because, when controlled to the special gaming state, not only the reception of the game ball into the first receiving port is promoted, but also the determination of whether or not the first starting information is lost for the first starting information related to the change is made. This is because it is performed with priority over the second start information stored in the second start information storage means. Thus, since the winning determination is promoted for the second start information, the extracted second start information is the second even if the frequency of accepting game balls to the second receiving port is increased. Discarding without being stored in the starting information storage means is suppressed. In addition, even though many game balls are received at the second receiving port, it is possible to suppress the player from being given stress due to the fact that the winning determination is not easily performed.

  In addition, when the winning determination result for the second start information is displayed on the display means, if the winning determination result is lost and the control result is a normal gaming state, a high expectation effect such as reach is achieved. As long as is not performed, the time during which a plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed differs depending on the number of second start information stored in the second start information storage means. That is, when the winning determination result for the second start information is displayed on the display means, the second start information stored in the second start information storage means is only the second start information related to the change. A second normal variation (variation number 01) in which a plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed over a predetermined time is performed, and the second start information stored in the second start information storage means is a second start related to the variation. If it is the second upper limit value including information, a second shortened variation (variation number 03) shorter than the predetermined time is performed. This is because, when controlled to the normal gaming state, it becomes more difficult to receive the game ball into the first receiving port than to receive the game ball into the second receiving port. By doing so, even if the second receiving port is relatively easier to receive game balls than the first receiving port, the extracted first starting information is stored in the first starting information storage means. It is suppressed that it is discarded without being. In addition, even if a large number of game balls are received at the second receiving port, it is possible to suppress the player from being given stress due to the fact that the winning determination is not easily performed.

  In addition, when the winning determination result for the second start information is displayed on the display means, if the special game state is controlled, the winning determination result is lost and a high expectation effect such as reach is achieved. As long as is not performed, the variable display of a plurality of symbol sequences is performed in a fixed time regardless of the number of second start information stored in the second start information storage means. This is because when the special game state is controlled, the reception of the game ball into the first reception port is promoted so that the first reception port can receive the game ball more easily than the second reception port, This is because even if the game ball is received at the first receiving port, the winning determination for the first start information is performed with priority over the second start information. That is, the second start information stored in the second start information storage unit is almost in a state larger than the first start information stored in the first start information storage unit. Therefore, when the game state is controlled to the special gaming state, the display of the winning determination result as the loss of the second start information is related to the number of the second start information stored in the second start information storage means. It is possible to reduce the amount of data stored in the ROM by setting the variable display time of a plurality of symbol sequences to a certain time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in control load. It should be noted that the fluctuation display of a certain time by a plurality of symbol sequences corresponds to the fluctuation number 7D described in the embodiment “During open extension / normal fluctuation”, and the fluctuation time at this time is 6000 ms.

  In addition, when the gaming machine of the above technical idea is controlled in the normal gaming state, if the combination by the stop symbol is a specific combination, the game per prize is always performed and the special game is triggered by the game per prize. Since the game is controlled to the state, once a game per grand prize is performed, another game per grand prize is likely to be executed. That is, when controlled to the special game state, the game per prize is not executed as long as the winning determination for the first start information is performed, so the first start information stored in the first start information storage means As long as the memory is not interrupted, another game per grand prize is executed. As a result, when the player wins the grand prize while being controlled in the normal gaming state, the game always enters the special gaming state, and at least two games per grand prize are executed before being controlled again in the normal gaming state. Therefore, the player's willingness to play is stimulated, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. Moreover, when the game per prize is executed twice, the special game state is not ended, but as long as the combination of stop symbols is displayed in a specific combination, the game per prize is executed at a relatively early stage. Become. In other words, as in the conventional so-called third type gaming machine, the winning game is not two or three times one set, as long as the special gaming state continues while at least two winning games are executed. There is a possibility that a game per the above grand prize will be executed. In this way, once a game per grand prize is executed, a large amount of game balls can be obtained as a prize ball. Therefore, even if the special game state is immediately ended, the player is immediately terminated. Discouragement can be alleviated and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[Technology 6]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 6 is
In the gaming machine described in technical idea 5,
The winning determination means includes
When the result of the winning determination for the first start information is a win, the special game is controlled by the special prize state controlled by the special game state using the game per prize and the special game triggered by the game per prize. While further determining whether the status is usually per winning grand prize,
When the result of the winning determination for the second start information is a win, it is either a win for the special grand prize or a small prize that can be controlled to the normal gaming state with the game per the prize It is a gaming machine characterized by further determining whether or not.

  According to the above technical idea, when the winning determination result for the first start information or the second start information is a win, the win determining means further determines the win type. Here, the hit type includes a special big prize (special big prize), a normal big prize (long open normal big hit), and a small prize (short open normal big hit).

  When the winning type is a special grand prize jackpot, the game is controlled to a special game state triggered by a game per grand prize (long open jackpot game). When the winning type is a normal grand prize, the special game state can be ended with the game per grand prize. More specifically, when it is controlled in the normal gaming state, if it is normally won per grand prize, it will be controlled in the short-time gaming state triggered by the game per grand prize, but when it is controlled in the special gaming state Normally, when winning per grand prize, the special gaming state ends with the game per grand prize as a trigger, and the state shifts to the short-time gaming state. In addition, when the winning type is a prize big prize, it can be controlled to a normal gaming state with a game per prize as a trigger. More specifically, when the player is elected per prize when being controlled in the normal gaming state, the game is controlled to the normal gaming state (that is, the normal gaming state is continued) on the basis of the game per prize. If the prize is won per prize while being controlled in the special game state, the game can be controlled in the normal game state after the game per prize is completed. This “can be controlled to the normal gaming state after the game per prize is finished” means that the game is controlled to the normal gaming state immediately after the game per prize is finished, or after the game per prize is finished. This is a case where the short-time gaming state is controlled and the normal gaming state is controlled after the short-time gaming state ends.

[Technology 7]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 7 is
In the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 6,
When it is determined by the winning determination means that the prize is won per prize,
The symbol display control means includes:
An aspect of the gaming machine is characterized in that an aspect very similar to an aspect displayed when it is determined that the winning determination result by the winning determination means is lost is displayed on the symbol display means. is there.

  According to the above technical idea, even if a prize is won per prize, the symbol display means (the effect display device 115) is a mode that is very similar to the mode displayed when it is determined that the result of the winning determination is lost Is displayed. The “similar aspect” means an aspect similar to an aspect that suggests a loss to the extent that a player who has seen the aspect displayed on the symbol display means can recognize that it is a loss at first glance. Thus, even if the player wins per prize when controlled in the normal gaming state, the player is more likely to continue the game without recognizing that he has won per prize. In other words, when the player is controlled in the normal gaming state, the player recognizes that the winning type is only per winning prize, and thus plays the game. If you win, you will always be aware that you will be offered at least two games per Grand Prize, and you will be able to suppress the decline in interest.

[Technology 8]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 8 is
In the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 7,
The symbol display control means includes:
When it is determined that the winning prize is won by the winning determination means, the combination of the stopped symbols is controlled so that the plurality of symbol strings are all displayed in the same symbol,
When it is determined by the winning determination means that the prize is won per prize, the combination of the stopped symbols is displayed such that at least one symbol of the plurality of symbol strings is different from other symbols. It is a gaming machine characterized by control.

  According to the above technical idea, when winning per winning a prize, all the stopping symbols by a plurality of symbol sequences are displayed with the same symbol, while when winning per small prize, at least one of the plurality of symbol sequences is displayed. The symbol is displayed in a symbol different from other symbols. For example, when a plurality of symbol sequences are composed of three symbol sequences of a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, and when the symbol sequence being changed is stopped, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are stopped in this order. When the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol, a so-called reach state is established. Then, it is conceivable that only the middle symbol is displayed in a varying manner for a predetermined time, and then stopped at a symbol different from the left symbol and the right symbol. At this time, the player recognizes that he has lost. Since the probability of winning the winning determination means is generally set to be low, the winning type is a win that won't get a prize ball or shift to a special gaming state despite winning. If it recognizes, a player's discouragement will become large. Therefore, as in the above technical idea, even if a prize is won per prize, by causing the player to recognize that it is a loss, the possibility of disappointing the player is reduced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[Technology 9]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 9 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of the technical thoughts 5 to 8,
A passing gate through which game balls can pass;
Passage information extracting means capable of extracting passage information based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate;
Passing information winning judgment means for judging a winning about the passing information extracted by the passing information extracting means;
A passing information winning determination result deriving means capable of deriving a winning determination result by the passing information winning determining means;
Movable control means for moving the movable member so that the game ball can be received in the first receiving port when the winning is derived by the passing information winning determination result deriving means;
Further comprising
When being controlled to the special gaming state by the gaming state control means, the frequency of winning the winning by the passing information winning determination result deriving means is higher than when being controlled to the normal gaming state. By this, the game machine is characterized in that the reception of the game ball at the first receiving port is promoted.

  According to the above technical idea, game balls can pass through the passage gate 612 at a constant frequency regardless of the game state. “A game ball can pass at a certain frequency regardless of the gaming state” means that the passing frequency is not different depending on the gaming state (however, it is biased toward the passing frequency). Is possible). When the game ball passes through the passage gate 612, passage information (normal symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 922) is extracted (acquired) by passage information extraction means (ordinary symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 922). The acquired passing information is determined to be winning by the passing information winning determining means (ordinary symbol appropriateness determining means 924). The result of this winning determination is derived by passage information winning determination result deriving means (normal symbol display control means 716 or / and normal symbol display 82). Then, when it is derived that the passing information is winning, the movable member (the pair of movable pieces 606) moves, and the game ball can be received into the first receiving port (second starting port 604). When the gaming state is the special gaming state, the winning information is derived more frequently by the passing information winning determination result deriving means than when the gaming state is the normal gaming state. Promoted. As a result, when the game state is controlled to the special game state, by increasing the frequency at which the winning information is derived by the passing information winning determination result deriving means, the game to the first entrance is more than the case of being controlled to the normal game state. The acceptance frequency of balls can be dramatically increased. In addition, since the first start information is determined to have a win determination in preference to the second start information, the win determination for the second start information may be performed when the special gaming state is being controlled. However, the situation where the special gaming state ends without obtaining a prize ball can be avoided, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. It should be noted that “when the gaming state control means is controlled to the special gaming state, the frequency of the winning determination by the passing information winning determination result deriving means is higher than when the gaming state control means is controlled to the normal gaming state. The following modes can be considered as the mode of “enhanced”. For example, the time when the winning determination result is derived by the passing information winning determination result deriving means is the same as when the special gaming state is controlled and when the normal gaming state is controlled, but it is controlled to the special gaming state. In a mode in which the probability that it is determined to be a win by the passing information winning determination means when it is being played is higher than the probability that it is determined to be a winning by the passing information winning determination means when being controlled in the normal gaming state is there. In addition, although the probability of being determined to be a win by the passing information winning determination means is the same as when being controlled to the special gaming state and when being controlled to the normal gaming state, by the passing information winning determination result deriving means An aspect in which the time for deriving the winning determination result is shortened is also conceivable. Even in such a case, as long as the game ball can pass through the passing gate, the frequency per unit time that the winning is derived by the passing information winning determination result deriving means is increased. Further, the probability of being judged by the passing information winning judgment means when being controlled to the special gaming state is judged to be winning by the passing information winning judgment means when being controlled to the normal gaming state. It is conceivable that the time when the winning determination result is derived by the passing information winning determination result deriving means is shortened.

  In addition, the term described in each said technical thought is corresponded to the following terms as described in this embodiment. The “plurality of symbol rows” described in the above technical ideas corresponds to “decorative symbol 1153 (three symbol rows)” of the present embodiment. The “symbol display means” described in the above technical ideas corresponds to the “effect display device 115” of the present embodiment. The “first receiving port” described in each technical idea corresponds to the “second starting port 604” of the present embodiment. The “first start information extraction unit” described in each technical idea corresponds to the “second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition unit 912” of the present embodiment. Further, the “first start information” described in each technical concept corresponds to the “random number for determination of success / failure” extracted (acquired) by the random number acquisition means for determination of second special symbol determination 912 described above. Sometimes referred to as “second start memory”. The “first start information storage means” described in the above technical ideas corresponds to the “random determination storage area 5131” and “second special symbol hold counter 913” of the present embodiment. More specifically, the acquired random numbers for success / failure determination are stored in the “randomness determination random number storage area 5131” in the order of acquisition. It is counted by the second special symbol hold counter 913 ”. The “winning determination means” described in the above technical ideas corresponds to the “first special symbol lottery means 900” and the “second special symbol lottery means 910” of the present embodiment. The “symbol display control means” described in the above technical ideas corresponds to the “display device control board 816” of the present embodiment. The “variable winning opening” described in each technical idea corresponds to the “opening / closing device 500” of the present embodiment. The “prize ball giving means” described in the above technical ideas corresponds to the “payout control board 720” of the present embodiment. The “hit game execution means” described in the above technical ideas corresponds to the “hit game execution means 715” of the present embodiment. The “specific combination” described in each of the technical ideas corresponds to the “specific symbol” of the present embodiment. The “combination other than the specific combination” described in the above technical ideas corresponds to the “non-specific symbol” of the present embodiment or “predetermined eye”. The “game state control means” described in the above technical ideas corresponds to the “game state control means 934” of the present embodiment. The “second receiving port” described in each technical idea corresponds to the “first start port 602” of the present embodiment. The “second starting information extraction unit” described in each technical idea corresponds to the “first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition unit 902” of the present embodiment. Further, the “second start information” described in each technical idea corresponds to the “random determination random number” extracted (acquired) by the first special symbol determination random number acquisition unit 902 described above. Sometimes referred to as “first start memory”. The “second start information storage means” described in the above technical ideas corresponds to the “random determination storage area 5131” and “first special symbol hold counter 903” of the present embodiment. More specifically, the acquired random numbers for success / failure determination are stored in the “randomness determination random number storage area 5131” in the order of acquisition. It is counted by the first special symbol hold counter 903 ". The “movable member” described in the above technical ideas corresponds to “a pair of movable pieces 606” of the present embodiment. The “game for winning a grand prize” described in the above technical ideas corresponds to the “game for winning a long open bonus” in the present embodiment. The “game per small prize” described in each technical idea corresponds to the “short open big hit game” in the present embodiment. The “first upper limit value” and the “second upper limit value” described in the above technical ideas correspond to the “second predetermined number” and the “first predetermined number” in the present embodiment, respectively. Both the “normal fluctuation” described in the technical idea 1 and the “second normal fluctuation” described in the technical idea 5 correspond to the “normal fluctuation” of the fluctuation number 01 of the present embodiment. The time is 12800 ms. Both the “shortening fluctuation” described in the technical idea 1 and the “second shortening fluctuation” described in the technical idea 5 correspond to the “shortening fluctuation 3” of the fluctuation number 03 of the present embodiment. The variation time is 2100 ms. The “first normal fluctuation” described in the technical concept 5 corresponds to the fluctuation number 96 “open extension / losing (no hold)” of the present embodiment, and the fluctuation time at this time is 12200 ms. The “first shortening variation” described in the technical idea 5 corresponds to the “open extension extending / shortening variation” of the variation number 7E of the present embodiment, and the variation time at this time is 1800 ms. The “special big prize” described in each technical idea corresponds to the “special big prize” in the present embodiment. The “normal winning a prize” described in each technical idea corresponds to the “long open normal winning a prize” in the present embodiment. The “per prize” described in the above technical ideas corresponds to the “short open normal big prize” in the present embodiment. The “pass gate” described in the above technical ideas corresponds to the “pass gate 612” of the present embodiment. The “passage information extraction means” described in the above technical ideas corresponds to the “ordinary symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 922” of the present embodiment. Further, the “passage information” described in each technical idea corresponds to the “normal symbol determination random number” extracted (acquired) by the above-described normal symbol determination random number acquisition unit 922. The “passage information winning determination means” described in the above technical ideas corresponds to the “ordinary symbol success / failure determination means 924” of the present embodiment. The “passage information winning determination result deriving unit” described in each technical idea corresponds to the “normal symbol display control unit 716” and / or the “normal symbol display unit 82” of the present embodiment. The “movable control means” described in the above technical ideas corresponds to the “movable piece opening / closing control means 928” of the present embodiment.

  In addition, although this invention is described in said preferable embodiment, this invention is not restrict | limited only to it. Various embodiments are possible without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which obstruct | occluded the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is the perspective view seen from the front of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear view of an outer frame. BB sectional view (A) in FIG. 8, CC sectional view (B) in FIG. 10 (A), DD sectional view (C) in FIG. 10 (A), E-in FIG. It is E sectional drawing (D). It is the perspective view seen from the front of a game production unit. It is a front view of a game production unit. It is a rear view of a game production unit. It is a front view of the main body frame which attached the game production unit. It is a side view of the main body frame before attaching components. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame which attached components from the front side. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached components. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back side. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of the pachinko machine which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball passage unit, a ball dispensing device, and a ball supply passage. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball passage unit, a ball dispensing device, and a ball supply passage. It is front sectional drawing of a ball path unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of the ball dispensing apparatus. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between the payout motor and the sprocket as a payout member. It is a perspective view which shows the flow of the game ball in a ball supply path. It is a top view for demonstrating the effect | action of a full tank rocking | fluctuation plate. It is a front enlarged view centering on the junction part of a main part frame and a game production unit, (A) is a figure showing the injection mode of a game ball in a ball guide passage, and (B) is a figure of a game ball in a ball guide passage. It is a figure which shows a backflow aspect. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back side. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the front side. It is a figure which shows the structure of the main drawer connector and the sub drawer connector. It is a back perspective view which shows the relationship between a locking device and a main body frame. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the latching structure to the main body frame of a locking device. It is the partial cross section cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction in the position slightly lower than the vertical direction center of a pachinko machine. It is an expanded sectional view which shows the detailed relationship between a locking device and the 1st surrounding wall and 2nd surrounding wall of a main body frame. It is the side view (A) of a locking device, and the perspective view (B) seen from the front side. The perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the locking device, the perspective view (B) of the sliding frame for the door frame and the sliding frame for the body frame that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device, (C). It is a disassembled perspective view of a locking device. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of the sliding frame for door frames, and the sliding frame for main body frames. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. It is a front view of the dish unit provided in the front of a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing the relationship between the lens cover of the door lens unit and the lens cover provided on the dish unit. It is a front view of a door frame at the time of removing the member irradiated to LED among the members which constitute a speaker cover and a decoration member. It is a front view of the dish unit provided in the front of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the plate unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back surface of the plate unit. It is a plane sectional view of a pachinko machine. It is a top sectional view of a pachinko machine, and is a figure where a main part frame opened to an outer frame, and a door frame opened to a main part frame. It is side surface sectional drawing of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game production unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the game production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game production unit from the back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the exploded view of FIG. 54 from the back surface. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected and shown in the vertical direction in the state which assembled the front structural member, game panel, and panel holder in a game production | presentation unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front structural member, game panel, panel holder, etc. which mainly comprise a game production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 57 viewed from the back. It is a front view of a center character. It is the perspective view which looked at the center actor from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from diagonally upper front, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from diagonally upper rear. It is a front view of a back unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from diagonally upward. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from back diagonally upward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every member and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every member and was seen from back diagonally upward. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles the upper left light emission decoration body in a back unit for every member, and shows from the front diagonal upper direction, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the diffused lens member in (A) from the back diagonally upward. It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower left light emission decoration body in the back unit for every member, and was seen from diagonally forward. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper right light emission decoration body in a back unit for every member, and was seen from diagonally forward, and (B) decomposed | disassembled the lower right light emission decoration body in a back unit for each member. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower right corner light emission decoration body in the back unit for every member, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the right middle movable light emission decoration body from diagonally forward. (A) is a left side view showing a state in which a pair of first surface forming members in the middle right movable light emitting decorative body is opened, and (B) is a left side view showing a state in which a pair of first surface forming members are closed. It is. FIG. 74 is a perspective view of the upper left movable light emitting decorative body as seen obliquely from the upper front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper left movable light emission decoration body from the diagonally upper front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the moving mechanism in a left upper movable light emission decoration body. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the moving body assembly in an upper left movable light emission decoration body. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower left movable light emission decoration body from the diagonally upper front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the moving mechanism in a lower left movable light emission decoration body. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the moving body assembly in a lower left movable light emission decoration body. It is a front view of a left middle upper light emitting decorative body. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a left middle upper light emission decoration body. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a left lower left light-emitting decorative body. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration, mainly showing a configuration around a main substrate. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration, mainly showing a configuration around a peripheral substrate. It is a functional block diagram which shows roughly the functional structure of a main control board and a periphery control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a hot wire failure prevention circuit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main system process which CPU mounted in the main control board of a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st and 2nd start opening winning process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern table setting process per 1st special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st special symbol loss fluctuation pattern table setting process. FIG. 96 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first special symbol loss variation pattern table setting process following FIG. 96. It is a figure which shows the 1st special symbol and normal time loss table (table T1H and T1R) which show the loss variation pattern of the 1st special symbol in a normal game state. It is a figure which shows the 1st special symbol and normal time hit table (table T1A) which shows the variation variation pattern of the 1st special symbol in a normal game state. It is a figure which shows the 1st special symbol and variation type setting table for determining the variation type regarding the variation pattern of a 1st special symbol. It is a figure which shows the 1st special symbol and specific time table (table J1) which shows the fluctuation pattern of the 1st special symbol in a specific game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern table setting process per 2nd special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd special symbol loss variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 104 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a second special symbol loss variation pattern table setting process following FIG. 103. It is a figure which shows the 2nd special symbol and normal time lose table (table T2H and T2R) which show the loss variation pattern of the 2nd special symbol in a normal game state. It is a figure which shows the 2nd special symbol and normal time hit table (table T2A) which shows the variation variation pattern of the 2nd special symbol in a normal game state. It is a figure which shows the 2nd special symbol and variation type setting table for determining the variation type regarding the variation pattern of a 2nd special symbol. It is a figure which shows the 2nd special symbol and specific time table (table J2) which shows the fluctuation pattern of the 2nd special symbol in a specific game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special electric accessory big hit control process. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on the effect display apparatus 115 in a normal game state. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on the effect display apparatus 115 in a special game state. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on the effect display apparatus 115 in a time-short game state. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the aspect in which the hold | maintenance of a 1st special symbol is accumulate | stored in a hold display area, (b) demonstrates the aspect in which the start memory of a 2nd special symbol is accumulate | stored in a hold | maintenance display area. It is a figure for doing. (A) is another figure for demonstrating the aspect in which the start memory of a 1st special symbol is accumulate | stored in a hold display area, (b) is the start memory of a 2nd special symbol being accumulated in a hold display area. It is another figure for demonstrating an aspect. It is a figure for demonstrating the aspect in which the starting memory of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol is digested in a holding | maintenance display area. It is a screen flow which shows the display mode in a production | presentation display apparatus at the time of winning a normal jackpot with a 2nd special symbol at the time of a normal game state. It is a screen flow which shows the display mode in a production | presentation display apparatus at the time of winning a normal jackpot with a 1st special symbol at the time of a specific game state.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game production | presentation unit 5 Door frame 6 Lower decoration board 6a Decoration cover board 6C Fixing protrusion 6D Fixing hole 6E Fixing screw 6F Guide board 7 Upper support metal fitting 7E Hanging piece part 8 Lower support Metal fitting 8C Mounting hole 10 Upper frame plate 10B Engagement notch 10C Insertion hole 11 Lower frame plate 11B Engagement notch 11C Insertion hole 12 Side frame plate 12a Outer wall portion 12b Thickness portion 12A Outer frame inner space 12B Installation hole 12C Installation hole 12D Mounting hole 12E Mounting hole 12F Groove portion 12G Space portion 12H Recess 13 Side frame plate 13a Outer wall portion 13b Thickness portion 13A Outer frame space 13B Mounting hole 13C Mounting hole 13D Mounting hole 13F Groove portion 13G Space portion 13H Recess 14 Connecting member 15 Connecting hole 15B Connecting screw 16 Connecting hole 16B Connecting screw 17 Mounting screw 18 Mounting screw 19 Supporting protruding piece 19A Supporting hole 20 Game area 21 Support Projection 22 Closing projection 22B Mounting screw 23 Closing projection 23B Mounting screw 24 Peripheral control board box 25 Main control board box 28 Ball slot 29 Launch guide path 30 Game effect unit installation recess 30a Front receiving slot 32 Plate part 33 Upper security Heavy groove 34 Side security groove 35 Security recess 37 Protrusion 38 Launch ball 39 Prize ball paying stopper mechanism 40 Launcher mounting portion 40a Handle connection window 41 Fastening hole 42, 43 Engagement groove 44 Rail connection member 44a Upper surface 46 Game effect unit Fixture 47 Upper shaft support bracket 48 Lower shaft support bracket 49 Shaft support side 50 Prize ball tank 51 Tank rail member 51a Sequence supply device 52 Ball passage unit 53 Ball delivery device 53a Seal 54 Substrate unit 55 Delivery control board box 56 Terminal board Box 57 Launching device 57a Hitting ball 58 Back cover 59 Ball supply Road 60 Locking device 62 Power supply board box 64 Board tray 68 Door relay board 70 Rear opening 78 Guide rail 80 LED display area 82 Normal symbol display 84 First special symbol indicator 86 Second special symbol indicator 88 First special symbol hold Display 90 Second special symbol hold indicator 92 Normal symbol hold indicator 99 Game effect control unit 100 Door frame main body 101 Game window 102 Speaker opening 103 Prize ball passing port 104 Opening 105 Cover opening 106 Lock hole 107 Slide unit installed Recess 108 Lever 110 Mounting opening 111 Engagement protrusion 112 Door frame protrusion 115 Production display device 115a Fixed piece 116 Attachment / detachment protrusion 119 Display device control board box 120 Door lens unit 121 Lens base body 122 Upper reflector 123 Cathode Tube support piece 125 Electrode support portion 127 Polar cover 128a, 128b Speaker through hole 130a, 130b Side reflector 131a, 131b Electrode support 132 Upper cold cathode tube 133 Rubber sleeve 134a, 134b Side cold cathode tube 135a, 135b Rubber sleeve 136 Inverter board 137 LED board 138a , 138b LED substrate 140 Lens cover 141 Upper lens cover part 141c Front lens part 142a, 142b Side lens cover part 142c Front lens part 143a, 143b Speaker mounting holes 144a, 144b Speaker 145a Speaker cones 146a, 146b Speaker covers 147a, 147b -Shaped covers 148a, 148b decorative member mounting areas 149a, 149b decorative member 150 red lens portion 151 cover base plate 152 LED substrate 154 speaker frame 1 5 decorative base plate 156 LED substrate 158 decorative frame 159a, 159b decorative plate 160 reinforcing sheet metal 161 upper reinforcing sheet metal 162 pivot side reinforcing sheet metal 163 open side reinforcing sheet metal 164 lower reinforcing sheet metal 165 upper bent protrusion 166 lower bent protrusion 167 Characteristic bent protrusion 172 Shaft support side short bent protrusion 173 Open side outer bent protrusion 174 Open side inner bent protrusion 175 Engagement opening 176 Hook cover 177 Prize ball passing port covering portion 178 Projection piece 179 Upper folding projection piece 180 Vertical folding projection piece 190 Glass unit 191 Unit frame 194 Stopping piece 195 Hooking projection piece 199 Crimping projection plate part 200 Engaging groove 201 Glass plate 202 Tank mounting groove 203 Rail locking groove 204 Passage unit mounting boss 205 Sphere dispensing device installation area 206 Sphere supply passage installation portion 207 Mounting hole 208 Launching device mounting boss 210 Security cover -211 Abutting recess 212 Anti-crime protrusion 213 Mounting elastic piece 214 Anti-crime protrusion 215 Anti-crime end protrusion 220 Mounting base 221 Prize ball passage opening 222 Unit mounting recess 223 Lid opening 224 Standing wall 226 Unit 227 Ball Flying guide surface 230 Slide unit 231 Slide engagement / disengagement piece 240 Frame decoration relay terminal plate 241 Relay board cover 280 Back cover support cylinder 290 First peripheral wall 290a Insertion hole 291 Second peripheral wall 292 Third peripheral wall 293 Fourth Peripheral wall 294 Open side rear wall 295 Upper rear wall 296 Pivot side rear wall 300 Dish unit 301 Unit frame 302 Top cover 302a Vertical cover 303 Front cover 304 Front decorative plate 305 Dish top opening 306 For operation button unit Recessed space portion 307 Decorative space portion 310 Space portion forming member 310a Connector 3 10b Wiring storage opening 313 First ball removal button 313a First ball removal button opening 314 Sliding support members 315a and 315b Speaker openings 316a and 316b Speaker cover 317 Handle mounting hole 318 Handle unit 318a Rotation operation member 319 Engagement cam 320 Second ball extraction button opening 322 Ball discharge port 323 Ball rental button unit opening 324 Ball rental unit 325 Fastener insertion hole 326 Operation button unit 327 Operation button 330 Lower speaker unit 331 Speaker box main body 337 Ball extraction passage front bar 338 Guide rod 341a, 341b Speaker 350 Lock mounting hole 351 Lock locking hole 352 Door hook hole 353 Lock mounting hole 354 Cylinder lock through hole 360 Dish body 361 Storage section 362 Guide passage section 364 Ball extraction path section 365 Slide valve 366 Rotation Element 67 Rotating shaft 369 Spring 375 Ball extraction valve 383 Side opening lid 388 Ball extraction opening 395 Power supply board 400 Second ball extraction link unit 401 Second ball extraction button 409 Game panel 409a Fitting hole 409b Long hole 409c Engagement step 409d Inside Rail fixing hole 409e Opening portion 409f Lower hole 410 Obstacle nail 414 First link 415 Ball removal connection passage 419 Second link 430 Dish cover body 431 Prize ball contact rod 432 Opening lid attachment window 433 Ball removal passage rear rod 434 Upper guide rod 435 Lower guide rod 436 Guide hole 462 Inner rail 463 Backflow prevention member 464 Rail security groove 465 Security projection 466 Positioning recess 467 Game production unit stop 468 Speaker cutout 469 Fastening portion 471 Out port 472 Outer rail 472a Rail surface 472b Lower end 473 Communication port 473a Foul ball taxiway 4 6 Stopping portion 477 Connection passage portion 477a Upper surface 477b Stop wall portion 478 Passage notch 482 Guide rail 489 Foul port 491 Winning space forming cover body 500 Opening / closing device 500a Grand winning port 500b Large winning port opening / closing door 504 Panel back plate 504a Screw Hole 504b Positioning hole 504c Locking claw 504d Recessed portion 504e Opening 505 Substrate holder 505a Game ball outlet 505b Bottom plate 505e Fixed boss 505f Through hole 505g Opening receiving portion 508 Lamp drive board box 510 Back unit 510G Production space 514 Back box 514a Rear wall 514b Opening portion 514c Outer tube portion 514d Fixing portion 514e Fixing hole 514f Projection 514g Panel relay terminal board fixing portion 514h First decoration control board box fixing portion 514i Second decoration control board box fixing portion 514j Liquid crystal fixing portion 528 Switch storage space 540 Panel holder 540a Fitting step (holding step)
540b Through-hole 540c Protruding pin 540d Engaging claw 540e Engaging piece 540f Boss insertion hole 540g Mounting support 540h Housing recess 540i Locking part 540j Mounting hole 540k Positioning hole 540l Thickening part 540m Positioning part 540n Opening 540o Communication hole 600 Attacker unit 600a Casing 600b Flange portion 602 First start port 604 Second start port 606 Movable piece 612 Pass gate 614 General winning port 620 Center accessory 620a Flange-shaped portion 620b Insertion portion 625 Unit relay substrate 641 Substrate cover 642 Wiring opening 643 Mounting piece 644 Wiring latching piece 645 Out ball passage 646 Fitting hole 648 Main drawer relay board 649 Sub drawer relay board 670 Winning port member 680 Front component 680a Positioning boss 680b Positioning protrusion 683 Slot Flop 685 U-shaped base 685a side 685b side 690 guide member 691 slopes 700 main substrate 702 first special symbol display control section 704 second special symbol display control means 710 main control board 711 CPU
712 ROM
713 RAM
714 Opening / closing device operation processing means 715 Big hit game execution means 715a Long open big hit game execution means 715b Short open big hit game execution means 716 Normal symbol display control means 718 Normal symbol hold display control means 720 Discharge control board 722 CPU
724 ROM
726 RAM
730 Full switch 736 Inner frame opening switch 738 Door opening switch 746 First decoration control board 748 Second decoration control board 750 Panel relay terminal board 751 Fitting protrusion 753 External terminal board 754 Switchgear relay terminal board 760 Gate sensor 762 General prize Oral sensor 768 Normal symbol / special symbol display board 774 Ordinary electric accessory solenoid 776 Opening / closing device count sensor 778 Opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 780 First starting port sensor 782 Second starting port sensor 800 Peripheral substrate 810 Peripheral control substrate 811 CPU
812 ROM
813 RAM
816 Display Device Control Board 818 Sound Source IC
819 ROM
832 CPU
834 RAM
836 ROM
838 VDP
839 Image ROM
842 Frame decoration lamp 852 Unit decoration lamp 854 Production drive part 860 Hook through opening 861 Screw stop part 862 Locking protrusion 863 Insertion hole 864 Rivet 865 Fraud prevention notch 866 Lock attachment piece 867 Lock insertion hole 868 Cylinder lock 869 Lock attachment board 870 screw 871 mounting hole 872 lock shaft 873 engagement cam 874 engagement protrusion 875 engagement protrusion 876 screw 877 insertion vertical opening 878 insertion vertical opening 879 spring locking piece 880 horizontal hole 882 first fraud prevention member 882a inclined portion 883 Moving shaft hole 884 Protrusion piece insertion hole 885 Stopper piece portion 886 Guide pin 887 Pin hole 888 Connection hole 889 Restriction protrusion 890 Second fraud prevention member 892 Connection hole 893 Connection pin 894 Spring 896 Spring locking hole 897 Contact portion 898 Screw Stop hole 900 1st special symbol lottery means 902 1st Random number obtaining means 903 for determining whether or not another symbol is determined First special symbol hold counter 904 First special symbol determination / determination means 906 First normal special symbol determination table 907 Second normal special symbol determination table 908 First positive variation special symbol determination table 909 Second Probability variation figure determination table 910 Second special symbol lottery means 912 Second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 913 Second special symbol hold counter 914 Second special symbol success / failure determination means 920 Normal symbol lottery means 922 Normal symbol success / failure random number Acquisition means 923 Normal symbol hold means 924 Normal symbol success / failure determination means 926 Normal normal figure determination table 927 Open extended normal figure determination table 928 Movable piece opening / closing control means 930 First special symbol hold display control means 932 Second special symbol hold display control means 934 Game state control means 938 Opening / closing operation control means 940 Reservation order memory 946 Command sending means 950 Command receiving means 960 Production lottery means 962 Production control means 971 Door frame sliding rod 973 Door frame hook portion 974 Rivet long hole 976 Guide protrusion 978 Play hole 979 Lifting engagement hole 980 Spring hook portion 981 Abutting elastic piece 982 Spring 983 Notch portion 984 Main body frame sliding rod 985 Upper hook member 986 Lower hook member 987 Connecting wire rod 988 Hook portion 989 Rivet long hole 991 Projection piece moving hole 993 Spring hook portion 994 Connecting hole 995 Connecting hole 996 Rivet slot 997 Lowering engagement hole 998 Play hole 999 Projection piece moving hole 1000 First special symbol corresponding symbol 1002 Second special symbol corresponding symbol 1014 Hook portion 1015 Abutting portion 1016 Abutting portion 1017 Engaging notch portion 1150 Hold display area 1151 1st special figure hold Image 1152 Second special figure reserved image 1153 Decorative design 1153a Left design row 1153b Middle design row 1153c Right design row 1404 Discharge port 1412 Passage 1413 Ball leveling member 1414 Ball presser plate 1415 Alignment gear 1417 Shaft pin 1421 Bending passage wall 1422 Ball drop passage 1422a Front / rear bending passage portion 1422b Left / right bending passage portion 1422c Vertical passage portion 1423 Notch portion 1424 Detection piece 1425 Spindle 1426 Ball break switch 1427 Actuator 1428 Stopper projection 1429 Ball clogging insertion groove 1451 Unit base body 1452 Bending passage wall 1453 Bending passage 1455 Distribution space 1456 Bearing cylinder 1457 Sprocket 1458 Rotating shaft 1459 Passage partition wall 1460 Prize ball passage 1461 Ball removal passage 1462 Discharge ball detection sensor 146 Motor housing space 1465 Discharge motor 1468 Motor shaft 1469 Guide protrusion 1472 Detachable button 1475 Unit sub-plate 1476 Relay board area 1480 Relay board 1481 Connector 1485 Board cover 1488 Button opening 1490 Connection opening 1490 Gear area 1491 Aluminum heat sink 1493 First gear 1494 Second gear 1495 Shaft 1497 Third gear 1498 Shaft 1500 Detection disk 1501 Detection notch 1502 Gear portion 1504 Sensor board 1505 Sensor 1507 Board mounting portion 1510 Gear cover 1521 Box main body 1522 Side guidance passage 1523 Side guidance receiving portion 1524 Buffer member 1525 Reverse side guide passage 1526 Partition wall 1527 Inclined side wall 1528 Switch storage space 1529 Spindle pin 1530 Shaft spring 1531 Full swing plate 15 2 Detection piece 1534 Stopper piece 1535 Front guide passage 1536 Ball exit 1537 Foul ball passage 1538 Foul ball entrance 1541 Lid 1542 Prize ball entrance 1543 Switch mounting portion 1547 Wire drawing recess 1549 Spring locking pin 1601 Chucker entrance 1602 Chucker exit 1605 Warp entrance 1606 Warp passage 1607 Stage 1607a First stage 1607b Second stage 1608 Production decoration 1609 Guiding shelf 1610 Guiding shelf 1611 Right edge guiding passage 1612 Convex strip 1641 Guiding rod 1642 Mounting hole 1643 Protrusion 1671 Body portion 1672 Flange portion 1673 Guiding rod 1647 Mounting hole 1713 First decoration control board box 1715 Second decoration control board box 1716 Slide piece 1720 Light-emitting decoration body 1721 Upper left light-emitting decoration body 1 721a First surface forming member 1721b Second surface forming member 1721c Diffusing lens member 1721d First convex line 1721e Second convex line 1722 Upper right light emitting decorative body 1722a Substrate fixing part 1722b Surface forming member 1722c Decoration auxiliary member 1722d Through part 1722e Wall-shaped side surface 1723 Lower left light emitting decorative body 1723a First surface forming member 1723b Second surface forming member 1723c Diffuse lens member 1723d First convex line 1724 Lower right light emitting decorative body 1724a Surface forming member 1724b Decoration auxiliary member 1724c Through part 1724d Notch 1724e Insertion part 1724f Wall-like side surface 1725 Right middle movable light emitting decorative body 1725a First surface forming member 1725b Second surface forming member 1725c Right middle substrate 1725d Moving mechanism 1725e Rotating shaft 1725f Motor 1725g Pinion gear 1725h Rack gear 1725i Slide member 1725j Detection piece 1725k Slide position sensor 1725l Base member 1725m Transmission pin 1725n Elongation hole 1725o Upper left movable light emitting decoration 1726a Moving body assembly 1726b Moving mechanism 1726c Opening 1726d Outer shell member 1726e Front surface forming member 1726f Diffusion Lens member 1726g Holding member 1726h Upper left substrate 1726i Base member 1726j Extension portion 1726k Rotating shaft 1726l Motor 1726m Pinion gear 1726n Rack gear 1726o Slide member 1726p Detection piece 1726q Slide position sensor 1726r Base member 1726s Slit 1726t Support member 1726v Protrusion pin 1726v Slit 1726v 1726x slide support Member 1726y Fixed bushing 1726z Bracket 1727 Left middle upper light emitting decorative body 1727a First surface forming member 1727b Opening 1727c Outer shell member 1727d Diffusing lens member 1727e Holding member 1727f Second surface forming member 1727g Conducting path 1727h Wall-shaped side surface 1728 Left middle light emitting decoration Body 1728a Convex 1728b Wall-shaped side surface 1729 Left middle lower light emitting decorative body 1729a First surface forming member 1729b Opening 1729c Outer shell member 1729d Diffusing lens member 1729e Holding member 1729f Second surface forming member 1729g Wall-shaped side surface 1730 Lower left movable light emitting decorative body 1730a Moving body assembly 1730b Moving mechanism 1730c Opening 1730d Outer shell member 1730e Front surface forming member 1730f Diffusing lens member 1730g Holding member 1730h Lower left substrate 1730i Base member 1730j Extension part 1730k Rotating shaft 1730l Motor 1730m Pinion gear 1730n Rack gear 1730o Slide member 1730p Detection piece 1730q Slide position sensor 1730r Slide member 1730s Slit 1730t Support member 1730u Connection pin 1730v Slit 1730w Projection pin 1730y Fixed bushing 1730x Slide support member 1730x 1731 Lower right corner light emitting decorative body 1731a Surface forming member 1731b Diffusing lens member 1731c Groove 1731d First convex strip 1731e Wall side surface 1732 Upper left corner decorative member 1733 Lower left corner decorative member 1735 Support base 1735a Mounting boss 1741 Upper left substrate 1742 Lower left substrate 1743 Upper right front substrate 1744 Upper right rear substrate 1745 Lower middle substrate 174 Lower right board 1747 Right lower board 1748 Left middle board 1760 Ball guiding unit 2000 Main drawer connector 2000a Unit side main drawer connector 2000b Frame side main drawer connector 2001a Terminal 2001b Contact 2002 Sub drawer connector 2002a Unit side sub drawer connector 2002b Frame side sub drawer Connector 2003a Terminal 2003b Contact 2010 Delivery control board connector 2012 Door frame connector 2100 Hot wire failure prevention circuit 2100a Hot wire failure prevention circuit 2100b Hot wire failure prevention circuit 2100c Hot wire failure prevention circuit 5131 Random number storage area 5132 for pass / fail judgment

Claims (1)

A symbol display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbol sequences when the variation start condition is satisfied;
A first entrance that can accept a game ball flowing down the game area;
First starting information extracting means capable of extracting first starting information based on the reception of the game ball at the first receiving port;
First starting information storage means for storing the first starting information extracted by the first starting information extracting means up to a first upper limit;
A winning determination means for determining a winning for the first starting information stored by the first starting information storage means one by one in the stored order when the variation condition is satisfied;
The symbol display control means for controlling the display result of the winning determination by the combination of stop symbols when the plurality of symbol strings are stopped by changing the plurality of symbol strings;
When the stop symbol is a combination that indicates a winning combination, a variable winning opening that allows the winning of a game ball; and
A prize ball granting means for granting a player a predetermined amount of prize balls in accordance with at least the winning of a game ball to the variable prize opening;
When the stop symbol is displayed in a combination indicating winning, the winning per game that can facilitate the winning of the game ball to the variable winning opening in order to give a large amount of game balls to the player as a prize. Game execution means;
When a specific combination is displayed among the combinations indicating winning, the special game state with a relatively high probability of being determined as winning by the winning determination means is controlled and displayed in a combination other than the specific combination. A gaming state control means capable of controlling to a normal gaming state with a relatively low probability of being determined to be a hit by the winning determination means,
A gaming machine comprising:
A second receiving port disposed above the first receiving port and capable of receiving a game ball flowing down the gaming area;
Second starting information extracting means capable of extracting second starting information based on the reception of the game ball at the second receiving port;
Second starting information storage means for storing the second starting information extracted by the second starting information extracting means up to a second upper limit;
With
When the first receiving port is controlled to the special gaming state, the receiving of the game ball relative to the second receiving port can be facilitated by facilitating the receiving of the game ball to the first receiving port. And a movable member that makes it easier to receive a game ball than the second receiving port when controlled to the normal gaming state,
The winning determination means includes
While determining whether the second start information is successful when the variation start condition is satisfied,
As long as the first start information is stored, whether or not the first start information is stored is always determined regardless of whether the first start information is stored before the second start information. Is,
When the winning determination result for the first start information is winning, the winning game is executed regardless of whether or not the combination indicating the winning is displayed in the specific combination,
When the determination result of winning about the second start information is a win,
Even if the stop symbol is a combination indicating a winning combination, when the combination indicating the winning combination is a combination other than the specific combination, the winning determination result by the winning determining means is a winning combination. A game per prize where the variable prize opening is operated in a manner in which a game ball can barely win can be executed and the game can be controlled to the normal game state after the game per prize ends.
When the combination indicating the winning is the specific combination, the game per prize is executed and the special gaming state is controlled after the game per prize ends.
When the determination result of winning about the second start information is lost and the determination result of winning indicating the loss is displayed on the display means,
When the gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state,
When the number of the second start information stored in the second start information storage means is only the second start information related to the change, there is a normal change in which the change display of the plurality of symbol sequences is performed over a predetermined time. Can be displayed,
When the number of the second start information stored in the second start information storage means is the second upper limit value including at least the second start information related to the change, the plurality of symbol sequences While the variation display can be displayed a shortened variation that is performed over a time shorter than the predetermined time,
When the gaming state is controlled to the special gaming state,
The gaming machine, wherein the plurality of symbol sequences can be displayed in a variable manner in a certain time regardless of the number of the second start information stored in the second start information storage means.